Civil Specification PDF

S.T.
H Consultant
Abu Dhabi Branch
Tel : 6417627 Fax : 6417621 P.O.Box 108707 - Abu Dhabi
STH CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY
COMM. NO: 12-18
__
LIST OF CONTENTS
PAGES
__
SECTION NO.
TITLE
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100
01200
01300
01400
01600
01700
01800
SUMMARY
PROCEDURE
ADMINISTRATIVE ERQUIREMENTS
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
FACILITY OPERATION
5
2
3
2
3
6
2
DIVISION 2: EXISTING CONDITIONS

02300
02310
02700
02800
EARTHWORK
DEMOLISHING
BASES, BALLASTS, PAVEMENTS AND APPURTENANCES
LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATION
8
4
4
11
DIVISION 3: CONCRETE
03200
03500
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
CEMENTITIOUS DECKS AND UNDERLAYMENT
16
3
DIVISION 4: MASONRY
04200
MASONRY UNITS
DIVISION 5: METALS
05300
05500
05515
05521
057500
05810
METAL DECK
METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL RAIILINGS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLE
7
6
5
5
6
3
DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

060661
06100
062020
06200
06400
06600
06610
TRANSLUCENT PANELS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKS
FINISH CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS
WOOD AND PLASTIC SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS
5
6
16
10
5
7
7
_________
LIST OF CONTENTS
PAGES
__
DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07100
07200
07500
07800
07900
DAMP PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING

THERMAL PROTECTION
MEMBRANE ROOFING
FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION
JOINT SEALERS
5
5
9
8
3
DIVISION 8: OPENINGS
08100
08200
08300
08460
08600
08700
08800
088113
08900
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS
SPECIALTY DOOR
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
SKYLIGHTS
HARDWARE
GLAZING
DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING
ALUMINUM FRAMING, DOORS & WINDOWS
11
3
8
4
7
21
4
9
11
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09200
09250
092216
092714
09300
09310
09320
09500
095447
096340
09650
097200
09720
09800
09900
099123
PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD

GYPSUM BOARD
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GLASS, FIBER, REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
CERAMIC TILING
STONE TILES
EXTERNAL CLADDING
CEILINGS
STRETCH PVC CEILING SYSTEM
STONE FLOORING
VINYL FLOORING
WALL COVERINGS
COMPOSITE ALUMINUM WALL & CEILING PANELS
RADIATION PROTECTION
PAINTING AND COATINGS
INTERIOR PAINTING
4
9
8
4
11
9
3
22
5
11
10
5
10
11
13
15
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES EQUIPMENTS

10150
10210
102113
102123
102600
10522
10800
COMPARTMENTS & CUBICLES

CUBICLE CURTAINS & TRACKS
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
CUBICLE CURTAINS & TRACKS
WALL & CORNER PROTECTION
FIRE EXTINGUISHER & CABINETS
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY SPECIALTIES
2
3
4
4
4
7
3
14
10810
10900
10950
MIRROR UNITS
SHEDS
INTERIOR DECORATIONS CONTROL BOOK
1
6
83
DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT

11014
11600
11650
11950
122413
142000
143100
WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
MATERIALS/ SUPPLIERS SCHEDULE
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
ELEVATOR
ESCALATOR
7
46
10
1
6
57
7

SUMMARY 01100-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: The Burjeel Medical City project comprises the execution, completion
and maintenance during the defects liability period of the following:
1. Main Building consisting of Basement, 4 Podiums and 4 Typical Floors.
2. Temporary facilities (Site offices, signboard, temporary roads, temporary utilities (water,
electrical, drainage & other utilities)
Project Location: Plot P7 Sector Z-9, Mohammed Bin Zayed City.
1.03
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENSIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
CSI/CSCs Master Format numbering system.
Section Identification: The Specification use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning
of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract
Documents.
B. Specification Content: The Specification use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural,
and the plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the
Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to
describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by other when so
noted.
1. The words shall, shall be, or shall comply with, depending on the context, are implied
where a colon ( : ) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.04
SUBCONTRACTPRS, MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS LOG

As soon as possible after the contract has been awarded but within a maximum period of 30
days, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Client a list of Subcontractors, materials and
shop drawings Log necessary for the execution of the works for approval. After a period of 30
S.T.H.

SUMMARY 01100-2
______________________________________________________________________________
days from the date of contract has been awarded, the contractor has to commence submitting
of contract documents for approval of Engineer/Client.
1.05
SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor shall check and verify all site measurements and shall submit with sufficient
promptness as to cause no delay in the works, three copies checked and approved by him of
all shop or setting out drawings and schedules required for the works or which have been
specifically requested by the Engineers/Client. The Engineer/Client shall check and approve
with reasonable promptness (within 14 working days) such schedules and drawings for the
contract documents. The contractor shall make any corrections in the schedules and drawings
as required by the Engineer/Client and resubmit further prints thereof until approved by the
Engineer/Client. The contractor will be responsible for making all copies necessary for his own
use and the use of his own sub-contractors.
The shop drawings shall be complete and show the design, dimensions, materials used
finishes, type of shop paint and all other details and information necessary and shall also show
adjoining work and details of connections thereto.
Where adjoining work requires shop drawings, the contractor shall prepare and submit
composite shop drawings which shall show and define the work under all affected trades. If the
contractor installs work before co-coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference
with work of those trades, he shall make changes necessary to correct the conditions at his
own cost.
No changes shall be made by the contractor to resubmitted shop drawings in excess of those
corrections noted by the Engineer/Client in previously returned drawings, unless such new
changes are brought to the attention of the Engineer/Client in a separate note on the shop
drawings.
No works at the site shall be started and no material or equipment to be ordered until the
Engineer/Client has approved. It shall be responsibility of the contractor to submit the shop
drawings on a schedule that allows reasonable time checking and approval and subsequent
fabrication. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking, correcting and
rechecking will not justify delay in time of completion of work.
The approval by the Engineer/Client of shop drawings and schedules shall not relieve the
contractor from responsibility for deviating from the drawings or specifications, unless such
deviations have the prior approval of the Engineer/Clients, nor shall it relieve him from
responsibility for errors in such drawings and schedules.
The term shop drawings as used here in shall also include:
Manufacturers standard drawings, descriptive literature, catalogues, brochures, performance
and test data, wiring and control diagrams and all other such descriptive data pertaining to
materials, equipment and method of construction. Catalogues, pamphlets, etc., shall be clearly
marked in ink. Data of general nature will be accepted.
The contractor shall also check and verify all site measurements wherever requested by other
specialist contractors or by nominated or other sub-contractors to enable them to prepare their
own shop drawings and pass on the information with sufficient promptness as will not in any
way delay the works. A copy of all such information passed on shall be given to the
Engineer/Client.
S.T.H.

SUMMARY 01100-3
______________________________________________________________________________
1.06
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
The Contractors choice is limited to same and no other manufacturer shall be considered only
if the Client asks to replace any of the items with an equivalent brand. However, the Contractor
has to submit at least three (mock up, samples) of different suppliers on the site for Client
choice and approval, the Client has the right to approve any of them. No claims will be
accepted in this regards. When reference is given to one manufacturer or equal and approved
the Contractor shall submit same together with at least two alternatives for approval. When the
sole manufacturer is limited to that specified, the contractor shall submit all required
documentation, samples and the like for approval.
1.07
TESTING AND INSPECTION

All equipment necessary for the testing of materials and workmanship shall be regarded as
constructional plant as defined in the conditions of contract. It shall be delivered to the
Engineer/Client in accordance with the schedule of requirements of such equipment described
in the contract, and if he so requires, within four weeks of the order in writing from the
Engineer/Client to the contractor to commence the works. All equipment shall be kept in good
conditions throughout the period of the works.
Where it is necessary and required by the Engineer and Client to visit places away from the
works (inside and outside border of U.A.E.) for supervision or inspection in compliance with the
contract.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer/Client with protective clothing and any other articles
or equipment necessary for the Engineer and Client to carry out their duties in accordance with
the Contract. Duration of visit will be according to the works requirements.
Unless directed otherwise by Engineer/Client, the required tests & inspections (frequency of
visits shall be one (1) visit per each test) for materials and equipments shall be carried out at
the expense of contractor and attendance of one person representing the Engineer, one per
visit, for but not limited to the followings tests:A. Marble & Granite.
B. Curtain Walls.
C. Limestone.
D. Lifts.
E. Cradle.
F. Pumps (All Types)
G. Generator.
H. Electrical Panels.
I.
Industrial kitchen & laundry.
J. Chillers.
K. Cooler Tower.
S.T.H.

SUMMARY 01100-4
______________________________________________________________________________
L. A.H.U.
1.08
CONTROL AND TEST EQUIPEMT TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

During the contract, the contractor shall provided, maintain and clear away on completion the
following listed items of control and test equipment. All items shall be to Engineer/Clients
approval.
The items listed here under are indicative only and not limited. The Client/Engineer may
request for additional equipments to be provided during the contract.
a. A separate caravan or the like for housing all test and control equipment as well as for the
approved samples of projects, construction material.
b. Four sets of six number, 150x150 mm cast iron or steel cube moulds, for pre-paring
concrete cubes.
c. Maximum and minimum thermometers including replacements in the event of breakage.
d. Metric weighting scales.
e. Water tank with thermostatically controlled heating and cooling for curing concrete test
cubes.
f. Proctor compaction equipment.
g. Slump testing equipment.
h. 4 No. of special Thermometer for measuring concrete Temperature.
1.09
SAMPLING AND TESTING

The contractor shall supply all samples of materials for testing. He shall provide materials,
equipment transportation and appropriate manpower assistance as may be required from time
to time by the Engineer/Client in taking and packing samples into containers, provided by the
contractor, and dispatching them for testing. All cost of these will be contractors expense.
1.10
THIRD PARTY
Third parts whom carry out all test of materials shall be submitted by contractor for approval of
Engineer/Client. All cost of these tests will be on contractors expense.
1.11
DAILY & MONTHLY REPORTS

The contractor shall deliver daily to the Engineer/Client representative daily report comprise of
a machinery report as to the number of work people employed on the works in each trade and
copies of delivery notes of all materials, goods delivered to the site during the day, events or
accidents occurred and daily construction progress at the site in forms, should approved by the
Engineer/Client.
Monthly Reports will be include updated program, photographs for all activity at the site,
material submitted and need to approve in the current month any works open but not started,
formats & details of this monthly report to be directed by the Engineer/Client.
1.12
FIRST AID
The contractor has to provide sets of First Aid and all related tools for Clients, Engineers and
contractor staffs.
S.T.H.

SUMMARY 01100-5
______________________________________________________________________________
1.13
CHECK REQUEST
The contractor must request the Engineer/Client to check any parts of the works at least 24
hours before staring the works in order that the necessary inspection and checking can be
arranged in an orderly manner.
This notification must be submitted in writing upon the checking request form in a format to be
approved by the Engineer/Client.
1.14
STATIONERY
The contractor shall provide an adequate supply of stationery and miscellaneous office
equipment for the use of the project throughout the period of construction and until the end of
the maintenance period.
1.15
PHOTOGRAPHS AND ADVERTISING

The Contractor shall supply once a month separate from the monthly report requirements at
his own expense and as directed by the Engineer/Client three sets of un-mounted colored
copies of progress photographs (15 no. minimum) of a size not less than 12.5x18 centimeters
of such portions of the works completed and in progress as may be directed by the
Engineer/Client. The negatives of the photographs with the dates imprinted shall be the
property of the Engineer/Client and no prints from these negatives may be supplied to any
person unless authorized by the Engineer/Client.
Contractor shall also record on video the monthly progress of the works, along with recording
any major milestone achievements during the interim periods.
Such video recordings shall be of a profession quality and presentation, with the Contractor
further developing a video documentary to chronicle the construction of the project. The video
shall be in the VHS-PAL format suitable for the U.A.E. and have a running time between 30 to
60 minutes, with both English and Arabic versions of commentary.
The Contractor shall treat detail related to the Contractor as confidential. No photographs or
other documents may be used for advertising or other purposes without the written authority of
the Owner, which authority shall not be unreasonably withheld.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

PROCEDURE
01200-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in junction herewith.
1.2.
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
1.
Scheduled preconstruction, progress meetings.
2.
Progress schedules.
1.3.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
As soon as possible, arrange meeting(s) between the Engineers, subcontractors,
project superintendents, and representatives of others whose coordination is required
during construction.
1.4.
SITE MEETINGS
Invite all Engineers to attend regular site meetings called and conducted by the
Contractor, to discuss with his Subcontractors project scheduling, document
interpretation and completion to keep the Contract proceeding smoothly without delay.
1.5.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1.
Submit a construction progress schedule within fourteen (14) working days of

notification of tender acceptance, for approval.
2.
Correct, revise, up-date, and otherwise maintain schedule during progress of

construction on a monthly basis as a minimum or as directed by the Engineer.
3.
Revision to the schedule alerting the intent of the schedule must first be approved by the
consultant prior to implementing and issuing said version.
4.
Construction progress schedule to be in bar chart format in sufficient detail to monitor

the actual progress of the Work and should be updated immediately when required.
1.6.
PROGRESS REPORTS
Maintain at site a permanent, legibly written record of progress of work. Make the
record available at all times with copies provided when requested. Include in
record each day, giving the following minimum data:
S.T.H.
1.
Date.
2.
Weather conditions.
3.
Commencement and completion dates of the work of each trade in each area
of project.

PROCEDURE
01200-2
___________________________________________________________________________
4.
Name of each Subcontractor working on site giving for each the number of
tradesmen working on site, type of work, location of work and a record of
the work they performed.
5.
Dates, status and particulars of submissions, i.e. shop drawings, samples,

mock-ups and the like.
6.
Dates, status and particulars of deliveries, i.e. manufacturing dates,

delivery and installation dates.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01300-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
1.
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this
specification and must be read in junction herewith.
2.
Make submittals specified in this Section to the Engineer unless otherwise

specified.
1.2.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1.
Submit proposed construction progress schedule.
2.
As construction progresses, submit updated construction schedules each

month.
3.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer drawings and full
particulars of all temporary Works he intends to construct at least fourteen (14)
days before he intends to commence such Works. The Engineer may require
modifications to be made if he considers the proposals to be insufficient and the
Contractor shall give effect to such modifications at his own cost but shall not be
relieved of his responsibility for the sufficiency thereof.
1.3.
SHOP DRAWINGS
1.
Include in final shop drawings submissions detailed information, templates and

installation instructions required for incorporation and connections of the Work
concerned.
2.
In addition to shop drawings specified in other Sections, submit shop drawings

required by jurisdictional authorities in accordance with their requirement.
3.
The Contractor shall check, sign and make notations he considers necessary on
shop drawings before each submission to the Engineer.
4.
Indicate on each submission, changes from the Contract Documents that

have been incorporated in the shop drawings.
5.
Submit shop drawings folded into A4 size.
6.
Do not proceed with work dependent on shop drawing information until approval
is given and verification received from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for work performed prior to receipt of reviewed shop drawings.
1.4.
S.T.H.
GENERAL
SAMPLES
1.
Submit samples for which submission requirements is specified in trade

Sections of this specification.
2.
Submit samples in triplicate of adequate size to represent the material in its

intended use on project.
3.
Label samples with project name, number, Contractor, and date.

01300-2
___________________________________________________________________________
4.
1.5.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
1.
Prepare interference and equipment placing drawings to ensue that all

components will be properly accommodated within the spaces provided.
2.
Prepare drawings to indicate coordination and methods of installation of a

system with other systems where their relationship is critical.
1.6.
PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
1.
Submit project record drawings on completion. Final acceptance of the

Work will be predicated on receipt and approval of record drawings.
2.
Record, as the work progresses, work constructed differently than shown on

Contract Documents.
1.7.
WARRANTIES
1.
The Contractor shall submit all the warranties as herein specified.
2.
The Contractor shall countersign and guarantee all warranties submitted, stating
that all work executed will be free from defects of materials and workmanship.
The Contractor further agrees that he will repair and replace all such defective
work and all other work damaged thereby which become defective during the
term of the warranty/guarantee, except if damage is due to negligence on the
part of the end user.
3.
Submit each warranty in an approved uniform format.
1.8.
S.T.H.
If sample is disapproved, two samples will be returned. If sample is approved,

one sample will be returned, marked "approved".
MAINTENANCE/MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Submit three (3) maintenance manuals at completion of project. Maintenance

manual shall consist of shop drawings, extended warranties and project data
book.
2.
Include in maintenance manual one copy of each final approved shop drawings
issued for project of which have been recorded changes made during fabrication
and installation caused by unforeseen conditions.
3.
The project data book shall:

1.
Contain only types or printed information and notes, and nearly drafted
drawings.
2.
Contain maintenance instructions as specified in various sections and as

referenced in Section 01700, Contract Project Closeout.
3.
Contain brochures and parts listed on all equipment.
4.
Contain a list of manufacturers and trade names of finishes and coatings

applied.

01300-3
___________________________________________________________________________
1.9.
5.
Contain finished hardware schedule.
6.
Contain charts, diagrams and reports specified in Division 15 and 16.
EXTRA STOCK
Supply extra stock at completion of project as specified in trade sections of this
specification.
1.10.
INSPECTION COMPANY REPORTS
1.
Submit copies of test reports as specified in Section 01400.
2.
Submit one copy of each report unless specified otherwise, and signed by a
responsible officer of the inspection and testing company to the Employer and
the Engineer.
3.
The Contractor shall submit test certificates in accordance with the appropriate
British Standards or other equivalent standards.
1.11.
SURVEY DATA
Submit final survey of completed contract work and site, including underground
services.
1.12.
COST BREAKDOWN AND CASH FLOW

Submit a complete cost breakdown and cash flow within fourteen (14) working
days of notification by letter of intent of award of Contract in a format approved
by the Engineer and Employer.
1.13.
1.
1.14.
1.
PROGRESS BILLING
Format of progress billing shall be as requested by and approved by the
Employer.
SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT
Prepare and submit soil report to the local authorities for approval prior to start
of any structural work.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

01400-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in junction herewith.
1.2.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.
Inspections and testing required by the laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of
jurisdictional authorities.
2.
B.S.S. 5606: 1990 Accuracy
3.
Testing, balancing and adjusting of equipment: In applicable mechanical and

electrical sections of the specification.
4.
Cutting and patching: Section 01041.
5.
Submission of inspection and testing reports: Section 01300.
6.
Soils investigation report.
1.3.
1.
1.4.
1.
1.5.
TOLERANCE FOR INSTALLATION OR WORK

Unless acceptable tolerances are otherwise specified:
1.
"Plumb and level" shall mean plumb or level within 3mm in 3m non cumulative.
2.
"Square" shall mean not in excess of 10 seconds lesser or greater than 90

degrees.
3.
"Straight" shall mean within 3mm under a 3m long straight edge.
CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
The Engineer may carry out construction review during the progress of the Work. The
Engineer's general review during construction and inspection and testing by
Independent inspection and testing companies reporting to the Engineer are both
undertaken to inform the Employer of the Contractor's performance and shall in t he
Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility.
QUALITY CONTROL
1.
Bring to the attention of the Engineer any defects in the Work or departures from the
Contract Documents which may occur during construction. The Engineer will decide
upon corrective action and state his recommendations in writing.
2.
Except where otherwise stated or approved by the Engineer, all materials used in
the Works shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified or
described in the Specification, Drawings and Bills of Quantities and shall comply
S.T.H.

01400-2
______________________________________________________________________________
wherever possible with the appropriate current standard published by the British
Standards Institution or other equivalent standards.
3.
1.6.
1.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all orders for materials.
INSPECTION AND TESTING SERVICES QUALIFICATIONS AND
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Qualifications of inspections and testing companies:
1.
2.
Reference Standards:
1.
1.7.
Companies engaged for inspection and testing shall provide equipment,

methods of recording and evaluation, knowledgeable personnel to conduct
test precisely as specified.
Perform inspection and testing reports in accordance with standards quoted

and as required by procedures described in specified reference standards
that are applicable to the work being inspected and tested.
SUBMITTALS
Submit inspection and testing reports in accordance with Section 01300.
1.8.
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
1.
All inspection and testing performed by firms engaged for source and field quality
control specified in other sections shall be appointed and paid by the Contractor.
2.
Notify the Engineer and inspection and testing company at least 48 hours before
work to be inspected and tested commences.
3.
When it is discovered on inspection that work is proceeding with incorrect materials

or methods, ensure that corrections are immediately made and that improperly
completed work is replaced.
1.9.
S.T.H.
DEFECTIVE WORK
1.
Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred

or that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the
Engineer may have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical
calculation of structural strength made, and the like, in order to help
determine whether the Work must be replaced. Testing, retesting,
inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be
made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which
may be such that, in the Engineer's opinion, the Work may be
acceptable.
2.
Defective work discovered before expiration of the warranty period will

be rejected, whether or not it has been previously inspected. If rejected,
defective materials or work incorporating defective materials or
workmanship shall be promptly removed and replaced.

01400-3
______________________________________________________________________________
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
1.
2.
Where equivalent products are specified, or where alternatives are proposed,

these products claimed by the Contractor as equivalent shall be comparable in
construction, type, function, quality, performance, and, where applicable, in
appearance. Where specified equivalents are used in the stipulated price for
the Work, they shall be subject to final approval by the Engineer.
3.
Products delivered to the project site for incorporation in the Work shall be
considered the property of the Client.
1.2.
PRODUCT HANDLING
1.
Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver and store products so that no damage occurs to
structural qualities and finish appearance, nor in any other way be detrimental to
their function or appearance, or both.
2.
Ensure that products, while transported, stored or installed, are not exposed to an
environment which would increase their moisture content beyond the maximum
specified.
1.3.
STORAGE AND PRODUCTION
1.
Store products on site or in storage sheds with secure protection. Prevent damage,
adulteration, staining and soiling of materials while stored.
2.
Store manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.4.
SPECIFIED PRODUCTS
1.
Products specified by manufacturer's name, brand name or catalogue reference

shall be the basis of the bid and shall be supplied for the Work without exception
in any detail, subject to allowable substitutions as approved by the Engineer and
the Client.
2.
For products specified by reference standards, the onus shall be on the supplier
to establish that such products meet reference standard requirements.
1.5.
S.T.H.
GENERAL
SCHEDULING OF PRODUCT DELIVERY
1.
Verify that products supplied by all sections are ordered from suppliers in sufficient
time to ensure delivery for incorporation in the work within the time limits
established by approved construction schedule. Schedule delivery of products to
ensure no delay in the progress of the Work and provide delivery access and
unloading areas.
2.
3.
Obtain confirmed delivery dates from product and supplier.

Immediately inform the Engineer should supplier's confirmation of delivery dates
indicate that project completion may be delayed.

________________________________________________________________________
4.
Submit copies of purchase orders and confirmations of delivery dates for products
as may be requested.
5.
Submit copies of all material and product delivery notes to the Engineer.
1.6.
SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
1.
Products substituted for those specified or approved, or both shall be permitted only
as approved. Substitute only a product that is of equal or superior quality to the
specified product as approved, and with no addition to the contract price. If only a
product of inferior quality is available and acceptable to the Client, the contract price
shall be adjusted accordingly as approved by the Engineer.
2.
Submit, with request for substitution, documentary evidence that substituted

products are equal to, or superior to, approved products and a comparison of price
and delivery factors for both specified or approved products, and proposed
substitute.
1.7.
WORKMANSHIP
Unless otherwise specified in a more detailed manner, workmanship shall be of the
highest quality recognized by the trade executing the work in accordance with
standard practices, by the best methods recommended by the manufacturer of the
product, and as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.
1.
Products and work found defective not in accordance with the specifications will
be rejected for incorporation in the Work whether or not incorporated in the Work.
2.
Replace rejected products and work with no delay after rejection.
1.9.
CONCEALMENT OF MATERIAL
1.
Conceal pipes, ducts, tubing and wiring in the floor, wall and ceiling construction
of finished areas.
2.
Arrange to have mechanical and electrical work laid out well in advance of concrete
placement and furring installation so that provisions may be made for proper
concealment.
1.10
S.T.H.
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND WORK
FASTENINGS
1.
Include in the work of each section necessary fastenings, anchors, inserts,

attachment accessories, and adhesives.
2.
Install metal-to-metal fastenings fabricated of the same metal or of a metal which will
not set up electrolytic action causing damage to fastenings or components, or both.
Use stainless steel fastenings for exterior work, and where attached to, or contained
within, exterior walls and slabs.

________________________________________________________________________
1.11
Estidama Pearl Rating System Requirements:
A. All construction equipment and materials during the construction stage to be used in the
project shall be Asbestos Containing Material (AMCs) Free from site and from the building
after completion and/or to be removed from refurbished building if required. This credit
requirement builds on Cabinet Resolution No.39 of 2006 Concerning Prohibiting import,
Production and Utilization of Asbestos Boards and extends the Prohibition to ALL AMCs.
B. Eliminate Materials or building products containing elements or compounds with the
following R-phrase attribution under EU Risk Phrases (R-Phrases) Listed in Annex III EU
Derivatives 67/548/EEC:
R20 harmful by inhalation

R21 harmful in contact with Skin
R22 harmful if swallowed
R23 Toxic by inhalation
R24 Toxic in contact with skin
R25 Toxic if Swallowed
R26 very Toxic by inhalation
R27 very Toxic in contact with skin
R28 very Toxic if Swallowed
R29 Contact with water liberates toxic gas
R31 Contact with acids liberates toxic gas
R32 Contact with acids liberates very toxic gas
R33 Danger of cumulative effects
R36 irritating to the eye
R37 irritating to respiratory skin
R38 irritating to skin
R39 Danger of very serious irreversible effects
R41 Risk of Serious Damage to Eyes
R42 May Cause sensitization by inhalation
R43 May Cause sensitization by skin contact
R45 May Cause Cancer
R46 May Cause heritable genetic damage
R48 Danger of serious damage to health by

prolonged exposure
R49 May cause cancer by inhalation
R50 Very toxic to aquatic organisms
R51 Toxic to aquatic organisms
R52 Harmful to aquatic organisms
R53 May Cause long-term adverse effects in the
aquatic environment
R54 Toxic to flora
R55 Toxic to fauna
R56 Toxic to soil organisms
R57 Toxic t bees
R58 May Cause long-term adverse effects in
environment
R59 Dangerous for the ozone layer
R60 May Impair fertility
R61 May cause harm to the unborn child
R62 Possible risk of impaired fertility
R63 Possible risk of harm to the unborn child
R64 May cause harm to breastfed babies
R65 Harmful: may cause lung damage if
swallowed
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

01700-1
____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda there to form an integral part of this
1.2.
JURISDICTIONAL AUTHORITIES
Where reference is made to jurisdictional authorities, it shall mean all
authorities who have, within their constituted power, the right to enforce the
laws of the place of the building.
1.3.
FIRE PREVENTION AND SAFETY

Maintain clear emergency exist paths for personnel and emergency vehicles at
all times.
1.4.
FIRE SEPARATIONS
Ensure that fire separations are installed to maintain total integrity and that they
are not diminished or breached by work following their installation.
1.5.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

Maintain roads and sidewalks clear of construction materials debris, including
excavated material. Clean roads and sidewalks as frequently as required to ensure
that they are cleared of materials debris and excavated material to be standards
acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction, and to the Engineer and the
Client.
1.6.
REFERENCES STANDARDS
1.
Whenever reference is made in this specification to British Standards or Standard

Codes of Practice or other equivalent standards, the issue current at the date
of issue of this Contract Document shall be deemed to apply unless stated
otherwise.
2.
Have a copy of each code, standard and specification, and manufacturer's

directions, instructions and specifications, to which reference is made in the
specifications, always available at construction site.
1.7.
LAND
The Contractor shall arrange with the relevant authorities the provision of all
land, way leaves and easements for the Permanent Works and the Contractor
may, where approved by the Engineer, so far as they are available, use the
same for temporary purposes.
In case of land required for temporary purposes, such as workshops, work yards,
offices, storage of materials, the Contractor will be responsible for all authorization
and permits necessary from the relevant, and will be deemed to have included the
costs for this in his cost for the project.
S.T.H.

01700-2
____________________________________________________________________________
1.8.
USE OF SITE
The following provisions shall be deemed to apply to the possession and use of the site.
1.
The land and other places outside the Site shall be used strictly in accordance
with the instructions of the Engineer.
2.
The Contractor shall at any time move any vehicles, machine, vessels, or any
other obstruction within his control that may be required by the Engineer to be
moved.
3.
The Contractor shall maintain access for the inspection of the Works belonging to
the Client or other Statutory Authorities which lie within the Site or elsewhere.
4.
The Contractor shall not use any portion of the Site for any purpose not connected
with the Works unless the prior written permission of the Engineer shall have been
obtained.
1.9.
ACCESS TO THE WORK

The actual route to be used by the Contractor between the public highway and the
Site of the Works is to be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer prior
to the start of the Works. All movement of the Contractor's plant and personnel
and all supporting transport shall be restricted to such agreed routes, and the
Contractor shall be responsible for the installation, maintenance and removal of
such temporary access as necessary.
1.10.
TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS AND PLANT

The Contractor is to ensure that damage to any public or private roads, footpaths
or tracks used by any vehicles or plant proceeding to or from the Site shall be kept
to a minimum and he shall be responsible for the cost of all repairs necessary to
restore such roads, tracks, or footpaths to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.11.
SERVICES
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water,
electricity, telephone, compressed air and other services to the Works, Temporary
Works and Plants and shall provide and maintain all pipes, cables and fittings
which may be necessary to carry such services to his operations.
1.12.
DRINKING WATER
The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of drinking water, with all
necessary drainage, on the Site and shall make all the necessary arrangements.
The number, capacity and location of the installations shall be to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
1.13.
SANITARY CONVENIENCES
Sanitary conveniences for the use of persons employed in the Works shall be
provided and maintained by the Contractor to the extent and locations as shall be
approved by the local authority concerned.
S.T.H.

01700-3
____________________________________________________________________________
1.14.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
This Contractor is responsible for quality control of the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
2.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: Coordinate requirements of

all local jurisdictional authorities.
3.
QUALITY CONTROL
1.15.
1.
Ensure that Work meets specified requirements.
2.
Schedule, supervise and coordinate inspection and testing.
3.
Maintain accurate job records of the Work.
JOB CONDITIONS
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Work proceeds under
conditions meeting specified environmental requirements and that such conditions
are maintained.
2.
Ensure that protection of adjacent property and public and the Work is adequately
provided and maintained.
3.
The Contractor shall take upon himself the full and entire responsibility for the
Sufficiency of plant, centering, scaffolding, timbering, machinery, implements
sleeves, openings in structure etc. and generally for all means used for the
fulfillment of the contract even though previous approval has been received from
the Engineer .
4.
Existing Buildings and Services

The Contractor is to execute the Works in such a manner that he does not
damage or interfere with existing services which are located in proximity to the
Site. The Contractor shall accept responsibility and shall allow in his rates for
any damages or interference which may be caused to these services due to the
execution of the works and shall carry out the necessary repairs at his own
expenses and to satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.
Drains, Water Courses, etc.

All drains, pipes, channels, etc. temporarily cut through or disturbed by the
Contractor's execution of the Works are to be restored so that the water
flowing in them may continue to flow in as full and free a manner as it did
before the disturbance.
6.
Materials on and under the Site

All materials in the excavation of the Site shall belong to the Client. Such
materials must not be removed from the Site without the consent of the Engineer.
7.
S.T.H.
Levels

01700-4
____________________________________________________________________________
a.
Datum
The datum to which all levels are shown on drawings, is to be established
on site with the Engineer.
b.
Surface Levels
Immediately before any work or any section or part section of the Works
commenced, all necessary levels shall be taken and agreed with the
Engineer.
8.
Slips
The Contractor shall during this Contract and as ordered by the Engineer make
good any damages or defect caused by slips to any cuttings, excavations or
embankments and shall do any necessary work to prevent or remedy the same.
9.
All structures and buildings erected by the Contractor on the Site at his own
expense during the course of construction and until the completion of the Works
be deemed to become the property of the Client and the Contractor shall not
demolish or remove any buildings or part of any buildings without the written
permission of the Engineer. On completion of the Works, they shall become the
property of the Contractor who shall, if so ordered, remove them entirely with all
drains and water mains and restore the surface of the land to its original
condition or other reasonable condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Maintenance of the buildings during the Contract will be sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
The whole cost of the installation, use, charges and their maintenance during the
period of the Contract and the removal on the completion of the Contract shall
be included in the Contract Price.
The Client shall not at any time be liable for the loss or damage of the aforesaid
works.
10.
Site Sign
The Contractor shall provide and erect one fully illuminated sign of minimum
overall size 660 x 300cm with the names of the Employer, the project, the
Contractor, the Consultant clearly painted and illuminated in a manner and design
and position approved by the Engineer. Include on the sign an illuminated
perspective 300 x 120cm. Sign to be maintained through the duration of the
project.
11.
Construction Waste Management

The General contractor, working collaboratively with all subcontractors and
specialty contractors (e.g. demolition), shall develop a Construction and
Demolition Waste Management Plan (CDWMP) prior to the start of construction
and demolition activities. The CDWMP shall include subcontractors activity log
register to be filled-up in a weekly basis and must identify the materials to be
diverted from landfill and indicate whether the materials will be segregated on-site
or commingled. If materials are planned for salvage, the plan must indicate their
planned use.
S.T.H.

01700-5
____________________________________________________________________________
The Contractor shall implement monthly monitoring of the CDWMP, and achieved
a minimum final recycling/salvage rate of 30% of construction and demolition
waste (by weight or volume). This figure excludes all hazardous waste that must
undergo specialized treatment.
The Contractor will be held responsible for compliance of the requirements of
Estidama (SM-R2), no deferring of responsibility to subcontractors can be
accepted.
1.16.
1.
SITE: Examine the site, and ensure that each Section performing Work related to
site conditions has examined it.
2.
Ensure by examination that all physical features at the Work, and working
restrictions and limitations which exist are known, so that the Client is not
restricted in his use of the premises for his needs.
3.
PREVIOUSLY COMPLETED WORK:
1.17.
1.
Where dimensions are required for proper fabrication, verify dimensions of

completed Work in place before fabrication and installation of Work to be
incorporated with it.
2.
Commencement of the Work will constitute acceptance of site conditions

and previously executed Work as satisfactory.
CONSTRUCTION MEASUREMENTS:
1.
Take site dimensions before installation of Work to be incorporated commences.
2.
Before commencing installation of Work, verify that its layout is accurately in

accordance with intent of drawings, and those positions, levels, and clearances to
adjacent Work are maintained.
3.
Before commencing installation of Work, verify that all clearances required by

jurisdictional authorities can be maintained.
1.18.
1.
2.
3.
S.T.H.
EXAMINATION
RELATED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK

Coordination of the installation of systems specified in Divisions 15 and 16,
including the inter-relating operation and functioning between components of a
system and between systems, is the responsibility of those performing the work
of Division 15 and 16, with final coordination the responsibility of the Contractor.
Ensure that service poles, conduit, wires, fill-pipes, vents, regulators, meters and
similar project service work are located in inconspicuous locations. Conceal pipes,
ducts control systems and electrical distribution systems within wall or ceiling
construction.
Ensure that the integrity of required fire separation is maintained.

01700-6
____________________________________________________________________________
1.19.
COORDINATION
1.
Review Contract Documents and advise the Engineer of possible conflicts

between parts of the work before preparation of shop drawings, ordering of
products or commencement of affected work.
2.
Coordinate and be responsible for all Work in each area and Work in which
subsequent Works depends to facilitate mutual progress, and to prevent conflict
between parts of the Work.
3.
Ensure that setting of drawings, templates, and all other information necessary for
the location and installation of materials, fixtures, equipment, holes, sleeves,
inserts, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections, and access panels are
provided by each Subcontractor whose Work requires cooperative location and
installation by other Subcontractor's, and that such information is communicated
to the applicable installer. Contractor shall coordinate to ensure that above
mentioned items are to the Engineer's approval, but this approval will not relieve
the Contractor of any responsibilities in the future.
4.
Provide interference and equipment placing drawings to ensure that all

components will be properly accommodated within the spaces provided.
5.
Remove and replace Work installed in error which is unsatisfactory for

subsequent Work at no extra cost to the Client.
1.20.
1.
1.21.
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
The Contractor as soon as possible after award of the Contract, shall itemize in
the form of two lists, all documentation as required by the Contract.
1.
The first list shall itemize all operating instructions, maintenance manuals,
spare parts and similar data which are required to allow the Client to
properly operate the premises.
2.
The second list shall itemize all date, operating, instructions, maintenance
manuals, record drawings, spare parts, warranties and the balance of the
documentation as applicable to the project and as required by the Contract
which will later be required to be submitted and approved by the Engineer
before he will issue his final certificate for payment.
PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

Record as the Work progresses, Work constructed differently from that shown
on Contract Drawings. Coordinate preparation of record drawings as described in
Section 01300 Submittals.
1.22.
CUTTING AND PATCHING

1.
S.T.H.
Before cutting, drilling or sleeving structural load-bearing elements, obtain

the Engineer's approval of location and methods in writing.

01700-7
____________________________________________________________________________
2.
Do not endanger Work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities.

No Subcontractor shall cut or alter the Work of another Subcontractor unless
such cutting or alteration is approved by the latter Subcontractor.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

FACILITY OPERATION
01800-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL
1.2.
CLEANING
1.
Use only cleaning materials which are recommended for the purpose by both the
manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned and of the cleaning material.
2.
Ensure that cleaning operations are scheduled to avoid deposit of dust or other
foreign matter.
3.
Each section shall supply the Contractor with instructions for final cleaning of his
work, and for inclusion in project data book as specified in each trade section and
in Section 01300, Submittals.
1.3.
FINAL CLEANING
1.
Coordinate final clean-up.
2.
Include in Work final cleaning by skilled cleaning specialists on completion of

construction.
3.
Remove temporary protections and make good defects before commencement of

final cleaning.
4.
Replace glass and mirrors that have been broken, damaged and/or etched during
construction, or which are otherwise defective.
5.
Remove, dust, stains, paint spots, soil, grease, fingerprints, and accumulations of
construction materials, interior and exterior to the building. Perform cleaning in
accordance with installer's instructions for each material. Final cleaning shall
include:
1.4.
1.
Washing of interior floors and vacuuming of ceilings and walls.
2.
Cleaning and polishing of: glass; mirrors; porcelain; enamel, and finish
metal; and washroom accessories, tile and finished flooring, glazed
surfaces and hardware.
3.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean and replace

filter of mechanical equipment.
SUBMITTAL
1.
Submit maintenance manual, project record drawings and extra stock as

specified in Section 01300.
2.
Submit other documents as required by specified take-over procedures.
1.5.
FINAL INSPECTIONS AND CLOSE OUT
1.
Submit proposed close out procedures and schedule of inspection to the

Engineer's approval before final inspections commence.
S.T.H.

FACILITY OPERATION
01800-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.
Arrange for, conduct and document final inspections, close out and take-over at
completion of work of this specification in accordance with local close out and
take-over procedures.
3.
After the date of substantial completion of the total project is established, all
Subcontractors shall complete within sixty (60) days all deficient work including
the required documentation. All deficient work not completed within the
above time will be completed by the Client and the cost of this work will be
deducted from the Contractor's final progress claim.
1.6.
SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
1.
Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to the Client

and Engineers.
2.
Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and

systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as the basis for
instruction.
1.7.
DOCUMENTS
1.
Collect reviewed submittals (Section 01300) and assembly documents executed

by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
2.
Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use
with the Client's permission during construction, submit within ten (10) days
after start-up. For items of work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittals acceptance as start of warranty period.
3.
Provide warranties fully executed and notarized.
4.
Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract amounts,

previous payments, and monies remaining due.
1.8.
PROJECT COMMISSIONING
1.
Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Engineer.
2.
Review maintenance manual contents (operating, maintenance instructions,

record "as built" drawings, spare parts, materials) for completeness.
3.
Submit required documentation such as, warranties, certificates of approval or

acceptance from regulating bodies.
4.
Review condition of all equipment which have been used in the course of the
Work to ensure turning over at completion in "as new condition" with warranty,
dated and certified from time of substantial performance of the work.
5.
Arrange and coordinate instruction of the Client's staff in care, maintenance and
operation of building systems and finishes by suppliers or Subcontractors.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

EARTHWORK 02300-1
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1.
1.
1.2.
specification and must be read in conjunction herewith.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.
Section 01300:
Administrative Requirements
2.
Section 01400:
Quality Requirements
3.
Section 03200:
Concrete Reinforcement
1.3.
S.T.H.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SITE CONDITIONS
1.
EXAMINE SITE: When visiting the Site prior to submitting his Tender, the
Contractor shall determine the nature of all earth, soils or other materials that he
shall encounter during the Works and the quantities , locations and suitability to
meet the requirements as specified herein and in all Contract Documents . The
Contractor shall base his Tender on his own determination of soil conditions. After
award of the Contract , no claims for extras based on source of soil information or
failure of the Contractor to examine the Site and perform his own independent soil
investigation and subsurface investigation will be entertained .
2.
LEVELS: Existing grade levels shown on drawings are furnished in good faith for
the guidance of the Contractor.
3.
Before commencing the works the Contractor shall obtain information pertaining to
bench marks and shall subsequently establish all additional supplementary bench
marks as directed by the Engineer . All pertinent existing levels , lines locations
must be checked and verified before commencing the works . All the above shall
be at expense of the Contractor .
4.
TOPOGRAPHY: The Contractor shall, before commencing any excavation, survey

the whole of the site and the existing sidewalks, curbs and surrounding roads and
shall prepare plans and cross sections at intervals not exceeding 25m. All sections
must show existing levels and proposed subgrade levels . The plans and sections
shall, when finally and mutually agreed, be signed by both the Engineer and the
Contractor as truly representing the configurations of the site.
5.
On completion of the excavation of any area, the Contractor shall survey the site
and prepare plans and sections accordingly. The plans and sections shall, after
agreement and signature, shall be deemed to represent the final configurations.

EARTHWORK
02300-2
________________________________________________________________________
6.
UNDERGROUND SERVICES:
1.
1.4.
S.T.H.
Notify public utilities or municipal authorities in advance of planned

excavations adjacent to their services. Take care not to damage or
displace encountered known and unknown services. When such
services are encountered immediately notify Engineer, and protect,
brace and support active services. Where repairs become necessary,
use the following procedure:
1.
Known Services: Repair at no expense to the Client.
2.
Unknown Services: Forward complete breakdown of estimated

cost of such work. Proceed immediately with repairs upon receipt of
written approval to proceed with such repair work.
3.
In the case of damage to an essential service, notify the Engineer

immediately and repair service under the Engineer's direction. Inform
the Engineer of services encountered which require adjustment,
relocation or abandonment and arrange for disconnection and capping
of pipe.
STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1.
Stockpile materials in designated areas. Stockpile each type of fill material and
granular materials separately to prevent integration.
2.
Keep surrounding roads free of soil deposits from material hauling trucks. Load
trucks carefully to prevent spillage and wind drift.
3.
To protect neighborhood from wind-blown sand and dust, sprinkle with water entire
excavated area and stockpiled excavated materials when necessary.
4.
Protect adjacent property from damage which may occur from any cause in the
performance of the work.
5.
Do not interfere with the use of existing buildings which are to remain or in use.
6.
Take precautions against movement, settlement or collapse of sidewalks, public

services adjoining property and be liable for all damage to the same.
7.
Before commencing Work verify location of survey monuments in the areas in

which the Work is to be executed.
8.
Take precautions against movement or settlement of existing buildings to remain.

Provide and place bracing and shoring necessary for the safety and support of the
structure and execute the Work in a manner to prevent movement, settlement,
damage or injury caused thereby or resulting there from.
9.
Supply and maintain adequate and proper planking, cants and bridging over
municipal sidewalks, curbs, paving and boulevards to protect these areas from the
pass of vehicles and damage caused by them.

EARTHWORK
02300-3
________________________________________________________________________
10.
11.
1.5.
SHORING AND TRENCHING: In addition to requirements of local authorities, carry

out in accordance with requirements of the local authorities for construction projects,
British Institution of Occupational Safety and Health and all other applicable
regulations.
Protect existing trees, shrubs and plants not designated for removal. Suitably wrap
trunks of trees susceptible to damage by construction work. Remove wrappings at
job completion.
SOIL REPORT
1.
This clause shall apply to soil mechanics science as well as foundation engineering
to the Site where the work is being constructed, to determine the suitability of the
foundation proposed for the works to be constructed on the Site.
2.
Soil Investigation: Soil investigation shall be carried out at the Contractor's

expense, by an experienced and specialized technical firm who employs the
services of an experienced soil mechanics engineer and who has the necessary
facilities to carry out all boring, classification, soil testing on the Site and in the
laboratory, and can provide the required technical reports and recommendations.
The soil and foundation engineering firm proposed to carry this must be approved
by the Engineer.
3.
Code of Practice: Soil investigation shall be carried out in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 5390 or according to the applicable ASTM recommended
practice.
4.
The report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist or can occur on the
site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from the report,
changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made.
5.
EXTENT OF SOIL INVESTIGATION WORK : The Contractor shall bore in locations

approved by the Engineer boreholes each not less than 20 meters deep. The
number of field and laboratory tests needed shall not be less than that
recommended by best practice and adequate with respect to the Works and the
Site.
6.
Soil investigation work shall be done in accordance with the recognized standards,
local Regulations and Bylaws.
7.
The Engineer reserves the right to request additional and supplementary boring and
tests if, in his opinion, they are required.
8.
Supervision: All field work shall be continuously supervised by a trained and

specialized technician under the employment and responsibility of the specialized
firm appointed to carry out the work.
9.
SOILS REPORT: a comprehensive soil report shall be submitted, to include the

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
S.T.H.
Soil profile and logs of boring.

Results of laboratory tests.
Elevation of the water table.
The physical and chemical characteristics of the soil.

EARTHWORK
02300-4
________________________________________________________________________
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
10.
In the event unsuitable soil is encountered during the performance of works under
this Contract or when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out
exploratory excavations and carry out such tests as may be required to determine
the suitability of such material and what steps are to be taken at those areas.
PART 2:
2.1.
The safe allowable bearing capacity of the soil.

The total and differential settlement.
The most suitable type of foundation design recommended.
The depth of foundations recommended.
The depth to which piling shall be carried out in the case of piled
foundations.
The strength of the bed-rock and its capacity to take the pile loads carried
down to it, including for the existence of gaps, caverns or shallow bedrock
below the bottom of the pile.
Fill materials and compaction densities.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
FILL MATERIAL TYPE 1: For sodden areas or site grading work shall be clean,
excavated material free from waste materials, debris, rubbish, organic or cohesive
matter and rocks larger than 75 mm in diameter. If a sufficient quantity of material is
not available from the excavation, use imported fill having the same characteristics.
2.
FILL MATERIAL TYPE 2: For backfill and fill under paved areas, walks and areas
to receive floor slabs, shall be Granular 'B' material in accordance with local
requirements, well graded and with a maximum aggregate size of 50 mm. Material
shall be maintained at optimum moisture content during placing and while
compacting work is in progress, in strict accordance with inspection engineer's
instructions and to his approval.
3.
Imported fill material shall be of selected granular material and obtained from an
approved source and it shall contain no perishable or organic rubbish and no
particles in excess of 150 mm in diameter. The maximum dry density of the
material shall be no less than 1600 kg. per cubic meter.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1.
PREPARATION
1.
In the area of excavations for the building where there exist foundations of former
buildings which have been demolished to grade level, break out foundation walls,
remove fill debris from basements and break out floor slabs.
2.
Clear and remove, from site, obstructions to excavating. Establish and maintain
accurate lines and levels as required. Provide batter boards, line stakes and
templates, and establish permanent reference lines and bench marks required.
3.
DEWATERING
1.
S.T.H.
At locations where the excavation extends below the groundwater table, the
Contractor shall provide a dewatering system which shall effectively reduce

EARTHWORK
02300-5
________________________________________________________________________
the hydrostatic pressure ad lower the groundwater levels below excavation
levels , as required for the safe and proper excavation of the work , which
shall result in obtaining a stable, dry sub grade for the performing of
subsequent operations .
2.
The Contractor shall design dewatering methods and settling basins so that
neither during the initial operations nor during the construction operations
any critical amount of soil, sand or silt is removed.
The Contractor shall submit also for review and approval by the Engineer
complete shop drawings showing the type of dewatering and groundwater
control system proposed by the Contractor.
3.2.
S.T.H.
3.
The Contractor's submittal drawings shall indicate the arrangement, location

and depth of the proposed dewatering system, a complete description of the
equipment and materials to be used and the procedure to be followed, the
standby equipment, standby power supply, and the proposed location or
locations of points of discharge of water .
4.
The Contractor shall provide necessary facilities for dewatering , during , or

diversion of stream flow when necessary for the protection of the works or as
directed by the Engineer .
EXISTING UTILITIES
1.
Before commencing any construction work, the Contractor shall obtain from the
various Utilities Departments, the location of any existing utilities on the Site. Active
utilities on the Site shall be carefully protected from damage, relocated or removed
as required by the work. When an active utility line is exposed during construction,
its location and elevation shall be plotted on the Record Drawings and both the
Engineer and the utility owner notified in writing.
2.
Inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during operations shall be removed.

The location of such utility shall be noted on the Record Drawings and reported in
writing to the Engineer.
3.
Use all necessary precautionary and protective measures required to maintain

existing utilities , services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation. In
particular, the Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent undermining of
utilities and services presently in service .
4.
Protect existing or new utilities and services where required by the Contractor's
operations and/or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible
for bracing and supporting utilities and services to prevent settlement, displacement
or damage to same.
5.
The Contractor shall not remove any utility or service line, conduit or any
structures, above or below the ground, within the limits of the works until receiving
written permission from the respective service Utility Department and written
permission from the Engineer .
6.
The locations of the existing service facilities may not be indicated on the Contract
Drawings. The Contractor shall make his own determination of the existence and
locations of such utilities. The Contractor shall adjust to finished grade or level all
existing utilities within the limits of the Contract.

EARTHWORK
02300-6
________________________________________________________________________
3.3.
S.T.H.
EXCAVATION: GENERAL
1.
Excavate with due regard for the peculiarities of soil conditions and take precautions
to protect adjacent foundations and property.
2.
Remove subsoil and excavated material not required from the site, including
material excavated by other sections. Under no circumstances shall material
declared to be unsuitable for fill be stored next to material declared to be suitable for
fill. Excavated material shall not be piled up along sides of excavations in a manner
that will overload or increase danger of collapse of excavation sides.
3.
All surplus stockpiled materials remaining upon completion of the backfilling work
shall be removed from the site.
4.
Excavate to extent, elevations and depths required for completion of work, leaving
sufficient space for removal of formwork and application of waterproofing. Excavate
and construct for slabs, ramps, driveways, and walks, to lines, elevations and cross
sections shown on drawings to allow finishing sections to install their work to
required thicknesses.
5.
Keep excavation free of water (storm water, percolation water or subsoil water) by
dewatering or system of drainage as required, and provide pumps, suction and
discharge lines of sufficient capacity. Maintain until such time as permanent
drainage system is installed or until Engineer's approval for removal of equipment is
obtained. Take all necessary measures to prevent flow of water into excavation.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on completion any equipment
necessary together with temporary drains and the like. Under no circumstances
shall concrete be poured, fill placed, pipes laid or appurtenances installed in
excavations containing water.
6.
Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials leveled and
stepped at changes of levels except excavations made for drainage purposes which
are to slope as required.
7.
If removal of earth causes displacement of adjacent earth, remove disturbed earth

at no additional cost to the Owner.
8.
Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated ground, quicksand and organic material

encountered in excavating and fill void with well compacted, clean, dry fill of quality
as herein specified.
9.
After completion of excavation and prior to placing concrete or fill, notify the
Engineer so he may make inspection of exposed bearing surfaces. In event
founding levels are subjected to rain or other moisture after inspection and approval
but prior to installation of concrete, notify inspection engineer to re-examine all
exposed bearing surfaces. Do not place concrete until re-examination has taken
place and approval given.
10.
Excavate for footings to firm, undisturbed subsoil capable of safely supporting

respective soil bearing values shown.
11.
Should nature of subsoil at depths shown prove to be unsatisfactory for placing of

structural work thereon, then upon Engineer's written order, excavate to greater
depth until satisfactory bottom is reached.

EARTHWORK
02300-7
________________________________________________________________________
12.
If excavations reveal seepage zones, running water or other unexpected subsurface

conditions which may necessitate revisions or additions to any drainage system,
inform Engineer immediately for remedial action.
13.
Excavated surfaces scheduled to receive concrete skim slabs shall be protected

from excessive traffic and other disturbances and shall not be left exposed for
extended periods of time. Co-ordinate work with Section 03300 to allow for
immediate installation of skim slabs.
3.4.
1.
The work of this section includes excavation of all types of strata including rock. All
excavated material including broken asphalt and base material; broken concrete;
abandoned foundations and rubble fill at site of previous buildings; oil storage tanks,
catch basins, sumps and related piping, piling; concrete sidewalks and paving; and
the like, shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from site and
disposed of in location to be determined by Contractor in accordance with governing
regulations. Obtain Engineer's approval prior to using excavated material for backfill
and protect as necessary.
2.
Piling not interfering with construction of project may be cut off minimum 600 mm
below finish grade and abandoned or as directed by the Engineer.
3.5.
TRENCH EXCAVATING
1.
Excavate with suitable machinery or by hand as may be necessary to depths and

dimensions shown or required.
2.
Cut and trim sides of trenches evenly and as near vertical as possible, shore as
required to prevent cave-ins.
3.
Keep bottoms of trenches clean and clear of loose material. Slope or grade as
required. Hand trim at least last 100 mm of trench excavations to ensure minimum
disturbance to load bearing value of trench bottoms.
4.
Bottoms of trenches shall be graded evenly to secure the required falls for pipes
and to ensure bearing over the entire length of the pipe. Bottoms of trenches shall
be firm, undisturbed soil, and free from rock, stones, hard substances, rubbish, etc.
Where rock, stones or other hard materials occur, these shall be removed for a
depth of at least 150 mm and the space backfilled with selected sand or granular
material compacted in accordance with backfill requirements. No such material
shall be excavated or backfilling carried out without the approval of the Engineer.
3.6.
S.T.H.
EXCAVATED NATIVE MATERIAL
BACKFILLING
1.
Proceed promptly with backfilling as building progresses. Proceed only when work
to be backfilled has been inspected and approval to backfill has been obtained.
Place backfill in 200 mm thick maximum layers. Compact each layer before placing
next. Maintain optimum moisture content to achieve required densities.
2.
Backfill evenly on both sides of foundation walls to avoid unequal fill pressures on
walls. Care shall be taken when filling or backfilling to avoid any wedging action or
eccentric action upon or against the structure of work.

EARTHWORK
02300-8
________________________________________________________________________
Before placing of fill, the surface of the sub-grade shall be compacted at optimum
water content to the same percent of maximum dry density required of subsequent
layers and by mechanical means where possible.
3.
Fill over-excavations under bearing surfaces and footings, or within pyramid

enclosed by 7 in 10 slope from bearing surface with concrete of same strength as
specified for footings. Fill over-excavation under all other areas with approved
sand/gravel mixture and compact as directed. Fill over excavation at no additional
cost to the Owner.
4.
Withdraw shoring material during backfill.
5.
Compaction equipment to be of size and type to permit required compaction without

causing lateral forces resulting in displacement of foundation walls. Exercise
caution in this regard to avoid movement of foundations.
6.
Take care to avoid damage to waterproofing or displacement of waterlines, drains,

conduit and other underground installations.
7.
Prior to placing fill or concrete floor slabs on earth, consolidate subgrade to obtain
same compaction specified for fill material.
8.
Compact with mechanical tampers, areas adjoining vulnerable building components

which cannot be thoroughly compacted by drawn equipment.
3.7.
TESTING
1.
Sequentially test each stage of backfill commencing at founding elevations and

continuing through installation of subsequent lifts or material and compaction
thereof.
2.
Do not proceed with installation of any material until preceding surface or layer
meets design criteria. Engage and pay for independent testing agency to conduct
testing in addition to tests noted in paragraph above, and as described in Division 1.
3.8.
COMPACTION
1.
Density of fill in place shall be in accordance with latest revision of A.S.T.M.

D698-70, 95% Standard Proctor Density for all fill unless specifically noted
otherwise. Fill to underside of asphalt base - 100% Standard Proctor Density.
The Engineer is authorized to check the degree of compaction at any place in any
layer from time to time. Costs of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.
Maintain optimum moisture content during backfill and fill compaction to achieve
required density. Deposit in layers of such thickness that equipment being used for
compacting can produce specified density.
3.
Puddling or flooding with water for consolidating granular fill will not be permitted.
Addition of water is limited only to extent required to provide optimum moisture level
of fill material.
4.
During and immediately after leveling, thoroughly compact each layer of fill by use
of compaction equipment of size and type to permit required compaction without
causing lateral forces resulting in displacement of foundation walls. Exercise
caution in this regard to avoid movement of foundations.
5.
After a period adequate to reveal settlement has passed, place additional fill and
compact in all depressions. Make good any subsequent settlement without extra
cost to the Client.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

DEMOLISHING
02310- 1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. Compliance with Sections of Division 1, General and Preliminaries.
2. The removal and capping-off of existing r. concrete wall and floors, block works, tiles,
floor finishes, false ceiling, doors etcall as detailed in drawings, scope of works or as
found during execution and all those services required to maintain normal operation of
the existing buildings without any disturbance.
3. This specification deals with the general requirements for the demolition of buildings,
other structures and services above and below ground level and/or for the clearance
from the site of the other superficial obstructions, shrubbery, materials and the like. The
Contractor is to allow for the provision of adequate screens, necessary watering to allay
dust and removal of all debris from the site.
4. The Contractor is responsible for taking all necessary precautions for the protection of
existing structures on the site that may need to be retained if indicated and shall be held
responsible for reinstating or replacing any items of work damaged by him during the
execution of the works, to the approval of the Consultant.
5. Co-ordination with Local Authorities regarding existing services.
6. Before commencing the Works, the Contractor shall study all available drawings and
carry out a thorough survey and examination of buildings, structures or services to be
demolished or site to be cleared. The Consultant shall be fully informed of the results of
this survey.
PART 2: DEMOLITION PROCEDURE
1.
Extent of the Works

The Contractor shall demolished, break-up and remove materials, structures and
superficial obstructions on the site in the way of otherwise affected by the works. HE
shall clear each part of the site at times and to the extent required or approved by the
Consultant.
2.
Demolition Techniques
Demolition shall be carried out using techniques, which will not be detrimental to
adjacent or adjoining structures or parts of structures, which are not to be demolished.
Where shown on the drawings or where directed by the Consultant.
PART 3:
SUBMITTALS
1. Before starting works, examine all available all available information, carry out a survey
of the structure, site and surrounding area and submit a survey report and method
statements to ENGINEERS covering all relevant matters listed below:
a.
S.T.H.
The form, condition and demolition methods of the structures;

DEMOLISHING
02310- 2
___________________________________________________________________________
b. The removal methods of all demolished works;
c. The method of protection to the adjoining works which may be adversely affected by
vibration, dust or removal of structures;
d. The identification and location of services above and below ground;
e. Obtain approval from ENGINEER and Local Authorities in respect with disposal of
materials.
PART 4:
SERVICES AFFECTED BY DEMOLITION
1. Protect drains, manholes, gullies, vent pipes and fittings still in use and ensure that they
are kept free of debris at all times. Make good any damage arising from demolition
works and leave clean and in working orders at completion.
2. Notify ENGINEER of any damage. Make all arrangements for repair to ENGINEERs
satisfaction and bear any costs arising out of the damaged services.
PART 5:
DISPOSAL OF OLD MATERIAL
Materials to Remain Property of Employer

1. Where specified, certain materials arising from the site clearance are to remain the
property of the Employer. All fossils, antiquities and other objects of interest or value
which may be found or uncovered on the Site shall remain or become the property of the
Client and the Contractor shall forthwith:
a. Use his best endeavors not to disturb or damage the object;
a. Cease work, which would endanger the object or prevent or impede its removal;
b. Inform the Consultant of the discovery and precise location of the object.
2. The Consultant will issue instructions on the procedure to be adopted which may include
conditions to permit the examination, excavation or removal of the object by a third party.
3. Subject to the provisions of the conditions of Contract and of this Specification, all
materials arising from site clearance which are surplus to or unsuitable for use in the
Works shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of by him
either off the Site to an approved tip or if agreed by the Consultant on the Site in an
approved manner.
3. The Contractor shall propose two sites for disposal of unsuitable or surplus material.
One of which shall be specified as having priority and which must be filled before the
second is used, together with a separate location where debris, such as concrete,
kerbing etc., shall be disposed of. The Contractor shall seek approval for all the
nominated sites from the Municipality before work commences.
S.T.H.

DEMOLISHING
02310- 3
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 6: PROTECTION
1.
Adequately protect and preserve, except those which are to be removed. Replace to
approval or treat as instructed by Local Authority any species or areas damaged or
removed without approval.
Roads and Footpaths: Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to
the site for the on-going use of the buildings being occupied and keep clear of mud,
debris and obstructions. Any damage to roads and footpaths caused by site traffic or
otherwise consequent upon the works must be made good to Local Authorities
satisfaction. The Contractor to bear any costs arising.
PART 7:
SAFETY OF ADJOINING EXISTING BUILDINGS
1.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precaution during the demolition and excavation
period to protect existing building in the immediate vicinity of the Work from damage or
collapse, unless other method specified under other sections or on the drawings/
Provide special care in the case of excavations adjacent to buildings by installing
temporary or permanent shoring, strutting, piling or underpinning or by making
excavations in short lengths as are deemed fit. The Contractor shall properly support all
foundations, trenched, walls, floors, etc., which may affect the safety of the adjacent
existing buildings.
2.
The shoring, strutting, pilling, etc., shall be executed in such a manner as to cause as
little inconvenience as possible to OWNER/EMPLOYER.
3.
The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of the adjoining existing
buildings and for the sufficiency of all temporary or permanent shoring, underpinning,
strutting, piling or any other methods used.
4.
Should any damage occur due to the ineffectiveness of the shoring, underpinning,
strutting, etc. or any other supports provided, the damage shall be made good by the
Contractor at his own expense.
5.
Prior to starting work, the Contractor shall obtain ENGINEERs approval as to the
manner in which he intends to proceed with the demolitions, excavations and
implementation of safety measures. Approval by ENGINEER shall not absolve the
Contractor to any way of his responsibility as indicated in this Section.
PART 8:
DEMOLITION WORK GENERALLY
1.
Demolish structures in accordance with BS 6187:1982 and Health and Safety rules of
Statutory Authorities. Contractors site staff responsible for supervision and control of
the work is to be experienced in the assessment of the risks involved and in the
method of demolition to be used.
2.
Take precautions to prevent fire or explosion caused by gas, vapor, etc.
3.
S.T.H.
Reduce dust by periodically spraying demolition works with water.

DEMOLISHING
02310- 4
___________________________________________________________________________
4. Excavate and break out any type of old foundations, slabs, etc. Remove all
rubble, stone and contaminated earth. Backfill as specified in Section 02200.
5. Inform the authorities immediately of any unrecorded materials, discovered during
demolition work and proceed with safe removal, filling, etc., only as directed by
ENGINEER.
a. RUBBISH
1.
Remove rubbish, debris and surplus material regularly and keep the site and
Works clean and tidy.
2.
Remove all rubbish and residue from voids and cavities before filling or closing
in.
3.
Ensure that all demolition material and rubbish is disposed of at a place

approved by Local Authorities.
b. COMPLETION
1.
Clear away all debris and leave the site in a tidy condition on
completion.
2.
Grade the site to follow the levels of adjacent areas as agreed with
ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
STH BASES, BALLASTS, PAVEMENTS AND APPURTENANCES

02700-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
This Section includes solid concrete interlocking pavers, pre-cast concrete pavers, and
stone pavers set in latex Portland cement setting beds over concrete bases.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of unit pavers, erect mock-ups for
each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under
sample submittals. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials and same base construction including special features for expansion joints
and contiguous work as indicated for final unit of work.
1.
Construct mock-ups on site as a part of finished construction in

location and size directed by the Employer Representative, but in no
case less than 1500 x 1500 mm for each paver type.
2.
Notify Employer Representative one week in advance of the dates and

times when mock-ups will be erected.
3.
Demonstrate quality of workmanship that will be produced in final unit

of work.
4.
Obtain Employer Representative's acceptance of mock-ups before

start of final unit of work.
5.
Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed

condition as a standard for judging completed unit of work.
a.
1.3
Retain mock-ups as part of finished construction upon Employer

Representative's for judging completed unit of Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds. Provide artificial shade and
wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with
temperatures of 38 deg C and above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS/ PRODUCTS
A.
Unit Pavers: Provide selections as or equal to those listed in Division 9 "Finish

Legend" and approved by the Employer Representative.

02700-2
___________________________________________________________________________
B.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products which may be incorporated in the Work includes.
COLORS AND TEXTURES

A.
Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed unit
paver surfaces and joints complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.3
CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS

A.
B.
2.4
2.5
Solid Concrete Interlocking Pavers, General: Solid, dense concrete paving units
made from a "no slump" concrete mix cast under extreme pressure with high
frequency vibration to achieve a compressive strength exceeding 55 mPa, and that
meets or exceeds applicable requirements of ASTM C 936.
1.
Maximum Water Absorption: 5%.
2.
Freeze-Thaw Properties: Meeting or exceeding the requirements of

Section 8, ASTM C 67.
Pre-cast Concrete Plaza Pavers, General: Solid, pre-cast concrete paving units of
concrete having an average compressive strength of 35 MPa, with an absorption
rate of less than 5%, that show no weight loss after 50 freeze-thaw cycles. Provide
auto claved units having a gauged tolerance of plus minus 1 mm in any direction.
GRANITE PAVERS
A.
Granite Building Stone Standard: ASTM C 615.
B.
Association Standard: The National Building Granite Quarries Association's

(NBGQA) "Specifications for Architectural Granite".
C.
Granite Selections: As indicated in Finish Legend.
LIMESTONE PAVERS
A.
Limestone Building Stone Standard: ASTM C 568, classification as follows.

1.
B.
2.6
Match color and texture indicated by reference to manufacturer's

standard designations for these characteristics.
Classification: III (High-Density) dolomitic limestone.
Limestone Selections: As indicated in Finish Legend.
LATEX MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR SETTING BED MATERIALS

A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
B.
Aggregate: ASTM C 144 with a fineness module of 2.25 plus or minus 0.10.

02700-3
___________________________________________________________________________
C.
Latex additive (water emulsion) describe below, serving as replacement for part or all
of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer
for use with job-mixed Portland cement and aggregate and not containing a retarder.
1.
Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
D.
Water: Clean, free of materials detrimental to strength or bond of mortars.
E.
Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturer's

Mortar Mixes:
instructions relative to mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and
joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
Discard mortars and grout when they have reached their initial set.
1.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting-bed Mortar: Proportion and

mix Portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to
comply with directions of latex additive manufacturer and as necessary
to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to
receive pavers.
2.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and

mix Portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat
to comply with directions of latex additive manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
3.2
Joint Patterns: As indicated on drawings.

1.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 1.5 mm unit-to-unit offset from flush

(lippage) and a tolerance of 10 mm in 3 m from level or slope as
indicated for furnished surface of paving.
2.
Hand tight Joints: Where unit pavers are indicated without spaced
joints, set unit pavers with sand-filled hand-tight joints.
LATEX MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR APPLICATIONS

A.
Saturate-concrete sub-base with clean water several hours before placing settingbed. Remove surface water about 1 hour before placing setting-bed.
B.
Apply cement paste slush coat over surface of concrete sub-base about 15 minutes
prior to placing setting-bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out prior to
placing setting-bed. Do not exceed 1.5 mm thickness for cement slush coat.
C.
Apply mortar setting bed over cement paste slush coat immediately after latter has
been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at sub-grade
elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D.
Mix and place only the amount of mortar setting bed that can be covered with pavers
prior to initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting bed material
that has reached initial set prior to placing pavers.
E.
Wet pavers several hours before laying unless their initial rate of absorption (suction)
when subjected to testing by method described in Section 9 of ASTM C 67 is less

02700-4
___________________________________________________________________________
than 3 / 4 oz. per 30 sq. inches of immersed area. Do not lay pavers with free
moisture on the surface.
F.
Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately prior to placing
pavers on green or wet setting bed, apply uniform 1.5 mm thick slurry bond coat to
bed or back of each paver with a flat trowel just prior to placing it on end.
G.
Tamp and beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contract
with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each
paver in single operation prior to initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already
set and disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
END OF SECTION

LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATION 02800-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction and scope of work

2. References
2.1. Contract Documents
2.2. Project Specifications
2.3. Other Documents
3. Resources
3.1. Plant and equipment
3.2. Personnel
4. Materials
4.1. List of materials / Plants
5. Method Sequence
5.1. Preliminary requirements
5.2. Shop Drawings
5.3. Material submittal / Plants
5.4. Delivery storage and handling
5.5. Production
5.6. Site Inspection
5.7. Methods: Soft scape Installation / Plantation
5.8. Inspection & Test Plan
5.9. Protection
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1)
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE OF WORK

This Methodology Statement consist of descriptive details and the installation sequence
of the company process in the execution of all works included in package.
Scope of Work
The scope of work covers the supply and plantation of the following items:

2)
Palm trees, Trees

Shrubs, Ground Covers, Grass and Lawns
REFERENCES
2.1
Contract Documents
Hard Soft Landscape & Irrigation Works
2.2
Project Specifications
Landscaping Specifications
3)

Irrigation System Installation Specification

Hard landscaping Install Specifications
Soft landscaping (Planting, Turf and Grasses) Specification
Earthwork (Infrastructure) Specification
2.3
Other Documents

Approved Shop Drawings All shop drawings will be approved from consultant.
Approved Material Submittals All material will be approved by Consultant.
Approved ITP Test report will be from approved ITL.
Approved Method Statements from each activity.
Physical Site Measurement to submit IR for survey works.
Mock-up sample and approval will be approved by client
RESOURCES
3.1
Plant and Equipment
Machinery will be maintained by project onsite mechanic who checks each piece of plant
every day before use. Hired or leased machinery will be maintained by the owner
company. All certification for Plant and Machinery will be filled in site office and will be
readily available for review by the Client.
S.T.H.
3.2
Personnel

Project Manager
Technical Manager
Construction Manager
QA/QC Manager
QA/QC Engineer

_____________________________________________________________________________

4)
Quality Surveyor
Safety Officer
Supervisors
Foremen
Team Leaders
Gardener
Laborers
Document Controller
Machine Operators
MATERIALS
All materials used are in accordance with contract specifications and will be submitted for
approval before ordering. Any requirements from Abu Dhabi Municipality will be
incorporated during supply and installation and an environmental permit will be sought
from them and returned granted before any works take place.
All materials used in used in this contract will be extracted from the contract specification
and approved drawings. The quality surveyor in conjunction with the Project Manager will
incorporate these material parts, description, specifications and quantities in the procured
material log sheet.
The Project Manager in co-ordination with the Construction Manager will ascertain the
requirement of Abu Dhabi Municipality if any from time to time, and all such requirement
will be incorporated during the process of supply and installation stages.
All materials will be submitted for approval to Client/Consultant.
4.1
List of Materials
The following list is a summary of key materials to be used for Soft Landscaping Works.
PALMS
Nanorrhops Ritchieanna (Palm Tree)
TREES
Prosopis Cineraria
SHRUBS
Vitex Agnus Castus
Acacia Ehrenbeggiana
Pennisetum Setacum
GROUND COVERS
Sesuvium Portulacastrum
Centipeded Grass
HARD SCAPES
Crushed stones (red color)
Crushed stones (gray color)
Garden Path (gray color) rectangular stone tiles
Non-skid stone tiles
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
Interlocking tiles (6cm THICK)

Interlocking concrete pavers
LANDSCAPE ACCESSORIES
Pergola
Fabric tensile umbrella type
Fabric tensile shading
OTHERS:
Compost (Cow Manure)
Fertilizer
Sweet sand
Burlap
Tree Rubber tie
Geo-textile Fabric
Drainage Cell
5)
Soil Addictives
Tree Stake
Oman Gravel mulch
Tree/Palm anchors
Sano plant Solid Additives
Root barrier
METHOD SEQUENCE
5.1
Preliminary Requirements

Shop drawings
Material Approval
Approval of Inspection Test Plan
Approval of Method Statement
Site Survey and project planning
Physical site measurement
Mock up sample approval
Approval of Quality Control Plan
5.2
Shop Drawings
Preparation & submission of the shop drawings submittal schedule will be done in
accordance with the Tender/Contract drawings, this will be provided when receive award
of the contract notification.
The Project/Construction Manager will prepare a list of required drawings to be submitted
to the consultant for co-ordination and approval.
Upon approval of drawing list, design department will prepare and check up the project
drawings taking into consideration the following factors:
Project requirements for the product and material that includes dimension details
of product, material type, type of finish and quality of finish and or/workmanship.
Permissible tolerance
Product acceptance criteria
Aesthetic (Artistic) specifications and acceptance criteria
Standardization of products
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
According to the nature of the work, the Project Manager will decide on the necessity to
carrying out site measurements.
Preparation of shop drawings will be in accordance to the schedule submitted.
The Project/Construction manager will monitor the progress of shop drawings approved
via the list of approved drawings for the reference numbers and approval dates.
All approved shop drawings will be stamped Controlled and will be issued to the
Engineers for site use.
Site survey will be conducted whenever necessary by the surveyor and measurements
will be taken for any non standard items.
The Quality Surveyor will quantify the variations based on the approved shop drawings &
site measurements.
All of the above will follow the procedure & requirements.
5.3
Plants/Material Submittal
Materials samples/samples of plants with height and girth of all Palms, Trees, Shrubs
matching the specification and will be submitted for approval before ordering. No
materials to be order without the approval of the Clients Representative or Consultant.
The Project/Construction Manager will coordinate with the purchasing department to
purchase and provide all the necessary approved materials and verification requirements
as per contract specifications requirements.
All incoming materials will be subject to inspection by the Quality Control Inspector and
approved by the QA/QC Manager. No material will be withdraw from stores area before
inspection and approval from the QA/QC.
Stores will receive the incoming materials to a designated holding area, checks will be
made for Quality and Quantity with any materials not conforming to be clearly labeled and
stored separately awaiting QA/QC to follow the procedures of sub contractors suppliers
NCR.
Material will be handled manually where possible, when not mechanical measures will be
set in place i.e, forklifts or any other lifting device appropriate for the task.
Handling of materials within the stores containers will be by hand.
Handling of materials in open storage area will be carried out by mechanically to
reduce risks involved in Manual handling.
All Operative exposed to manual handling will have undergone manual handling
training.
Pallet bases to be checked to allow safe handling by forklift or telehandler.
No stacking of 2 different types of material in one pallet this also goes for stacking
pallets; stacked pallets must be of the same material.
No more than 2 pallets loads per stack.
Stacking height should not exceed 3 meters.
Stacking will be as per the procedures and requirements.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
5.4
Delivery, Storage, Handling and Transportation of Plants
During transportation, all plants shall be packed adequately to ensure protection for
climatic or physical injuries. Tarpaulins or other covers shall be place over plants when
they are transported by trucks or in open freight cars. All plants shall be treated with antidesiccant prior to transportation.
All records of stock materials at the storage area will be recorded and labeled stating
intended location for installation on the project,
All materials will be marked and monitored.
Materials for each task/zone will stored separated
Unless materials are near the intended installation area and are in the process of
installation, materials will be protected as appropriate.
Protective tapes/coverings will be made to protect the stored materials of unique nature
and specification, materials will be protected as appropriate.
Protective tapes/coverings will be made to protect the stored materials of unique nature
and specifications, materials will be stocked in groups to increase efficiency of site
deliveries.
All hazardous materials will be stored separately and to manufacturers recommendation
in clearly marked Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) boxes with
material safety data sheet (MSDS) and COSHH assessments for each item understood
and signed by staff required to handle/work with it. This file will be held in the site office
and made available upon request.
All of the above must follow the procedures and requirements.
5.5
Production
The purchasing department will liaise with QS department and prepare a detailed
material list for each item in accordance with the approved shop drawings. All materials
will be approved by the consultant.
The first sample of each item will be submitted to the consultant for approval and the
production process will continue as per schedule. Each product/ item will be labeled with
a unique number for its identity.
Suppliers Quality control will take care of the quality issues if any of the material once
approved and passed by their QC team. The materials will then be stacked in pallets,
protection wrapped around them awaiting delivery call off from site. When materials
delivered to site QA/QC and CONTRACTOR/CONSULTANT representative along with
the storekeeper will inspect all goods for conformity.
If a non-conformance arises the contractor will issue the supplier with an NCR. The store
keeper and logistic team will ensure safety and soft handling of all delivered materials.
The contractor will submit Materials Inspection Request (MIR) on all incoming materials.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
5.6
Site Inspection
Prior to starting installation activities, each specified area will be inspected by the survey
team to ensure grading is in accordance with the approved specification for handover. If
any discrepancies occurred the consultant will be informed and a coordinated outcome
will prevail.
Only approved material will be used. Delivered material will ne stored at lay down area
and will always be subject to the consultant representative inspection. The contractor will
submit Material Inspection Request (MIR) for checking and approval.
The contractor will comply with the consultant procedures and requirements.
5.7
Softscape Installation
For Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling & Grading Method Statement to be submit

separately.
For Irrigation Installation Works Method Statement to be submit separately.
For Hard Landscaping Works Method Statement to be submit separately.
For Electrical and Mechanical Installation Works Method Statement to be submit
separately.
For Site Furniture Installation Works Method Statement to be submit separately.
Method: Shrubs, Ground Covers & Grasses
Samples of all materials to be used in this contract will be submitted for approval. The
approved samples will be the quality standard for the material and its placement.
Excavation for low planting
Palms, Trees, Shrubs, ground covers and lawn excavation pit sizes will be in accordance
with the approved detailed landscape drawings. While the lawn, grasses and ground
cover beds will be backfilled with approved planting fill available on site to a depth of 30
cm from finish grade. Surplus excavated materials will be disposed off to assigned
locations by the consultant.
As per Soft landscaping Specification
Softscape Planting
Pit Dimensions & Soil grade
Shrubs
500 mm deep
Ground covers
500 mm deep
Turf and Grasses
As per Approved drawings
The sub-grade level will be handed over to the contractor at -300 mm from finish level.
The rough sub-grace will follow the designed finish level -/+ 50 mm to be considered
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
acceptable for top dressing with sweet agricultural soil. Minor trimmings will be performed
by personnel to achieve an acceptable slope and mound shape.
Surveyor along with the consultant Surveyor will ensure that the sub-grade level is
acceptable and is within tolerable variance from designed finish level before requesting
inspection and sign off.
Plant beds for shrubs/grasses/ground covers and lawn will be backfilled with sweet soil
only procured from the approved Abu Dhabi Municipality borrow pit. Prior to planting, soil
additives/fertilizers will be spread over the area newly backfilled as per specifications.
The amendment will be wetted and rototilled to the dept required for every category. The
depth required being the depth of the plant bed shown on the approved shop drawings.
Potted plants classified as shrubs, grasses and ground covers will be planted per the
spacing shown on the approved shop drawings. Set back between plants species and/or
hardscape will be in strict compliance with the approved shop drawings. Planting area will
be irrigated immediately after planting.
Immediately after completion of planting the plants beds and mounds will be leveled and
raked, as well as, barricaded to prevent trespassing. The final shape of the mound or flat
area would be achieved at this stage after which the surface irrigation drip lines would be
permanently installed.
Planting Materials
Compost
General Fertilizer
Groundcovers
10 kg. per m2
200 g per m2
Shrub Bed
10 kg. per m2
200 g per m2
Lawn areas
10 kg. per m2
200 g per m2
Drainage Cell
Place the drainage cell over the surface of the membrane and butt together. Cut the
drainage cell where required using a hand or circular saw.
Place the filter fabric over drainage cell allowing for a 150 mm overlap at each seam. Allow
additional fabric to cushion the edge of the drainage cell around the perimeter against the
waterproof membrane.
Palms & Trees
Samples of all materials to be used in this contract will be submitted for approval. The
approved samples will be the quality standard for the material and its placement.
Palms and Trees excavation pits will be in accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality
guidelines and approved shop drawing details, dimensions are as shown in the table below.
Pits will be excavated materials will be disposed off to assigned locations.
Excavation dimensions for Palms and Trees
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
Softscape Planting Material
Minimum Pit Dimensions
Palms
1.5 x 1.5 x 1.85 m
Trees
1.5 x 1.5 x 1.85 m
Palms and Trees excavation pit sizes will be in accordance with the approved detailed
landscape drawings.
Planting of Palms and Trees
Drainage cell will be added in horizontal and vertical concrete surface. Setting out of
individual Palm, Tree, locations and planting is an equipment intensive operation.
Palms/Trees will be planted utilizing a telescopic-handler or a crane depending on size,
location and access. Palms/trees will be planted straight and/or to the angle required by the
architect.
Setting out of Palms & trees to be checked and approved by the consultant representative
on site.
Only approved and acceptable quality Palms/Trees will be planted and rejects will be
removed from site, upon the request of the inspector. All planted palms will be burlapped
and sprayed by fungicides and insecticides to its delivery to site.
Backfilling
Soft Scape Planting

Materials
Compost
Palms
25 kg. per pit (applied 3

months after planting)
Trees
20 kg. per pit
General Fertilizer
175 g per pit (3
months after
planting)
300 g per pit
Palm and Tree pits will be backfilled with approved sweet soil procured from the Abu Dhabi
Municipality borrow pit. At the time of planting, the pit will be excavated in preparation for
the plant root ball at which time the soil will be amended with the recommended soil
additives/fertilizers. The Palm/Tree will then be lifted and placed in pit where the planting
crew will add water during backfilling to aid in soil compaction and rid pit of air pockets in
order to achieve maximum settlement and stability of Palm/Trees.
Post planting of palms will be supported with galvanized steel cable and tensioned SS
turnbuckles as necessary and in accordance with approved shop drawings details. All tree
ties and as per approved shop drawing details.
All palms will be trunk cleaned and/or frond bases cut in a neat manner. Additional cleaning
or cutting of frond base may be performed, if needed, prior to palm erection/planting.
Precautionary Measures when Planting Trees:
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
a)
Sub soil will be removed and not mixed with planting medium.
b)
Tree containers to be irrigated one day prior to planting.
c)
Trees to be removed carefully from their containers and care will be taken not to
damage the roots & foliage.
d)
Dead and damaged fronds & branches are to be removed after planting.
Planting will adhere to the time specified or other time as per the consultant.
Precautionary Measure during Planting of Palms:
a)
Will be irrigated thoroughly prior to uprooting.
b)
Prior to transporting all suckers, flowers fruiting parts and approx. 30% of fronds will
be removed.
c)
Growing tip and the roots will wrapped in hessian and tied properly.
d)
At the time of planting palms will be irrigated thoroughly to remove air pockets from
the pit.
Temporary Measures on Newly Planted Palms:

All palms and trees planted at site will be maintained by the contractor until the site
handover certificates are issued by the consultants representative.
The temporary measures are taken especially early planting prior to having the irrigation
system operational. These measures are:
a)
Daily hand watering of palms at an average rate of 120-150 liters/day. The water will
be from the approved source assigned by the consultant representative to the
contractor to utilize. The source now being the on-site main line/water tank.
b)
Re-wrapping of palm fronds, if falling down.
c)
Re-establishing the palm fronds, if falling down.
d)
Manual fertilization should take place after the tree start showing new growth
development.
e)
Weeding of palm basin of any undesirable vegetation.
f)
Spraying fungicides/insecticides if the tree shows any disease symptoms (curative).

As a preventive measure one drenching of 4 liters of diluted fungicide/palm would be
applied once/ 2 weeks.
g)
S.T.H.
Re-staking the palm if falling down or if the stakes become loose.

_____________________________________________________________________________
h)
Rooting hormone application once a month would be applied. This application is an

additional application to the one administrated at the Nursery before transferring the
palm to the site.
5.8
Inspection & Test Plan
Each area will be offered for inspection before installation and after completion. Representatives
will be available at site to supervise and monitor the work area.
All inspection & tests will be conducted in accordance with the approved Inspection & Test Plan
and check list signed off.
5.9
Protection
All materials & equipment will be delivered to site wrapped in protection as per manufacturers
practice.
Protection will only be removed to conduct material quality control procedures or when
installation of material is ongoing.
All installed materials/items will be protected as far as reasonable practicable after installation
and will remain in that state until final handover.
S.T.H.

03200-1
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
1.
1.2.
1.
1.3.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in conjunction herewith.
SCOPE OF WORK
This section describes and specifies work required for plain and reinforced concrete,
including formwork intended to be used for the Project under the Contract in
accordance with the Drawings, Bill of Quantities and as directed by the Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Prior to commencement of Concrete Work, the Contractor shall submit samples of

concrete components to the Engineer before sending them to the laboratories for
testing, to establish the probability of the materials passing tests for specified
requirements.
2.
The Contractor shall have the tests made, at his own expense, in the laboratories
approved by the Engineer.
3.
Testing
4.
1.
All concrete delivered to the Site shall have a minimum strength of 400
Kg/cm2 and be accompanied by manufacturers test certificates showing
compliance with BS 1881. Copies of these certificates shall be given to the
Engineer.
2.
Notwithstanding initial compliance with the foregoing clauses, concrete which at

the time of proposed usage is more than 6 weeks old from the date of
manufacture shall be tested for fineness, setting time, strength and soundness
in the presence of the Engineer and evidence of the satisfactory nature of the
cement shall be submitted before use. Costs of all tests are deemed to be
included in the Contract Price.
Tests for Water

1.
1.4.
When required by the Engineer the quality of the mixing water shall be
determined by the Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in
Concrete, as specified in BS 2690 & B.S. 1328 or ASTM D 512 & D 516.
MONOLITHIC SMOOTH FINISH SURFACES
1.
All concrete surfaces which are not in acceptable condition and which are required
to be surface-finished as designed herein, shall be rubbed to a smooth and uniform
texture with a carborundum brick and clear water as soon as the forms are removed
and the concrete is ready to hone.
2.
Concrete surface shall be free from honeycombing, air holes, fins and projections
arising from defective mixing, placing or formwork.
S.T.H.

03200-2
________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.
DELIVERY
1.
The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such, as to

provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall
be such that interval between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes.
2.
Protection of Steel Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement shall be protected at all

times from injury. When placed in the work, it shall be protected from dirt,
detrimental scale, paint, oil, loose rust, grease or foreign substances.
1.6.
1.
SUBMITTALS
Trial Mixes (Design Mixes Only)
1.
The Contractor shall submit not less than 3 weeks before the
commencement of manufacture of preliminary trial mixes the following
information to the Engineer in respect of each grade of concrete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S.T.H.
Grade of concrete.
Title of particular trail mix.
The grading of the aggregates.
The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete.
The expected compacting factor and slump.
Full details of the proposed site quality control.
Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing.
2.
At least six weeks before commencing any concreting in the Works, The
Contractor shall make preliminary trial mixes using samples of aggregates
and cement typical of those to be used.
3.
Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the mixes as follows:1.
For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3

consecutive batches. Three from each set of 6 shall be tested at
an age of 7 days and three at an age of 28 days. The cubes shall
be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in compression
in accordance with BS 1881. The test shall be carried out in a
laboratory approved by the Engineer.
2.
If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of

concrete a batch shall be made with a double dose of the additive.
For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and 1 tested at
days and 2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of errors in
dispensing.
3.
At each stage of test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate
minimum specified on the approved drawings.
4.
Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the

Engineer for his approval full details of the mixes he proposes to use,
with their anticipated average strength, which must be based on the
satisfactory results of these preliminary tests.

03200-3
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2:
2.1.
1.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Cement
1.
General
Cement shall be Portland Type I for superstructure and Type II for sub
structure, originating from approved manufacturers, obtained in sealed and
labeled bags, each 50 kgs net capacity; name and brand of the manufacturer.
The quality of cement shall conform to the standard Specification for
Portland Cement of ASTM Designation C150 or B.S. 12.
2.
Alkali Content
1.
3.
Expansion Due to Sulphate Exposure

1.
4.
General Requirements
1.
Aggregates shall conform to the requirements in ASTM C33 and BS

882 in addition to other requirements specified herein.
Fine Aggregates
1.
S.T.H.
The autoclave expansion shall not exceed 0.80 percent when tested in
accordance with "Standard Method of Test for Autoclave Expansion of
Portland Cement ASTM C151.
Aggregates
1.
3.
The heat of hydration shall not exceed 70 calories per gram and 80
calories per gram at seven days and twenty-eight days respectively
when tested in accordance with "Standard Method Test for Heat of
Hydration of Portland Cement ASTM C186.
Autoclave Expansion
1.
2.
The expansion in fourteen days shall be less than 0.045 percent when
tested in accordance with "Standard Method of Test for Potential
Expansion of Portland Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulphate
ASTM
C452.
Heat of Hydration
1.
5.
The total alkali content (Na2 0 + 0.658 k2 0) shall not be in excess of

0.60 percent by weight of cement when tested in accordance with
"Standard Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement ASTM
C114.
1.
All fine aggregates for concrete shall conform to Standard

Specification for Concrete Aggregates of ASTM Designation C-33.
2.
Organic Impurities : The color shall have an intensity not darker than twothirds the intensity of the standard color solution (not darker than Plat 2) as

03200-4
________________________________________________________________________________________
determined by the Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in
Sands Concrete of ASTM Designation : C-40.
4.
3.
Chlorides Soluble in : Not more than 0.10 percent by weight dilute Nitric
Acid when expressed as sodium chloride (Na C1).
4.
Total Acid Soluble: Not more than 0.50 percent by weight Sulphates when
expressed as sulphur trioxide (S03).
5.
Silt: Not more than 2 percent
6.
Mortar Strength : Compression ratio not less than 95 percent.
7.
Soundness: Weighted average loss when subjected to 5 cycles of the

soundness test using magnesium sulphate, not more than 10 percent.
Coarse Aggregates
1.
General Requirements: All coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to

Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates consist of crushed stone, having
hard, strong durable pieces, free from adherents and deleterious substances
Coarse aggregates shall be washed thoroughly with demineralized water to ensure
compliance with the Specifications. The minimum aggregate size shall be 20mm
down grade.
2.
Grading
1.
Coarse aggregate, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM,

shall meet the following gradation and shall by uniformly graded within the
limits stated in Table 3.3.D.4.1 here below:
Table 3.3.D.4.1
Percentage by weight Passing
1 inch
3/4 inch
1/2 inch
3/8 inch
No. 4
No. 8
No. 200
3.
Grading
(3/4" to No. 4)
Grading
(3/8" to No. 4)
100
95-100
35-70
20-55
0-10
0-5
0-1
100
95-100
25-50
0-10
0-1
Combined Aggregates
Approved fine and coarse aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined
in proportions as approved by the Engineer.
S.T.H.

03200-5
________________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Aggregate for Mortar

General Requirements: Aggregate for mortar shall conform to the Standard
Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar of ASTM Designation: C-144
and shall consist of hard, strong, durable, uncoated mineral or rock particles,
free from injurious amounts of organic or other deleterious substances.
5.
Water
1.
6.
1.
The water used for ice production, chilling, rinsing, concrete

production and for curing concrete shall be clean and free from
contamination. A complete chemical analysis of the water used
from each source shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval at the trial mix and thereafter as provided in these
specifications.
2.
The pH of the water for mixing and curing of concrete shall not
be less than pH 6.5 or more than pH 8.5.
Admixtures
1.
7.
Quality of Water
General :
1.
Admixtures in concrete shall be used only when approved in

writing by the Engineer and shall conform to the requirements of
the ASTM Standard Specifications Designation C-494-71 Type
B and Type for Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures.
2.
Costs of such admixtures, sampling and testing shall be at the

Contractor's expense.
Corrosion Inhibitor Admixture

1.
General :
The corrosion inhibiting admixture shall be added in an aqueous
solution form at batching plant and must be specially formulated for
Gulf area of hot weather. Also the manufacturers of this product
must be ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certified such as CORTECs
CORPORATION (USA) product MCI-2005(GS). Together with the
above certificates the Manufacturer / supplier should be consulted in
a specific circumstances. (If mentioned on the drawing)
The corrosion Inhibiting Admixture product, when used in
accordance to manufacturers recommendations, it should impart
changes to three important properties of concrete compared to
similar concrete without the product. The changes are increased
corrosion resistance (Durability), No adverse effects on physical
properties of concrete and effective even where corrosion is active.
The Migrating Corrosion Inhibitor (MCI) when used in accordance
with manufacturers recommendation, it should form a suitable
alternative for compliance with design to the relevant sections of
BS 1881, ASTM G109.
S.T.H.

03200-6
________________________________________________________________________________________
The corrosion inhibitor must comply with an international standard
such as ANSI / NSF standard 61 certification states that it can
come in contact with potable water.
2.
Mix Design :
The Migrating Corrosion Inhibitor (MCI) should be incorporated
into the mixing water for the purpose of determining the water
cement ratio of the concrete.
The Contractor must submit with the above design mix a letter of
undertaking by the local MCI supplier in which it states that he
would carry out his full duties and responsibilities under the
relevant section of these special specifications.
3.
Supervision and Control :

During the course of the construction of the works, the MCI
supplier should be advised to be present and carry out the
necessary quantity control of the corrosion inhibitor addition and
supervision. The Contractor / Readymix manufacturer must give
all necessary and possible assistance to the supplier in order for
him to carry out his duties.
2.2.
1.
CONCRETE COMPOSITION AND STRENGTH

General
1.
All concrete mixes shall be made in accordance with the

requirements of BS 5328 or similar approved Standard(s) and as
designated on drawings approved by the Engineer.
2.
Before any concrete is placed in the Works, all sources of concrete

materials shall be approved by the Engineer and satisfactory
evidence provided of compliance of those materials with the
physical and chemical tests detailed in the approved Standards.
The Contractor shall submit full details of each mix he proposes to
use in the Works, including its characteristic Works strength, its
principal intended use, source of materials, type of cement, mix
constituents by weight, minimum cement content, max. water
cement ratio, aggregate nominal size and grading limits, workability
etc. Such information shall be based on the results of Trial Mixes
as detailed in the following Clauses.
3.
4.
S.T.H.
Concrete mixes to be used in various parts of the works shall be

such that their strengths be equal to or better than those indicated
below.
The following tables give the recommended grades of structural c
concrete and their relevant composition and
strength:

03200-7
________________________________________________________________________________________
Grade
of Cube
Concrete
Strength
N/sq.mm
21 Days
N/sq.mm.
7 days
Prelim Test
Prelim
Test
36
32
-
Working Test
C40-45
C35-40
C15 -
40
35
15
Grade of Max Agg.

Concrete
Size mm.
Working
Test
32
28
10
C 50
20
Min.Cement
Content
kg.cu.m.
425
Max.W/C
Ratio
0.4
Compressive
Strength
(28 days)
50 N /mm2
C40
20
375
0.4
40 N/mm2
C20
20
275
0.5
20 N/mm2
2. Concrete Testing
For test purposes two sets of three standard 15cm cubes shall be taken from
each day's pour.
Test specimens shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C31: one
set at 7 days and the other at 28 days shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM C39. The average results of strength tests of laboratory controlled
cubes for any portion of the job must be higher than the minimum allowable
compressive strength at 28 days by at least 15 kg/cm2 with no individual
result less than 85% that strength otherwise, the Engineer reserves the right
to order changes in proportions of aggregates or water content of the
concrete, or both for the remaining portions of the job, without extra cost to
the Client.
Reports of test shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of being tested
and shall include the name of the job, date, location of pour, design strength, mix
date , slump, compressive strength, age and condition of test cylinder, type of
fracture and type of curing; report shall be in sextuplet.
In case admixtures are to be used, concrete tests shall be conducted with the
admixture incorporated to establish that specified strengths are achieved and
that densities are not reduced.
3. Record of Test Cubes
1.
S.T.H.
Up to date records shall be kept by the Contractor at the Works of

positions in the Works of all batches of concrete, of their grade and of
all test cubes, cores, or other specimens taken from them. Copies of
these records shall be supplied to the Engineer.

03200-8
________________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Changes in Materials or Mix Proportions

1.
5.
Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be
altered without the prior approval of the Engineer.
Failures to Meet Test requirements

1.
If the strength of the test cubes, the mix proportions of prescribed mixes
or the limits on cement content do not comply with those specified or if
in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete fails to meet the specified
requirements in other respects, the concrete in that part of the works
from which the sample has been taken will be considered not to comply
with the specified requirements.
2.
As and where directed by the Engineer, cylindrical core specimens of

150 mm nominal diameter shall be cut from the hardened concrete in
the Works for the purpose of examination and testing. The cutting
equipment and the method of doing the work shall be approved by the
Engineer. The specimens shall be dealt with in accordance with BS
1881. Prior to preparation for testing the specimens shall be made
available for examination by the Engineer. The results of such test shall
not nullify the fact of non-compliance with the Specification.
3.
If the specified requirements have not been met, the Contractor shall
propose such remedial action as may be required. Such action is subject
to the Engineer's satisfaction and approval.
6. Water/Cement Ratio
1.
The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete should not exceed the

specified maximum value by more than 5% of that value.
7. Cement Content
1.
Where a minimum or maximum cement content of designed mix is

specified and compliance is assessed by observation of the batching or
from autographic records, the cement content shall not be less than 95%
of the specified minimum or more than 105% of the specified maximum.
2.
Where compliance is assessed from the results of analysis tests on

fresh concrete, the content shall not be less than 90% of the specified
minimum or more than 110% of the specified maximum.
8. Slump Tests
1.
2.
S.T.H.
Slump tests shall be carried out periodically to ensure the appropriate

water cement ratio in accordance with Standard Method of Test of Slump
of Portland Cement Concrete of the ASTM Designation: C-143.
The required slump for C50 and C40 concrete will not exceed 75mm and
for C20 concrete will not exceed 125mm - all as per ACI Code.

03200-9
________________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
1.
MIXING OF CONCRETE
General
1.
2.
Truck Mixing
1.
3.
S.T.H.
Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer shall be of the

revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that the concrete can
be mixed to ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass.
All solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured in
accordance with Section 2.7, and charged into the drum at the
proportioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck mixer shall
be equipped with a tank carrying water. Only the prescribed amount of
water shall be placed in the tank unless the tank is equipped with a device
by which the quantity of water added can be readily verified. Truck mixing
shall be continued for not less than 50 revolutions after all ingredients
including water, are in the drum. Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after
the cement has been added to the aggregate. When cement is charged
into a mixer drum containing water or surface-wet aggregate and when the
temperature is above 30 degrees, the limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes:
the limitation on time between the introduction of the cement to the
aggregates and the beginning of the mixing may be waived when, in the
judgment of the Engineer, the aggregates are sufficiently free from
moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects on the cement.
Partial mixing at the Central Plant

1.
4.
Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, concrete shall be machine

mixed.
When a truck mixer provided with adequate mixing blades is used for
transportation, the mixing time at the mixing plant may be reduced to 30
seconds and the mixing complete in the truck mixer. The mixing time in
the truck mixer shall be as specified under Section 2.4.3.1 for truck mixing.
Plant Mix
1.
Mixing at a central plant shall conform to the requirements for mixing at

the Site and shall conform to the applicable requirements of the Standard
Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete of ASTM Designation: C-94.
2.
Cement
It should be noted that the cement to be used shall be selected after
careful study of the different types available, and that the chosen variety
shall confirm as closely as possible to the requirements for variation
outlined in ASTM C-917 as follows:
PROPERTY
MAX VARIATION
Tricalcium silicate
Loss on ignition
Fineness
4%
0.5%
325 Ccm2/gm (max)

03200-10
________________________________________________________________________________________
SO3
5.
6.
0.4%
Time of Hauling and Placing Concrete

1.
If the distance from the mixing plant to the construction site is so great that
between the time of mixing and pouring the concrete, the temperature is below
40 degrees centigrade and the traveling time is more than 30 minutes, truck
mixers must be employed.
2.
When truck mixers are used, concrete shall be discharged and placed in its
final position in the forms within forty five (45) minutes after water is first
added to the mix.
Delivery
The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such as
to provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete. The
rate shall be such that the internal between batches shall not exceed thirty
minutes. The method of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as
will facilitate placing with the minimum of rehandling and with no damage to
the structure of concrete.
PART 3:
3.1
1.
2.
S.T.H.
EXECUTION
HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE

General
1.
Prior to pouring concrete in any structure, the Contractor shall secure a

written order to commence from the Engineer.
2.
In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, clips, and other
construction debris and extraneous matters shall be removed from the
interior of forms. Struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold
the forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of
concrete at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing
has reached an elevation rendering their services unnecessary.
Precautions for concreting in hot weather

1.
Cooling the mixing water and/or replacing 50% of the mixing water
by crushed ice. Where crushed ice is used it shall be stored at a
temperature that will prevent formation of lumps. The ice shall be
completely melted by the time the mixing is completed.
2.
Maintaining the mixing time and the delivery time to the minimum
acceptable.
3.
Sprinkling of forms sub-grade and reinforcement with cool water

prior to placement of concrete.

03200-11
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.
4.
Water reducing and retarding admixture shall be used in all concrete

work when the temperature of concrete exceeds 32 degrees
centigrade.
5.
The water cement ratio inclusive of free surface moisture on

aggregates and any admixtures shall be kept to a minimum.
Vibrating Concrete
Concrete during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly
compacted. The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject
to the following provisions:-
3.2.
1.
The vibration shall be internal.
2.
Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the Engineer.

They shall be capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at
frequencies of not less than 4500 impulses per minute.
3.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 300 mm

thick except as hereinafter provided. Each layer shall be placed and
compacted before the preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent
injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between
the batches.
4.
Immediately following an approved discontinuance of placing

concrete, all accumulations of mortar splashed upon the
reinforcement bars and the surfaces of forms shall be removed.
5.
The concrete blinding thickness required shall be a minimum of 100mm,

have minimum strength of 100 KG/cm2 and a minimum cement content of
200 Kg/m3 moderate sulphur resistant concrete as per BS 4027.
PRECAST CONCRETE CURBSTONES
1.
Precast or cast-in-situ curbstones shall be vibrated concrete Class C40, cast in

steel moulds to the dimensions and shapes as directed by the Engineer and shall
be uniform in color, free from cracks, flaws or other defects and with well defined
arises.
2.
The curbstones shall be either prefabricated in standard units of 800 mm long or

cast-in-situ to the lengths as directed by the Engineer's . Samples of curbstones
proposed to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to
order or manufacture.
3.
The visible face of curbstones facing the road and pathways shall have batter
from the top of the curbstone to the finished elevation of the road pavement
and shall be straight from this elevation to the bottom.
4.
Curbstones shall be laid on concrete base Class C20 bedded and jointed with
cement and sand (1:3) mix. Each unit shall be cleaned and saturated with water
before being laid. All curbstones shall be well bedded and settled in place true to
line and level with a suitable wooden maul. Before the joints are mortared, any
curbstones which are set in such manner that their top surfaces are not in correct
S.T.H.

03200-12
________________________________________________________________________________________
alignment, when ordered by the Engineer, shall be removed and reset at the
Contractor's expense.
5.
3.3.
1.
Joint or curbstones shall be not less than 6 mm nor more than 10 mm in width,
and thickness shall be uniform from top to bottom. Joints shall be completely
filled with mortar and shall be pointed before the mortar has set.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
General
1.
3.4.
1.
Construction joints shall be placed as directed by the Engineer.

Shear keys or inclined reinforcement shall be used where
necessary to transmit shear or bond the two sections.
FORMWORK
General:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and suitability of the
formwork. The Contractor shall submit a full program of work indicating
the various phases for the erection and removal of forms and the manner
in which he intends to execute all concrete works.
2.
Material
1.
3.
4.
Workmanship
1.
Forms should be inspected by the Engineer prior to installation of

reinforcement.
2.
The number and spacing of the Form struts and braces shall be such that
the forms will be braced rigidly and uniformly, lock joints between form
sections shall be free from play or movement.
3.
The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of

re-used forms shall be maintained at all times. Forms which are
unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be re-used.
4.
All forms shall be treated with oil and saturated with water immediately
before placing the concrete. For members of exposed faces, the forms
shall be treated with an approved oil to prevent adherence to concrete.
Removal of Formwork
1.
S.T.H.
All forms shall be built of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion due to the
pressure of the concrete and other loads incident to the construction
operations. Forms shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent
warping and the opening of joints due to shrinkage of the wood.
In the determining of the time for removal of forms, consideration shall be

given to the location and character of the structure, the weather and other
conditions influencing the setting of the concrete, and the materials used
in the mix. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, forms shall remain
in place for the following specified period of time.

03200-13
________________________________________________________________________________________
- Centering under beams: 14 days
- Floor slabs: 14 days
- Wall sides of beams and other vertically formed surface: 36 hours
2.
3.5.
1.
In general, the forms shall be removed from the bottom upwards. Forms
and their supports shall not be removed without the written approval of
the Engineer. Supports shall be removed in such a manner as to permit
the concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to its
weight.
REINFORCEMENT
General:
The Contractor shall prepare for his own bar bending schedules from the
information given on the Drawings and as instructed in writing by the Engineer.
The ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be tied so that bars are
properly braced. The inside of their curved part shall be in actual contact with the
bars, around which they are intended to fit.
2.
Type and Quality of Steel Reinforcement.

1.
3.
Steel reinforcing shall be high tensile deformed bars conforming to BS

4449, BS4461 or ASTM A615M. The minimum characteristic strength
FY=4250 kg/cm2.
Wire: Wire for binding reinforcement bars shall be of soft black annealed mild
steel wire. The diameter of the wire shall not be less than 16 S.W.G. (1.6 mm)
and the binding shall be twisted tight with proper pliers. The free ends of the
binding wire shall be bent inward.
4. Fabrication
Bar reinforcement shall be bent to the shapes shown on the Drawings; Bending
dimensions and Scheduling of bars to be approved by the Engineer. All bars
shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. No bars partially
embedded in concrete shall be bent except as shown on the plans or specifically
permitted by the Engineer.
5. Placing and Fastening
S.T.H.
1.
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown

on the Drawings and firmly held during the placing and setting of
concrete. Bars shall be tied at all intersections except where spacing is
less than 300 mm in each direction, in which case alternate intersections
shall be tied so that the fixity of bars is not impaired.
2.
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of trays, blocks,

ties, hangers, or other approved supports.
Blocks for holding
reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks
of approved shapes and dimensions or approved metal chairs. Metal
chairs which are in contact with the exterior surface of the concrete shall
be galvanized. Layers of bars shall be separated by metal chairs or by
other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles, piece of broken
stones or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted.

03200-14
________________________________________________________________________________________
Reinforcement in any member shall be placed and then inspected and
approved by the Engineer, before the placing of concrete begins.
3.
Minimum cover to concrete for :

Foundation
Slab
Tie Beam
4.
3.6.
1.
=
=
=
=
75mm Bottom
50 mm Side
25mm Side
30 mm .
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the

Drawings. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Drawings, will not
be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices shall
be staggered as far as possible. Minimum lap length to be 45 times the
diameter of the bar.
CURING AND PROTECTION

The method, procedure, materials and equipment for curing shall be approved by
the Engineer.
1.
Water Curing
1.
Emphasis has to be given to the very early and continuous

wetting of all exposed concrete surface.
2.
Immediately after initial setting and for ten continuous days

thereafter all concrete shall be protected against harmful effects
of sunshine, drying winds. During this period, concrete shall be
kept continuously wet by the continuous supply of the water to
wet Hessian sheets covering all exposed concrete surfaces and
maintained wet by covering with heavy duty sealing polythene
sheet.
3.
Curing has to be carried out in accordance with ACI 305 and in

addition:
Horizontal Surface:
1.
Polythene sheeting should be placed immediately after

finishing.
2.
After initial set has taken place and in any case not later
than 8 hours after pouring, the polythene should be
replaced by wet Hessian which is then to be immediately
covered with polythene.
Measure must be taken to ensure that the Hessian is always
wet and continuously supplied with water.
3.
S.T.H.
After 10 days the Hessian and polythene should be

removed and an approved aluminized or white pigmented
resin based curing compound sprayed on the surface. The
rate of application should be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

03200-15
________________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Concrete shall be shaded.

Vertical Surfaces:
2.
3.7.
1.
Immediately after stripping, the member should be wrapped with wet

Hessian and then covered with polythene which is to be held firmly in
place. The Hessian must not be allowed to dry out.
2.
After an initial curing period of 10 days the Hessian and polythene

may be removed the concrete surface sprayed with an approved
aluminized or white pigmented resin based curing compound as an
alternative to retaining the Hessian and polythene in place for at
least another 7 days.
Curing with Curing Media

1.
Curing media shall meet all requirements of the Specification for

Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete of
ASTM Designation: C-309 and test for water retention by concrete
curing materials of ASTM Designation: C-156.
2.
The compound shall be applied to the concrete surfaces by

means of a sprayer. Ample time shall be allowed for the
concrete surface to harden and to prevent any damage.
3.
The compound shall be completely compatible with adhesives,

joint sealants and cement grout.
CONCRETE WORK FOR FOUNDATIONS

Materials Generally
1.
2.
1.
All materials used for plain or reinforced concrete work shall have the approval
of the Engineer and shall be as specified.
Cement
1.
The cement used shall be Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland cement

MSRPC (ASTM C150 type 11). Cement complying with BS 12 but containing
not less than 4% and not more than 8% proportion by weight of tricalcium
aluminate C3A. It shall not contain more than 3.0% proportionally weight of
sulphate trioxide S03.
2.
Protection of Concrete in Foundations

Not less than 100 mm of blinding concrete shall be placed in a base for all
reinforcement concrete to be placed below ground . All concrete placed below
ground or in filing shall be sulphate resisting as specified.
3.8.
1.
S.T.H.
FORMWORK REMOVAL
The removal of formwork shall be affected in such a manner as will ensure that no
damage to the concrete occurs.

03200-16
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.9.
1.
POLYETHYLENE MEMBRANE
Polyethylene vapor barrier membrane,1000 gauge heavy - duty grade shall be
provided on the compacted fill, under all ground level slabs .
Membrane shall be laid with laps as recommended by the manufacturer, according
to homologation sheets. All other concrete surfaces in contact with soil shall be
coated with two layers of hot-applied bitumen paint approved by the Engineer.
3.10. WATERSTOPS
Water stops shall be high water pressure, heavy duty 250 mm wide extruded PVC
with center bulb as manufactured by an approved manufacturer. They shall be fixed
in positions mentioned by the Engineer and in all construction joints submerged
under water in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.11. PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS
Supply and install all recast concrete lintels to all door and wall openings. Check
widths and lengths to match openings required.
3.12. PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS
1.
Supply and install all recast concrete curbs to roads and parking areas within the
plot limits.
2.
Profile of curb to match profiles approved by the Local Municipality.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

03500-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this
1.2.

Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement
1.3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
QUALIFICATIONS: Execute the work of this section by a subcontractor who has

adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously.
2.
ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE: Levels of finished concrete floors shall be within 6 mm

of established elevations in any 6100 mm x 6100 mm square area. Provide and
securely set screeds not more than 3 m apart to required elevation, using engineer's
level. Place concrete and rough screed making sufficient allowance for compacting
of concrete due to machine finishing.
3.
JOB MOCK-UP:
1.
At a location directed by the Engineer, provide a completely finished sample

area of steel trowel led floor for approval.
2.
Approved mock-up will serve as a standard by which subsequent work will be judged
acceptable.
4.
REFERENCE STANDARDS: Reference standards quoted in this section refer to:
5.
1.4.
1.
1.
ASTM C309-74, specification for liquid membrane-forming compounds for

curing concrete.
2.
DDENV 206, concrete materials and methods of concrete construction.
CO-OPERATION: Ensure that concrete supplied for slabs contains no admixtures

which would be incompatible with floor hardener material.
JOB CONDITIONS
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Perform work only when environmental
conditions are as specified in Section 03300.
1.
S.T.H.
Provide adequate moisture, sun shades and wind barriers to prevent too
rapid drying of concrete during hot weather.

03500-2
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
PART 2:
2.1.
Protection: Ensure that finished concrete floor areas are protected from
abrasion from foot or wheeled traffic, and from damage caused by spillage
of oil or other harmful materials.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
Unless specified otherwise, materials shall meet specified requirements of

section 03300.
2.
CURING SHEET: 2 mil polyethylene or waterproof paper.
3.
CURING-SEALING COMPOUND: Chlorinated rubber resin formulation to meet

specified requirements of ASTM specification C309, type 1; Class 'B' for plain
exposed concrete.
4.
JOINT SEALANT: Two component pour able self-leveling polysulphide; minimum

shore A udometers hardness of 25 -
5.
TOP PROTECTION: To protect where screed area with Mastertop 1330

system of MBT. or equal approved by Engineer.
PART 3:
3.1.
1.
3.2.
1.
S.T.H.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Before commencing work, ensure that surfaces are acceptable to receive and
maintain concrete finishing, and that specified installation will be achieved.
INSTALLATION
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING:
1.
Immediately after placing, screed and darby concrete before any water has
bled to the surface.
2.
Roll or tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate into concrete mix and then
screed.
3.
Strike off concrete level to screeds leaving no low spots. If vibrators are
used on straight edge, ensure that concrete is not over vibrated causing
segregation and collection of water fines over the surface.
4.
Smooth concrete to an even plane with a darby or bull float, and leave until
bleed water and water sheen has disappeared.
5.
Proceed with finishing only when concrete has hardened sufficiently to

support a man with only a slight footprint left on surface.
6.
Finish edges of concrete surfaces smooth with an edging tool to provide

slightly round exposed corners.
7.
Finish concrete surface with power float or with metal hand floats in areas
inaccessible to power floats. Floating shall embed large aggregate below the

03500-3
______________________________________________________________________________
surface, consolidate mortar at the surface, provide even planes with no
humps or depressions, remove marks from edging, and prepare the surface
for further specified finishing. Do not bring water and fine material to the
surface by overworking.
8.
Steel trowel floated surface with power trowels or hand trowels in areas
inaccessible to power trowels. Proceed with trowel ling only when there is
no sheen on surface. Repeat trowel ling until surface is bought to approved
finish. Allow sufficient time between toweling for additional set of concrete.
9.
Draw a soft bristled brush over steel trowel led surfaces provide a very light
broom surface where non-skid floor is required or as indicated.
10.
Finish floor surfaces shall be level dense, with no aggregate showing, and
free of blemishes.
2.
CURING: Cure concrete as specified in Section 03300 and DDENV 206; and by
methods specified in concrete floor finishing schedule. Ensure that no curing
compound is used which is detrimental to bond of bedding for finish flooring or finish
flooring materials.
3.
SEALED FLOORS: seal with a floor covering concrete floors that are not finished .
4.
CONTROL JOINTS:
1.
As soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by

cutting, cut 4.8 mm wide control joints into surface of concrete with abrasive
lade power saw.
2.
Locate control joints on centre lines of columns, and at maximum spacing of

6100 mm in both directions unless noted, or as otherwise indicated on
drawings.
3.
Cut joints in slabs on grade 38 mm deep.
4.
Within four weeks of cutting joints, fill them with joint sealant. Completely
clean side joint surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, and similar contaminants.
5.
Mask floor surfaces at joints while pouring. Prime side joint surfaces with
compatible primer if surfaces are not completely dry. Install bond breaker of
silica sand, polyethylene film strip or foam filler in bottom of joints. Apply
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
3.3.
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING SCHEDULE
1.
EXPOSED CONCRETE: Steel trowel smooth finish, cured by liquid curing

compound or moist curing.
2.
FOR CONCRETE STAIRS AND LANDINGS: Broom finish, with non - slip inserts
on all stair treads.
3.
FOR CERAMIC, MARBLE AND GRANITE: Light steel trowel finish, cured by curing
sheet or moist curing.
4.
FOR DEPRESSED SLABS: Rough broom finish, cured by curing sheet or moist
curing.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

MASONRY UNITS 04200-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
1.
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.
1.
1.4.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Metal Fabrication
Membrane Roofing
Joint Sealers
Tile
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SAMPLES: Submit samples of block, mortar, masonry accessories, masonry
reinforcement, anchors, ties, and counter flashing, for Engineer's approval
before commencing Work. All accessories to satisfy B.S. 5750 Part 2: 1987.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
1.
Deliver and store masonry units on site on pallets. If not used immediately after
delivery, cover with tarpaulins. Keep units protected from roofing bitumen, concrete,
mortar and other work and materials which could stain them.
2.
Store bagged products such as lime, cement and metal accessories in dry,
waterproof sheds.
1.5.
JOB CONDITIONS
1.
PART 2:
2.1.
1.
2.
Conform to BS 8000 Part 3. Maintain temperature of mortar around 50C

until used.
PRODUCTS
CONCRETE BLOCK
Cement:
1.
Ordinary Cement: Cement for solid or hollow blocks and mortar shall be
ordinary Portland Cement Type 1 as specified in Section 03300: Concrete
Aggregates:
1.
S.T.H.
03200:
05500:
07500:
07900:
09300:
Aggregate for Concrete Blocks and Mortar: Aggregate for solid and hollow
concrete blocks shall conform to the requirements of the AASHO
Designation: M6 and M80, except that the requirements for gradation shall
not apply (maximum aggregate size 10 mm), and aggregate for mortar shall
conform to the requirements of the AASHO Designation: M45.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
Water
1.
4.
5.
6.
2.2.
S.T.H.
Aggregate for Mortar: Shall conform to the foregoing requirements, except

that the aggregate shall be of an approved white crushed limestone chipping.
Water to be used in block work shall conform to the requirements specified

for water under Section 03300: Concrete.
Lime
1.
Non-hydraulic lime complying in all respects with BS 900, and shall be

prepared in accordance with the appropriate requirements of Clause 504 of
C.P. 121.101: latest revision.
2.
The contractor must satisfy himself by analysis or otherwise that the ground
lime is not adulterated or air slaked.
3.
The factory produced dry hydrated non hydraulic or semi-hydraulic lime,

ready for use shall be mixed with sand and made into coarse stuff or be
soaked to putty by mixing with water and allowing to stand not less than 16
hours before use.
4.
The lump or ground non-hydraulic or quick-lime shall be slaked, run to putty

and matured for not less than 2 weeks.
Blocks shall be autoclave or bubble cure process, high pressure steam cured,
modular, conforming to BS 6073, part 1 , part 2; linear shrinkage and moisture
movement not to exceed 0.045% and shall be as follows:
1.
{S/15/A/M} , 100% solid for all locations where structural members bear on
concrete block.
2.
{H/15/A/M } , for all other block work.
Where concrete block walls are required as fire separations or barriers, they shall
conform to the local building code requirements and British Standards Institute with
respect to equivalent thickness and type of concrete. Consult with Engineer for
locations and special conditions.
MORTAR MATERIALS
1.
Mortar materials shall conform to BS 5838 Part 2.
2.
AGGREGATE: BS 4550, except that the maximum allowable percentage passing

no. 30 sieve shall be 80%, and maximum passing no. 50 sieve shall be 50%.
3.
CEMENT: Normal Portland, BS 5224.
4.
HYDRATED LIME: ASTM C207.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.3.
MORTAR MIXES
1.
MIXING: Prepare and mix mortar materials under strict supervision and in small
batches for immediate use only. Mix proprietary mortars in strict accordance with
BS 5838 Part 2. Do not use retempered mortars.
2.
FOR BEDDING LINTELS: Use type 'M' cement mortar having compressive strength
of 17.2 MPa minimum.
3.
For all other masonry: Use type 'N' masonry mortar having a compressive strength
of 5 MPa.
4.
Mortar shall be prepared in the following proportions with the addition of the
minimum quantity of clean water for workability: Cement and sand mortar (1:3) mix
shall be composed of one part cement to three parts of sand by volume. Hydrated
lime up to 1/4 by volume of the dry cement may be added for bedding blocks, upon
the approval of the Engineer, to improve workability, without appreciably reducing
the strength.
5.
The ingredients for cement and sand shall be measured in proper clean gauge
boxes and the mixing shall be carried out by means of an approved mechanical
batch mixer.
6.
In the case of cement lime mortar, the sand and lime shall be mixed first, and the
cement added.
2.4.
NON-SHRINK GROUT
1.
2.5.
2.6.
MASONRY REINFORCING, TIES AND ANCHORS

1.
Masonry reinforcement, ties and anchors shall be in accordance with

Connectors for Masonry - BS 8000.
2.
MASONRY REINFORCEMENT: Wire mesh shall be 9 gauge deformed, brite

basic finish, reinforcement for interior wall locations and hot dipped
galvanized after fabrication at exterior wall locations, sized 40 mm to 50 mm
narrower than wall partitions.
SEALANT
1.
PART 3:
S.T.H.
Conforming to BS 5838 Part 2, Table 3.
Multi-component, chemical curing or two component "Dymeric" sealant.

EXECUTION
3.1.
INSTALLATION: GENERAL
1.
2.
2.
Maintain dimensions, lines and levels.

Keep exposed faces free from stains, chips and cracks. Keep tolerance in
plane 3 mm in 2438 mm. Do not use chipped, cracked or deformed units in
exposed work.

_____________________________________________________________________________
3.
Buttering corners of units, throwing mortar droppings into joints, will not be
permitted. Do not shift or tap units after mortar has taken initial set. Where
adjustments must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and
replace with fresh supply.
4.
When mortar is "thumbprint'' hard, tool all masonry joints (exposed or concealed)
concave.
5.
Lay all joints 10 mm thick unless otherwise specified or otherwise indicated. Fill all
joints with mortar except where specifically designated to be left open.
6.
Stagger joints in every course. Align joints plumb over each other in every other
course. Vertical and horizontal joints to be uniform in thickness
3.2.
BLOCKWORK
1.
Lay block with face shell bedding only. When solid units are used lay block with full
beds of mortar. Leave no cells open in exposed work. Supply and install wall
reinforcement in all blockwork.
2.
Locate corners accurately. Use full bed of mortar for first course. Bed face shells
and cross and end webs fully in mortar. Stagger joints in every course. Align joints
plumb over each other in every other course.
3.
Bond intersecting block walls in alternate courses. Where blockwork abuts

concrete, bond each block course with dovetail anchors, ties and dovetail
slot. Do not break bond of corridor walls or other walls of exposed units
where partitions intersect and if bonding would show through on exposed
face of walls. Bond these partitions to walls they intersect with prefabricated
intersection masonry reinforcement in each course.
3.3.
S.T.H.
PARTITIONS
1.
Carry all partitions up through the ceiling to concrete slab above, unless noted or
specified otherwise.
2.
Except around staircases and shafts, terminate through partitions within 20 mm

of structure above, and where such partitions occur directly under and parallel to
structural framing carry these partitions up to within 20 mm of bottom of such
structural framing.
3.
Around staircases and shafts, wedge and grout masonry solidly to structure above.
Laterally support other partitions as required by building code. Where tops of
partitions are exposed to view, lateral supports shall be concealed.
4.
Where walls and partitions are pierced by structural members, ducts or pipes, fill
voids with mortar as required to maintain fire rating and flush with wall finish where
exposed.

_____________________________________________________________________________
5.
3.4.
Fill spaces between partition and structure, ducts and pipes with compressed glass
fiber or mineral wool insulation completely from one side of wall to other and top of
wall to structure.
CONTROL JOINTS
1.
Provide vertical through wall control joints 7600 mm c to c. maximum (except as

otherwise shown or specified) in continuous walls having no openings, intersections
or columns. Locate control joints as directed by Engineer.
2.
Locate control joints at high stress concentrations and at points of weakness such
as at abrupt changes in work height, wall thickness changes such as at chases and
at pilasters and maximum of 3600 mm from corners.
3.
Construct joint as follows: Place building paper against end of masonry unit on one
side of control joint. Use paper to prevent mortar bonding to one side of joint.
Extend bond breaker full wall thickness. Fill voids between ends of masonry unit
with mortar to form key and strike back exposed vertical joints 20 mm deep, ready to
receive caulking by Section 07900. Reinforce joints every third course with two 6
mm diameter greased smooth rods. Locate rods 30 mm in from faces of masonry
unit centered on joint running parallel to wall.
3.5.
REINFORCEMENT AND REINFORCING TIES
1.
Reinforce all masonry walls with continuous masonry reinforcement in every third
block course.
2.
Provide extra reinforcement and reinforcing ties at openings so that first and second
courses above and below openings are reinforced. Extend extra reinforcement 600
mm beyond opening in each direction.
3.
LATERAL SUPPORTS
At top of walls that span over 3 meters in height from floor to underside of
structure above provide 100 mm x 100 mm x 150 mm long x 6 mm clip angles each
side of wall bolted to concrete slab @ 2000mm c/c maximum. All other walls to be
wedged with metal wedges and the joints packed with mortar.
3.6.
PLASTER
Plaster all interior masonry walls to ensure a smooth, plumb surface.
3.7.
S.T.H.
BUILT-INS
1.
Build in items provided by other sections, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, loose steel
lintels, shelf angles, access panels, and other such items. Leave wall openings
required for ducts, grilles, pipes and other items.
2.
Fill voids between masonry and metal frames with masonry mortar for interior walls.
Exterior walls shall have frames filled with fiberglass insulation.

_____________________________________________________________________________
3.8.
1.
3.9.
REPOINTING OR TUCKPOINTING
EPOINT DEFECTIVE JOINTS AS FOLLOWS: Cut back joints 13 mm, taking care
not to damage units. Remove dust and loose materials by brushing or by water jet.
If water jet is used, allow excess water to drain before repointing.
Repoint with same mix as original. Pack mortar tightly in thin layers,
and tool joints or strike flush as required.
CLEANING
1.
Keep work clean and free of mortar stains during laying.
2.
Remove mortar with wood paddles and scrapers before wetting. Saturate masonry
with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. Clean block work using water,
scrubbing brushes and wood paddles only.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
METAL DECK
05300-1
______________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AAMA 611, Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
B. ASTM A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process.
C. ASTM A792/A95M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc AlloyCoated by Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
E. ASTM C920, Specification and Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM C1311. Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
G. ASTM D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
H. ASTM D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
1.03
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:
1. Formed wall flashing and trim.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induces movement and exposure to weather without failing,
rattling, leaking and fastener disengagement.
B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following
forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:
1. Wind Zone 2: For velocity pressures of 31 to 45 lbf/sq. corner uplift force and 45lbf/sq. ft. outward force.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections and other
detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as result of
S.T.H.
METAL DECK
05300-2
______________________________________________________________________
sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 def F (100 deg
C), material surfaces.
D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water
infiltration to building interior.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details material
descriptions, dimension of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and
elevations.
Distinguish between shop-field- assembles work. Include the following:
1. Identify material, thickness, weight and finish for each item and location in Project.
2. Details for forming sheet flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams and
dimensions.
3. Details for fastening joining, supporting and anchoring sheet metal flashing and
trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats and attachments to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below:
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 300 mm long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures and
other attachments.
2. Trim: 300 mm long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Accessories: Full-size Sample.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNAs Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet
metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to
prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage.
S.T.H.
METAL DECK
05300-3
______________________________________________________________________
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather tight and
ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contract
with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage.
1.08
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
SHEET METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005,
Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than
H14.
B. Finish: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client, Finish shall be Anodized. Apply
the following coil-anodized finish:
1. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
2.02
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welder rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous as required for complete sheet
metal flashing and trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching colour of sheet metal by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,
with hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solid polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with realease-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
D. Underlayment Felts: ASTM D226, Type II (No.30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
S.T.H.
METAL DECK
05300-4
______________________________________________________________________
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane sealant; of type, grade,
class and use classification required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including
riveted joints.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free of consistency required for
application.
2.03 FABRICATION GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply to
design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricates
items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and metal flashing and trim without excessive oil
canning, buckling and tool marks and true to line levels indicated, with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Forms
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to
be seamed, form seams and solder.
E. Sealed Joints: From nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the
Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less
than 25 mm deep, filled with elastomeric butyl sealant concealed within joints.
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet
metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
I.
S.T.H.
Thickness: As recommended by SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and

FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than thickness of
metal being secured.
METAL DECK
05300-5
______________________________________________________________________
2.04
LOW SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 2400 mm
long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Furnish with 150 mm wide joint cover
plates.
1. Joint Style: Lap, 100 mm wide.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 2400 mm long, but not exceeding 3 m long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to
support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg.
Miter corners, seal and solder or weld watertight.
1. Joint Style: Butt, with 300 mm wide concealed back up plate.
2.05
FINISHED
A. Comply with NAAMMs Metal Finished Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
for recommendations for applying and designating finished.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finished on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
area acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions with Installer present to verify actual
locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage and securely
anchored.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
Securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants and other
miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
S.T.H.
METAL DECK
05300-6
______________________________________________________________________
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or
install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling and tool marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solders, welds and elastomeric
butyl sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimension of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 300 mm apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within
provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion
25 mm deep, filled with elastomeric butyl sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 32 mm
for nails and not less than 16 mm for wood screws.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric butyl sealant as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members
not less than 25 mm into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 5 and
35 deg C, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust
setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not
install sealant- type joints at temperatures below (5 deg C).
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7
Section Joint Sealant.
3.03
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturers written installation instructions and
SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,
joints and seams that will permanently water tight.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind
zone and as indicated.
S.T.H.
METAL DECK
05300-7
______________________________________________________________________
1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to
substrate at 400 mm centers.
C. Copings: Anchors to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in FMG Loss Preventions Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as
indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to
substrate at 400 mm centers.
2. Anchors interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 450 mm
centers.
D. Counter flashing: Coordinate installation of counter flashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counter flashing in reglets or receivers and fir tightly to base
flashing. Extend counter flashing 100 mm over base flashing. Lap counter flashing
joints a minimum of 100 mm and bed elastomeric butyl sealant.
1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or
lead wedges and sealant.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinates installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Seal with elastomeric butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof
except for lead flashing on vent piping.
3.04
CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation
and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealant.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal
flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished
surfaces, including removing unused fasteners metal filings, pop rivet stems and
pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

METAL FABRICATION 05500-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3.
Section 03200:
Section 04200:
Section 05515:
Section 06400:
Section 07900:
Section 08800:
Section 09900:
Div. 15 & 16
Masonry Units
Metal Railings
Architectural Woodwork
Joint Sealers
Glazing
Painting and Coatings
Mechanical and Electrical
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Conform to requirements of DDENV 1993 - Design of steel Structures.
2.
Work to be executed by firm thoroughly conversant with laws, by-laws and

regulations which govern, and capable of workmanship of best grade of
modern shop and field practice known to recognized manufacturer's
specializing in this work. Shop drawings shall be certified by a Professional
Registered Engineer.
3.
Work shall be executed by workmen especially trained and experienced in

this type of work. Have a full time, senior, qualified representative at the site
to direct the work.
1.4.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Make thorough examination of drawings and details, determine the intent,

extent, and materials, and be fully cognizant of requirements when preparing
shop drawings.
2.
Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and

describe in detail all work of this section including large scale detail of
members and materials, of connection and interfacing with work of other
sections, jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges,
thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as other
pertinent data and information.
1.5.
1.
S.T.H.

Co-ordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for
strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations. Do not load any area
beyond the design limits.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.
Adequately protect and crate all components against damage, dirt, disfigurement
and weather during delivery and storage. Damaged materials shall not be used and
shall be replaced by approved material.
3.
Cover and protect the work of other sections in the area of work from damage.
Make good all damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.
Protect the installed work of this section and on completion the work shall be
examined and damage shall be remedied to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer.
PART 2:
2.1.
S.T.H.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS AND STEEL PLATE: B.S. 4, B.S. EN 10029
2.
STAINLESS STEEL: NO. 304, A.I.S.I. NO. 4 Finish, Brushed.
3.
HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS: B.S. 4, B.S. EN 10029
4.
SHEET STEEL (STRUCTURAL QUALITY): ASTM A570-1979.
5.
SHEET STEEL (COMMERCIAL QUALITY):

Leveled or Temper Rolled.
6.
TUBE: ASTM A153
7.
GALVANIZED SHEET STEEL (COMMERCIAL QUALITY): Galvanized coating G90

(Z275) in accordance with ASTM A526-80A, minimized spangle, stretcher leveled or
temper rolled. Specially treat by phosphate conversion process conforming to B.S.
5411 ready to receive prime paint finish.
8.
GALVANIZING: All uncoated steel specified to be galvanized shall be galvanized

after fabrication by the hot dip process according to B.S. 729. Coating 640 g/m2.
Galvanize after all welding is complete. Welding of galvanized material will not be
permitted. Specially treat by phosphate conversion process conforming to B.S.
5411, ready to receive prime paint finish.
9.
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS: ASTM A325-80A.
10.
WELDING MATERIALS: To B.S. 25817
11.
METAL FILLER: Polyester based.
12.
PAINT PRIMER: Zinc Chromate Conforming to CGSB 1-GP-40M.
13.
ZINC RICH PRIMER: Primer conforming to CGSB 1-GP-181M. 15. Repaint finish:
For galvanized surfaces to be exposed and finish painted -ASTM D2029-68.
14.
NON-SHRINK GROUT (NON-METALLIC): As per BS 6319-83.
ASTM A366-1979 Stretcher

_____________________________________________________________________________
15.
ALUMINUM: shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1470 for plate sheet and
strip. B.S. 1474 for bars, extruded round tubes and sections, grade 6063 (HEQ TF).
Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings shall not exceed the
values in C.P. 118.
16.
STEEL: Steel components where required for load bearing structural elements and
anchor structures shall be in accordance with B.S. 5950. All steel components
which will no longer be accessible after installation shall be zinc - coated.
Permissible process is hot zinc coating.
2.2.
S.T.H.
FABRICATION
1.
Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute work according to details
and reviewed shop drawings.
2.
Take measurements at the building for work which is to fit or be connected to steel,
concrete framing or masonry, before commencing fabrication.
3.
Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop.
4.
Do all welding in accordance with requirements of B. S. 25817. Grind welds smooth

and flush with surface of parent metal, where exposed to view and where specifically
indicated on drawings. Welds shall be continuous seam welds unless specified
otherwise.
5.
Fit joints and intersecting members accurately in true planes, square, plumb, straight
with tight joints and intersections.
6.
Provide adequate reinforcing, fastenings, anchors, accessories required for

fabrication and erection of work of this section. Such items occurring on or in an
exterior wall or slab shall be hot-dip galvanized.
7.
Fabricate, drill and tap members to accommodate attachments, anchorage and work
of other sections where located and directed by them.
8.
Exposed steel surfaces shall be smooth and free from imperfections such as
warping, buckling, weld marks, burrs, rust and scale.
9.
PRIMING:
1.
Thoroughly clean steel free of rust, scale and weld spatter by power wire
brushing. Remove oil and grease with solvent and clean cloths, apply shop
coat of primer to all surfaces except areas requiring field welding. Apply by
brush, working paint well into surfaces, interstices and cavities.
2.
Prime field welded areas after erection and touch up shop coat where
damaged and bared by erection and handling.
3.
Prime steel with two full coats of zinc rich paint having high corrosion
resistance in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's directions.

_____________________________________________________________________________
3.1.
GENERAL
1.
Verify at site that the work to receive the work of this section is free of irregularities
detrimental to the installation and performance of the work and that it is located
correctly and at proper levels before delivery and installation.
2.
ERECTION: To meet specified requirements of DDENV 1993.
3.
BEARING PLATES AND ANCHORS: Standard.
4.
ANCHORS: Anchors to structural concrete shall be approved inserts set into

concrete or approved self-drilling expansion inserts drilled and placed afterwards.
3.2.
INSTALLATION
1.
Assemble and erect work plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurate to sizes
detailed, to reviewed shop drawings, free from distortion and defects detrimental to
appearance and performance.
2.
Insulate metals where necessary to prevent corrosion due to contact between

dissimilar metals and between metals and masonry, concrete or plaster. Use
bituminous paint or butyl tape.
3.
Supply adequate instructions, templates, and if necessary, supervise installation of

the fastenings or accessories requiring to be built-in by other sections of the work.
4.
SCHEDULES
1.
GENERAL: Supply and install all miscellaneous metal work indicated on

drawings and not included in the work of other sections in addition to items
listed below. Where items are required to be built into masonry, concrete or
other work, supply such items to respective sections with all anchors and
accessories for building in.
2.
ITEMIZED LIST: Supply and install metal work listed below unless
specifically designated to be supplied only. Each item shall be as shown
on drawings and as detailed on reviewed shop drawings.
3.
MILLWORK SUPPORTS, BRACKETS, ETC: Fabricate to details, supply to

carpentry, concrete or masonry sections as required for building-in. Supply
galvanized tube and angle framing at vanity supports and mounting
hardware, brackets, bolts, sleeves, and the like.
4.
VANITY SUPPORTS:
5.
1.
Fabricate and install galvanized steel supporting framing as for

support of vanities.
2.
Co-ordinate installation with work of masonry and carpentry sections.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL FRAMING, BEAMS, CHANNELS,

ANGLES, PLATES AND BRACKETS:
Check all drawings and documents and supply and install where required.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
6.
RAILINGS AROUND OPENINGS AND FOR STAIRS: Where required.

Supply all miscellaneous galvanized steel metals required and as detailed
including brackets, inserts, counter sunk screws, bent plates, channels,
plates, bars, moldings, and the like, and install with the co-ordination of
Sections 03300, 05100, 06100 and 08800. Finished work shall be ready for
painting by others, and be capable of withstanding loads applied horizontally
at top of railings as designated in local code requirements.
7.
ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPORT FRAMING AND ALUMINUM SCREEN

SUPPORT FRAMING: Provide and install under the co-ordination of Section
08310, all necessary steel support framing in ceiling space for aluminum
doors and screens that do not extend up to structure above. Supply inserts,
brackets and the like to Section 03100 for building into concrete.
8.
WOOD DOORS SUPPORT FRAMING : Supply and install all necessary

steel support framing for doors and panels to provide rigidity and strength to
the entire wood screen assembly .
9.
Anodized Aluminum (Metallic Door Frame)

-
Tensile Test should according to UNE EN 10002-1:02 (DIN EN 100021:02 / BS EN 10002-1:02)
Determination of anodized thickness according to UNE-EN ISO 2360:04

(DIN EN ISO 2360:04 / BS EN ISO 2360:04)
Tensile Test
Specimen machining on: 29/05/08
Test Date:
30/05/09
Standard Test Method:
UNE-EN 10002/1:02 (DIN EN 100021:02 / BS EN 10002-1:02)
Apparatus:
- Testing machine Shimadzu AG-IS
- Caliper MA 990036
- Micrometer INV99007
Uncert = 0.5%
Uncert = 0.02 mm
Uncert = 0.002 mm
Specimen Description:
- S0: Initial Cross Section
- L0:gauge Length
34.29 mm
80 mm
Tensile test according to UNE 10002-1:02 (din en 10002-1:02 / bs en

10002-1:02)
Determination of Zn thickness according to UNE-EN ISO 2178:1996

(DIN EN ISO 2178:96 /BS EN ISO 2178:84)
Standard Test Method:
UNE-EN 10002-1:02 (DIN EN 100021:02 / BS EN 10002-1:02)
Apparatus:
- Testing machine Dartec 9500
- Caliper MA 990036
S.T.H.
Uncert = 0.5%
Uncert = 0.03 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________
Specimen Description:
- S0: Initial Cross Section
- L0: Gauge Length
27.08 mm
80.00 mm
Testing Conditions:
- Temperature:
- Relative Humidity
- Speed of Testing
- Calculated proof/ductile strength:
- Ductile Strength (MPa)
- Tensile Strength (MPa)
- Elongation After Fracture %
10.
22C
40%
10 MPa/s
High ductile strength
(Reh)
336 8
403 10
33.5 0.5
Fire Resistance Door

The doors of one leaf with EXTENSIBLE AND DISMOUNTABLE METALLIC
FRAME are defined as a provoting door of one wood leaf. Its function is to
resist to fire as per the characteristics of integrity and thermal insulation
described in part 5 of norm: BS/DIN/UNE EN 13501-2.
Test Norms:
BS/DIN/UNE EN 1634-1: 2000: Doors and hollow lock elements fire
resistance test.
Firewall doors and lockers
Door in position A:
Integrity
Integrity is maintained during the time of

the test, 30 minutes.
Thermal
Insulation
Thermal Insulation is maintained during

the time of the test, 30 minutes.
Door in position B:
Integrity
Integrity is maintained during the time of

the test, 30 minutes.
Thermal Insulation
Thermal Insulation is maintained during

the time of the test, 30 minutes.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

METAL RAILINGS
05515-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
03200:
04200:
05500:
09300:
09900:
Masonry Units
Metal Fabrication
Tile
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Conform to requirements of DDENV 1993 - Design of Steel Structures and related

standards and codes required by the authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Work of this section shall be executed by firm having five years minimum continuous
experience in similar fabrications, thoroughly conversant with laws, by-laws,
regulations which govern and capable of workmanship of best grade of modern shop
and field practice and with ample facilities to produce, furnish and erect the work so as
to satisfy the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.4.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and describe
in detail profiles, members, type and details of fastening and anchorage, fabrication
and erection, anchorage and mounting details, gauges and metal finishing and all
other pertinent data. Show location of expansion and construction joints and
coordinate with building expansion joints.
2.
Submit 2 copies of the manufacturers technical data, specifications, anchor details,

product handling and installation, instructions, including copies of manufacturer's
certifications and other data as may be required to show compliance with these
specifications.
3.
The Contractor shall submit samples of rails, mounting base, brackets, sealants and
other related materials as requested by the Engineer.
4.
MOCK UP: The Contractor shall erect a railing sample installation before
proceeding with the work. The mock-up shall be complete with anchors, fittings,
rails, and other accessories to simulate final condition. The mock-up shall be
reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
1.5.
WARRANTY:
1.
The Contractor shall submit a written warranty signed by the Subcontractor for a
period of 5 years against any defective materials or workmanship, to repair or
replace any defective railing work during the warranty period without any extra
cost to the Client.
S.T.H

METAL RAILINGS
05515-2
______________________________________________________________________________
1.6.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - RAILINGS:
1.
The drawings show the overall sizes and type of railing required. It is the intention
that similar details used by different manufacturers will be acceptable provided that
they comply with the size requirements and this specification.
2.
Railings shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 91 kg (200 lb) applied in

any direction at any point on the rail.
3.
The Contractor shall design, fabricate and install the railing system to suit the
conditions outlined in these specifications, the drawings, and the requirements of
local authorities.
1.7.
PRODUCT HANDLING, DELIVERY AND PROTECTION:
1.
Materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above

grade, properly protected from the weather and construction activities.
2.
Protection shall be provided during delivery, storage, erection and construction so as

to avoid development of non-uniformity of appearance or other deleterious effects.
3.
Protection shall be removed when requested by the Engineer for inspection of

finishes and reinstalled. Protection shall be completely removed when no longer
required.
4.
Items which are to be built into the work of other trades shall be delivered in time so
as not to delay the progress of the work.
PART 2:
2.1.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
ALUMINIUM: Sheet, Strip and Bent Plates B.S. 1470

Bars, tubes, sections B.S. 1474, Grade 6063 (HEQ TF)
2.
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS AND FASTENING DEVICES: Stainless steel type 316.
3.
POWDER COATING: Surface treatment of aluminum components shall be carried

out in accordance with B.S. 1615 and B.S. 3987. The conversion coatings shall
conform with ASTM D 1750 - 67, method 7, and applied by electrostatic spraying.
4.
NON-SHRINK GROUT As per B.S. 6319-83.
2.2.
CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
Substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the work is to be
installed shall be examined prior to commencement of installation. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.3.
1.
S.T.H.
FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Fabricate aluminum stairs to safely support live load of
1.5 KN/m or local code requirements (whichever is more stringent) evenly distributed
over treads and landings. Fabricate railings to conform to local requirements, the
specifications and drawings.

METAL RAILINGS
05515-3
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
4.
5.
S.T.H.
GENERAL:
1.
Fabricate to reviewed shop drawings and in general to details indicated on

drawings and specified herein. Where possible, fit and shop assemble and
deliver to site in largest practicable sections.
2.
Fabricated work shall be complete with components required for anchoring.
3.
Fit joints and intersecting members accurately with hairline joints in least
conspicuous locations and manner. Make work in true plane with adequate
fastenings, and all finished work to be square and plumb.
4.
Railings shall be of the design, size and dimensions shown on the drawings
with smooth flush and mitered connected joints, complete with all sleeves,
brackets, rails, bolts, fasteners, gaskets and other accessories as required
for a complete installation.
Work under this section consists of furnishing everything necessary for and
incidental to the design, execution, completion and maintenance of the railing
work as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
FINISHING:
1.
All Aluminum components shall be chemically procreated with a conversion

coating including zinc chromate. The polyester powder coat will be factory
applied to Engineer's later choice of color.
2.
Aluminum tube handrail and aluminum sphere, to be refinished polished,

mirror finish to Engineer's approval.
FASTENINGS AND CONNECTIONS:

1.
Weld connections and/or bolt, as shown on drawings and secure in approved

manner. Where approved, install fastenings of same material, color and finish.
2.
Countersink screws unless noted otherwise and reinforce where necessary.
3.
Use shop and field connections. Where not detailed, connections shall comply
with DDENV 1993.
RAILINGS & EXTERIOR LADDERS

1.
Mounting base of brackets shall be aluminum.
2.
Rails shall be aluminum of size and shape as indicated on drawings. Surface

treatment color to approval of Engineer.
3.
All concealed mechanical fasteners used in assembly of railing system shall

be aluminum.

METAL RAILINGS
05515-4
______________________________________________________________________________
4.
Anchors, plates, inserts, for concrete shall be minimum 12 mm thickness,

and hot dipped galvanized.
5.
Expansion anchorage shall be lead shield or tooth steel drilled in type of

expansion bolt anchors.
6.
Where components come in contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be

protected from direct contact wherever damage may be caused. Protection
shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7.
Where railing components come into contact with concrete or lime mortar,
exposed surfaces shall be protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.
All works shall be fitted and assembled in the shop in so far as practical. Items
shall be preassembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Following trial, disassembled units shall be fitted
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Units shall be clearly
marked for reassembly and coordinated installation. Alignment and splice
plates shall be provided for accurate field fit.
9.
All splices, corners and miters shall be accurately machined, filed and
carefully fitted and matched with a hairline contact using connectors or angle
tees. Joints shall be reinforced as required for rigidity and stability and to
meet design requirements.
10.
Allowance shall be made for normal construction tolerances. Accessories

and fabrication variations required to compensate for construction tolerances
shall be provided.
PART 3:
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
1.
Furnish, set and secure framing brackets, hangers, anchors, inserts or similar
supports for proper erection of stairs before masonry and concrete is placed.
Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position stairs.
2.
Do all cutting, drilling and fitting necessary to attach work of this section to adjoining
work. Cutting, drilling and fitting of joints, and other accessories required shall be
completed prior to finishing. Only methods which will avoid distortion or
discoloration of exposed surfaces shall be used.
3.
Secure wall brackets to wall at 1200 mm O.C. maximum with through-bolts and
plates where they can be concealed, otherwise use bolts and expansion shields to
achieve maximum rigidity of rail. Wood plugs for fixing to walls will not be permitted.
Use metal anchoring devices.
4.
Grout bases of posts, balusters or newels occurring in concrete. No sleeves, core

drill only using grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Finish smooth,
level and flush with surrounding finished surface.
5.
Grout and sealants shall be applied in accordance with sealant manufacturer's

printed instructions and recommendations except as may be otherwise shown or
directed by the manufacturer's representative.
S.T.H.

METAL RAILINGS
05515-5
______________________________________________________________________________
6.
Sealants and grouts shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions, to obtain maximum bond to surfaces, cohesive strength and durability at
the earliest possible date.
7.
Excess sealant must be removed promptly as the work progresses and the adjoining
surfaces cleaned as may be necessary to eliminate any evidence of spillage.
8.
Insulate where necessary to prevent electrolysis due to dissimilar metal-to-metal

contact or metal-to-masonry and concrete. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape,
building paper or other approved means.
9.
Grind off surplus welding material and provide sharp profiles and arises.
10. Build and erect work plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurate, to sizes
detailed, to reviewed shop drawings, free from distortion or defects detrimental to
appearance and performance.
11. Prime base metal surfaces, field welds, damaged and abraded primed surfaces, and
surfaces not previously primed. Leave ready for finish painting by Section 09900.
3.2.
INSTALLATION - RAILINGS
1.
Proper anchors shall be selected, or stem engineered to accommodate the mounting

base. Anchors and stems shall be protected to prevent corrosion and oxidation. All
supplementary parts necessary to complete each item shall be included, even where
such work is not shown or specified.
2.
Railings shall be set plumb, level and aligned. Leveling tolerance shall not
exceed 3 mm in 3000 mm. Align tolerance shall not exceed 3 mm in
3000 mm.
3.3.
1.
Finished surfaces shall be protected against damage during subsequent

construction operations and all such protection removed at time of Substantial
Performance.
2.
All surfaces of railing work shall be cleaned of all dirt, grime, stains, residues and all
unwanted objects.
3.
In case of any damage to the work, make repairs or replace to the satisfaction of
the Engineer without extra cost to the Client.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

05521-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Stainless steel pipe and tube handrails and railing systems.
2. Steel pipe and tube handrails and railing system.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing related terms apply to this section.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural
loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing
materials based on the following:
1. For cold-formed structural steel: AISI "Specification for Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Member".
2. For stainless steel: AISI "Stainless Steel Cold-Formed Structural Design
Manual".
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate,
and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM
985 for structural performance based on the following:
1. Testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 894 and E 935.
2. Structural computations.
C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate,
and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural
loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials
for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to
produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising
handrails and railing system.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads
applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 890 N applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 730 N per linear meter applied horizontally and
concurrently with uniform load of 1.46kN per linear meter applied
vertically download.
c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with
uniform loads.
S.T.H.

05521-2
_____________________________________________________________________
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following
loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 890 N applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 730 N per linear meter applied in any direction.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal
concentrated load of 890 N applied to a 300 mm square area at any point in
the system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements
composing the infill area.
a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top
rails of railing system in determining stress on guard.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication,
and installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of
joints, overstressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects.
Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material
surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL
A. General: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of
referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed
to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finishes
units are not acceptable.
B. Stainless Steel: Austenitic stainless steel grade and type designated below for
each form required:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, grade as follows:
a. Grade MT 304.
b. Grade MT 316.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 312, grade as follows:
a. Grade TP 304.
S.T.H.

05521-3
_____________________________________________________________________
b. Grade TP 316.
3. Castings: ASTM A 743, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
4. Plate: ASTM A 167, Type as follows:
a. Type 304.
b. Type 316.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
1. Galvanized finish for all installations.
2. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (schedule 40), unless
otherwise indicated, or another weight, type, and grade required by
structural loads.
D. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and other requirements as
follows:
1. Cold-Formed Round Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless
otherwise indicated or required by structural loads.
2. Hot-Formed Round Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
3. Provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53.
E. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
F. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
G. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510.
H. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type
material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Steel Wire Mesh: For guard infill at handrails and railings where indicated
provide 8 gauge woven wire mesh of 50 x 50 mm pattern with intermediate
crimp. Fabricate with steel bar edging as shown on drawings. Provide in steel
or stainless steel matching material of railings in which infill occurs.
2.2 GROUT AND ANCHORING

A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications
of type specified in this Section.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to other Construction: Select fasteners of the
type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for
anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of
withstanding design loadings.
S.T.H.

05521-4
_____________________________________________________________________
1. For steel railings and fittings use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B
633, Class Fe/ Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating or ASTM B 696,
Class 12 for cadmium plating.
2. For stainless steel railings provide fasteners fabricated from type 304
stainless steel.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same

basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use
metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing
components and for their attachment to other work except where exposed
fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for handrail
and railing system indicated.
2. Provide Philips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Cast-In-Place and Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type

indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to
sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
laboratory.
1. Cast-in-place anchors.
2. Expansion anchors.
2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application
of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable or installed to minimize
contrast.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform directional textured polished
finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each
piece.
C. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No. 4 satin finish.
5. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
S.T.H.

05521-5
_____________________________________________________________________
2.5 GALVANIZED FINISH
A. General: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with
applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2.
ASTM A 123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made from rolled,
pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips.
B. For all steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish,
galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
C. All galvanized steel railings are to be primed and field painted after assembly
and installation.
Priming and painting are to be in accordance with
requirements specified in Division 9 "Painting".
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

057500-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Metal base.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish

setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to
be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for
installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to

ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against
damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes of
deterioration.
1.4
A.
1.5
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed
metal.
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details.

Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member,
fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 150mm- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the
Work.
S.T.H.

057500-2
_________________________________________________________________________
E.
1.6
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items
specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of
housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.
B.
Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and professional engineer.
C.
Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.
D.
Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.7
A.
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For mirror like stainless-steel finish and fused metal to include in
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal

similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1.
Build mockups for the following types of decorative formed metal:

a.
2.
1.9
Stainless steel sheet base.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become

part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and

strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective
coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.
B.
Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.
S.T.H.

057500-3
_________________________________________________________________________
1.10
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other
construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1.
2.2
Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
SHEET METAL
A.
General: Fabricate products from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on
finished units.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcherleveled standard of flatness.
2.3
A.
Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain airtight; as
recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
1.
2.
ASTM D 1056, Type 1, Class A, grade as recommended by gasket

manufacturer to obtain seal for application indicated.
Closed-cell polyurethane foam, adhesive on two sides, release paper
protected.
B.
Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable sealant complying with Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants" and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
C.
Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for
strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.
1.
D.
Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.
1.
S.T.H.
Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined and will not
cause discoloration.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items

and for attaching them to other work unless otherwise indicated.

057500-4
_________________________________________________________________________
E.
Nonstructural Anchors: For applications not indicated to comply with design loads,
provide fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193.
F.
Anchor Materials:
1.
G.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
Sound-Deadening Materials:
1.
2.
Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying

ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test.
Mastic:
Cold-applied
asphalt
emulsion
complying
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
with
with
H.
Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by decorative formed metal

manufacturer.
I.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond
metal to metal, will prevent telegraphing and oil-canning, and is compatible with
substrate and noncombustible after curing.
J.
Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard bituminous paint or epoxy coating.
2.4
PAINTS AND COATINGS
A.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Water-based galvanized metal primer complying
with MPI#134.
B.
Bituminous
Paint:
Cold-applied
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.5
asphalt
emulsion
complying
with
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest

extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
B.
Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items

with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely
fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce

flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed
edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 12-mmwide hem on the concealed
side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm and support with concealed
stiffeners.
D.
Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or

both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard
of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.
S.T.H.

057500-5
_________________________________________________________________________
1.
Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of

adjoining sheets in flush alignment.
E.
Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated
items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed
to attach and support other construction.
F.
Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners,
and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.
G.
Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously.
Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are
not visible after finishing is completed.
1.
2.6
A.
Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause
discoloration of metal being joined.
METAL BASE
Form metal base from metal of type and thickness indicated below:
1.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: As indicated but not less than 1.0 mm.

a.
2.7
Finish: As indicated
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where
possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface
blemishes to match sheet finish.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish items indicated on Drawings after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
B.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
1.
C.
S.T.H.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

057500-6
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of decorative formed metal.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment
with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install
decorative formed metal.
1.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed
by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight
connection.
C.
Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide
reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
D.
Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work
progresses, to make interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or lightproof
as applicable to type of fabrication indicated.
E.
Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation

materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact
with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or
deterioration of either material or finish.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with water and
soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in 099123 "Interior Painting."
C.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence

remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.4
A.
S.T.H.
PROTECTION
Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction
period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

05810-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies.
2. Wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
3. Ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies.
4. Exterior wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
5. Roof expansion joint cover assemblies.
6. Roof-to-exterior wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
7. Fire-rated expansion joint cover assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the work include.
2.2 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
A. Expansion joint cover systems for this project were developed using the
following expansion joint cover assemblies as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, Inc. Naming of manufacturer and model numbers is for the purpose
of identifying kind and configuration of joint cover assemblies required, and is
not intended to limit competition. Expansion joint cover assemblies by other
manufacturers of similar configuration and performance complying with
specifications may be proposed for use subject to approval of the Employer
Representative. Joint sizes, performance requirements, finishes, and other
characteristics of required joint cover assemblies are shown on Expansion Joint
Cover Schedule included on the drawings using type designations shown
below.
1. Type EJC-1 Floor-to-Floor Covers: Construction Specialties GFR-200D
deep recess cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint Cover
Schedule on the drawings.
2. Type EJC-2 Floor-to-Floor Covers: Construction Specialties GFR-200
recessed cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint Cover Schedule
on the drawings.
3. Type EJC-3 Floor-to-Wall Covers: Construction Specialties GFWC-300
gasket flush corner wall cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint
Cover Schedule on the drawings.
S.T.H.

05810-2
_____________________________________________________________________
4. Type EJC-4 Wall-to-Wall/ Ceiling-to-Ceiling Covers: Construction
Specialties FWF-300 flush seal cover.
5. Type EJC-5 Ceiling-to-Ceiling Covers: Construction Specialties FCF-300
flush seal cover.
6. Type EJC-6 Exterior Wall-to-Exterior Wall Covers: Construction Specialties
SF-300 flush exterior wall seal.
7. Type EJC-7 Exterior Wall-to-Exterior Wall Covers: Construction Specialties
SF-300 flush exterior wall seal with primary seal only.
8. Type EJC-8 Roof-to-Roof Covers: Construction Specialties SRJ-400/ 1600
seismic roof-to-roof cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint Cover
Schedule on the drawings.
9. Type EJC-9 Roof-to-Wall Covers: Construction Specialties SRJW-400/
1600 seismic roof-to-wall cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint
Cover Schedule on the drawings. Provide with extended height vertical leg
as indicated on drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy
6061-T6, sheet and plate.
1. Protect aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious
materials with a protective coating.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304 with 2B finish, unless indicated
otherwise, for plates, sheet, and strips.
C. Extruded Performed Seals: Single or multi-cellular elastomeric profiles as
classified under ASTM D 2000, designed with or without continuous,
longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to fit compatible frames, in color indicated
or, if not indicated, as selected by the Employer Representative from
manufacturer's standard colors.
D. Fire Barriers: Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement
without material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E
1399. Tested in maximum joint width condition with a field splice as a
component of an expansion joint cover per ANSI/ UL 263, U.B.C. 43-1, or
ASTM E 119, including hose stream test of vertical wall assemblies by a
nationally recognized testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers,
flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants, adhesive,
sealing tapes, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as
indicated or required for complete installations.
2.4 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile,
materials, and operation indicated. Provide units comparable to those indicated
or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and
S.T.H.

05810-3
_____________________________________________________________________
dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue when
tested according to ASTM E 1399. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths
to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered corners where joint
changes directions or abuts other materials. Include closure materials and
transition pieces, tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other
accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies.
B. Moisture Barrier: Provide manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible vinyl
moisture barrier under covers at location indicated.
C. Fire-Rated Joint Covers: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies with
manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible fire barrier seals under covers at
locations indicated to provide fire-resistive rating not less than the rating
indicated in Expansion Joint Cover Schedule shown on the drawings.
D. Metal Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide continuous extruded metal frames of
profiles indicated with seating surface and raise rim or exposed trim strip to
accommodate finishes and concealed bolt and anchors embedded in concrete.
Provide assemblies formed to receive cover plates of design indicated and to
receive filler materials as indicated between raised rim of frame and edge of
plate. Furnish indicated depth and configuration to suit type of construction and
to produce a continuous flush wearing surface with adjoining finish surfaces.
E. Wall and Ceiling Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide interior wall and ceiling
expansion joint cover assemblies of same design and appearance that are
compatible with floor expansion joint cover assemblies design and appearance.
F. Flexible Filler: Secure the approved flexible filler between frames to compress
and expand with movement. Vulcanize or heat-weld splices (if any) to ensure
hermetic joint condition.
2.5 METAL FINSIHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply
finishes to products in factory after fabrication. Protect finishes on exposed
surfaces before shipment.
B. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Mill Finishes: AA-M10 (unspecified mill finish) for traffic surfaces of floor
covers.
2. Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as
fabricated, non specular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.02 mm) complying
with AAMA 607.1.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANELS
060661-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the Plastic Fabrication as shown and specified in the
described system:
1.
1.3
Privacy partitions
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contact and

Division 01 specification section 013300 Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data:
Submit manufacturers product data; include product
description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified
performance requirements.
C.
Submit product test reports from a qualified independent third party testing
agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the
project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current
products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current
manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project.
1.
Test reports required are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635)

Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929)
Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843)
Flame spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84)
Room Corner Burn Test (NFPA 286)
Extent of Burning (UL 94)
Impact strength (ASTM D 3763)
Safety glazing impact resistance (ANSI Z97.1-2004)
UPITT Test for Combustion Product Toxicity
Dynamic environmental testing (ASTM standards D 5116 and D
6670)
D.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, panel dimensions,

details, and attachments to other work.
E.
Samples for Initial Selection:

1.
S.T.H.
Submit minimum 50 mm by 50 mm. samples. Indicate full color, texture

and pattern variation.

060661-2
_____________________________________________________________________
F.
Samples for Verification:

1.
G.
Mockups:
1.
2.
3.
H.
1.4
A.
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and

to demonstrate aesthetic effects.
Build mockup of each type of Plastic Fabrication.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance data,

including care, repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout
documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturers Qualifications
1.
1.5
Submit minimum 100 mm by 100 mm sample for each type, texture,

pattern and color of solid plastic fabrication.
Materials and systems shall be manufactured by a company

continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified
materials for a period of at least five (5) consecutive years and which
can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at
least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three
(3) of the projects shall have been successful for use five (5) years or
longer.
A.
Deliver Plastic Fabrications, systems and specified items in manufacturers

standard protective packaging.
B.
Do not deliver Plastic Fabrications, system, components and accessories to

Project site until areas are ready for installation.
C.
Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place that is not exposed to

exterior elements.
D.
Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective

coverings to prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of
project.
E.
Before installing Plastic Fabrications, permit them to reach room temperature.
1.6
A.
S.T.H.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install Solid Polymer Fabrications until
spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when
occupied for its intended use.

060661-3
_____________________________________________________________________
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers Special Warranty on Plastic Fabrications: Manufacturers

standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or
workmanship within the specified warranty period.
B.
Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of substantial completion.
C.
The warranty shall not deprive the Employer of other rights or remedies the
Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is
in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.8
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Materials
Translucent Resin Sheet
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.
Engineered polyester resin

Thickness: 25.4mm
Front Finish: Sandstone
Back Finish: Sandstone
Color: As indicated.
Rhythm: create with intriguing pattern, scale and order with distinctly
architectural design.
Gauges: 9.5mm, 12.7mm, 19.0mm, 25.4mm
Pattern: As indicated.
Maximum width: 1219 mm
Maximum length: 2438 mm or 3048 mm
Maximum surface area: 3-3.7 sq.m
B.
Interlayer Materials: Compatible with polyesters and bonding process to

create a monolithic sheet of material when complete.
C.
Sheet minimum performance characteristics:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
S.T.H.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635). Material must attain CC1 Rating for a
nominal thickness of 1.5 mm and greater.
Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929). Material must have a Selfignition temperature greater than 650F.
Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843). Material must have a smoke density
less than 75%.
Flame spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84). Material
must be able to meet a level of Class A (Flame spread less than 25 and
smoke less than 450) at thickness of 25.4 mm
Room Corner Burn Test (NFPA 286). Material must meet Class A
criteria at 6.30 mm. thickness as described by the 2003 International
Building Code.

060661-4
_____________________________________________________________________
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.2
Extent of Burning (UL 94). Must submit UL card.

Impact strength. Minimum impact strength test as measured by ASTM D
3763 of 20 ft. lbs. (for durability, shipping, installation, and use).
Safety Glazing. Material must attain a Class A impact rating in
accordance with ANSI Z97.1-2004 at 3 mm thickness.
UPITT Test for Combustion Product Toxicity: Product must be recorded
as not more toxic than wood.
Dynamic environmental testing (ASTM standards D 5116 and D 6670).
Panels must not have detectable VOC off-gassing agents and must be
have Greenguard Indoor Air Quality certified.
Panels must be produced from a minimum of 40% post-industrial
recycle content. This recycle content must be certified by a recognized
3rd party certification group, such as Scientific Certification Systems
(SCS).
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate Plastic Fabrications to designs, sizes and thicknesses

indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles and other
characteristics are indicated on the drawings.
B.
Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for fabrication.
C.
Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that

material is not chipped or warped by machining operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using the appropriate method

listed below. Comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
2.3
Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required.
Drilling: Drills specifically designed for use with plastic products.
Milling: Climb cut where possible.
Routing
Tapping
Cold Bending
Hot Bending
Thermoforming: Acceptable only on uncoated material.
Drape Forming
Matched Mold Forming
Mechanical Forming
Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and techniques

recommended by manufacturer.
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
B.
Cleaner: Type recommended by manufacturer.
S.T.H.

060661-5
_____________________________________________________________________
C.
Fasteners: Use screws designed specifically for plastics. Self-threading

screws are acceptable for permanent installations. Provide threaded metal
inserts for applications requiring frequent disassembly such as light fixtures.
D.
Bonding Cements: May be achieved with solvents or adhesives, suitable for

use with product and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Plastic
Fabrications will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with
manufacturers requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are
satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturers written instructions for the installation of

Plastic Fabrications.
B.
Manufacturers shop to fabricate items to the greatest degree possible.
C.
Utilize fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents recommended by

manufacturer for type of installation indicated. Material that is chipped,
warped, hazed or discolored as a result of installation or fabrication methods
will be rejected.
D.
Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in

accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.
E.
Form field joints using manufacturers recommended procedures. Locate

seams in panels so that they are not directly in line with seams in substrates.
3.3
A.

Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair
work or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired to Engineers
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION 060661
S.T.H.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Division 01, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall
apply as if repeated here.
B.
This section includes, but is not limited to, the following work.
1. Supply and installation of wood beams, blocking, nailers,
strapping, grounds and other rough carpentry indicated on
drawings and required for installation of work of other sections,
and as specified.
2. Provision of wood preservative treatments and means of
securing the rough carpentry.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Fire Retardant Requirements
Mark each piece of timber and plywood which has been given pressure fire
retardant treatment to attest that it meets specified requirements for fire
retardancy and complies with requirements of Civil Defense Authority of
Abu Dhabi
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards
The following reference standards included this section shall apply
as specified in Section 01 42 19:
The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM E84-08a, Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
1. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):
AWPA C20 (2003) Structural
Treatment by Pressure Processes
Lumber
Fire-Retardant
AWPA C27 (2002) Plywood Fire Retardant Treatment by

Pressure Processed
AWPA P8 (2008) Standards for Oil-Borne Preservative
2. British Standard Specification
BS 1202-1:2002: Specification for Nails Part 1: Steel Nails
S.T.H.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-2
_________________________________________________________________________
BS 1203-2001: Specification for synthetic resin adhesives
(phenolic and aminoplastic) for plywood.
BS 1210-1963: Specification for wood screws.
BS 1282-1999: Guide on choice, use and application of wood
preservatives.
BS 5707-1997: Solutions of wood preservations in organic
solvents.
Part 1-1979: Specification for solutions for general purpose
applications, including timber that is to be painted.
Part 2-1986: Specification for pentachlorophenol wood
preservative solution for use on timber that is not required to
be painted.
Part 3-1980: Solutions of Wood Preservatives in Organics
Solvents Part3 Methods of Treatment
BS EN 636:03 Plywood Specifications.
Part 1: 1997 Specifications requirements for plywood for use in
dry conditions.
Part 2: 1997 Specifications requirements for plywood for use in
humid conditions.
Part3: 1997 Specifications requirements for plywood for use in
exterior conditions.
BS DD ENV 1099-1998, Plywood Biological durability.
Guidance for the assessment of plywood for use in different
hazard classics.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Samples
Submit samples to the site of wood and plywood intended for
incorporation in the works.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS

A.
Environmental Conditions
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that
storage, handling and execution methods suit environmental
conditions that are encountered at the site, and cause no
damage to the products specified in this section or to the
performance of these products in use.
S.T.H.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-3
_________________________________________________________________________
2. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
3.
Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited

to, ambient temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on
the products and surfaces with which they are in contact;
moisture content of the products and materials with which they
are in contact; and temperature of the products and the
materials with which they are in contact.
4. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat to BS 5707 with net

retention of preservative at 6.8 kg/m of wood using CCA.
Pressure treat all wood in contact with roofing, concrete and
masonry.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Moisture content at time of building-in shall not exceed 19% for

timber and 15% for plywood.
B.
Lumber
1. Russian or Romanian white wood, Grade 1; or Swedish Pine,
of the best available quality.
2. For utility use where concealed: Sound and free of
imperfections or deficiencies making unsuitable for use.
C.
Plywood
1. To meet specified requirements of BS EN 636, softwood.
2. Adhesive: BS1203, WPB Grade.
3. Do not make up plywood panel thickness by bonding plywood
sheets together.
D.
Nails, Spikes and Staples: In conformance with BS 1202, Part 1;

galvanized steel at exterior locations, at interior high humidity
locations and for treated lumber; plain finish steel elsewhere. Use
spiral shank nails generally.
E.
Screws: To meet specified requirements of BS 1210, steel.
F.
Fasteners:
To hollow masonry use toggle bolts; to solid masonry and concrete
use expansion shields and lag bolts; to steel use bolts or welded
stud fasteners. Use lead or inorganic fibre plugs for fasteners in
concrete and masonry. Provide washers at bolt heads and nuts.
S.T.H.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-4
_________________________________________________________________________
Galvanize fasteners at exterior locations, at high humidity interior
locations and for treated lumber.
G.
Wood Preservative:
Oil borne wood preservative solution of types recommended for
intended locations in accordance with BS 1282, and to meet
specified requirements of BS 5707; or AWPA P8.
H.
Fire Retardant Treatment

1. Pressure impregnate timber and plywood with chemicals to
provide a fire retardancy ensuring flame spread rating no
greater than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Treatment shall meet specified requirements for Interior Type A
of AWPA C20 for timber and C27 for plywood.
3. Kiln dry timber and plywood after treatment to maximum of
19% for timber and 15% for plywood.
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1. Lay out items installed by this section carefully and to
accommodate requirements of other sections. Cut and fit
members accurately; erect them in position indicated by
drawings; align, level, square, plumb, and secure them
permanently in place in place. Brace work temporarily as
required. Join members only over solid backing.
2. Bore holes true to line and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts
into place for snug fit, and use plates or washers for bolt head
and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when
installed, and again just before concealed by other installations
or at completion of the work.
3. Cooperate with other sections to ensure that unity of actions
will ensure orderly progress to meet construction schedule.
4. Supply anchors, bolts and inserts required for installations of
this section, to those performing the work of other sections and
who are responsible for their installation.
5. Include rough hardware such as nails, bolts, nuts, washers,
screws, and connectors required for installations by this
section.
6. Do not attach installations of this section by wood plugs or
blocking in concrete or masonry. Use lead shields, expansion
shields, concrete nails, or similar methods only as approved.
S.T.H.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-5
_________________________________________________________________________
B.
Blocking, Nailers, Strapping, Grounds and Miscellaneous Rough

Framing.
1. Install solid timber or plywood nailers, blocking, and such other
fastening provisions as indicated typically on drawings and
wherever else required by the works. Install required
provisions for fastening, located and secured to suit site
conditions, and adequate for intended support.
2. Provisions shall include, but shall not be restricted to:
a. Blocking for handrails.
b. Fire retardant plywood for securing of window blind carriers
at exterior walls.
c. Blocking for wall bases.
d. Blocking and recessed ceiling enclosures.
e. Blocking and nailers for fastening and/or anchorage of
finish installations, materials, fixtures, equipment and
similar work.
f.
Service device mounting panels: Furnish panels required

by elevator, mechanical, electrical and communication
trades for mounting of controls, panels, switches, breakers
and similar devices.
g. Blocking and carriers around kitchen cabinet installations.

h. Blocking for setting door frames generally.
i.
Blocking at vanity counters.
3. Cut members into lengths as long as practicable and with

square ends.
4. Align members at joints so that their adjacent surfaces are in
the same plane.
5. Verify that grounds required for fastening of components and
equipment are located correctly, and that they provide
adequate support.
C.
Wood Preservative
1. Apply wood preservative to all wood items incorporate in
exterior wall and roof constructions, in wet areas and in areas
vulnerable to humidity moisture or dampness.
2. Apply one coat of wood preservative to wood by means a
minimum of 3 minute dip to cover all surfaces and as suitable
S.T.H.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-6
_________________________________________________________________________
for conditions as recommended by the preservative
manufacturer. Treat all surfaces, including freshly cut ends.
D.
Fire Retardant Treated Wood:

Install fire retardant treated timber and plywood at all locations
within interior of building include timber and plywood specified in
sections 06 200 and 06 40 00 where it would affect the specified
fire rating.
3.02
ADJUSTMENT
Ensure that bolted fasteners are drawn up tightly and that members
are aligned.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORKS 062020-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Particular Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
This Section covers the work of making out from wood custom items, objects,
pieces, parts or components and fixing or building them to\in buildings for
indoor applications. Work items covered under this Section includes, but shall
not be limited to the following:
1.
Carpentry, Joinery and Woodwork:

a.
2.
Interior standing and running trim.
Casework (Cabinets):
a.
Plastic Laminated Casework:

1)
2)
3.
Desks, Work Stations, Counters and Countertops:

a.
Desks:
1)
2)
b.
1.3
Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Wood Paneling:
a.
5.
6.
Reception/ Greeter Desk.

Nurses stations.
Countertops.
1)
2)
4.
Floor-Mounted Cabinets
Wall Mounted Cabinets
Paneling to walls.
Closet and utility shelving.

Shop priming of interior woodwork.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and

hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other
construction before woodwork installation.
B.
MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________
C.
1.4
A.
MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.

SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including panel products,
high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate,
solid-surfacing material, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware and
accessories, handrail brackets and finishing materials and processes.
1.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials
comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net
amount of preservative retained.
Include chemical-treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.
2.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials
comply with requirements.
Submittals for finishing materials and submittals shall comply also with
requirements specified in Division 09, Section Interior Painting.
3.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and

elevations, large-scale details, sections, wall sections, framing details and
assemblies, bases and anchorages, attachment devices, and other
components, internal and external corners, joints, terminations and
relationships to adjoining finishes and materials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Plastic laminates.
PVC edge material.
Thermoset decorative panels.
Solid-surfacing materials.

1.
S.T.H.
Engineer may request additional details according to case.

Engineer may request calculations to demonstrate that proposed wood
sections for wood framing are sufficient to sustain imposed loads and
straining actions as specified.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips,
including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other
Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures,
faucets, soap dispensers and other items installed in architectural
woodwork.
Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and
identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch
for each leaf.
Show arrangement, pattern or panel of plastic laminates in each
elevation.
Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 125 mm wide by 600
mm long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used

for transparent-finished woodwork.
Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 300 by 600
mm, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam
and finish as specified.
Plastic laminates, 200 by 250 mm, for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge
material applied to 1 edge.
Thermoset decorative-panels, 200 by 250 mm, for each type, color,
pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge where
indicated on Drawings.
Solid-surfacing materials, 150 mm square.
Corner pieces as follows:
a.
b.
8.
Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as

exposed end pieces, 450 mm high by 450 mm wide by 150 mm
deep.
Miter joints for standing trim.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type [and
finish].
E.
Product Certificates:
manufacturer.
F.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
G.
Maintenance instructions for materials and components included in the works

similar to solid surface material and plastic laminates including cleaning
recommendation for all types of surfaces and finishes.
1.5
For each type of product, signed by product
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who customfabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose
products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
C.
Source Limitations:
Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume
undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with
sequence-matched wood veneers and wood doors with face veneers that are
sequence matched with woodwork and transparent-finished wood doors that
are required to be of same species as woodwork.
D.
Quality Standard:
Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's
"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural
woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and products with

specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Identify with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________
label or imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after
installation.
1.
2.
F.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals

and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials
and execution.
1.
G.
1.6
A.
1.7
Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Indices: Class A when tested

according to ASTM E 84 in an extended 30 minute tunnel test in
accordance.
Apply for all wood, lumber, timber, plywood, fiberboards and other wood
products except wood veneers.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if

undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination".
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could
damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where
environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project
Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements:
Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements
before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1.
2.
1.8
A.
S.T.H.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support

woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with
fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance
for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements,
and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that
interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

_____________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality

standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless
B.
Wood Species and Cut, General:

1.
2.
C.
For Transparent Finish: As indicated on Drawings.

For Opaque Finish: Red Pine or Douglas fir for concealed uses and
Meranti hardwood for exposed applications.
Wood Products: Comply with requirements for Fire-Test-Response

Characteristics as specified in this section. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.

Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made
with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
a.
4.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

a.
b.
5.
Use only veneer-core plywood.

Use moisture-resistant or marine-quality type in wet areas and
other applications as indicated.
Face Wood Veneers, General:

requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
S.T.H.
Use moisture-resistant type in wet areas.
Are to comply with the following
Grade: AA to the standards of Hardwood, Plywood & Veneer

Association (HPVA), USA, or corresponding European standards
acceptable to the Engineer.
Cut: As specified for each application.
Thickness: 0.635 mm. minimum.
Species : Face wood veneers are to be as indicated on Drawings
or specified.
Length of leaves: Is to be long enough to cover the height of
panel or door panel or application required, unless otherwise endmatched pattern is indicated or selected by the Engineer.
Matching of Leaves Through Panel: As selected by the Engineer.
Veneer Leaves for Elevations: Generally, are to be from same
flitch and conform to the assignment selected by the Engineer.
Width of leaves: Generally, width of leaves for elevation panels is
to be as required to attain the matching-through-panel selected by
the Engineer at minimum number of leaves.
Treatment: No fire retardant treatment is required for face
veneers. Preservative treatment is to be with material to BS 5707,
copper, chrome or arsenic based. Preservative treatment is not to
change or effect the characteristics of face veneer.
Finish: As indicated or specified.

_____________________________________________________________________
6.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood):

1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
a.
b.
D.
HPVA HP-
Use only veneer-core plywood.

Use moisture-resistant or marine-quality type in wet areas and
where specified.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard

finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper
complying with LMA SAT-1.
1.
Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on

components with exposed or semi exposed edges.
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (Code: SF1a, Sf1b): NEMA LD 3, grade

HGP for horizontal surfaces and Grade VGP for vertical surfaces, unless
higher grade is indicated or required by woodwork quality standard. For all
applications, provide heat-formable laminates to overlay edges in integral
sheets with top surfaces, unless edges are concealed and will not be finished
with laminate.
F.
Chemical-Resistant, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate:

Grade HGP, heat-formable and as follows:
1.
2.
Use where indicated and for applications in pharmacy rooms, blood

bank rooms, anesthetic work rooms and soil rooms.
Laminate shall have the following ratings when tested with indicated
reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.9.5:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
G.
Nitric Acid (30 Percent): Moderate effect.

Sulfuric Acid (77 Percent): Moderate effect.
Hydrochloric Acid (37 Percent): Moderate effect.
Phosphoric Acid (75 Percent): No effect.
Acetic Acid (98 Percent): No effect.
Formaldehyde: No effect.
Ethyl Acetate: No effect.
Ethyl Ether: No effect.
Phenol (85 Percent): Moderate effect.
Benzene: No effect.
Xylene: No effect.
Butyl Alcohol: No effect.
Furfural: No effect.
Methyl Ethyl Ketone: No effect.
Sodium Hydroxide (25 Percent): No effect.
Sodium Sulfide (15 Percent): No effect.
Ammonium Hydroxide (28 Percent): No effect.
Zinc Chloride: No effect.
Gentian Violet: No effect.
Methyl Red: No effect.
Solid-Surfacing Material (Code: SF2, SF3): Homogeneous solid, non-porous

sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.
1.
S.T.H.
NEMA LD 3,
Composition: Solid, non-porous surfacing material homogeneously

composed of 1/3 acrylic resin (PolyMethyl MethAcrylate or PMMA),
and 2/3 natural minerals. The main ingredient is the mineral Aluminum
TriHydrate (ATH) derived from bauxite.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
3.
ASTM E 84, Class A.

DIN 4102/1 B1, or
BS 476, Parts 6 and 7, Class 0 to National Building Regulations,
or
Chemical Resistance: The following reagents shall show no permanent

effect on solid surface material surfaces:
a.
b.
Acetic Acid (10 %).

Acetone (not more than slight lightening may occur after 16 hours
exposure).
c.
Acrodine Orange.
d.
AG Eosin Blue (5 %).
e.
AG Gentian Violet.
f.
Ammonia (10 %).
g.
Ammonium Hydroxide 5. 28 % (not more than slight lightening
may occur after 16 hours exposure).
h.
Amyl Acetate.
i.
Amyl Alcohol.
j.
Aromatic Ammonia.
k.
Ball Point Pen.
l.
Betadine Solution.
m. Bite Registration Accelorator (2 % Eugenol).
n.
Bite Registration Base.
o.
Bite Registration Mix (50/50).
p.
Blood.
q.
Butyl Alcohol.
r.
Coffee.
s.
Dry-Bond Dental Adhesive.
t.
Eosine (23 % Eugenol).
u.
Equalizing Accelerator.
v.
Ethyl Acetate.
w.
Household Soaps.
x.
Hydrochloric Acid (20, 30 %).
y.
Lemon Juice.
z.
Mercurochrome 2 % in water (not more than slight darkening may
occur after 16 hours exposure).
aa. Methanol.
bb. Methyl Ethyl Ketone.
cc. Methyl Orange (1 %).
dd. Methyl Red (1 %).
ee. Napthalene (Naptha).
ff.
Neotopanel.
gg. Hexane.
hh. Nitric Acid 6 %.
ii.
Pencil Lead.
jj.
Perchloric Acid.
kk. Permanent Marker Ink.
ll.
Picric Acid.
mm. Salt (Sodium Chloride).
nn. Silica Dental Cement (liquid).
oo. Silver Nitrate (10 %).
pp. Soapless Detergents.
qq. Sodium Bisulphate.
rr.
Sodium Hydroxide Solution 5, 10, 25, 40 %.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________
ss.
tt.
uu.
vv.
ww.
xx.
yy.
4.
Sodium Hypochlorite (5 %).

Sugar (Sucrose).
Sulphuric Acid (25, 33, 60 %).
Tea.
Urea (6 %).
Uric Acid.
Urine.
Thickness and Sizes:

a.
12.00 mm sheet: 760 x 3680 mm, 930 x 3680 mm

1)
b.
Use 12.00 mm thickness for vertical applications similar to

wall cladding.
19.00 mm sheet: 760 x 3680 mm.
1)
5.
Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturers full range, if not

indicated on Drawings:
a.
b.
A.
Sealants: Use sealants produced by manufacturer of solid surface

material.
7.
For making joints in countertops, repairs and custom edges, use only
joint adhesive as produced by manufacturer of solid surface material
which provides a smooth and inconspicuous joint, repairs, while sound
and fully functional and not noticeable to maximum extent possible.
8.
In-Lay Decorative Designs: Use only joint adhesive produced by solid

surface material manufacturer.
9.
Warranty: Manufacturers standard warranty agreeing to repair or

replace defects in material or workmanship.
Warranty Period: 10 years from Date of substantial Completion.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
General: Use materials complying with requirements in this Article that are
acceptable to Engineer and with fire-test-response characteristics specified
under Article Quality Assurance of this Section, unless more stringent
characteristics are specified in this Article.
1.
2.
S.T.H.
Engineer may select more than one color in same work items or
for different work items.
Engineer may also select hues and patterns in different work
items.
6.
a.
2.2
Use 19.00 mm thickness for horizontal applications similar to

wall countertops.
Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of

referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or
otherwise defective.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish
treated materials from untreated materials.

_____________________________________________________________________
3.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply

with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood). Use the following treatment type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.3
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification

marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer.
Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by

kiln drying.
Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation.
Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not
affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking
plant certified by testing and inspecting agency.
Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for
untreated materials.
Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with

ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant
chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flamespread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per
ASTM E 84.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with

architectural cabinets.
B.
Hardware Base Metal and Finish: For all cabinets and casework alloy 304
stainless steel, of satin No. 6 polished finish.
C.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that

complies with BHMA or equivalent European standard code finish.
1.
2.4
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
A.
Furring, Blocking, shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood

lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for
secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors
and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for
corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for
drilled-in-place anchors.
C.
Handrail Brackets: Cast from stainless steel with wall flange drilled for
exposed anchor and with support arm for screwing to underside of rail. Sized
to provide 38-mm clearance between handrail and wall, unless other
clearance is indicated on Drawings.
D.
Adhesives, General:
1.
S.T.H.
Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.
E.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate:

PVA.
1.
F.
2.5
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation

adhesives that comply with the limits for VOC content required by
authorities having jurisdiction in Abu Dhabi.
Un-pigmented contact cement or
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Adhesive specified above for faces.
Framing Connectors: Cast steel with hot-dip galvanizing finish, intensity of

zinc coating shall not be less than 300 g/m2.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premiumgrade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality

standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity
during fabrication and in installation areas.
C.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed

surfaces before fabrication.
D.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

edges to radius indicated for the following:
1.
E.
2.
S.T.H.
Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times

woodwork fabrication will be complete.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped
completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and
other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that
various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies
against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before
disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,

appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate
openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.
1.
G.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and

Rails: 1.5 mm.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to

maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,
and fitting.
1.
F.
Ease
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section

"Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual". For glass in wood frames, secure
glass with removable stops.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.6
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: As indicated on Drawings.
C.
For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not
glue for width.
D.
For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction.
Do not glue for width or thickness.
E.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide,
flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of

installation require field assembly.
G.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in

plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull
connections together.
2.7
FLUSH WOOD PANELING

A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: As indicated on Drawings.

1.
Lumber Trim and Edges:

panels.
Solid wood of same species specified for
C.
Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves:

directed by Engineer.
D.
Veneer Matching within Panel Face: As indicated on Drawings or as directed

by Engineer.
E.
Panel-Matching Method: No matching between panels is required. Select and

arrange panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent
panels.
F.
Panel-Matching Method:
following method:
1.
As indicated on Drawings or as
Match panels within each separate area by the
Blueprint-matched panels and components unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous match; veneer leaves of upper

panels are continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels.
H.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of wood veneer

and fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard. Panels shall have flamespread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less per
ASTM E 84.
I.
Where sliding panels are indicated, provide sliding stainless steel tracks and
other hardware for manual operation.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.8
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate

, except where chemical-resistant laminates are specified in this Section,
complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Horizontal Surfaces of shelves: Grade HGP, 1.00 mm thick.

Other Horizontal Surfaces: Grade VGS, 0.70 mm thick and produced for
post forming applications.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS, 0.70 mm thick and produced for postforming applications.
Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:

1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative

laminate, Grade VGS.
a.
b.
Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 3 mm

thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate
surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate,
Grade VGS.
1)
2.
3.
E.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels as specified in

this Section.
Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels, same as used for sides.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: Highpressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.
1.
F.
Use for concealed back surfaces of floor-mounted and wall hung units.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in
colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following
requirements:
1.
As selected by Engineer from laminate manufacturer's full range, if not

indicated on Drawings, in the following categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
G.
Use same laminate for exposed surfaces for back of sashes

and interior surfaces of units.
Solid colors, gloss finish.

Solid colors with core same color as surface, gloss finish.
Wood grains, gloss finish.
Patterns, gloss finish.
Provide dust panels of 6.00-mm plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.9
SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
S.T.H.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: Minimum 12 mm.

_____________________________________________________________________
B.
colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1.
C.
Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solidsurfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives,
sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1.
2.
D.
2.10
As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range, if not indicated

on Drawings.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges from same solid surface

material and configuration indicated.
Fabricate tops with integral coved backsplashes, do not provide applied
backsplashes
Drill holes in countertops for sinks, plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in
shop.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP.
C.
colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following
requirements:
1.
As indicated on Drawings or selected by Engineer if not indicated.
D.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
E.
Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
F.
Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood.
G.
Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on

underside of countertop substrate.
2.11
CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Shelf Material: 19-mm thermoset decorative panel as specified in this section

with PVC or polyester edge banding.
C.
Cleats: Solid lumber.
D.
Wood Species: Match species indicated for door to closet where shelving is
located.
2.12
S.T.H.
SHOP PRIMING

_____________________________________________________________________
A.
Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including back-priming, if any, for
transparent-finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 09
painting Sections for material and application requirements.
1.
Back-priming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish

coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of
paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plasticlaminate-clad woodwork do not require back-priming when surfaced with
specified plastic laminate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity

conditions in installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for

completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and
back-priming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade
specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with

requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in
the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 3
mm in 2400 mm.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated

wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions,
including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to

substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing
as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing
screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest
extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 3.00 meters long, except where
shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger
in adjacent and related members.
1.
S.T.H.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler,
sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
H.
Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panelhanger clips or splined connection strips. Do not use face fastening, unless
covered by trim.
1.
I.
Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall

framing.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight
line than 3 mm in 2400 mm.
Install flush paneling with no more than 1.5 mm in 2400-mm vertical cup
or bow and 3 mm in 2400-mm horizontal variation from a true plane.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly
and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of
hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Install cabinets with no more than 3 mm in 2400-mm sag, bow, or other

variation from a straight line.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not
more than 400 mm o.c. with either of the following according to case:
a.
b.
c.
J.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base

cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
K.
No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 25-mm penetration into wood

framing, blocking, or hanging strips,
No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or
metal framing behind wall finish, or
Toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall
finish.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to

comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in
color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove
surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 3 mm in 2400-mm sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
Wood beams with solid wood block decorative ceiling assembly.

1.
Install the wood beam with hangers and supports complete with
necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories to
the design indicated.
L.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of

woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
M.
Refer to Division 09 Section Interior Painting for final field finishing of

installed architectural woodwork.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________
3.3

A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate

functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shopapplied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-1
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall apply as if repeated
here.
B.
This section includes but is not limited to the supply and installation of the following works
as indicated on drawings:
1.
Cabinets and Counters in:

a. Kitchen and Servery.
b. Lobbies and Reception areas.
c. Vanities in washrooms as shown on drawings.
d. Security Rooms.
e. Janitor Rooms.
2.
Millwork:
a. Closet shelves, etc.
1.02
3.
Installation of finish hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00 or specified herein.
4.
Installation of wood casework specified in sections 06 40 00.
5.
Associated Electrical installations: Luminaries, swithches, trunking, cables, etc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with Safety Standards detailed within the ADDC/AADC General Requirements for
Safety and Quality.
B.
Ensure a Safety and Quality system is implemented for the project which satisfies the
requirements of ISO 9001:2000 or any other similar internationally recognized Quality of
Management System.
C.
All external carpentry works structures where there is a frequent and intimate live contact
shall not be CCA (Chromate Copper Arsenate) treated timbers and it shall not be used in
the project.
D.
Mock-up:
1. Provide full-size cabinet complete with drawers, hinged door, adjustable shelf and
countertop.
2.
S.T.H .
Approved mock-up will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work and may
be used as part of the Work.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-2
______________________________________________________________________________
1.03
A.
REFERENCES
References Standards:
The following reference standards included in this Section shall apply as specified in
Section 01 42 19.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSO):
ANSI/BHMA A156.9 03: Cabinet Hardware
2. British Standard Specification (BS):
BS 5750 P2-87: Quality Systems- Specification for Production and Installation.
BS 6566 P1- 85: Specification for Construction of Panels and Characteristics of Piles
including Marking.
BS 6566 P2- 85: Glossary of Terms.
BS 6566 P4- 85: Specification for Tolerances on the Dimensions of Plywood Panels.
BS 6566 P5- 85: Specification for Moisture Content.
BS 6566 P6- 85: Specification for limits of defects for the Classification of Plywood by
Appearance.
BS 6566 P7- 85: Specification for Classification of resistance to fungal decay and
wood borer attack.
BS 6566 P8- 85: Specification for Bond Performance of Veneer Plywood.
BS EN 942- 07: Timber in Joinery- General Requirements.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturers product data, detail sheets, specifications, indicate product description,
fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements.
2. Manufacturers installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings of all cabinets, counters, wardrobes, drawer units, etc., showing
including but not limited to following: locations, dimensions, component sizes, fabrication,
installation and joinery details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with
adjacent work.
C. Samples:
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-3
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Submit minimum 300 mm x 300 mm samples of including but not limited to plastic
laminates, veneers, inlays, particleboard, MDF board, wood species, etc of all
specified items in each specified finish, indicating manufacturers full range of colour
and pattern variation.
2. Approved samples will be retained as standards for work.
3. Submit samples of carcass, drawer and door fronts, cabinets hardware, etc. to the
Consultants office.
D. Maintenance data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance data, including repair
and cleaning instructions.
1.05
A. Protect materials from damage during handling, delivery and storage.

B. Receive and or supply and fix finish hardware and secure against theft until contract
handover.
C. Do not deliver cabinet materials to site until storage areas are completed and conditions
are such that no damage will occur to them while in storage and during installation.
1.06
SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that storage, handling and
execution methods suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and
cause no damage to the products specified in this Section or to the performance of these
products in use.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient temperature;
humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with which they are in
contact; and temperature of the products and the materials with which they are in contact.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Provide hardware required for cabinets specified in this section. Use non-corrosive
hardware.
2. Moisture content of wood at time of installation shall be at an average of 7% with a
permitted range of individual pieces of 5% to 9%.
3. Use only adhesives and fastenings that develop sufficient strength for intended use, are
non-staining and are unaffected by the environment to which exposed.
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-4
______________________________________________________________________________
B. Wood
1. Where not exposed to view, use hardwood or soft wood timber of grades suitable for
fabrication, utility and structural needs.
2. Where exposed to view, meet requirements of specified AWI Quality Grade Standard or
equivalent BS EN 942 as applicable.
3. Ensure that surfaces exposed to view and given a natural or stained finish free from
markings and stains caused by milling, treatment, storage, handling and other causes.
4. Ensure that veneered panels are matched for grain configuration and uniformity of color
throughout all surfaces exposed to view which are to receive a natural or stained finish.
C. Plywood
1. Softwood: To meet specified requirements of AWI, or equivalent of BS 6566, Parts 1, 2,
4, 5, 6, 7 an 8; Sanded Grade, Solid Two Slides.
2. Hardwood: To meet specified requirements of AWI as applicable for use, smooth
sanded, rotary cut face veneers, Good Grade where exposed to view and Sound Grade
where not; except that White Oak veneers shall be sliced and matched for continuous,
straight and consistent grain.
D. Kitchen Cabinet, Carcase work and Vanities
1. Carcase cabinets to be constructed using 15mm thick medium density fiber (MDF) board
melamine rasin coated on both sides, in white or beige with all edges strip seal lipped.
2. Carcases to be manufactured in accordance with BS 5750 Part 2.
3. Carcasing to kitchen cabinets and vanities to be designed and constructed to allow for
free passage of surface mounted pipe-works on back walls below worktop level.
4. Toe Space: As indicated.
E. Drawers
1. Drawers are to be formed in molded plastic, single piece, incorporating easy to clean
edges and angles.
2. Drawers to glide smoothly and quietly on concealed steel roller bearing runners with self
closing mechanisms (both sides), and with drawer front adjusters.
F. Shelves
1. Shelves to be constructed using 15 mm thick high-density particleboard with all edges
strip seal lipped.
2. Shelves to be adjustable via metal pin supports.
3. Shelves to be capable of bearing a load of 25kg at centre span over a measured period.
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-5
______________________________________________________________________________
G. Legs: Legs to be adjustable, plastic molded to accommodate a plinth height of 100mm to

150mm.
H. Plinth
1. Plinth to be continuous made of laminated plastic with a matching seating profile. Finish
being as indicated on drawings, otherwise plinth to match edges of carcase.
I.
Doors, Drawer Front and Open Shelves

1. To serveries, vanities in washrooms:
Solid colour laminate with vertical black trims wood grain effect on 18mm thick MDF,
square design fronts. Handle: black metal, blow design. Laminate color from
manufacturers standard color range.
J. Sinks
1. Type A: Sinks shall be inset type, stainless steel 1 bowl and side drainer or as detailed
on drawings.
2. Type B: Sinks shall be with countertops of thick solid polymer fabrication (Corian or
similar approved) shall be as specified under Section 06 61 16 and detailed on
drawings.
K. Mixers
1. Mixers to kitchens, washrooms and tearooms to be specified in Section 22 00 00.
L. Work Tops
1. V.I.P. washroom/toilets counters and work tops to be 30 mm Store Type 1 polished
finish as detailed on the drawings complete with 100 mm high splash backs, rounded
edges and cut out to receive sink units. All counters and work tops to be polished and
sealed with approved sealer to reduce permeability.
2. Washroom/toilet/pantry and other counters and worktops as indicated on Drawings shall
be 19 mm thick solid polymer fabrication (Corian or similar approved) as specified
under Section 06 61 16 and detailed on drawings.
M. Finish Hardware and Accessories
Provide all cabinet hardware required for completion of plastic laminate cabinets and
architectural woodwork. Cabinet hardware shall comply with requirements of ANSI/BHMA
A156.9.
1. Hinges
a.
S.T.H.
Hinges to be 3-way adjustable in bright steel with hinge plates set flush into cabinet
carcase.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-6
______________________________________________________________________________
b.
Hinges to be sturdy carry cabinet door weight and to be minimum 180 self return
swing conceled type.
2. Knobs and Handgrips to be supplied and fixed to harmonize with cabinets in all cases.
3. Wardrobe rails to be constructed using white nylon coated steel tube and nylon side
hook plates.
4. Provide all other cabinets hardware and accessories required for completion of plastic
laminated cabinets and architectural woodwork, including adjustable shelf supports and
cabinet hinges (where required and to the approval of the Consultant). Catches (2
cashes in doors over 1.2m high), locks for drawers and doors, pulls. Label holders,
cabinet towel bards, drawer accessories, bumpers and drawers slides.
N. Coat Rods (in WC cubicles):
25 mm dia chromium plated or polished stainless steel pipe, with matching flanges.
O. Seats for Benches:
1. Fabricate from 20 mm hardwood strips with protective varnish fixed to steel pipe support
as detailed on Drawings.
2. Round top edges and corners where exposed.
R. Wood Paneling
This above schedule does not necessarily incorporate listing of all finished carpentry items
to be included by this Section, but only those items which require specific description.
Ensure that all Drawings and specifications Sections, including those for architectural,
mechanical and electrical work, are consulted to establish the limits of finish carpentry
included in this Section.
2.01 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Assemble fabricated cabinets as shown on the drawings and with workstops in units as
long as possible. Design units to fit together if site assembly is required.
2. Fabricate cabinets to meet specified requirements of AWI Section 400 for Custom
Grade; or of BS EN 942 for equivalent quality.
3. Fabricate millwork and paneling to meet specified requirements of AWI Sections 300
and 500A for Premium Grade; or BS EN 942 for equivalent quality.
4. Incorporate services, fixtures and trim in fabricated millwork units as indicated on
Drawings or specified in Divisions 23 or 26, or both. Make necessary cut outs to
template information.
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-7
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Edge plywood where specified or indicated with solid wood to match face vaneer, with
profiled pressure glued edge and finished level with plywood surfaces.
6. Finger jointed or laminated solid wood members will not be acceptable.
B. Trim
1. Rout or groove backs of flat trim members.
2. Kerf backs of wide flat members.
C. Fastening
1. Fasten assemblies with screws or special fasteners at critical joints where strain and
excessive usage and shrinkage is anticipated and where required by specified quality
grade standards.
2. Glue built-up assemblies as well as nailing and screwing.
D. Plastic Laminate Facing
1. Factory bond plastic laminate generally unless otherwise indicated but where insitu
work is carried out, apply plastic laminate for counters to soft wood faced, phenolic
bonded plywood or to particleboard, minimum 19mm thick, or as otherwise indicated on
drawings. Apply plastic laminate for doors, drawer fronts, facing panels, gables, etc. of
cabinets to minimum 19mm thick wood core, close grain hardwood faced plywood.
2. Bond plastic laminate to backing with urea formaldehyde adhesive, or by methods of
equal or better quality recommended by the plastic laminate manufacturer.
3. Seal edges of cutouts with plastic laminate, or where concealed from view by other
methods that will prevent entry of moisture into core.
4. Apply plastic laminate backing sheet to core on backside of panels faced with laminate.
5. Ensure that both face and backing sheet have been sanded in the same direction.
6. Bond plastic laminate self-edges under pressure and bevel and finish smooth finished
corners.
7. Round corners of holes cut through plastic laminate and file them smooth.
8. Make joints only when length of plastic laminate facing exceeds 3660 mm. Butt joints
together, reinforce core with 6.4 mm hardwood blind splines and lock together with tite
Joint fasteners located at a maximum of 75 mm from edges.
E. Finishing
1. Finish each surface of millwork to specified quality grade standard where exposed or
semi-exposed.
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-8
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Consider that all visible surfaces are exposed, including underside surfaces above 1200
mm from floor and interiors if fitments behind glass doors.
3. Consider that underside surfaces with 1200 mm of the floor, top surfaces more than
1800 mm above the floor, interiors of fitments behind opaque doors and the back of
fitment doors are semi-exposed.
4. Find sand surfaces level and smooth after fabrication.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing installation ensure that groups, strapping and other constructions and
surfaces to which finish carpentry is installed are satisfactory for fitting and adequate for its
securement.
B. Take site measurement of construction to which finish carpentry installations must conform,
and through which access must be made, before fabricated units are delivered to site, to
ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection
1. Ensure that finish carpentry materials are protected from damage and deterioration
during installation and otherwise until project completion.
2. Take particular care that wood made fire retardant by pressure treatment is not
exposed to dampness.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Backprime exterior and interior millwork specified in this Section immediately after
delivery to site under work of Section 09 90 00. Ensure that cuts ends are primed.
Scrape or sand smooth surfaces by this Section. Notify those who are responsible for
backprming in sufficient time to enable them to schedule their work.
2. Install finish carpentry plumb, level and straight, and fasten it securely to backing to
support itself and anticipated superimposed loads.
3. Build finish carpentry into construction as indicated on Drawings or specified in other
Sections of Specifications, or both.
B. Trim
1. Install in single lengths except where material limitation makes impossible. Stagger
joints where they occur and locate over solid backing for fastening.
2. Install wood bases and edging in coordination with Section 08 14 00.
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-9
______________________________________________________________________________
C. Cutting and Fitting

1. Cut mouldings with sharp true profiles.
2. Cope trim and mouldings at interior corners and at returns.
3. Miter trim and mouldings at exterior corners. Glue and lock shop miters that are over
100 mm from heel to point.
4. Scribe and join members accurately together, and to other surfaces, to fit tightly and
with flat smooth surfaces. Install trim or fillers panels to close gaps.
D. Fastening
1. Fasten finish carpentry with nails generally, but use screws or special fasteners at
critical joints where strain, usage and excessive shrinkage is anticipated, and where
specified quality grade standards required.
2. Blind nail unless impossible.
3. Set finish nails below finished surfaces to receive putty.
E. Installation of Pressed Steel Frames
Set frames supplied by Section 08 11 00 in place for building into masonry. Anchor frames
to floor as provided for by anchor clips. Brace frames in place to prevent displacement until
anchored into masonry. Remove spreaders at floor after frames are anchored.
F. Installation of Doors
1. Install hollow metal doors supplied by Section 08 11 00 after finishing of walls.
2. Install hollow metal doors supplied by Section 08 11 00.
3. Fit wood doors with 2mm clearance at jambs and heads, and 9.5mm over finished
flooring.
4. Trim hinge side of wood doors to fit and bevel latch edges as required.
5. Ensure that top and bottom edges of wood doors are primed under Work of Section 09
90 00 after they are cut to fit.
6. Undercut wood doors where indicated on Door Schedule.
G. Installation of Finish Hardware
1. Install finish hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00. All door panels, drawers and doors
to window openings to have locks, hinges and hardware to the approval of the
Consultant.
2. Make cuts in wood doors neatly.
S.T.H.

FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-10
______________________________________________________________________________
3. Accurately locate and adjust hardware to meet manufacturers instructions. Use special
tools and jigs as recommended.
4. Install hardware in wood doors at same location as for hollow metalwork installed in
Project.
5. Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm from latch edge.
6. Install hardware and trim square and plum to doors.
7. Replace missing hardware to ensure specified installation at tile of building completion.
After installation, replace wrappings for hardware provided by manufacturer.
8. Safeguard keys to keep them out of unauthorized hands, tag them with opening
number, and deliver them to person designated by Consultant at building completion.
H. Finishing
1. Sand wood surfaces after installation to leave surfaces in true planes and free of
machine or tool marks.
2. Where edges of millwork have 1.5 mm thick lamination, the edge shall be lipped or
mitered to the approval of the Consultant.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Adjust hinged doors to swing freely and easily, to remain stationary at any point of swing,
to close evenly and tightly against stops without binding and to latch positively when doors
are closed with moderate force. Ensure that when doors are installed with hinged stiles
adjacent, both doors can open simultaneously without binding.
B. Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, and
closers act positively with the lease possible resistances in use. Lubricate hardware if
required by suppliers instructions. Clean hardware after installation in accordance with
suppliers instruction.
C. Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipated
wind and building air pressure and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable for
function, location and traffic.
D. Sand and clean woodwork to leave free from finish defects in any exposed part.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

06400-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall apply as if repeated
here.
B.
This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication, finishing and installation
of the following caseworks:
1. Reception Counters in Lobbies.
C. Works performed by other sections and which is related to this section is specified in:
1. Section 04400 : Stone Assemblies
2. Section 09900 : Painting and Coating
D. Supply of work which shall be installed by this section as specified in:
Section 087100 : To furnish hardware as specified in section 08 71 00.
E. Coordinate with section 05 70 00 to ensure that proper provisions are made for installation
of casework on metal framed counters and display cases.
F. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical, communication and similar
services and equipment in casework to ensure that suitable provisions are made and that
proper installation results.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Tolerances
Fabricate and install stainless steel where exposed to view to maintain a surface flatness
that ensures that the slope of the surface at any point is no greater that 0.5% from the
nominal plane of the surface when measured at 25mm intervals in any direction.
A. Qualifications
1. Provide caseworks specified in this section only by a fabricator who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to fabricate and install the casework, and is known to
have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a
period of at least the immediate past 10 years.
2. Perform welding to meet specified requirements of BS EN 1011-1 or AWS D1. 1.
S.T.H.

06400-2
______________________________________________________________________________
1.04 REFERENCES
A. References Standards
The following reference standards included in this section shall apply as specified in
sections 01 42 19.
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI Z97.1- 04: For Safety Glazing Materials used in buildings Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM C1048-04: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass & # 8212; kind
HS, kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
3. British Standard Specification (BS):
BS 952- Glass for Glazing:
Part 1: 1995 Classification.
Part 2: 1980 Terminology for work on glass.
BS 1186- Timber workmanship in joinery.
Part 1: 1991, Specification for timber.
Part 2: 1988, Specification foe workmanship.
BS 3794-00: Decorative, High Pressure Laminates (HPL) based on thermosetting.
Part 1: 1986, Specification for Performance.
BS 4965: 1999, Specification for Decorative Laminated Plastics Sheet Veneered
Boards and Panels.
BS 6206- 81: Specification for Impact Performance Requirements for Flat Safety Glass
and Safety Plastics for use in Building.
BS EN 1011-1 98: Welding Recommendations for Welding of Metallic MaterialsPART 1: General Guidance for Arc Welding.
BS EN ISO 11600- 03: Building Construction- Joining Products Classification and
Requirements for Sealants.
4. Federal Specification (U.S.A.)
FS DD-G-451D, Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat for Glazing, mirrors and
other uses).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
NEMA LD3:05 High-pressure Decorative Laminates
6. Except where more stringent requirement are specified in this section, fabricate
cabinetwork and fitments to Quality Standards of:
S.T.H.

06400-3
______________________________________________________________________________
a. AWI specification, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide

Specification, 1984, by Architectural Woodwork Institute, Section 400, Casework,
for Premium Grade quality; or
b. BS 1186, Parts 1 and 2, for equivalent to AWI Premium Grade.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings for units including full details and layouts.
B. Samples
Submit samples of plastic laminate, enamel, cork board, fabric and translucent glass yo
site and to Consultants office.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Package and otherwise protect casework from damage during handling, delivery and
storage. Provide temporary skids under large or heavy units.
B. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to meet construction
schedule, and to locations as directed.
C. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Protect finish surfaces by steady protective wrappings.
E. Do not deliver casework to site until conditions are such that no damage will occur to it
while in storage and during installation. Ensure that humidity in storage areas does not
exceed 55%.
1.07 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that storage, handling and
execution method suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site and
cause no damage to the products specified in this section or to the performance of
these products in use.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient
temperatures; humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with
which they are in contact; moisture content and temperature of the products and the
S.T.H.

06400-4
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
Conform to Premium Grade standards of AWI or equivalent BS 1186 as defined in

applicable reference standards for timber and plywood materials and their machining,
sanding and finishing.
B.
Plywood
1. Incorporate only plywood with wood plywood/lumber core.
2. Concealed: At option of fabricator.
3. Exposed: Red Oak Veneer.
C. Plastic Laminate
To meet specified requirements of BS 3794 Part 1, or BS 4965 as applicable for use; or of
NEMA LD3; GP-50 General Purpose and Post formed Grades as applicable, of texture and
colour selected from manufacturers standard range. Refer Section 06 20 00.
D. Glass
1. Tempered Glass:
Heat treated, fully tempered, safety glass to meet specified requirements of Federal
Specification FS DD-G-451D, or BS 952.
2. Translucent Glass:
Etched clear float glass to meet specified requirements of Federal Specification FS DDG-451D , or BS 952.
3. Laminated Glass:
Heat treated, fully tempered safety glass to meet specified requirements of BS 952, Part
1 for performance in accordance with BS 6206; or of performance specified in ANSI
Z97.1 to ASTM C1048 or U.S. Federal Specification FS DD G 451D Etch. As specified
glass before tempering. Refer also to Section 08 46 00.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded, preformed, neoprene or EPDM rubber, to meet specified
requirements of BS 4255.
F. Sealant
1. At Glass-to-Metal: Low modulus type silicone, to meet specified requirements of FS TTS-001543A, Type A; or BS EN ISO 11600.
2. At Glass-to-Glass: High modules type silicone, to meet specified requirements of FS TTS-001543A, Type A; or BS EN ISO 11600.
G. Glass Fibre Board
S.T.H.

06400-5
______________________________________________________________________________
Glass fibre insulation board formed into rigid board with resin binders, with minimum
density of 112 kg/cu.m.
2.02
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate Wood Components

1. With no finger joined or laminated solid wood members where exposed to view.
2. With edge grain of exposed and semi-exposed plywood concealed.
3. With cabinet body members assembled with adhesive.
4. Where permitted, with power-driven Tee head nails or staples with long dimensions
parallel to grain.
5. With solid wood provided at locations where hardware is secured.
B. Glass
1. Install glass with all required sealants and gaskets.
2. Grid and polish edges at external corners to provide mitered joints.
3. Fill joints with sealant and tool smooth.
C. Lighting
1. Install lights as shown on architectural drawings.
2. Install 240V/12V, 50Hz transformer as shown on electrical/architectural drawings.
3. Comply with the requirements of Division 26.
4. Incorporate services, fixtures and trim in units. Make provision for mechanical and
electrical installations included in work of Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary
cutouts to template information.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Take site measurements of construction to which cabinet work must conform, and through
which access must be made, before it is delivered to site, to ensure that adaptation is not
required which would result in construction delay.
3.02
INSTALLATION
Installation of cabinets and fitments is included in work of Section 06 20 00.
3.03
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjust operating parts of units to move freely without excessive play and to fit accurately.
S.T.H.

06400-6
______________________________________________________________________________
B. Refinish damaged and defective work before completion of project. Refinishing of exposed
surfaces shall show no discernible variation in appearance.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

06600-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall
apply as if repeated here.
B.
This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication,

finishing and installation of:
1. Vanity counter tops with integral bowls
2. Reception counters
3. Restaurant counters
4. Kitchen countertops with sinks
5. Covered backsplashes
6. Color inlays
C.
Coordinate with Sections 06 20 00, 06 40 00 and 05 70 00 to ensure

that proper provisions are made for installation.
D.
Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical and

electrical to ensure that suitable provisions are made and for
installation results.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications
Provide work specified in this section only by a fabricator who has
adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen who is known to have
been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that
specified during a period of at least the immediate past 5 years.
B. Allowable tolerances:
1. Variation in component size: 3 mm.
2. Location of openings: 3 mm from indicated location.
3. Mock-up:
Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect at project site one
full size mock-up of each component for review. Should mock-up
not be approved, re-fabricate and reinstall until approval is
secured. Remove rejected units from project site. Approved
mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards
The following reference standards included in this section shall
apply as specified in Section 01 42 19.
S.T.H.

06600-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. American National Standard Institute ( ANSI ) :
ANSI Z124.3 05:
ANSI Z124.6 07:
Plastic Lavatories
Plastic Sinks
2. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ):

ASTM D256-06ae1: Standard Test Methods for Determining the
Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D570-98(2005): Standard Test Method for Water
Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638-08: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of
Plastics
ASTM D696-08: Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear
Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30&#176C and
30&#176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D785-08: Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness
of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D790-07e1: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties
of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials
ASTM D2583-07: Standard Test Method for Indentation
Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a BarcolImpressor
ASTM D5420-04: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance
of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker impacted
by a falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
ASTM E84-08a: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
NEMA LD3, 2005: High Pressure Decorative Laminates
1.04
S.T.H.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings for units including full details

and layouts. Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication
details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with
adjacent work.
B.
Samples:
Submit minimum 50mm x 50mm samples. Indicate full
range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples will be
retained as standard for work.

06600-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.05
1.06
C.
Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information

and compliance with specified performance requirements.
D.
Test Reports:
Test Reports shall indicate compliance with
specified test methods and performance levels. Safety related test
data (flame spread, smoke generation, and smoke toxicity) shall be
specific to the color/pattern of the material selected, i.e. solid color
or granite pattern color.
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance

data including repair and cleaning instructions.

A.
Package and otherwise protect from damage during handling,

delivery, and storage. Provide temporary skids under large or heavy
units.
B.
Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to

meet construction schedule, and to locations as directed.
C.
Store products protected from damage and as recommended by

manufacturer.
D.
Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for

installation. Store components indoors prior to installation.
E.
Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide

protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining
following installation for duration of project.
GUARANTEE
A.
1.07
Provide manufacturers 10-year warranty against

materials. Warranty shall provide material and labor
replace defective materials. Damage caused by
chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat
warranted.
defects
to repair
physical
will not
in
or
or
be
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions.
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that
storage, handling and execution method suit environmental
conditions that are encountered at the site, and cause no
damage to the products specified in this section or to the
performance of these products in use.
S.T.H.

06600-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to,

ambient temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on the
products and surfaces with which they are in contact; moisture
content and temperature of the products and the materials with
which they are in contact.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Solid Polymer Components: Cast, homogeneous filled acrylic; not

coated, laminated or of composite construction.
1.
Material shall have minimum physical and performance

properties specified herein.
2.
Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable

by sanding and polishing.
Reception area counters:

8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with
inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed on
Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer; edge details as
indicated on the Drawings; color, inlays and pattern to the
Consultants approval.
C.
D.
Kitchen counter surfaces:

1.
Install 13mm thick solid surface material as indicated on

Drawings and as recommended by the Manufacturer,
adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams; edge details and
coved backsplash and end splashes as indicated on Drawings;
color, inlays and pattern to the Consultants approval.
2.
Follow manufacturers recommendations for reinforced joints

and cutouts, expansion joints, insulation requirements between
solid surface material and adjacent equipment, thermal
insulation between hot and cold applications, etc. Make cutouts
to templates furnished by the appliance manufacturer.
Countertops with sinks:

Provide countertop complete with single/double bowl with molded
drain-board sink as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the
Manufacturer. Provide counter complete with coved backsplash and
end splashes of size shown on the Drawings. Models, colors and
pattern to the approval of the Consultant.
S.T.H.

06600-5
_____________________________________________________________________________
E.
Vanity tops with integral bowls:

Molded countertop of 8mm thick solid surface material adhesively
joined with inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed
on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer; 600 mm wide,
complete with integrally molded bowls of solid surface material;
edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Provide with cove
backsplash and end splashes as shown on the Drawings. Models,
colors, patterns and inlays to the approval of the Consultant.
F. Performance Characteristics
PROPERTIES
TEST METHOD
PERFORMANCE
CHARACTERISTICS
Stretch Resistance
Stretch Module
Flexibility Strength
Flexibility Module
Strain Limit
Hardness
Shock Resistance
Gardner
IZOD
Ball Drop
Heat Expansion
Heat Resistance
Boiled Water Surface
Resistance
Water Absorbance
Erosion
Abrasion/Washable
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 790
ASTM D 790
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 785
ASTM D 2583
ASTM D 5420
ASTM D 256A
NEMA LD3-3.3
ASTM D 696
NEMA LD3-3.5
NEMA LD3-3.5
8000
1,5X10 psi
5850 psi
1.38X10 psi
35%
87 Rockwell M
60 Barcoll Impress
236 in lbs
0.27 ft lbs in
57 in.1/2 - lb ball
3.67x10 in/in/C
No Change
No Change
ASTM D 570
NEMA LD3-3.5
ANSI
Z124.3&Z124.6
ANSI
Z124.3&Z124.6
0.6 % Long Period

No Loss of Tissue
Pass
Strain Resistance
Density
Average Weight
Color Stability
Flammability
Blaze Diffuse
Fume Expansion
Category Rate
2.03
NEMA LD3-3.10
ASTM E 84
Pass
1.68
4.46 lbs/sq/ft
No Change
Class 1/Class A
<25
<30
1
ACCESORY PRODUCTS
A. Provide accessory product as recommended by the manufacturer
including but not limited to:
S.T.H.

06600-6
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
Joint adhesives;
Panel adhesives;
Sealants (color-matching or clear);
Required mounting hardware and tools (Manufacturers approved
clips, inserts, fasteners, etc).
FABRICATION
A. Fabrications to be performed by a certified fabricator/installer.
B. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and
shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturers requirements.
C.
Form joints between components using manufacturers standard

joint adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and
without voids. Attach 50 mm wide reinforcing strip under each joint
or as recommended by the Manufacturer.
D.
Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as

indicated on the drawings.
E.Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all
cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or
inaccurate work.
F.
Surface finish:
1. Finished surfaces shall have matte (gloss rating of 5-20), semi
gloss (gloss rating of 25-50) or polish (gloss rating of 55-80)
finish, as approved by the Consultant.
G. Thermoforming:
1. Comply with manufacturers forming data and instructions.
H. Cove backsplashes and endsplashes:
1. Fabricate 13 mm radius cove at intersection of counters and
backsplashes or as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate in shop.
i.Colored inlays:
1. Rout 3 mm max deep groove for inlay to pattern indicated on
Drawings.
2. Fill groove using methods approved by manufacturer, avoiding
air bubbles or voids. Overfill inlay area.
3.
S.T.H.
Allow area to fully cure. Do not overheat inlay while sanding.

Finish and touch up to uniform appearance.

06600-7
_____________________________________________________________________________
4.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
3.02
3.03
Make provision for mechanical and electrical installations included

in work of Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary cutouts to
template information.
Take site measurements of construction to which work must conform,

and through which access must be made, before it is delivered to site,
to ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in
construction delay.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop

drawings and product installation details.
B.
Form field joints using manufacturers recommended adhesive, with

joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands
clean when making joints.
C.
Adhere sinks/bowls to countertops using mounting hardware,

adhesives and color-matched silicone sealant as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
D.
Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings.

Adhere to countertops using manufacturers standard color-matched
silicone sealant.
E.
Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove

adhesives, sealant and other stains.
F.
Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 23,

Mechanical.
G.
Fabricator/Installer is to provide and review maintenance procedures

and the Manufacturers warranty with the head of maintenance upon
completion of project.

A.
Project surfaces from damage until completion of project. Repair or

replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architects
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
BURJEEL MED. CITY WOOD AND PLASTIC SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06610-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
1.
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall apply as if
repeated here.
2.
1.2.
1.
This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication, finishing and
installation of:
a. Vanity counter tops with integral bowls
b. Reception counters
c. Restaurant counters
d. Kitchen countertops with sinks
e. Covered backsplashes
f. Color inlays
3.
Coordinate with Sections 06 20 00, 06 40 00 and 05 70 00 to ensure that proper

provisions are made for installation.
4.
Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical and electrical to ensure

that suitable provisions are made and for installation results.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
Provide work specified in this section only by a fabricator who has adequate equipment
and skilled tradesmen who is known to have been responsible for satisfactory
installations similar to that specified during a period of at least the immediate past 5
years.
2. Allowable tolerances:
a.
Variation in component size: 3 mm.
b.
Location of openings: 3 mm from indicated location.
c.
Mock-up:
Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect at project site one full size mock-up
of each component for review. Should mock-up not be approved, re-fabricate and
reinstall until approval is secured. Remove rejected units from project site.
Approved mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
1.3.
1.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards
The following reference standards included in this section shall apply as specified in
Section 01 42 19.
a. American National Standard Institute ( ANSI ) :
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
ANSI Z124.3 05:

ANSI Z124.6 07:
Plastic Lavatories
Plastic Sinks
b. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ):

ASTM D256-06ae1: Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D570-98(2005): Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638-08: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D696-08: Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
of Plastics Between -30&#176C and 30&#176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D785-08: Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D790-07e1: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D2583-07: Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics
by Means of a BarcolImpressor
ASTM D5420-04: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic
Specimen by Means of a Striker impacted by a falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
ASTM E84-08a: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
NEMA LD3, 2005: High Pressure Decorative Laminates
1.4.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings for units including full details and layouts. Indicate
dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination
requirements with adjacent work.
2.
Samples:
Submit minimum 50mm x 50mm samples. Indicate full range of color and
pattern variation. Approved samples will be retained as standard for work.
3.
Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with
specified performance requirements.
4.
Test Reports:
Test Reports shall indicate compliance with specified test methods and
performance levels. Safety related test data (flame spread, smoke generation, and smoke
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
toxicity) shall be specific to the color/pattern of the material selected, i.e. solid color or
granite pattern color.
5.
1.5.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance data including repair
and cleaning instructions.
1.
Package and otherwise protect from damage during handling, delivery, and storage.
Provide temporary skids under large or heavy units.
2.
Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to meet construction
schedule, and to locations as directed.
3.
Store products protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
4.
Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. Store
components indoors prior to installation.
5.
Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to

prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.
1.6.
1.
1.7.
1.
GUARANTEE
Provide manufacturers 10-year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty shall
provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. Damage caused by
physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted.
SITE CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions.
a. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that storage, handling and
execution method suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and
cause no damage to the products specified in this section or to the performance of
these products in use.
b. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
c. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient
temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with
which they are in contact; moisture content and temperature of the products and the
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2:
PRODUCTS
2.1.
MATERIALS
1.
Solid Polymer Components: Cast, homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated,

laminated or of composite construction.
a. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified
herein.
b. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable by sanding and
polishing.
2.
Reception area counters:

8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams on
19mm MDF and/or as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the
manufacturer; edge details as indicated on the Drawings; color, inlays and pattern
to the Consultants approval.
3.
Kitchen counter surfaces:

a. Install 13mm thick solid surface material as indicated on Drawings and as
recommended by the Manufacturer, adhesively joined with inconspicuous
seams; edge details and coved backsplash and end splashes as indicated on
Drawings; color, inlays and pattern to the Consultants approval.
4.
b. Follow manufacturers recommendations for reinforced joints and cutouts,

expansion joints, insulation requirements between solid surface material and
adjacent equipment, thermal insulation between hot and cold applications, etc.
Make cutouts to templates furnished by the appliance manufacturer.
Countertops with sinks:
Provide countertop complete with single/double bowl with molded drain-board sink
as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the Manufacturer. Provide counter
complete with coved backsplash and end splashes of size shown on the
Drawings. Models, colors and pattern to the approval of the Consultant.
5.
Vanity tops with integral bowls:

Molded countertop of 8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with
inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed on Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer; 600 mm wide, complete with integrally
molded bowls of solid surface material; edge details as indicated on the Drawings.
Provide with cove backsplash and end splashes as shown on the Drawings.
Models, colors, patterns and inlays to the approval of the Consultant.
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. Performance Characteristics
PROPERTIES
TEST METHOD
PERFORMANCE
CHARACTERISTICS
Stretch Resistance
Stretch Module
Flexibility Strength
Flexibility Module
Strain Limit
Hardness
Shock Resistance
Gardner
IZOD
Ball Drop
Heat Expansion
Heat Resistance
Boiled Water Surface
Resistance
Water Absorbance
Erosion
Abrasion/Washable
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 790
ASTM D 790
ASTM D 638
ASTM D 785
ASTM D 2583
ASTM D 5420
ASTM D 256A
NEMA LD3-3.3
ASTM D 696
NEMA LD3-3.5
NEMA LD3-3.5
8000
1,5X10 psi
5850 psi
1.38X10 psi
35%
87 Rockwell M
60 Barcoll Impress
236 in lbs
0.27 ft lbs in
57 in.1/2 - lb ball
3.67x10 in/in/C
No Change
No Change
ASTM D 570
NEMA LD3-3.5
ANSI
Z124.3&Z124.6
ANSI
Z124.3&Z124.6
0.6 % Long Period

No Loss of Tissue
Pass
Strain Resistance
Density
Average Weight
Color Stability
Flammability
Blaze Diffuse
Fume Expansion
Category Rate
2.2.
1.
1.
S.T.H.
1.68
4.46 lbs/sq/ft
No Change
Class 1/Class A
<25
<30
1
ACCESORY PRODUCTS
Provide accessory product as recommended by the manufacturer including but not
limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.3.
NEMA LD3-3.10
ASTM E 84
Pass
Joint adhesives;
Panel adhesives;
Sealants (color-matching or clear);
Required mounting hardware and tools (Manufacturers approved clips,
inserts, fasteners, etc).
FABRICATION
Fabrications to be performed by a certified fabricator/installer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.
Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes

indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers
requirements.
3.
Form joints between components using manufacturers standard joint adhesive.

Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 50 mm wide
reinforcing strip under each joint or as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the
drawings.
5.Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then
sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
6.
Surface finish:
a.
Finished surfaces shall have matte (gloss rating of 5-20), semi gloss (gloss
rating of 25-50) or polish (gloss rating of 55-80) finish, as approved by the
Consultant.
7. Thermoforming:
a. Comply with manufacturers forming data and instructions.
8. Cove backsplashes and endsplashes:
a. Fabricate 13 mm radius cove at intersection of counters and backsplashes or
as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate in shop.
9. Colored inlays:
a. Rout 3 mm max deep groove for inlay to pattern indicated on Drawings.
b. Fill groove using methods approved by manufacturer, avoiding air bubbles or
voids. Overfill inlay area.
c. Allow area to fully cure. Do not overheat inlay while sanding. Finish and touch
up to uniform appearance.
d. Make provision for mechanical and electrical installations included in work of
Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary cutouts to template information.
PART 3:
3.1.
1.
S.T.H.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Take site measurements of construction to which work must conform, and
through which access must be made, before it is delivered to site, to ensure
that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.2.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop

drawings and product installation details.
2.
Form field joints using manufacturers recommended adhesive, with joints

inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when
making joints.
3.
Adhere sinks/bowls to countertops using mounting hardware, adhesives and

color-matched silicone sealant as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4.
Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere

to countertops using manufacturers standard color-matched silicone sealant.
5.
Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives,

sealant and other stains.
6.
Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 23,

Mechanical.
7.
Fabricator/Installer is to provide and review maintenance procedures and the

Manufacturers warranty with the head of maintenance upon completion of
project.
3.3.
1.

Project surfaces from damage until completion of project. Repair or replace
damaged work that cannot be repaired to architects satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

DAMP PROOFING AND WATER PROOFING 07100-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
This Section includes:
A.
Fluid cold-applied elastomeric membrane (for horizontal and vertical surface) to the
following locations:
1. Foundations (including top of raft foundation if not applied by enabling stage), tie
beams, columns up to S.F.L. of slab on grade of main building (For lower level floor
and ground level floor) any foundations & retaining walls not covered by enabling
works as per drawings.
B.
Cold Applied Bitumen Primer Damp proofing (for horizontal and vertical surfaces) to the
following locations:
a. Service block (including pump room, medical gas room, offices building) as per
drawings.
b. Laundry as per drawings.
c. Main & emergency Gate as per drawings.
2. Foundation of pre-cast boundary walls as per drawings.
3. Concrete & masonry block walls substrate for all faade & internal cladding (such as
curtains walls, aluminum composite panels, limestone cladding, granite cladding,
marble cladding etc.).
4. Concealed face of gypsum false ceiling at Operation Rooms.
C.
SBS Modified Bituminous Anti-Routing Membrane for the flower/plant box and landscape
areas as per drawings.
D.
Polyethylene sheet shall be laid under blinding concrete for all foundations and slab on
grade.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for methods of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness and protection course.
B. Material Certificate: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
C. Shop Drawings: Include installation requirement. Include plans, elevations, sections,
component details and attachments to other work.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
D. Samples: Submit full range of colors and patterns available.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary damp proofing materials and primers through one
source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and
approved for application of materials required for this Project.
C. Mock ups: Build mockups to verify selection made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for material and execution.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit damp proofing to be performed according to manufacturers written
instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of damp proofing in enclosed
spaces. Maintain ventilation until damp proofing has thoroughly cured.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturers Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer
agreeing to replace waterproofing materials that does not comply with requirements or that
does not remain waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that
does not remain water tight during specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared
and treated according to requirements of formation of new joints and cracks in substrate
exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6mm) in width.
2. Warranty Period: Ten years after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installers Warranty: Written waterproofing Installers warranty, signed by Installer,
covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of ten years.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.02
BITUMINOUS DAMP PROOFING (FOR LOCATION MENTIONED ABOVE, CLAUSE

1.02, ITEM A/1)
A. Fluid cold-applied elastomeric membrane (for horizontal and vertical surface): Shall be
one component moisture-curing bitumen-modified polyurethane, seamless elastomeric.
Shall permit expansion and contraction, suitable for all climates, resistant to bacterial
attack, acid, alkali and slats, damp proofing for locations mentioned above, shall
conform to ASTM C 836. Thickness shall be 1.5mm.
B. General Properties:
1. Shore hardness, ASTM C 836
86
2. Tensile strength, ASTM D 412
1.9 MPa
3. Average elongation, ASTM D 412
600%
4. Crack bridging, ASTM C 836
Passed 1/16 inch
5. Low temperature bending
40C
6. Tear resistance
12 N/mm
7. Average elongation, % ASTM D 412
500
8. Minimum recovery, %
90
9. Service temperature, C
40C to 90C
10. Water impermeability 0.3 MPa 30 Mins
No permeability
C. Protection of Works
1. Fiber protection board having a thickness of 12mm. Fiber board shall be applied
over fluid cold membrane for vertical surfaces.
2. Provide sand cement screed of minimum 50mm thickness and compressive
strength 30 MPa at 28 days for horizontal surfaces.
2.03
BITUMINOUS DAMP PROOFING (FOR LOCATION MENTIONED ABOVE, CLAUSE

1.02, ITEMS B/1,2,3,4)
A. Cold Applied Bitumen Primer: Solvent-Based, sulphur resistant, shall be applied with
two coat of Cold Bitumen Primer,, and each coat shall be applied over surfaces at
locations shown on the drawings at min. rate of 0.30 Kg/m2 as per manufacturers
recommendations and to complying with ASTM D 41.
1. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I.
2. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I.
B. Protection of Works
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Provide sand cement screed of minimum 50 mm thickness and compressive
strength 30 MPa at 28 days for horizontal surfaces.
2.04
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANCE DAMP PROOFING FOR LOCATION MENTIONED

ABOVE, CLAUSE 1.02, ITEM C)
A. All flower boxes and planets areas shall be waterproofed using two layers of 4mm
thick SBS bitumen anti-rooting membrane, fully bonded to RCC surfaces over two
protections shall be laid over sheet membrane.
B. Primer: Liquid bituminous primer recommended by manufacturer
waterproofing material for substrate, conforming to ASTM D 2397.
of
sheet
C.
1.
Characteristics:
a. Color
b. Specific weight
c. Flash point
d. Dry residue
:
:
:
:
Black
1.2
Non Flammable
45%
D. SBS Modifies Anti-Routing Bituminous Membrane: The membrane shall be

recommended by manufacturer for approval of Engineer/Client.
2.05
POLYETHYLENE SHEET (FOR LOCATION MENTIONED ABOVE, CLAUSE 1.02, ITEM

D)
The polyethylene sheet shall be of gauge 1000 with nominal weight 0.94 kg/m2, shall be
laid below the blinding.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXECUTION
Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Begin damp proofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted or coated with damp proofing. Prevent damp proofing materials
from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal
joints and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material
manufacturer.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
.03
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations unless more stringent
requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory
performance of damp proofing.
2. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve
coverages indicated.
3. Allow each coat of damp proofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.
B. Apply damp proofing for foundations and slab on grade up to the top level of finishes.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD

Where indicated, install protection board over complete-and-cured damp proofing. Comply
with damp proofing material manufacturers written recommendations for attaching
protection board. Support with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherwise
indicated.
3.05
CLEANING
A. Remove damp proofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive damp proofing.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY THERMAL PROTECTION

07200-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This Section include the following insulation types in locations as indicated on
drawings:
1. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill).
2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Sound attenuation insulation.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers
or glass fibers; produces in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flatcut lengths) or rolls.
1.04
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber where indicated in ceiling plenum whose test
performance is rated as follow for use in plenums as determined by testing
identical products per Erosion Test and Mold Growth and Humidity Test
described in UL 181, or on comparable test from another standard acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking,
flaking, peeling or delemination of interior surface of duct assembly, after
testing for 4 hours at 13-m/s air velocity.
2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of
mold growth, delamination or other deterioration due to the effects of high
humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomiumglobosium on all surfaces and
storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicating characteristics, performance
criteria and limitations. Indicate installation requirements and techniques, storage
and handling criteria and installation procedure acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Samples for Verification: Full size units for each type of insulation indicated.
C. Certification: Submit installers certification verifying compliance with specification
requirements.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
S.T.H.

07200-2
__________________________________________________________________
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through once source
from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with
fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 84.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.07

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
moisture, soiling and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply
with manufacturers written instructions for handling storing and protecting during
installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period insulation
and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials
to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as
possible in each of construction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450.
B. Physical properties:
1. Thermal conductivity
:
0.030 w/m. Deg.K
(K Value) 5 years aged value (DIN 52612)
2. Coefficient of thermal
:
80*10-6 longitudinal
Expansion
60*10-6 transverse
3. Water Absorption
:
1% by volume to ASTM D2842
S.T.H.

07200-3
__________________________________________________________________
4. Capillarity reaction
5. Density
6. Compressive strength
:
:
7. Combustion Characteristics :
8. Fire
:
9. Thicknesses
:
drawings.
Nil
:
Min.38 kg/m3.
0.22 0.36 N/mm2 to DIN 53421 or
42-65 PSI to ASTM D-16218
Non Combustible, ASTM e 136
Class B1 to BS 476/pass DIN 4102.
50 mm unless otherwise indicated on
C. ACCESSORIES
1. Insulation Fasteners and accessories required for the installation shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2.03
MINERAL FIBER INSULATION

A. Manufacturers (Acoustic/Fire Insulation)
B. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with
maximum flame spread and smoke- developed indices of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Thermal conductivity shall be: 0.030 w/m. Deg. K (K Value)
2.04
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond
insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and
substrates.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present for compliance with
requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and
for other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections
capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.03
A. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions applicable to products
and application indicated.
S.T.H.

07200-4
__________________________________________________________________
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed at any time to ice, rain and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove
projections that interfere with placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located with insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation
and insulation encapsulates piping.
E. For preformed insulation units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and
selected from manufacturers standard thicknesses, widths and lengths. Apply
single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple
layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with
manufacturers written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units
to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent
placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place.
Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic or sealant as
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according
to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that
will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction
fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 76-mm clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
4. Provide sound attenuation insulation at top of CMU partitions that stop short
of metal deck between private spaces and additional areas as indicated.
5. Install 76-mm thick, unless otherwise indicated, unfaced glass-fiber blanket
insulation 1219 mm on either side of partition.
D. Install board insulation in curtain0wall construction where indicated on Drawings
according to curtain-wall manufacturers written instructions.
1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within
window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation
manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel
glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and
glass.
S.T.H.

07200-5
__________________________________________________________________
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to
prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter firecontainment system.
3.05
PROTECTION
Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-1
________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1 - EXTENT OF WORK
1.1- WORK IDENTIFICATION:
These specifications cover ROOFING and WATERPROOFING Systems. The contractor shall refer to the
Particular specifications to check which items are relevant
The works covered by this specification includes:
Water proofing for Basement
Waterproofing for Water Tank (External)
Waterproofing system for Wet Areas.
Waterproofing system for Damp proofing.
Inverted Roofing system.
Planters Waterproofing system.
1.2 - REGULATIONS AND BASIC STANDARDS:
Materials shall have the characteristics specified by current international regulations or failing these shall
meet the conditions specified by current standards in countries of origin.
Standards of reference are as follows :
UEAtc (European Union for Technical Agreement in Construction)

General Directives for the Assessment of Roof Waterproofing Systems MOAT 27, January 83
Special Directives for the Assessment of SBS Elastomer bitumen MOAT 31, August 84
ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials)
ASTM Standards - Volume 04.04 - Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous materials
ASTM Standards - Volume 04.06 - Thermal Insulation
ASTM - 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187. USA
1.3 - QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1.3.1. GENERAL
The Roofing and Waterproofing systems shall be laid in strict conformity with the manufacturer's
instructions and the enclosed substrate preparation's specifications.
Waterproofing material shall be properly stored in a clean covered area and shall be kept away
from heat and sun.
During mobilization period, the Contractor shall submit its works program and its On-Site Quality
Control Plan.
1.3.2. PROTECTION AND SAFETY ON SITE:

The Contractor shall abide by all means to National and International Labor and health regulations. Safety
precautions on Site shall incorporate, but are not limited to :
All roofs to be fitted at the perimeter by handrails with safety nets.
All ladders and temporary stairs to be well secured at top and bottom.
Sufficient number of fire extinguishers to be available.
Required polyethylene sheet or tarpaulin to prevent spraying on adjacent structures or equipment.
Workers to wear PPE PERSONEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTS.
S.T.H.

__________________________________________________________________________
1.3.3. WATER TESTING:
Flood test 48 hours minimum after completion of the waterproofing works.

Restrict water run-off from membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes. Flood
restricted area to depth of about 100 mm and maintain at this depth for 48 hours.
Repair any leaks which develop and retest
At completion of flood test, drain plugs will be removed.
1.3.4. EXTENDED GUARANTEE:

A 10 years guarantee shall be provided by the contractor to the benefit of the Client for materials and
workmanship of waterproofing. This warranty shall clearly include the following:
1. All materials in the roofing systems shall be free from manufacturing defects and comply with
manufacturer's published technical specifications.
2. All workmanship in roofing systems shall be free from any defects and comply with all respect to
the manufacturer's technical instructions.
3. This warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the preliminary handing over certificate
of the contract and shall be valid for a period of ten (10) calendar years.
4. Within this warranty the contractor is liable for the cost of repair of defected materials or installation
of a replacement materials or system.
5. The text of the warranty shall be to the Consultant Engineer approval.
2 - MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SUBMITTALS:
2.1- SUBMITTALS:
PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's printed specification and installation instructions, including procedures
and materials for termination, penetrations, flashing, compatibility and bonding. The Contractor shall
provide with his submittals all the relevant Standards documentation.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate layout of sheets including side and end labs mechanical equipment flashing,
parapet flashing, and drain details.
SAMPLES:
Membranes
: Three 300 mm x 300 mm samples
Flashing Membrane
Insulation
Bitumen & Adhesive
: 1 Kg
Metal flashing
: Three 300 mm samples
Primer
: 1 liter
Coating
: 1 liter
Accepted samples will be retained to serve as a basis for checking at the time of delivery of materials to
site. The manufacturer shall furnish, when requested, proof of origin and quality of the materials that will be
used or where it has been applied. Only materials specified or approved by the Engineer will be permitted
to be used. The Engineer will stipulate acceptance tests and their mode of operation to be carried out on
materials supplied by the contractor.
2.2 - WATERPROOFING CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION
The Waterproofing Contractor is required to :
Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________
Submit complete details about the contractor's company: company profile, list of specialized staff
with their respective qualification and experience in the U.A.E. climatic conditions, references
(minimum 10 years), evidence of their ability to handle projects of a similar volume, specific
experience in the U.A.E. or in the Gulf.
The waterproofing Contractor shall be certified within the frame of ISO 9000 series standards: ISO
certificate shall be available for Engineer checking at time of submission.
2.3 - MANUFACTURER APPROVAL
For uniformity of the efficiency and future maintenance, all the products proposed for waterproofing
shall be from the same manufacturer or approved by the waterproofing membrane Manufacturer.
Furthermore, the manufacturer shall submit a guarantee of 10 years availability of the approved
materials.
The waterproofing membrane manufacturer shall be certified within the frame of ISO 9000 series
standards: ISO Certificate shall be available for Engineer checking at time of submission.
The manufacturer in house quality control shall be periodically audited by an independent technical
control office for compliance with the Q.C. manual and standard recommendations. Certificates
from the technical control office shall be available for Engineer checking.
2.4 . MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

2.4.1
BASEMENT WATERPROOFING:
Below ground Tanking for surfaces of piles caps, tie beams, basement walls, below ground slabs and walls
shall be carried out by application of a one layer heavy duty Tanking System consisting of:
One coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.
Double layer of 4 mm thick SBS electrometric modified bitumen membrane, reinforced with 250
gr/m2 non-woven polyester, with 100 mm side laps and 150 mm end laps torched and seamed with
staggered joints.
The Tanking System shall be applied over clean, dry and smooth concrete or block works surface.
All preparatory works (blinding, piles heads,) must be executed prior to any membrane installation.
Horizontally, the Tanking System shall be loose laid over One coat of primer according to ASTM D
41
applied at a rate of 250gr/m2, and covered with 1000 Gauge PE Foil before pouring a 50 mm
thick mortar
protective screed to receive reinforced concrete structure.
Vertically, it shall be fully torched over one coat of Primer, protected with a 6 mm thick bitumen
impregnated board before backfill or concrete cast.
Technical Characteristics of the membrane:

Properties
TENSILE STRENGTH (EN 12311-1)
Longitudinal
Transversal
ELONGATION AT BREAK (EN 12311-1)
S.T.H.
Value
:
:
1000 N
900 N

__________________________________________________________________________

Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
LOW TEMPERATURE FLEXIBILITY (EN 1109)

FLOW RESISTANCE AT ELEVATED T (EN 1110) :
RING AND BALL SOFTENING T (EN 1427)
:
DIMENSIONAL STABILITY (EN 1107-1)
WATER TIGHTNESS TO LIQUID WATER (EN 1928) :
PUNCTURE RESISTANCE ON EPS 100 (EN 12730)
PUNCTURE RESISTANCE ON CONCRETE (EN 12730):
IMPACT RESISTANCE ON EPS 100
:
JOINT STRENGTH (EN 12317-1)
:
TEARING RESISTANCE (EN 12310-1)
50%
55%
:
-15oC
o
100 C
110oC
:
0.4%
60kPa
:
L20
L25
I10
500 N/50mm
:
150 N/50 mm
THICKNESS
:
4 MM
PERMANENT TECHNICAL AGREEMENT WITH CERTIFICATE U.B.A.t.c - AGT 1631
Technical Characteristics of 6 mm fibre impregnated bituminous protection board:
Technical Characteristics
Value
Weight
Softening Point
Density
6.2 6.7 Kg/m2

110 oC - 125oC
1.00 1.20 g/cc
Compartment System
The compartment system shall be applied every 200 m2 by splitting the basement area into
compartments using a swelling bar on the perimeter applied directly over the waterproofing system
not allowing water, incase of leakage, to pass from one area to another.
Apply, an injection tube at center of each compartment. Extend the tube to the surface of the raft
slab for monitering and injection in case of leakage.
PILE HEAD TREATMENT

Shall be carried out by application of:
Repair the top of the pile with non-shrink grout to flatten out the surface to be treated.
One coat of primer according to ASTM D 41.
Double layer of a 4 mm thick SBS elastomeric modified bitumen membrane, membrane Reinforced
with 250 gr/m2 composite non-woven polyester with glass fibre threads extended up to the rebars.
Apply, high performance fluid resin system designed to encapsulate piletops and ensure water
tightness.
Apply, a Hydrophilic bentonite strip at the outer perimeter of the pile followed by, a post-injectable
injection tube at the inner perimeter of the pile head, extended to the surface of the raft.
Technical Characteristics of Epoxy Grout

Properties
Value
Compressive Strength ASTM C-579 50mm cubes
24 hrs.
82 MPA
3 Days
87 MPA
7 Days
S.T.H.
95 MPA

________________________________________________________________________________
28 Days
Creep Data, ASTM C-1181
3 Days
7 Days
28 Days
Linear Shrinkage, ASTM C-531
3 Days
7 Days
14 Days
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, ASTM C-531
-5
-5
2.6 x 10 in./in./F (4.5 x 10 mm/mm/C)
Bond to Concrete
Abrasion Resistance
Flexural Strength, ASTM C 580
24 hrs.
3 Days
7 Days
28 Days
Modulus of Elasticity, ASTM C 580
1 Day
28 Days
Tensile Strength, ASTM C 307
1 Day
28 Days
Gel Time, ASTM D 2471 90 minutes @23C
Technical Characteristics:
Properties
97 MPA
-4
-4
2.8 x 10 in/in (2.8 x 10 mm/mm)

-4
-4
2.9 x 10 in/in (2.9 x 10 mm/mm)
-4
-4
4.0 x 10 in/in (4.0 x 10 mm/mm)
0.003%
0.007%
0.008%
Exceeds tensile and shear strength of concrete

Greater than concrete
20.8 MPA
21.7MPA
24.1MPA
24.7MPA
6
0.95 x 10 psi (6.5 x 10 MPa)

6
3
1.24 x 10 psi (8.5 x 10 MPa)
11.5 MPa
12.3 MPa
Value
Swelling capacity in contact with water Swells up to max. 250% of its original dry volume at 8% salt
solution:
Density
Weight
Elongation at rapture
Maximum bend load
Installation temperatures
Operation temperatures
Approx. 0.8 kg/dm 3

Approx. 0.8 kg/m
7500%
No cracks at 180 oC above 0 oC
-15oC to 60oC
-45oC to 120oC
Technical Characteristics of:

Properties
Outside diameter
Inside diameter
Length
Weight
Operating temperature
Steel wire tensile strength
Filter pore diameter
Value
12 mm
8 mm
Max. 6 metres
71 gr/m
Up to 70C
Approx. 1800 N/mm2
35 m
S.T.H.

__________________________________________________________________________
2.4.2 WATER TANK WATERPROOFING (EXTERNAL)

Double layers of a, a 4 mm thick SBS electrometric modified bitumen membrane, reinforced with
250 gr/m2 non-woven polyester, with 100 mm side laps and 150 mm end laps torched and seamed
with staggered joints.
The Tanking System shall be applied over clean, dry and smooth concrete or block works surface.
All preparatory works (blinding, piles heads,) must be executed prior to any membrane installation.
Vertically, it shall be fully torched over one coat of Primer, protected with a 6 mm thick bitumen
impregnated board before backfill or concrete cast.
Properties
Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
1000 N
900 N

Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
50%
55%
Value

:
:
:
PUNCTURE RESISTANCE ON EPS 100 (EN 12730) :
:
:
:
-15oC
100oC
110oC
0.4%
60kPa
L20
L25
I10
500 N/50mm
150 N/50 mm
Technical Characteristics of 6 mm fibre impregnated bituminous protection board:

Value
Weight
Softening Point
Density
6.2 6.7 Kg/m2

110 oC - 125oC
1.00 1.20 g/cc
2.4.3. WATERPROOFING FOR DAMP ROOFING
Apply one coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.

Apply a waterproofing and damproofing neoprene-latex based material (elastomeric/SBS), solvent
free, thixotropic at a total rate of 750 microns.
2.4.4. WATERPROOFING FOR WET AREAS

Apply one coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.
Apply two coats of a waterproofing and damproofing neoprene-latex
(elastomeric/SBS), solvent free, thixotropic at a total thickness of 1.5mm,
Water
Bitumen
S.T.H.
Value
40%
50%
based
material

________________________________________________________________________________
Solid content
Penetration
Softening point (R&B)
Viscosity
Density
PH
Condensation porosity
Elasticity
60%
80-100 (temperature= 25oC)
>120oC
185.000 250.000 m.p.a.s.
1,080 g/dm3
11 0.2
0.72 g/m 2/hour at 20oC
> 1000%
2.4.5 INVERTED ROOFING SYSTEM concrete deck

The roofs to receive tiles finish shall receive a single ply roofing system, consisting of the following built up:
Lightweight foam concrete to 1% minimum slope with Minimum thickness of 50mm, having Density
of 650-750 Kg/m3.
One layer of a 4 mm thick SBS electrometric modified bitumen membrane, reinforced with 250
gr/m2 non-woven polyester, loose laid over the slip-sheet with 80 mm side laps and 120 mm end
laps torched and seamed.
One separation layer of Geotextile, 100-g/m2.
50mm thick extruded polyestyrene thermal insulation board, 32-35kg/m3 density.
One separation layer of Geotextile, 100-g/m2.
50 x 50 x 5cm thick concrete tiles loosely laid over separation layer.
Skirting, flashing and roof details shall receive :

A 200 mm wide corner reinforcement strip, a 4 mm thick SBS elastomeric bitumen membrane
polyester reinforced, fully torched at the angle.
A 4 mm thick SBS elastomeric bitumen flashing membrane mineral Finished, stable spun bond
non-woven polyester torched and seamed extended up-to the desired level.
Membrane termination shall be protected by a counter flashing system (metal flashing, Or groove)
filled with two part polysulphide sealant and shall be at least 150 mm higher than the top level of
the roof tiles.
The roof being opened to public access, the flashing membrane shall be protected ( vertical
concrete tile, or similar approved )
Properties
Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
1000 N
900 N

Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
50%
55%
Value

:
:
:
PUNCTURE RESISTANCE ON EPS 100 (EN 12730) :
S.T.H.
-15oC
100oC
110oC
0.4%
60kPa
L20
L25

__________________________________________________________________________

:
:
:
I10
500 N/50mm
150 N/50 mm
Technical Characteristics of Geotextile - 100 g/m2 separation layer:

Properties
Mass Unit Area
Thickness (2kN/m2)
Wide Width Tensile strength
Wide Width Tensile Elongation
Grab Tensile Strength
Grab Elongation
Trapezoidal Tear Strength
Mullen Burst Strength
Puncture Strength (CBR)
Opening Size
Flow Rate 5cm head
Permittivity
UV Resistance @ 150 hrs3
Standard
ASTM D 5261
ASTM D 5199
ASTM D 4595
ASTM D 4595
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4533
ASTM D 3786
ASTM D 6241
ASTM D 4751
ASTM D 4491
ASTM D 4491
ASTM D 4355
Unit
gms/m2
mm
kN/m
%
N
%
N
kPa
N
microns
l/sq.mt/s
Sec-1
% Strength Reatained
Value
100
1.00
5
>50
350
>50
130
800
1000
100
100
2.40
>85
Technical Characteristics of 50 mm thick extruded heat insulation board:

Properties
Standard
Unit
Value
Density Min.
Thermal conductivity
Compressive Strength
At 10% deflection
Capilarity
Flammability
Water vapour permeability
DIN 53420
DIN 52612
DIN 53421
kg/m3
W/m K
kpa
32-35
0.024
300
DIN 4102
ASTM C-355-64
None
Building material class B1
Perm Inch
0.4-0.6
2.4.6 Flower Boxes and Planters Waterproofing System.

Flowers and planters boxes shall receive a heavy duty, anti roots roof garden waterproofing system consisting
of:
One coat of Primer according to ASTMd-41 at a rate of 250gr/m 2 on a properly prepared Surface.
One layer of a 4 mm thick SBS elastomeric bitumen flashing membrane mineral Finished,
reinforced with a 250 gr/m2 stable spun bond non-woven polyester, laying by torch, hot bitumen or
cold adhesive, loose laid over the primer coat with 80 mm side slaps and 150 mm end laps fully
torched and seamed.
One layer of a 4 mm thick APP root resistant membrane, consisting of a polyester reinforcement,
coated with plastomer bitumen.
10 cm gravel drainage layer.
Filter layer consisting of a 200 g/sq.m non woven polyester geotextile.
Sweet soil, minimum 300 mm thick, to receive plantations.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________
Properties
Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
1000 N
900 N

Longitudinal
Transversal
:
:
50%
55%
Value
LOW TEMPERATURE FLEXIBILITY (EN 1109) :

-15oC
FLOW RESISTANCE AT ELEVATED T (EN 1110):
100oC
:
110oC
:
0.4%
WATER TIGHTNESS TO LIQUID WATER (EN 1928):
60kPa
PUNCTURE RESISTANCE ON EPS 100 (EN 12730):
L20
PUNCTURE RESISTANCE ON CONCRETE (EN 12730): L25
:
I10
:
500 N/50mm
150 N/50 mm
:
Technical Characteristics of anti-root membrane
Reinforcement
:
Polyester reinforcement 180gr/m2
Coating Mass
Tensile Strenght (EN 12311-1):
Plastomer bitumen, consisting of 70% bitumen and %30% atactic

polypropylene (APP), with addition of a root-rejecting element.
Longitudinal :
700 N
Transversal
:
450 N
Elongation at break (EN 12311-1): Longitudinal

Transversal
:
:
Low temperature Flexiglibity

(EN 1109)
:
Heat Resistance (EN 1110)
:
Dimentional stability (EN 1107-1)
:
4 year period FLL German root-test accomplished
30%
40%
-8oC
140 oC
0.4 oC
Vertical parts and details shall receive:

1. One coat of a bituminous primer to ASTM D 41 for 0.250 kg/sq.m
2. The same above mentioned layers fully torched.
3. The Waterproofing Membrane termination shall be protected by a counterflasing system
(metal flashing, groove.) and shall be at least 150mm higher than the top level of the
soil.
3. CERTIFICATES (TO BE SUBMITTED BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT):
Certificate of final quantities sent to site to be issued by supplier and submitted to consultant.
Certificate to be issued by supplier confirming that the material has been used as per manufacturer's
recommendation.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

07800-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
This Section includes through-penetration fire stop systems for penetrations through
fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings
containing penetrating items.
1.03
REFERNCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
B.
1.04
UL, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistive-rated constructions, including both
empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide throughpenetration fire stop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases and
main original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems with the following
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of
constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration
firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials
in occupiable floor areas.
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
3. L-Rated Systems: where through-penetration fire stop systems are indicated in
smoke barriers, provide through-penetration fire stop systems with L-ratings of
not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient
temperatures and 400 degF (204 deg. C).
S.T.H.

07800-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. For through-penetration fire stop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture and
physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when
exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.
D. For through-penetration fire stop systems exposed to view, provide products with
flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450 respectively,
as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Products Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration fire stop system, show each type of
construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and type
of penetrating item. Include fire stop design designation of qualified testing and
inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition
indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and
inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration fire stop
system configuration for construction and penetrating items.
C. Sample:
1. Submit duplicate samples of each specified material, including anchoring
impaling clips, in accordance with Contact Documents.
D. Through-Penetration Fire stop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each
through-penetration fire stop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration fire stop systems for each location identified by fire stop
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
E. Qualified Data: For Installer.
F. Product Certificates: For through-penetration fire stop system products, signed by
product manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating throughpenetration fire stop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop
systems similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance.
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop
systems and fire-resistive joints systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
S.T.H.

07800-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration fire stop systems, for each kind of
penetration and construction condition indicated, through once source from a
single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems
that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1
Performance Requirements Article:
1. Fire stopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency
is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services
for fire stop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Mock-up:
1. Construct one complete mock-up of each type in location acceptable to
Engineer/Client.
2. Arrange for Engineers/Clients review and acceptance.
3. Mock-up may remain as part of Work if acceptable by Engineer/Client. Remove
and dispose of mock-ups which do not part of Work.
1.07

A. Delivery through-penetration fire stop systems products to products to Projects site
in original. Unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers
labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number shelf
life applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agencys classification marking
applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component
materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration fire stop systems to prevent
their deterioration or damage dues to moisture, temperature changes,
contaminants or other causes.
1.08
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration fire stop systems
when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by throughpenetration fire stop system manufacturers or when substrate are wet due to rain,
frost, condensation or other causes.
B. Ventilate through-penetration fire stop systems per manufacturers written
instructions by natural means, or where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.09
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that that
through- penetration fire stop systems are installed according to specifies
requirements.
S.T.H.

07800-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Do not cover through-penetration fire stop systems installations that will become
concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by
building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems that are compatible
with one another; with the substances forming openings; and with the conditions of
service and applications, as demonstrated by through-penetration fire stop system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration fire stop system
that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 Performance
Requirements Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration fire
stop system under manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for fire stop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to,
the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealant.
2. Temporary forming materials
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.03
FILL MATERIALS
A.
S.T.H.
General: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems containing the types of fill
materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Fire stop System Schedule at the
end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill
materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting
agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

07800-5
_____________________________________________________________________________
B.
Cast-in-Place Fire stop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-inplace concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an in
tumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of sleeve for
fastening to concrete formwork and a neoprene gasket.
C.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not reemulsify during exposure to moisture.
D.
Fire stop Devices: Factory-assembled collar formed from galvanized steel and
lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
E.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
F.
Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water-resistance

containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds.
G.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with

aluminum foil on one side.
H.
Mortars: Pre-packed dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders,

hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with
water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar.
I.
Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber

cloth cases filled with combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion
agents and fire-retardant additives.
J.
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-base liquid elastomers that, when

mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.
K.
Silicone Sealants: Single-components, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric

sealants of grade indicated below:
putties
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other

horizontal surfaces and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other
surfaces requiring a non-slumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated fire
stop limits use to non-sag grade for both opening conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for
opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces.
3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Non-sag formulation openings in vertical and
other surfaces.
2.04
MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with throughpenetration fire stop system manufacturers written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection
of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items procedures
needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
S.T.H.

07800-6
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, fro compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing throughpenetration fire stop systems to comply with fire stop system manufacturers written
instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items
foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration fire
stop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration fire
stop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration
fire stop system manufacturer using that manufacturers recommended products
and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration
onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: use masking tape to prevent through-penetration fire stop systems
from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work
and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire stop system materials.
Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire stop systems seal with
substrate.
3.03
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration fire stop systems to comply with Part 1
Performance Requirements Article and with fire stop system manufacturers
written installation instructions and published drawings for products and
applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of typed required
to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings
indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of fire stop systems.
S.T.H.

07800-7
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. Install fill materials for fire stop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items as required achieving fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.04
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration fire stop systems with preprinted metal or plastic
labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 150 mm of
edge of the fire stop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to
remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners foe metal
labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesive capable of
permanently bonding labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding label material, will result in partial destruction label if removal
is attempted. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words Warning-Through-Penetration Firestop System Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage.
2. Contractors name, address and phone number.
3. Through-penetration fire stopsystem designation of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
4. Date of Installation.
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturers name.
6. Installers name.
3.05
CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by throughpenetration fire stop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in
which openings occurred.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration fire stop systems are without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated throughpenetration fire stop systems immediately and install new materials to produce
systems complying with specified requirements.
3.06
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM LOCATIONS AND RATINGS

A. Install ULC fire stop and smoke seal systems rated to match fire resistance design
rating of assemblies into which they are installed.
S.T.H.

07800-8
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Install fire stop and smoke seal systems. Use systems with required ratings at
following typical locations, including but not limited to:
1. Gaps at intersections of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board
partitions.
2. Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated walls and partitions such as
masonry and gypsum board.
3. Gaps at top of fire-resistance rated partitions such as masonry and gypsum
board partitions.
4. Penetrations through fire-resistance rated walls and partitions including
mechanical and electrical services and openings and sleeves for future use.
5. Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.
6. Gaps at edge of floor slabs at exterior walls such as curtain wall and precast
concrete panels.
7. Perimeter of retaining angels angles on rigid ducts greater than 0.012 m2, fire
stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between
retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

JOINT SEALER
07900-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1.
1.
1.2.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The tender documents and Addenda there to form an integral part of this
DESCRIPTION
1.
Read other sections of the specifications for extent of caulking specified in those
sections. Do all other caulking indicated, specified or required.
2.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3.
04200:
07500:
08200:
08800:
09300:
10800:
Masonry Units
Membrane Roofing
Wood and Plastic Doors
Glazing
Tile
Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Specialties
SUBMITTALS
1.
SAMPLES: Submit for approval and color selection of each specified type of
compound to be used, together with recommended primers and joint filler or fillers
proposed to be used.
2.
WARRANTY: Warrant that work of this section shall remain free from leaks and
visible defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with General Conditions
but for five years. Agree to promptly make good any defects which become
apparent within warranty period. Defects include, but not limited to, joint leakage,
cracking, crumbling, melting, running, staining of adjoining or adjacent work or
surfaces, sag and failure in adhesion or cohesion.
1.4.
CERTIFICATION
1.
Submit manufacturer's literature describing each material to be used in the Work of

this section. Literature shall contain a statement that the material complies with the
specified standard.
2.
Installation of sealant and caulking work shall be carried out by a recognized

specialized applicator having skilled mechanics, thoroughly trained and competent
in all phases of caulking work.
1.5.
1.
S.T.H.
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
Consult the sealant manufacturer and apply sealant to dry surfaces at air and
material temperatures as recommended by him.

JOINT SEALER
07900-2
______________________________________________________________________________
1.6.
1.
1.5
1.
PART 2:
2.1.
S.T.H.
MANUFACTURER
Before any sealants are applied, the manufacturer of each material shall visit the
site, examine the conditions at each joint to be sealed and make recommendations
in writing re: Joint preparation, suitable materials and application techniques and
conditions. Copies of the recommendations shall be submitted to the Contractor,
and the Engineer.
WARRANTY
Warranty is to provide for repairing and replacing sealants used for joints in
Concrete which fails to perform as intended, because of either leaking, crumbling,
hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining or loss of adhesion, within a
minimum period of ten years from date of Substantial Performance of Work as
certified by the Engineer/ Owner.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
COLOURS: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range.
2.
SEALANT TYPE "A": One component, acrylic base, solvent curing by Tremco
'Mono' or approved equal, or one component polyurethane sealant.
3.
SEALANT TYPE "B": Multi-component, chemical curing conforming to BS 4254,

Type 1 and Type 2, or two component sealant by Tremco or approved equal.
4.
SEALANT TYPE "C": One component, silicone base, chemical curing.
5.
JOINT FILLER: Polyolefin foam rope closed cell type, circular cross section at least
30% larger than joint. SOF rod as supplied by Tremco or approved equal.
6.
JOINT PRIMER: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of surface

being primed.
7.
BOND BREAKER: 3M #226 or 481 or approved equal.
2.2
GENERAL
1.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that
are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
2.3
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
1.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing

elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920, including those

JOINT SEALER
07900-3
______________________________________________________________________________
requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and
Uses.
2.
One-Part Neutral Cure Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; where
specifically approved by the Engineer / Owner.
A.
Additional Capability: When tested per ASTM C 719, to withstand 50

percent increase and decrease of joint width as measured at time of
application.
3.
Two-Part Gunnable Polyurethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25.
4.
One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25:

A.
5.
Formulated with fungicide for sealing interior joints with nonporous

substrates at plumbing fixtures.
Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing

acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both,
with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint
width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates
indicated for Project without failing cohesively:
A.
7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15

percent.
2.4
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
1.
Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
A.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by
testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of
airborne sound.
3.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical joint

sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
A.
Acoustical Sealant:
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
2.5 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS

1.
S.T.H.
Preformed Foam Sealants: Manufacturer's standard preformed, pre-compressed,

impregnated open cell foam sealant manufactured from high density urethane foam

JOINT SEALER
07900-4
______________________________________________________________________________
impregnated with a nondrying, water repellent agent; factory produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to
develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified
by manufacturer; and complying with the following requirements:
2.
Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew-resistant, non-migratory, non staining, and

compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants.
3.
Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard.
4.
Density: Manufacturer's standard.
5.
Backing: None, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
1.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non staining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
2.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non

waxing, non extruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and
of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
producing optimum sealant performance:
A.
3.
Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing

complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to plus 5 deg C. Provide products with
low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control
sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
4.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by

sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint
filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in
sealant failure. Provide self -adhesive tape where applicable.
PART 3:
3.1.
S.T.H.
Either flexible, open cell polyurethane foam or non-gassing, closed -cell

polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated or as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
1.
Clean joints and spaces to be caulked and ensure they are dry and free of dust,
loose mortar, oil, grease and other foreign material. Clean ferrous metals of rust,
mill scale and foreign materials by wire brushing, grinding or sanding.
2.
Wipe metal surfaces to be caulked, except recoated metals, with cellulose

sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, xylol or tuluol. Wipe dry

JOINT SEALER
07900-5
______________________________________________________________________________
with clean cloth. Clean recoated metals with solutions or compounds which
will not injure finish and which are compatible with primer and sealant.
3.
On horizontal traffic surfaces support joint filler against vertical movement which
might result from traffic loads, including foot traffic.
4.
Where joints are 12 mm deep or deeper, install joint filler to proper, uniform depth to
give sealant bead of optimum size and shape for joint condition and expected
movement condition.
5.
Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with sealant during
application, mask prior to priming and caulking.
6.
Caulk joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where surfaces
to be caulked are prime painted in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime
paint is compatible with primer and sealant. If they are incompatible inform
Engineer, consult the manufacturer and change primer and sealant to approved
compatible types.
7.
Prime side of joints, if priming is recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of

surface being caulked.
8.
Check form release agent used on concrete for compatibility with primer and
sealant. If incompatible inform Engineer and change primer and sealant to
approved compatible types or clean concrete to Engineer's approval.
3.2.
1.
Where joint configuration does not allow for proper depth/width ratio, place bond
breaker (pressure sensitive plastic tape) which will not bond to the sealant at the
back of the joint.
2.
Apply sealant using air or hand operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles and
equipment approved by sealant manufacturer. Apply in strict accordance with
manufacturer's directions and recommendations. Apply sealant under pressure in
such a manner as to assure good adhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill all
voids in joint.
3.
Form surface of sealant smooth, concave, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air
pockets, and embedded foreign matter.
4.
Upon completion, remove masking and sealant smears and droppings from
adjacent and other surfaces.
3.3.
1.
S.T.H.
APPLICATION
USE SEALANTS SPECIFIED IN THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS

Type "A": Joints between interior door frames and masonry, and drywall, and/or
where required or directed on site.

JOINT SEALER
07900-6
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
Type "B": Masonry control and expansion joints and all other locations
where sealants are required, except for Type "A" and "C", and/or where
required or directed on site.
3.
Type "C": Joints between walls and service sinks, urinals, wc, vanities, basins etc.
where non-staining sealant is required or as directed on site by the Engineer.
4.
Further to the above, it is the intention of this section to provide all sealants and
caulking (interior and exterior) where gaps exist between two dissimilar materials.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

08100-1
________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.

Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
03200:
07500:
07900:
08800:
09200:
Membrane Roofing
Joint Sealers
Glazing
Plaster & Gypsum Board
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
The firm executing work of this section shall have a minimum of ten (10) years
continuous experience in successful installation of work of type and quality shown
and specified.
2.
Erection of the aluminum work and curtain wall system and component parts shall
be performed by workmen specially trained and experienced in this type of work.
Have a senior, qualified representative at the job to direct the various stages of
operations at all times.
3.
Conform to the requirements of the local authorities, latest BSI and ASTM
standards.
4.
Contractor's Responsibility: The contractor shall examine the contract drawings and
these specifications to ensure that the work is complete. If errors, omissions or
inconsistencies are discovered, he shall so notify the Engineer in writing before
executing a contract.
5.
Only original profiles, fittings and accessories may be used for fabrication. The fittings
shall be selected by the fabricating plant to withstand anticipated stresses.
1.4.
EXAMINATION
Make thorough examination of drawings and details, check anchorage, structural
deflections, size and shape of glass, system of sealing, interfacing with work of other
sections and other factors influencing design and performance of the glazing system,
and be fully cognizant of requirements.
1.5.
EQUIPMENT
Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, tools, plant,
safety protection, and other equipment required for the completion of the work.
S.T.H.

08100-2
________________________________________________________________________________
1.6.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.
Design aluminum work and glazing in strict accordance with the requirements
of the applicable Building Code requirements and applicable BSI and
ASTM standards specified.
2.
Design components to size and profiles indicated, reinforcement flange and

web thickness of aluminum shall be as required for adequate rigidity and
strength. The unit when tested at a minimum pressure of 35 P.S.F. in a
positive (inward) direction in accordance with the method specified in ASTM
E330 shall show no permanent deformation of any member nor any glass
breakage. Maximum permissible deflection of any member shall not exceed
1/200 of distance between fixing points. Frames shall be thermally broken
extruded sections.
3.
The method of assembly, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminum work

and glazing as indicated on the drawings is schematic and shows general
intent only. Location and methods of providing same shall be this contractor's
responsibility, who shall design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to
suit each specific condition in an acceptable manner.
4.
All component parts shall be fastened, connected or anchored together to

transmit wind loading and other stresses to the system or anchors. Provide
anchors which transmit wind loading to the anchorage system without
causing local over-stressing and distortion of the aluminum work at point of
attachment of anchor or to the anchor itself. Additionally, anchors shall
transmit uniformly distributed loads through structure.
5.
All fastenings shall be concealed.
6.
Provide and/or make allowances for free and noiseless vertical and horizontal
thermal movement, due to the contraction and expansion of any or all
component arts, for an ambient temperature range of from -25C to +40C.
Buckling, opening of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners,
failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to the thermal movement
of any or all component parts will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly
and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range
at the time of the respective operation.
7.
The design and installation of the aluminum work, including the glass, shall
accommodate all inherent building structure movements, expansion, creep and
deflections and the fabrication and installation tolerances of all related work not
included in this section, without the loss of, or detrimental effect to, the
performance requirements herein specified.
S.T.H.

08100-3
________________________________________________________________________________
8.
Thermal-barrier connection shall provide complete metal-to-metal separation between

the two main frame members. No connecting screws, clips or other devices will be
permitted which would tend to bridge the two frame members or restrict in any
manner, the expansion and contraction of individual separated frame members. Vinyl
member of thermal barrier connector shall serve as key lock only between the two
aluminum frame members in non-structural manner with minimum points of contact
and dead air pockets between vinyl and aluminum.
9.
There shall be no water infiltration into the building through the aluminum work and
glazing under the design wind loads.
1.7.
DESIGN CRITERIA
1.
Design components to sizes and profiles indicated having reinforcement, flange and
web thicknesses as required for adequate rigidity and strength to limit deflection to
L/200 maximum under positive and negative peak wind design gust pressures.
Design wind load shall be calculated by reference to B.P. 3: Chapter V: Part 2.
The maximum wind speed to be allowed for in calculations is 150 km/hr.
2.
If, with a window casement open, a transom can be subjected to load by persons
leaning out, the necessary additional vertical load shall be taken into account.
3.
For visual reasons, deflection of glass shall be limited to L/1000.
4.
Make allowance in the design for localized zones where increased wind loads and
reactions will occur due to the building location and configuration.
5.
Resultant effects of structural elements on the indoor climate shall be taken into
account, particularly in regard to the type and arrangement of the air conditioning at
exterior wall surfaces and the solar radiation involved.
6.
No water infiltration when subjected to water spray at rate of 23 liters per .093 m2
per hour maintained for 15 minutes with static pressure difference across the glass
of 1.2 kPa.
7.
Air infiltration and exfiltration of 0.57 L/min/m2 for window areas and 0.57
L/min/m2 for spandrel and soffit areas, when subjected to static pressure of
0.075 kPa. Permissible air leakage shall not be cumulative between
windows, spandrels and soffits.
8.
Difference in temperature between central and edge portions of any inner pane of
sealed units shall be less than the maximum permissible difference recommended
by the manufacturer of sealed glass units.
9.
All sizes such as oversize, cutting sizes, glass sizes shall be established on the sole
responsibility of the fabricator, maintaining the design intent to the approval of the
Engineer. In all cases involving abnormal stresses, it is necessary to document
details, attachments, etc. in the form of drawings, and to carry out structural
calculations for stressed profiles and anchors and to have these checked and
approved by Professional Engineer licensed to work in place of work.
S.T.H.

08100-4
________________________________________________________________________________
10. SYSTEM DRAINAGE: Provide complete system drainage for all water which has
penetrated.
11. All components must sustain the forces acting on them and be capable of
transmitting them to the load bearing part of the building structure, complying with
the requirements of B.S. 8200 and B.S. C.P. 118.
1.10.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Furnish complete shop and erection drawings required for the work of this section to
the Engineer for review prior to fabrication. Submit shop drawings in accordance
with General Conditions.
2.
Co-ordinate shop drawings for work of this section with those for other sections to
ensure correct interface details required to provide a water-tight installation.
3.
No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and all other related submittals,
documentation, certifications and samples as required by the specifications, have
been reviewed by the Engineer.
4.
Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, elevations, sections and details for all work in
this section. The details shall be at full scale as far as practical and shall show and
specify the construction of all parts of the work including metal and glass thicknesses,
jointing details, field connections, anchoring, fastening, types and finishes; areas to be
sealed, sealing methods and sealant materials; gaskets; glazing methods; direction
and magnitude of thermal expansion; type of construction including joinery, fasteners
and welds and all other pertinent information.
5.
All anchorage assemblies and components; the fabrication and erection tolerances
for the work in this section and the adjoining related work. Show connection details
of all work which is connected to or assimilated into the system.
6.
Furnish prototype unit consisting of the sections necessary to make the typical
intersection of the split vertical and split horizontal mullion condition. Unit shall be
approximately 460 mm X 460 mm and be complete with glazing, gaskets, thermal
barriers, tapes and sealants.
7.
On completion of work of this section, supply maintenance and glazing instructions

for insertion in maintenance manual.
8.
The profile dimensions of frame, casement, transom and mullion shall be determined
in accordance with the structural analysis tables for profiles and fittings and in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. Cavity profiles shall be used in all
cases for inner and outer frames.
9.
SAMPLES: Submit to Engineer for approval before fabrication of work, samples of all
materials, components and finishes to be used in the Work and typical frame jointing
method.
S.T.H.

08100-5
________________________________________________________________________________
1.11.
MOCK-UP
1.
Supply and install to a location directed by the Engineer a mock-up panel, with
glazing, for approval prior to final production, consisting of one window units.
2.
When approved by the Engineer the mock-up panel may remain as part of the
building system and become the standard by which the Work of this section is
judged.
1.12.
1.
1.13.
WARRANTY
Warrant Work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in
accordance with the General Conditions but for an extended period of five (5) years
and agree to promptly make good defects which become evident during warranty
period without cost to the Client. Defects shall include but not be limited to, leaking,
deformation of members, loss of seal in sealed glass units, frame distortions and
thermal forces, discoloration of finishes and failure of sealants.
STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING & PROTECTION
1.
Before shipment, coat exposed portions of aluminum with SPV blue colored film
coating.
2.
strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations.
3.
Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, scaffolding,
staging, safety protection equipment, tools, plant and other equipment required for
the completion of the work.
4.
Protect the Work of other trades from soiling and damage during the execution of the
Work.
PART 2:
2.1.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
ALUMINUM WINDOW: Shall be thermally-broken fixed units suitable for glazing

with insulated sealed glass units. The general size and profile of the window units
shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.
OPERABLE WINDOWS: All operable windows shall be hinged as indicated on

drawings.
3.
EXTRUDED SHAPES: Aluminum 6063 (HEQ TF) with a minimum yield of 139
MPa/25mm2 anodizing quality, free from defects impairing appearance, strength
and durability. Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings shall
not exceed the values in CP 118.
Aluminum extrusions shall be in accordance with B.S. 8200 and B.S.
S.T.H.

08100-6
________________________________________________________________________________
4.
STEEL SECTIONS: BS 5950. All structural steelwork shall comply with the
requirements of the National Structural Steelwork Specification for building
Construction, publication No. 1/89 March 1989. All steel shall be hot dipped
galvanized. Welds shall be treated with "galvafroid" zinc rich paint.
5.
PREFINISHED ALUMINUM SHEET: BS 1470. Aluminum sheet to match finish of

extrusions. Minimum 2.4 mm thick.
6.
SETTING BLOCKS: Neoprene ASTM C542-69, 75 to 85 durometer A.
7.
POLYETHYLENE ROPE: Closed cell foamed polyethylene, 50% larger than joint.
8.
SEALANT: Silicone rubber type, conforming to BS 5889.
9.
PAINT: Bituminous, conforming to BS 6949.
10. GLASS AND GLAZING: Refer to Section 08800.

11. AIR SEAL PANELS:
class, 1.0 mm thick.
Fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having Z275 coating
12. INSULATION: Rigid fiberglass insulation. Fiberglass - Corning AF 530 or approved

alternate, with black facing.
13. FLEXIBLE FLASHING: EPDM sheet, 1.6 mm thick.
14. SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, RIVETS AND OTHER FASTENING
DEVICES: Stainless steel with a chromium content of not less than 12%.
15. DOORS:
1.
Glazed doors as per drawings. Fastening shall be as inconspicuous as

possible, and to Engineer's approval.
2.
Hardware shall be offset pivot hinges and closers, provide a ms lock c/w
thumb turn. Provide aluminum thresholds and complete (4 sides)
weather stripping.
16. ALUMINUM FINISH: Surface treatment of aluminum components shall be carried

out in accordance with B.S. 1615 and B.S. 3987. Quality of film thickness and
subsequent densification shall be in accordance with B.S 1615. The surface with
respect to gloss, texture, hue and its uniformity and the necessary surface treatment
E6 shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All interior and exterior components
to be powder coated, to match color from standard color chart by 'Jotun Corro Coat', to later selection.
17. POWDER COATINGS: All components shall be chemically treated with a conversion
coating, and shall include a zinc chromate coat (for aluminum). The conversion coating
shall conform with ASTM D 1750 - 67, Method 7 (Amorphous Chromium Phosphate) or
method. Factory apply the polyester powder coat by electrostatic spraying to a dry film
thickness of 60 - 80 microns.
S.T.H.

08100-7
________________________________________________________________________________
1.
Composition: Polyester powder coating shall consist of a polyester resin, a

curing agent and the appropriate light and heat resistance pigments.
2.
Processing: Electrostatic spraying of the powder, on a metallic substrate

subjected to heat, melts the powder to form a continuous film and a fully
cured coating.
3.
Application: Due to outstanding weather resistance, the grades used shall be

especially suited for outdoor use. Where applicable, grades used for indoor
use shall be suitable for exposure to ultra violet light.
4.
Range: Color shall be selected from the full range of the shades on the
RAL color card. Sheen shall be selected by Engineer from high gloss (G)
with approximately 80-100% gloss and satin gloss (S) with approximately 6080% gloss.
5.
Material: Fine powder with grain size less than 100 microns, with a solid
content of 100%.
Aluminum Sliding Doors

Supply and installation of Aluminum sliding doors, with 8mm tempered clear glass
Size 4.00 X 2.50 meters (wxh) Quantity 10 Nos.
Sliding Door Operator
Option 1: Corsa Operator manufacture by CAME S.P.A. Italy
Sliding door drive unit covering to be hinged up aluminum guide way profile. Drive unit with
direct current motor mains connection with plug 220 V, 50 Hz.
Motor max current
Nominal current
Power Automation
Drive System
Max force exerted
Opening speed
Opening Tempera
PIR sensor for opening
Safety photocells
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
6A.
(230V) 0.6A
70 W
HTD 8M toothed belt
5Kg.
57 cm/sec. Double doors
from -20 to +70c
Aluminum Swing door

Aluminum Swing Door (1.80 x 2.50) (WxH) with 8mm tempered glass.
Operator
FLY-PB 2100 manufacture by CAME Italy
Max. weight 200 Kg. Per leaf, gear motor runs at 24V
Automatic closure, Obstacle detection stop the door movement.
Adjustment of the speeds of opening, closing and slowing down during closing.
S.T.H.

08100-8
________________________________________________________________________________
Power supply
Frequency
Nominal input
Motor power
Max. motor input
Absorbed input
Max. torque
Opening Time
Closing Time
Operation intermittence
230/24 V.A.C.
50/60 Hz.
0.6 A
24 V.D.C.
6A
Automation 276 W
Accessories 60 W
40 Nxm
from 2 to 5 second
from 1 to 6 second
Continuous duty
from -20 to 70 C
Operated Steel Sliding Gate

Supply, installation of operated Steel Sliding Gates as per the specification given below
Steel Gates (5.00 x 3.00) (WxH) 2 Nos.
Sliding Gate Motor BY -3500
Model 'BY -3500T' from M/s CAME S.P.A., Italy
High performance, rack and pinion type, industrial/ heavy duty sliding gate motor.
A three phase, self-locking electro-mechanical gear motor.
In case of power failure, the locking lever can be released by key manual release system/
Motor pinion
Limit stops.
Operating Limit
Operation
: Gate weight up to 3500 kg.

: By push button
Technical Data:
Duty cycle
Speed
Nominal current
Power
Power supply
Reduction ratio
Torque
Maximum thrust
Weight
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.2.
1.
S.T.H.
50%
10.5 m/min.
2A
0.75 Kw
380/220 V
1/30
135 N.m
3500 (adjustable)
74 Kg.
FABRICATION
Measurements submitted and reviewed during shop drawing review may change
due to site conditions. It is this Subcontractors responsibility to coordinate and
verify, by measurement at the job site, all dimensions affecting the Work.

08100-9
________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Workmanship shall be the best modern shop and field practice known to
recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Joints and intersecting
members shall be accurately fitted to true planes, adequately and securely
fastened and made completely watertight. Cuts shall be machined and fitted to
form permanent hairline joints. Component fastenings shall be concealed of
adequate strength, fabricated from stainless steel or shall be concealed fusion
welds.
3.
Fabricate units from extrusions of profile and size indicated having wall thickness
required by design criteria (minimum 3 mm thick) and complete with rabbets,
interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required to interface
with work of other contracts.
4.
Connecting mullions shall be of special formed extruded aluminum sections

designed to provide a functional split without having a seam joint on the exterior
weathered face of the mullion. The design of the mullion shall provide and
maintain positive air and vapor seals against infiltration and exfiltration, prevent
water entry into the system, permit necessary movement required by the
expansion and contraction contraction of the system and accommodate the
structural creep and deflections of the building structure.
5.
The windows shall be accurately sized to suit the window openings.
6.
Fabricate window sills from refinished sheet aluminum in color and finish to
match adjacent window framing. Accurately construct sills with mitered corners.
Construction of sills shall be to Engineer's approval. All fastenings shall be
concealed and stainless steel.
7.
Form accurate extrusions with clean,

from any defects.
8.
Joints between horizontal and vertical mullions shall be accurately cut and fitted.
Horizontal and vertical mullions shall be in true plane with interior and exterior
faces in line.
9.
Frame members shall be assembled together by means of sealed mechanical

joints produced by fitting formed butyl gaskets of correct profile between the
members and secured by means of self-tapping screws through the wall of one
member into specially formed grooves of the adjoining member. Screws shall
be driven home with gauged force to ensure proper uniform compression of
sealing gaskets and permanent securement of the components in place.
straight, sharply defined profiles free
10. Glazing shall be from the exterior.

11. Framing members shall have integrally formed keyed slots to receive and retain
performed gaskets, seals and thermal separators.
12. Pressure plates shall be designed with integrally formed keyed slots to receive seals
and they shall be of thickness necessary to provide permanent, uniform, sealing
pressures for the glazing units and spandrels, without deformation.
13. Vapour air seal panels of spandrel areas shall be fabricated from galvanized steel
formed and braced as required to resist specified forces and maintain the required
S.T.H.

08100-10
________________________________________________________________________________
convector plenum. Tack weld impaling pins to panels for securement of insulation
by means of speed clips.
14. Fabricate all devices required for erection and adequate anchorage and attachment,
including but not limited to supplementary steel framing, brackets, inserts, clip angles,
anchors, straps, shims, stud bolts, nuts and washers. Attachments shall be designed
to provide for accurate adjustment and to compensate for structure tolerances and
permit unrestricted expansion and contraction of the framing members.
15. Provide inconspicuous, baffled weep holes to properly drain aluminum system
cavities to exterior.
16. Component fastenings, concealed
stainless steel.
PART 3:
3.1.
throughout, of adequate
strength, should be
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1.
Check structural elements and adjoining work on which work is dependent, verify
governing dimensions, floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
between aluminum work and structural frame. Confirm conditions satisfactory before
proceeding. Commencement of work shall be deemed to be acceptance of existing
conditions.
2.
Anchor assemblies to structure, galvanized steel, adjustable to permit accurate

location of wall components, conforming to design criteria and fully detailed on shop
and erection drawings.
3.
Backpaint aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with concrete, surfaces between
dissimilar metals, one coat of bitumastic paint. Touch up field welds in steel with two
coats of zinc chromate paint.
4.
Joints and intersections shall be accurately fitted in true planes, free of distortion,
waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
Prevent damage to metal finish.
5.
Fit flexible seals, tapes, formed neoprene deflectors and gaskets at locations required
to provide water, air, vapor and weathertight junction. Caulk junctions of system
components to themselves and other work with sealant to maintain effective vapour,
air and water barrier. Where joints are 12 mm deep or deeper, back with polyethylene
rope filler. Sealant bead depth shall be 1/2 width but not less than 6 mm. Apply
sealants with pressure gun. Caulk exterior junction of glass to mullion caps at sill and
100 mm up each jamb with neat bead of clear silicone sealant.
6.
Fixing
1.
S.T.H.
Installation and anchoring shall be carried out in accordance with the highest
standards of safety and security.

08100-11
________________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.2.
1.
In the case of elements with movable casements, transoms and mullions, the
outer frames shall be anchored in such a way that the forces from the hinges,
pivots, transoms and mullions are transmitted to the building structure.
CLEANING
At completion of work remove all labels from glass and clean inner and outer faces of
glass and all exposed aluminum surfaces at interior and exterior. Replace scratched
or broken glass and make good any damaged materials, including operating hardware.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS 08200-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3.

Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
06400:
07900:
08700:
08800:
09200:
09900:
Architectural Woodwork
Joint Sealers
Hardware
Glazing
Painting and Coating
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor executing the Work of this contract shall have had a minimum of 5
years experience. Submit proof of experience upon Engineer's request.
1.4.
1.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions

illustrating door construction for the Engineer to review. Show type of core and
construction detail, glazing and stops, opening required, material designation and
door schedules.
2.
Submit two 600 mm x 600 mm samples of solid core doors, and two corner
samples of each type of wood door.
1.5.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1.
Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for
off the ground, under cover storage location.
2.
Do not permit delivery of work to job site until building is sufficiently dry, wet trades
are completed and the moisture readings of surfaces in proposed storage area is
less than 18%.
3.
Materials shall be carefully checked, unloaded, stored and handled to prevent

damage. Store doors flat on level surface. Protect materials with suitable nonstaining waterproof coverings, but allow air circulation at sides.
4.
Wrap doors individually in protective wrapping for shipment and site storage.
1.6.
1.
S.T.H.
SUBMITTALS
EXAMINATION
Make thorough examination of drawings, details and schedules, determine the
intent, extent, materials and be fully cognizant of requirements.

______________________________________________________________________________
1.7.
WARRANTY
1.
Warrant the solid core doors against defects in materials and workmanship in
accordance with the General Conditions but for full lifetime of original installation.
2.
Make defects good promptly, during warranty period, by replacing defective

doors, in finish to match original door finish.
3.
Without limiting the generality of the word, "defects" shall include bubbling,
delamination of faces, cores or edges, telegraphing of core through to face, warp or
twist across the diagonal, and telegraphing of core. "Replace" as used herein
includes installing hardware, finishing, "hanging and fitting.
1.8.
FIRE RATED DOORS
1.
All doors that are required to be fire-rated by jurisdictional authorities shall be

provided, whether indicated or not in the contract documents.
PART 2:
2.1.
1.
2.2.
1.
MATERIALS
SOLID CORE PANELLED DOORS:
1.
All interior doors and wardrobe cupboards to be mahogany wood veneer

paneled doors or approved equal.
2.
Stiles and Rails to be solid laminated wood with first veneer in 0.8mm
thickness natural Mahogany glued under high pressure and second veneer
in Mahogany 0.8mm thickness glued and laid transversely with first veneer.
Total thickness to be 40mm.
3.
Panels to be 22mm thick MDF panels of 720 kg. density with shaped
molding at perimeter of panels finished on both sides with 0.4mm thick
Mahogany Veneer, glued under high pressure.
4.
Supply and install 22mm x 28mm solid Mahogany wood edge decorative
profiled molding between rails and stiles and panels.
5.
All doors and frames to be stained
6.
All doors and frames to be refinished and pre-machined for butts and
strikes and to be supplied with matching stops, casings and architraves.
FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

GENERAL CONDITIONS:
1.
S.T.H.
PRODUCTS
45mm Solid core doors, except as specified otherwise herein. Size doors
from (1.6 mm) clearance of heads and jambs and (10 mm) at sills.

______________________________________________________________________________
2.
2.
Incorporate solid wood blocking at locations where hinges, locksets, closers,

and similar hardware is installed and applied.
3.
Indicate top and hinge side on each door.
4.
Fabricate of framed construction with wood core 30mm minimum top and
bottom rails and 75mm stiles.
5.
Prepare all doors for finish hardware as per the approved hardware
schedule.
6.
All adhesives shall be waterproof.
7.
Outside edges of top and bottom rails of doors shall be factory sealed with
one coat of sealer.
8.
All doors to be installed with hardwood frames.
SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS:

1.
3.
4.
CUT OUT OPENINGS:

1.
Glass and louvers shall not be closer than (125 mm) to an edge and shall
be fully framed or blocked. Wood stops and moldings shall be compatible
with face veneer and attached to one side only.
2.
Prepare doors in factory to receive glass lights. Fit loose stops and tack in
place. Stops shall match face veneers.
FIRE RATED DOORS:

1.
5.
Solid Particle Core: Laminated wood frame core construction comprising

solid particle board core with minimum total thickness of stiles, top and
bottom rails to be 13/4 in to AWI section 1300, NWWPA IS - 1 standards.
Doors shall be incombustible solid core type bearing Labels for class "C"
3/4 hours, and class "B" 1 - 1/2 hours.
VENEERED DOORS:
1.
Door faces 5 - ply plywood with approved mahogany hardwood face veneer.
2.
Minimum (19 mm) hardwood edging to be of same species as face veneer.
3.
Premium grade veneers shall be used for doors to be stained and

varnished. Veneers shall be slip - matched of the species of hardwood
specified and each face shall be made of tight and smoothly cut veneers.
4.
Finishing: One coat filler/stain followed by a coat of clear vinyl sealer, clear
topcoat and final clear topcoat, to all veneered doors. Fire-rated doors to
receive a clear fire resistant varnish as per requirements of the local
Authorities.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-1
____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes combination swing/slide manual intensive care unit/critical care
(ICU/CCU) entrance door assemblies.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 08 Section Glazing for glazing requirements for ICU/CCU entrance
doors.
1.03
REFERNCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA, American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
C. CGSB, Canadian General Standards Board.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles and finished for entrance doors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting
heights and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples for Verification: For type of exposed finish required, prepared on Sample of
size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If
finished involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the
full ranged of variations expected.
1. Size: 300-mm long sections of extrusions or formed shapes.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specifies in Quality Assurance Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of Architects and Owners
and other information specified.
E. Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems to include in maintenance
manuals.
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-2
____________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the entrance door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required
for this Project.
B. Manufacturers Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain entrance doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes for
systems aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another and to adjoining construction.
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or
more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing or in service performance.
E. Welding Standards: Comply with AWS D1.2, Structural Welding CodeAluminum..
F. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Requirements.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify entrance door openings by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.07
COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks
for entrance doors. Concrete, reinforcement and form work requirements are specified
in Division 3- Concrete.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace components of the entrance door system that fail in materials or workmanship
within special warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Lateral deflection of glass lite edges in excess of 1/175 of their length or 75 mm,
whichever is less.
2. Faulty operation of hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal use.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-3
____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with standards indicated below:
1. Extruded: ASTM B 221M.
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.
3. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A.10.
B. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section Glazing.
C. Sealants and Joints Fillers: Refer to Division 7 Section Joint Sealants for joints at
perimeter of entrance system.
PART 3 - ICU/CCU ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES

3.01
ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Provide manufacturers standard ICU/CCU entrance door assembly,
complete with doors, sideline framing and accessories as indicated. Comply with the
following:
1. Number of Doors: As indicated.
2. Emergency Breakaway Capability: As indicated.
B. Opening Force: Provide entrance doors that require no more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to stop
door movement.
3.02
COMPONENTS
A. Doors: Provide manufacturers standard 44.5-mm thick glazed doors with minimum
3.2-mm thick, extruded tubular site and rail members. Fabricate corners with
mechanically fastened reinforcing brackets or by welding Incorporate concealed tie0
rods that span full length of top and bottom rails.
1. Glazing Stops and Gasket: Provide manufacturers standard sharp-on, extrudedaluminum, square glazing stops and preformed resilient glazing gaskets.
2. Stile Design: Medium stile; 89-mm nominal width.
3. Rail Design: 89-mm nominal height, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-4
____________________________________________________________________________________
4. Mounting Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stiles and rails.
B. Framing Members: Fabricated from extruded-aluminum or formed-aluminum sheet or
plate.
1. Main Extrusions: Minimum wall thickness of 3.2 mm.
2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum wall thickness of 1.6 mm.
3. mounting Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for sidelites; match stiles and rails.
C. Headers: Fabricated from minimum of 3.2-mm thick, extruded aluminum or formedaluminum sheet or plate. Conceal roller track in header, providing access by means of
hinged or removable access panel to permit service and adjustment. Secure panel to
prevent unauthorized access.
1. Concealed: Fabricate header to match depth of framing and to extend full width of
door opening.
2. Surface Mounted: Manufacturers standard case, sized to extend full width of door
opening.
3. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 45 kg. per leaf.
D. Carrier Assembly and Overhead Roller Track: Manufacturers standard carrier
assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered ballbearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track or ball-bearing
center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered continuous roller track.
Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.
1. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each
active leaf.
E. Glazing:
1. Tempered/laminated safety glass: ASTM C1172, 8 mm thick laminated.
2. Temporary glass presence markers: Easily removable, non-residue depositing.
3. Glazing tape: Pre formed and pre-shimmed tape, paper release, colour as selected
by Consulatant.
4. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard compression types, replaceable,
molded or extruded, that maintains uniform pressure and water tight seal.
5. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturers standard elastomeric types.
6. Glazing and rebate primers, sealants, sealers and cleaners: Compatible with each
other. Type as recommended by glass manufacturer.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturers standard; compatible with adjacent
materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-5
____________________________________________________________________________________
G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding; compatible adjacent materials.
1. Reinforcement: Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware
application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine
screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless
3.03
HARDWARE
A. Heavy-Duty Hardware: Provide units as indicated in sizes, number, and type
recommended by manufacturer for entrances required. Finish exposed parts to match
door finish, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows panel to
swing out in the direction of egress to a full 90 degrees from sliding mode as indicated.
Maximum force to open panel shall be 222 N.
1. Release Position: Doors fully open.
C. Limit Arm: Provide limit arm to control doors in the swing mode.
D. Manual Flush Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, edge-mortised, lever-extension-type flush
bolts. Locate flush bolts at bottom of inactive leaves of ICU/CCU doors.
E. Recessed Pulls: Manufacturers standard units.
F. Surface Pulls: Manufacturers standard units.
3.04
FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes and
thickness specified and to comply with indicated standards.
B. Prefabrication: Provide entrance doors as prefabricated assemblies. Complete
fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application and other work before shipment
to Project site.
1. Do not drill and tap surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at
Project site.
2. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and
grinding of metalwork. For hardware, perform these operations before applying
finished.
3. Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations,
before finishing.
4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchors and connection
devices.
5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with end coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-6
____________________________________________________________________________________
C. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before
finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to
greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to
maximize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides
from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
D. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass
indicated according to GANAs Glazing Manual.
E. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
F. Hardware: Install hardware, except surface-mounted hardware at fabrication plant.
Remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation
at Project site.
G. Doors: Fabricate doors in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed
loads and for installing hardware. Factory assemble door and frame units.
H. Framing: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies in configuration indicated
with welded or mechanical joints according to manufacturers standards. Provide
subframes and reinforcement of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a
complete system to support required loads.
3.05
ALUMINUM FINISHED
A. Comply with NAAMMs Metal Finished Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
for recommendations for applying and designating finished.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish; etched, medium matte; Anodic.
Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker complying with
AAMA 611.
PART 4 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

4.01
SYSTEM
A. Heavy Duty Door Operator: Design is based on self contained, low pressure electrohydraulic power. Operator to be manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed at
the list of manufacturers.
B. Door operating equipment shall be complete with electro mechanical motor gear box.
Provide 3 position (off-on) switch. System shall operate between -10 deg C and 50 deg
C.
4.02
REQUIREMENTS
A. Functional Requirements:
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-7
____________________________________________________________________________________
1. Equipment shall be designed to operate swing doors up to weight of 100 kg.
2. Opening Speed:
a. Door shall be field adjusted to back check as required in Table 1 of
ANSI/BHMA A 156.19.
b. Opening speed to fully open shall be 4 seconds or longer.
B. Hold Open: Door shall be field adjusted to remain fully open for not less than 5
seconds or more than 30 seconds.
C. Closing Speed:
1. Doors shall be field adjusted to close 90 to 10 in 3 seconds or longer as required
in Table 1 of ANSI/BHMA A 156.19.
2. Doors shall close from 10 to fully close in not less than 1.5 seconds.
3. Force required to prevent door from opening or closing shall not exceed 7 kg
applied 25 mm from latch edge of door at any point in opening or closing cycle.
4. During power failure, doors shall open with manual pressure not exceeding 11.3 kg
at point 25 mm from latch edge of door.
5. Doors shall be equipped with signs visible from either side, instructing user as to
operation and function of door.
D. Requirements:
1. Provide header complete with full housing, finish match door frame finish.
2. Operator shall be activated by push button switches on either sides as indicated.
Switched shall be located no more than 1200 mm from floor. Switches shall bear
universal handicap logo visible to all types of traffic.
PART 5- EXECUTION
5.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install automatic door operators, controls and accessories for doors indicated in
accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer written instructions.
B. Doors shall operate manually as though with manual door closers, without damage to
automatic door components, in event of power failure or in event of power termination.
C. Co-ordinate this work with applicable sections.
D. Power supply to each door operator and wiring shall be provided by Division 26Eletrical. Make connections at operators and at control panel and supply and install
each electrical work between operators and activating controls. Comply with
requirements of Division 26- Electrical. All wiring shall be concealed and where
exposed shall be run in conduit. Location of exposed wiring shall be subject to
Consultants approval.
S.T.H.

SPECIALTY DOORS
08300-8
____________________________________________________________________________________
5.02

A. Test and adjust operators and controls smooth and proper operation.
B. Upon completion of Work of this Section, remove from Site all debris, equipment and
excess material resulting from Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

08460-1
__________________________________________________________________________
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. WORK INCLUDED: Furnish complete automatic swing door system, as specified, that
has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance criteria stated
by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
B. RELATED WORK:
1. Masonry: Division 4, applicable sections.
2. Electrical: Division 16, applicable sections.
3. Glass; Hardware: Division 8, applicable sections.
4. Perimeter Sealants; Insulation: Division 7, applicable sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ZH 1/494 Germany Guidelines on power operated doors,windows and gates.
B. Manufacture and Test Code of Practice for Automatic doors in Emergency Rescue
Routes , Issue 10/1984 Germany .
C. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE:
1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test.
D.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS:

1. ASTM B221: Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes.
E.
THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION:

1. AA Aluminum Finishes Manual.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's complete product data, standard details and
instructions for all material provided in this specification.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, product

components including anchorage, accessories, finish and glazing details (where
required),necessary wiring and electrical requirements.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Submit the following:

1. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Data.
2. Warranty document as specified herein.
D.
Samples: Reasonably sized to adequetely represent materials and finishes.

A.
INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS: Installer experienced to perform work of this section

who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project for
at least (5) five years and who is acceptable to product manufacturer.
S.T.H.

08460-2
__________________________________________________________________________
B. MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer to have minimum (10) ten years
successful experience in the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for this
project. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during installation,
approving acceptable installer and approving application method.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: Units to be warranted against defect in material and
workmanship for a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights owner may
have under Contract Documents.
B. DISTRIBUTOR'S WARRANTY: One year warranty: Labor and transportation charges for
defective parts replacement.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that the orther trades are complete with their required work before installing the
automatic sliding door system. Verify actual dimensions/openings by field measurements
before fabrication and record on shop drawings. Coordinate with fabrication and
construction schedule to avoid construction delays.
B. Mounting surfaces shall be plumb,straight and secure;substrates shall be of proper
dimension and material;material on which the door is anchored to shall be capable of
supporting the automatic door system and associated loads .
C. Coordinate installation with glass , glazing and electrical work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. ORDERING AND DELIVERY: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and lead time
requirements. Delivery shall be in factory's original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification labels intact.
B. STORAGE AND PROTECTION: Store materials in a dry, protected ,well-vented area.
Immediately report any damaged material to carrier that made the delivery and note such
damage on the carriers freight bill of lading.Provide protection from exposure to harmful
weather conditions and vandalism.
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Proposals for substitutions will be accepted from approved bidders only and must be
submitted a minimum of ten ( 10 ) working days prior to the bid date. The proposed
substitution shall meet the performance and quality standards of this specification.
S.T.H.

08460-3
__________________________________________________________________________
PART ll - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
Automatic sliding door(s) furnished and installed shall be as per Approved
Manufacturers.
2.02
A.
EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURED DOOR UNITS: Shall include the surface mounted
,electromechanical self lubricating rack and pinion swing door operator with
microprocessor control, header , connecting hardware, actuating controls and
integrated program switch.Radar Motion detectors and safety sensors for push and
pull side to be supplied with the system , with lengths to suit door widths. All operator
components shall be factory assembled , fully adjusted and tested.The system shall be
installed and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.A complaince
inspection shall be completed after the operating system is completely installed .The
Door units and frames shall be of sufficient design and construction to accommodate
automatic door operation.
B.
OPERATOR: The Swing door operator shall be ED 250 Full energy with upgrade
cards,heavy duty operator unit, for doors with load bearing capacity 250 Kg, door
widths upto 1600mm and opening angle of 110 degrees. The drive unit should have an
adjustable closing force of Size EN 2-4.The microprocessor control is 1224vDC,800Ma,AC, The system to have degree of protection IP 20. The operator shall
have the following dimensions 685mm width ,70mm height, and overall depth of
130mm.
C.
OPERATOR PARAMETERS: The Operator shall have the following functions

incorporated in it .
Function programs : Off,automatic, permanent open, adjustable backcheck,adjustable
delayed closing action,connection for infra-red safety sensors for pull and push side,
connection for electromechanical lock if needed. Where specified for Access control
doors, the operator to be compatible with 24VDC/0.3Amp fail safe electromechanical
lock.The opeartor shall also monitor the open/ close signals.
Where specified use door acitvation by Magic switches for operation theaters, Elbow
switches for corridors, card readers for access control, sensors on both sides for
corridors.
Selectable performance functions :
Adjustable opening time >= 1.5 secs,
Adjustable closing time>=3 secs,
Adjustable hold-open time 0-30 secs
2.04
RELATED WORK REQUIREMENTS
A.
ELECTRICAL: 230 VAC, 60 cycle, 1 phase, 15 amp.
B.
GLASS AND GLAZING: Glass stops, glazing vinyl and setting blocks for field glazing
as per Safety Glazing standard ANSI Z97.1.2. General contractor to coordinate
S.T.H.

08460-4
__________________________________________________________________________
acquisition of glass in thickness and type in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations for prescribed design.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify that base conditions previously
installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation according to
manufacturer's instructions. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to
the proper and timely completion of work. Do not start work until all negative
conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and manufacturer.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
GENERAL: Install door units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of
frames or sash with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor
in place.
B.
DISSIMILAR MATERIALS: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar Materials by

separating aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion
or electrolytic action contact points.
C.
WEATHER-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION: Install header and framing members in a bed of

sealant or with joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and
other components of construction.
D.
ELECTRICAL: General or electrical contractor to install all wiring to operator on a

separate circuit breaker routed into header.
3.03
CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A.
CLEANING: After installation, installer to take following steps:

1.
Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
2.
Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of
debris.
3.
Repair or replace damaged installed products.
4.
Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum
condition and safety.
B.
ADJUSTMENT: Installer to adjust operator and controls for optimum condition and
safety.
C.
ADVISE CONTRACTOR: Of precautions required through the remainder of the

construction period, to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other
than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-1
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.02
SUMMARY
This Section includes aluminum-framed skylights and sloped glazing with the following
glass glazing retained by field-installed pressure caps on four sides.
1.03
A. Provide metal-framed skylights, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without
failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural Loads.
2. Thermal Movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame
5. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent constructions.
B. Failure includes the following:
1. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. Water leakage.
3. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
4. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
5. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
6. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments and other components.
C. Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads, Snow Loads and Seismic Loads; As indicated by structural design
data on Drawings.
2. Load Combinations: Calculate according to requirements of applicable code

D. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane:
S.T.H.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-2
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a. Span Up to 6m: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 25.4 mm, whichever is smaller.
b. Span Exceeding 6 m: limited to 1/240 of clear span.
c. Glass Edge Deflection: Limit edge deflection of individual glass lites to 19 mm.
E. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members are
laterally braced by cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural
member that is braced. Glazing does not provide lateral support.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and night time-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100def
C), material surfaces.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles and finishes for metal-framed skylights.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylight. Include plans, elevations, sections, details
and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturers
standard sizes.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for metal-framed skylights.
E. Maintenance Data: For metal-framed skylights to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

A. Installer Qualifications: Entity capable of assuming engineering responsibility and
performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for metal frames skylight systems
including the following:
a.
S.T.H.
Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturers

standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and
submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturers standard
assemblies.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-3
_____________________________________________________________________________________
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications established
requirements for skylights aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetics
effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines to one another, and to adjoining
construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification
by one or more methods including testing conducted by an independent testing agency
and in-service performance.
1.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architects approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, Structural

Welding Code- Aluminum.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of metal-framed skylights that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finished and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage.
2. Warranty Period: Ten Years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components on which finished fail within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include normal weathering.
S.T.H.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking and
fading of finished.
2.
Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-4
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Systems:Naturalite HP-1175, or equal, 44.5 mm by 171.5 mm thermal aluminum
system using HP-1103 rafters and HP-1103 rafters and HP-1106 purlins.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 M.
2. Extruded Bards, Rods, Profiles and Tubes: ASTM B 221 M.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
C. Pressure Caps: Manufacturers standard aluminum components that mechanically
retain glazing.
1.
Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturers standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.
E. Anchors, Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturers standard, corrosion-resistant,
nonstaining and nonbleeding; compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M, 300 series stainless-steel screws.
2. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads or vibration, use self-locking devices.
3. Exposed Fasteners:
a. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk screw heads.
b. Finish exposed portions to match framing system.
4. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers and sleeves of material and type
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
F. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot0dio galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), hot-dip zinc
coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
H. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.457-mm thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M
type recommended in writing by manufacturer.
S.T.H.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-5
_____________________________________________________________________________________
I.
Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturers standard aluminum components not

less than 0.762 mm thick.
J. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard.

K. Framing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2.03
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: Fritted glass as specified in Division 08 Section Glazing.
B. Spacers, Setting Blocks and gaskets: Manufacturers standard elastomeric types.
C. Glazing Sealant: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2.04
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: Specified in Division 07 Section Building Insulation.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per
coat.
2.05
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum components before finishing.
B. Fabricate aluminum
characteristics:
components that,
when assembled, have the following
1. Profiles those are sharp, straight and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints,
condensation occurring within framing members and moisture migrating within
skylight to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
C. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous
component.
D. Weld aluminum components as required to receive fasteners threads.
S.T.H.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-6
_____________________________________________________________________________________
E. Weld aluminum components in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to
minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides
from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
F. Factory-Glazed Units:
1. Factory install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section Glazing.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according
to Shop Drawings.
2.06
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMMs Metal Finished Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Class II, Clears Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish, etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker, complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impending movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
S.T.H.

SKYLIGHTS
08600-7
_____________________________________________________________________________________
7. Seal joints water tight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.
C. Install continuous aluminum still closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked
and sealed or welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.
D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevation.
F. Install glazing as specifies in Division 08 Section Glazing.
G. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 07 Section Building Insulation.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 0.8 mm where surfaces abut in line,
edge to edge at corners or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned
surfaces by less than 76 mm; otherwise, limit offset to 3.2 mm.
2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 3.2 mm in 3.7 m
but no greater than 13 mm over total length.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
1.1
A.
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Scope
It is the intent that this section shall provide for the supply of all items of finishing hardware
and adequately service this project as indicated in the Hardware Schedule and the
drawings.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
Supply of finishing hardware as scheduled including Hardware Schedule-Hardware Sets
reviewing in conjunction to latest revision of Drawings and Specifications.
1.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Door hardware and furniture shall be approved types, suitable for the location
and the
intended function of the doors, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant
Standards.
B.
Submit Product Information, and Control Samples if directed.
C.
Verify correct handing, internal external application, compliance to fire rating requirements, if
applicable, and suitability of Hardware with the door type and door/frame construction, floor
levels, door swing limits for all Hardware items before commencing.
D.
Include fixings, striker plates, shims, and escutcheons for a complete installation, whether
indicated or not.
Coordinate the work of this trade with the base-structure, services and adjacent work.
Coordinate with:
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
WOOD DOORS
TEMPERED GLASS DOORS, SCREENS, PANELS AND BALUSTRADES
ALUMINUM FRAMED INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR GLAZED AND

LOUVERED SCREENS, DOORS AND FRAMES.
CURTAINS WALL, EXTERIOR ENTRANCES
SLIDING DOORS
SIGNAGE
ELECTRICAL SERVICES for power and control wiring for electric, electromagnetic and electronic strikes, locks, detectors, controllers and similar
devices.
SECURITY SERVICESDRAWINGS for locations and extent.
MATERIAL/PRODUCTS SCHEDULE for finishes selections.
DOOR SCHEDULE.
FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT for doors, if applicable.
ACOUSTIC REPORT for doors, if applicable.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 2
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.4
REFERENCES
Comply with the current edition of all relevant standards to include:
No. of Doc.
Title
EN 1670
Corrosion resistance
EN 12209
Mechanically operated locks, latches and locking plates.
EN 1303
Cylinders for locks
EN 1935
Single axis hinges
EN 1154
Controlled door closing devices
EN 1155
Elec. Powered hold open devices for swing doors
EN 1158
Door coordinator devices
EN 1906
Lever handles and knob furniture
EN 1125
Panic exit devices operated by a horizontal bar
EN 1527
Hardware for sliding doors and folding doors
EN 12365
Gaskets and weather stripping
EN 1634
Fire Testing of door and shutter assemblies.
The BHIF (Builders Hardware Industry Federation) code of practice for hardware for timber
fire and escape doors.
All fire and life safety codes shall be met as required by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Prepare and supply 6 copies of a completely detailed hardware schedule. The schedule will
list all the doors by number, size, hand and degree of opening.
B.
Indicate the handling of each door and the degree of swing. In case of pairs of doors,
indicate the active door. Schedule to indicate the material, finish, dimensions, and details of
fastenings for each hardware.
C.
The schedule shall indicate the manufacturers name and the article numbers.
D.
Submit samples as each hardware type is specified finish and the appropriate fasteners.
E.
Provide with templates and hardware schedule, original catalogue cuts of all the hardware
scheduled.
F.
Submit template information to the contractor for distribution to related trades.
G.
Submit a key schedule for review with the consultant and the client.
H.
Approved samples may be incorporated in the works unless otherwise instructed by the
architect.
I.
Submit affidavits to verify that hardware in each case has been installed in the correct
location and that it is operating correctly.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The supplier of finishing hardware shall be regularly involved in the sale and distribution of
Builders Hardware for commercial projects of this nature.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 3
_______________________________________________________________________________
B.
The supplier shall employ a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (A.H.C.) or Dip GAI
(Guild of Architectural Ironmongers) to supervise all the issues related to doors and doors
hardware. The Hardware consultant will be responsible for architectural submittals, samples
submission, to review Hardware sets in conjunction with Drawings, specifications, statuary
rules, international standards such as Life Safety code and Disability Act. The Hardware
consultant should also look after material deliveries to site, making sure right material is
delivered, marked and packed.
1.7

The supply shall ensure that deliver of proprietary packaged products in the manufacturers
original packages and containers with labels intact and legible, including installation
instructions, templates and detailed delivery dockets. Packaging of hardware shall be (in):
1.8
Complete individual sets for each door.
Separate dust and moisture proof packages.
Clearly labelled to show intended locations.
Complete with required fixings.
WARRANTY
All hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of issue of
completion certificate. Lever handles to be guaranteed for a period of five years from the
date of issue of completion certificate. Material shall be covered against manufacturing
defects or breakage, will-full damage excluded.
The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:
Correct selection for required location performance
Correct functioning of moving parts.
Structural adequacy.
Chipping, fading, excessive wear or delamination or other deterioration of finishes.
Fixing and connectors including stripped threads and damaged heads.
Integrity of seals.
Sagging, slackness or looseness of knobs and handles due to wear, relaxation of

springs, stripped threads, or any other cause.
The warranty shall include an undertaking that spare parts and replacement items will be
available for sale off-the-shelf, or with a lead time not exceeding four weeks from date of
order, for a period not less than the warranty period.
Warranty shall be accompanied by a current retail price list properly identified and dated.
The warranty shall include an undertaking with respect to price control for the following
items:
S.T.H.
Replacement keys.
Replacement cylinders.

HARDWARE
08700- 4
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.9
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Provide maintenance data, parts lists and manufacturers instructions for installation and
maintenance for each type of hardware including door closer, lock case, exit devices, etc.
B.
Provide 3 nos. copies of catalogues for all hardware used for incorporation into maintenance
manual. Only original catalogue shall be used.
1.10
SELECTION
In as much as the items in the hardware schedule represent the Architects / Engineers
selection pertaining to weight, method of fixing, design, finish, and function, alternatives will
only be considered if, in their opinion, it equals or exceeds the set standard and quality of
the hardware.
PART 2:
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Products listed in the hardware schedule are from the manufactures listed
below.
Dorma GmbH +Co KG
P.O. Box 4009
D-58247 Ennepetal, Germany
Dorma Architectural Hardware
DORMA Drive, Drawer AC, USA.
Dorma Gulf Door Control FZE
PO Box 17268
Jebel Ali Free Zone South
Dubai, UAE
Dorma Productions GmbH
No.2 Jalan Terusan, Jurong
Singapore 619285
National Guard Products (NCP)
P.O.Box 753430 (38175)
4985 E. Raines Road
Memphis, TN 38118
GIESSE s.p.a.
Via Leonardo Da Vinci
320/414 40060 Villa Fontana di
Medicinia Bologna Italy
Trimco
Triangle Brass Manufacturing
Company, INC.
3528 Emery St. PO Box 23277
LA, California 90023, U.S.A.
S.T.H.
Lock cases, Cylinders, Door

Closers and Floor Closers, Lever
handles, Pull handles, Floor stops,
TV Locks, , Door Contact etc.
Door Closers, Exit Devices.
Hinges
Door Closers, etc.
Weather Strip, Threshold
Flush Bolts for Aluminium Doors
Door pulls, push plates, Kick/Mop

plates, Dust proof strikes, flush
bolts and accessories.

HARDWARE
08700- 5
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.2
HARDWARE ITEMS
A.
HINGES
Hinges and screws shall be suitable approved types and sizes.
Submit product information, and Control Sample if directed.
Coordinate with door and frame manufacturer for correct location of hinge recesses and
screw holes.
Hinges shall be Dorma Type JC603 5 knuckle ball bearing but hinges, template drilled,
suitable for timber and metal doors, to be tested for performance as per ANSI/BHMA
Grade1. Unless otherwise specified, hinge size shall be 4.5x4x3.4mm with hospital tip
Where specified for external outward opening doors, JC603 NRP hinges shall be used.
Aluminium hinges are not acceptable.
For Aluminium doors use Dorma LM hinges type B22, 2 or 3 parts hinges as per weight and
size of door with Eccentric bearing bins with door clearance adjustment feature after
installation.
B.
DOOR CLOSERS
Door closers and controllers shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the
intended function of the doors, including size and weight of the door, door swings and wind
pressure, in accordance with the product information and relevant standards. All door
closers to comply with EN 1154.
Where the Fire rated doors are to be used by public, door closer should be Cam-action
mechanism, to comply with the maximum opening force needed of 22.5 N at 30-60 degrees
as per approved document M 2004 and simultaneously comply to minimum closing force as
per BS 8300:2001 and comply to DIN SPEC 1104/CEN/TR 15894-2009-12 (DIN SPEC
1104 advises the application of manually-operated fittings that reduce the opening
resistance of a door by around 40% in the sweep range from 2 to 60 degrees thus to
facilitate effortless door operation for children, the elderly and disabled people by enabling
door to be opened with 40% less effort as compared to convention door closers)
Submit product information, and Controlled Samples if required by the consultant.
Where specified use Door closers Dorma Type TS92 with Cushion Block size 3 with Slide
track and arm. Suitable for fire and smoke check doors. Door closer to have two
independent values force closing speed adjustment. Door closer to be CE marked.
For heavy or external doors where specified, use Cam-Action door closer Dorma type TS93,
EN 2-5, 5 and 7 as per width and weight parameters of the door. Closing speed and latching
speed shall be controlled by separate concealed key operated valves. External doors facing
high wind conditions and internal doors likely to be opened with high forces shall be having
back check to protect the door and adjacent wall damage. Door closer to be CE marked.
The door closers should be installed on the push side of doors opening to exterior. Where
floor stops cannot be used, use Dorma Type 8616 door closers with Parallel Arm door Saver
for push side installation and Integra Stop Arm for pull side installation to control opening of
the door and prevent damage to the door leaf and adjacent walls.
For Non public areas, use TS73V, rack and pinion spring strength adjustable overhead
closer, non handed, hydraulic control from 180 degree, thermo-constant, pressure relief
valve, separate sweep and latch value, self adjusting back-check for standard or fame
installation on interior doors up to 1100mm wide doors. finish as specified in hardware
schedule. For external or heavy doors use TS83, rack and pinion door closer.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 6
_______________________________________________________________________________
For corridor doors, and doors having public area on both sides, use concealed Cam-Action
door closer Dorma type ITS96 integrated in the door leaf or frame, tested to EN1154A, with
rapidly decreasing opening torque. Closing strength, closing speed and latch action
adjustable, non handed, with slide channel G96N20. For non fire rated doors, where
required, use hold open unit integrated in slide channel arm RFG96N20. For fire rated
doors, where required, use Electro-mechanical hold open EMF 24V DC tested to EN1155.
For double doors where required, use Door co-ordinator G96GSR integrated in slide
channel arm tested to EN1158. complete with slide track and arm. Door closer to be CE
marked.
Door closers to have built in manual hold open feature where required except for fire rated
doors. Uses integral electromechanically hold open function with closer where hold open is
needed in fire doors. Electromechanical hold open door closers need to close the door
automatically in case of fire alarm or power interruption.
Double rebated doors to have door closers with integral co-ordinators GSR for sequential
closing of doors.
Door closer to be of EN size 2-4 for doors up to 1100mm wide and 80kg weight.
Door closer to be of EN size 2-6 for doors up to 1400mm wide and 120kg weight.
Door closer to be of EN size 7 for door up to 1600mm wide and 160kg weight.
Where practicable, surface mounted closers shall be concealed from view by mounting
inside rooms and stairwells. Do not fix closer to the visible side of public corridors, foyers or
the like. In case it is desirable door closer not to be seen from both sides, Concealed type
door closer to be used which is installed inside the cut out on frame or door and the closer is
not visible from both sides of the door.
C.
FLOOR CLOSERS
Floor closers and controllers shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the
intended function of the doors, including size and weight of the door, door swings and wind
pressure, in accordance with the product information and relevant standards. Floor closers
to conform to EN 1154.
Submit product information, and Controlled Samples if required.
Where need, the floor closer to be installed with Terrazzo pans and interchangeable
spindles to allow insertion of floor finish material in the pan to avoid sight of cover plates.
Sealing compound to be used where there is chance of water reaching to the door closer
body.
For door where floor closer is indicated or required, the floor closer to be Universal nonhanded floor spring Dorma type BTS 80. Floor closer to be suitable for single and double
door up to 300kg of door leaf weight. Floor closer to have adjustable closing speed,
adjustable closing action, back check and hold open feature.
The cover plate to be stainless steel, suitable for both left and right handed doors. Single
action doors to have spindle with 3 degree offset for securely closing the door in windy
conditions.
Where need, the floor closer to be installed with Terrazzo pans and interchangeable
spindles to allow insertion of floor finish material in the pan to avoid sight of cover plates.
Sealing compound to be used where there is chance of water reaching to the door closer
body.
When used for fire rated doors, floor closer have to be tested and certified by accredited
internationally known fire testing laboratory. In case of hold open or free swing feature in
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 7
_______________________________________________________________________________
floor closer, the closer should close the door automatically in case of fire alarm or power
interruption.
The selection of the floor is to be considered in conjunction with the manufacturers
recommendations for selecting the right size for the floor closer.
Floor closers to be installed on fire rated doors are to be CE Marked.
D.
LEVER HANDLE SETS

Lever handles shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended function of
the doors.
Lever handle to be Dorma Premium 8101 handle, with long back plate 7021L Dorma
Premium 70021 L WC for water closet doors with indicator. Sets to conform to EN 1906
category 4 for high level of usage in public area, with 5-year guarantee. The lever handle,
roses and escutcheons to be in satin stainless steel finish.
Lever handles to be with 8mm spindle, secured by non reversible spring clips into serrations
located on spindle. The back plates to be of steel base and have extended depth, strong
enough to transmit forces to the door leaf, and have a compensating collar with spring clip
for easy but secure snap in installation. Fixing bolts to be back-to-back fixing, M5 bolts, with
steel support lugs for precise retention of the assembly position and slip-free fitting of the
furniture set to the door leaf.
.
E.
PULL HANDLES
Pull handles shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended function of
the doors.
Pull handles to be Dorma TG9355, TG9356, with single side and back to back fixing as
specified.
F.
MORTISE LOCKS
Locks and latches shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended
function in accordance with the relevant standards.
Locks and latches to conform to EN 12209.
Samples if directed.
Submit product information, and Control
Unless otherwise indicated, locksets and latch-sets shall be mortise type. Use only
proprietary strike plates nominated for the required locks or latches.
All latch-sets and locksets shall be from one manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Locks to be Dorma type 132 for dead bolt, Dorma type 771 for non fire rated doors, Dorma
752F for fire rated doors, Dorma type 775 for Bathroom/WCs. For doors where only latching
is required use, Dorma type 115-latch lock. For narrow style doors use, Dorma type 952,
type 985 roller latch and type 917 dead bolt where specified.
Lock case to be sealed and zinc plated. Nickel Plated Latch and/or bolt. Bolt projection to be
double throw, 20mm, with 8mm square steel follower mounted in drawn steel bushes.
Springs and other moving parts not fabricated from brass shall be corrosion-resistant steel
alloy or stainless steel. The forends to be 24mm width, square edges, of stainless steel
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 8
_______________________________________________________________________________
material in satin finish. Locks to be for euro profile cylinders with 55mm back set. For narrow
stile doors the lock back set to be less then or equal to 35mm. Latch should be steel
material for Fire rated doors.
High frequency doors should have special bronze-bushed self-adjusting clamp follower for
Rattle-free lever handles and maintenance free, lubricated silent pattern latch.
G.
KEY AND CYLINDERS

Cylinders shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended function in
accordance with the relevant standards.
Cylinders to conform to EN 1303
Submit product information, and Control Samples if directed.
Cylinders to be Dorma 410 Euro-profile double cylinders, Dorma 430 Euro-profile
Knob/Thumb turn cylinder, Dorma 452 Euro-profile Single cylinders.
Cylinders to be Euro-Profile keyed under a master key system, each cylinder to have 3
change keys. The cylinders should have protection against picking, scanning, and
manipulation. The cylinder should have a solid steel cam and special key way.
Master keying to be done in factory and records maintained. Access to additional keys to be
through authorised representative of owner only. The master key system should have 3
keys per cylinder and master keys based on key schedule approved by the consultant. The
system should have a capability of expansion of 50% for the future.
Where specified cylinders to have thumb-turn on one side. Exit devices which have a trim,
should have single cylinder.
Cylinders shall be interchangeable between different manufacturers.
Cylinders shall be solid brass, and tumbler pins shall be nickel alloy steel.
Cylinders and keys shall be code stamped with an identification number in an approved
location. Verify identification numbers with the Principal before stamping.
H.
FLUSH BOLTS
Flush bolts shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the intended
function, in accordance with the Product Information.
Flush bolts to be TRIMCO 3917 for Metal doors and TRIMCO 3913 for Timber doors.
Automatic flush bolt to be Trimco 3810 for Metal Doors and 3815 for Timber doors.
Inactive leaf of double doors except those having exit devices, to have manual bolts.
Rebated doors or doors having astragal where closing of the leaves is controlled by door
coordinator, the flush bolt should be automatic type that bolts the door automatically when
closed. Frame at the top to have flush bolt strike and flooring at the bottom to have Dust
Proof strike-TRIMCO 3911 to receive the bolts.
Door with heights above 2200mm, to have extension bolt for the top manual flush bolt for
easy access.
For aluminium doors use flush bolt of type GIESSE 2150.
Lever action flush bolts appropriate to the type of the door i.e., Steel/wood/Aluminium should
be used.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 9
_______________________________________________________________________________
I.
EXIT DEVICES
Exit Devices shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the intended
Exit devices to be Dorma 9000 series without side trim suitable for Euro profile cylinder.
Exit devices to conform to EN 1125, (EN 13633 for Electronic panic devices). Exit devices to
be full length touch bar in satin stainless steel finish. The touch bar, rail and chassis cover to
be in true architectural finish.
Single doors to have rim type while double doors to have vertical rod exit devices either
concealed or surface mounted as specified, with trim outside on the active leaf. All doors
leading from lobbies to staircases and staircase to the exit should have exit devices.
Exit devices for non-fire rated door to have dogging option, if required. For fire rated doors, if
required, panic devices to be Dorma 9000 Series with Magnetic Dogging feature. The
dogging should release upon activation from the fire alarm systems or interruption of power
supply. Exit devices for fire rated doors to be CE Marked.
When in combination with card readers use electric bolt retraction (ES) for accessing the
door. All vertical rod devices to have less bottom rod for aesthetic reasons and for easy
accessibility for the disabled.
For locations where Delayed egress exit device is required, use DORMA DE9000. Device to
have Delayed egress, Nuisance Alarm, Local or Remote alarm, Indicator LED, Key switch
Control, Remote authorized egress, Remote rearm, and door position input. The Delayed
egress exit device to be listed by U.L. under continuing re-inspection programs and
conforms to the standards U.L. 10C and U.B.C. 7-2 positive pressure testing. The Delayed
egress exit device to by Certified by BHMA to the requirements of ANSI A156.3 for Grade 1
exit devices. For Aluminium doors where delayed egress feature is required, DE9000
Narrow Stile series panic bar to be used.
J.
DOOR SEALS
Door seals to be NGP 5050C jamb and header weather seals for internal doors and NGP
152 for external doors,
Door seals, including weather seals, smoke seals, acoustic seals and air seals, shall be
suitable for the location and the intended function in accordance with the Product
Information.
Include fixings, rebates, grooves, and clearances for correct installation and operation of
seals.
Coordinate with the door-frame manufacturer for required rebates to door-frames.
All external door to have suitable weather seals to protect against outside dust, wind and
cold.
Threshold type to be Saddle/Panic thresholds UL listed ADA complaint. Jamb and header
seals proprietary to the aluminium door and frames to be used subject to the approval of the
consultant. Jamb and header seals to be with pressure sensitive tape 6.4mm in charcoal
finish.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 10
_______________________________________________________________________________
K.
MOP PLATES, KICK PLATES AND PUSH PLATES

All protection plates custom made as per the door design.
Door protection plates shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information.
Applied facings to doors and kick plates shall be approved types to match control samples.
Verify edge details on shop drawings before commencing.
Applied facings shall be factory bonded where practicable. Fully faced doors shall be factory
matched with door-frames to minimise requirement for site adjustment.
Use water-resistant adhesive or other suitable concealed methods. No mechanical fixings
shall be visible in the completed work. Finish exposed edges with smooth edges.
Unless otherwise indicated, width of applied facings shall be full width of door. Width may be
reduced to clear doorstops, if approved before commencing.
L.
DOOR STOPS
Door stops to be Dorma TZ5000 for floor mounting, Dorma TZ5012 for wall mounting. For
locations where door stop cannot be installed on floor as well as wall, overhead door stop
Dorma 911S, if hold open is also required then Dorma 911H shall be used.
Door stops shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the intended
Provide door stops to limit door swing where indicated or required to prevent damage to
adjacent work by uncontrolled door opening.
Verify floor or wall mounting locations before installation where not indicated. Do not mount
door stops to un-reinforced lightweight walls.
Where stops for non-fire rated doors are not practicable, provide overhead stays to control
door swing.
M.
DOOR COORDINATORS
Door closers to have Dorma GSR-V with cover set and arms.
Door coordinators shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information.
Where two number door closers are used for double doors, where possible the door closers
should have integral door coordinating system.
N.
ELECTRONIC EXIT BOLT

Where fail safe applications are needed use TV104 electronic exit bolt, Stainless Steel finish
(TV101, where specified, at locations where these are not exposed to public area) with anti
tamper and door monitoring contacts and holding force of 6KN with jam free opening
irrespective of load. Power supply unit shall be Dorma RZ01 stabilised 24VDC units.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 11
_______________________________________________________________________________
Where fail safe application surface mounted lock is specified, use Dorma electro magnetic
lock, grade 1, surface mounted with 1650lb holding force, 350mA @ 24VDC, with door
position switch feature.
O.
POWER SUPPLY
Where specified use Dorma RZ 01 power supply unit, 230 vAC +/- 10%, 16VA, max current
output 600mA, IP class 21, with LED for status indication size 160x80x50mm. For Delayed
Egress panic bars, use Power supply model ADPS-501 for input 220-240 VAC, 50/60Hz,
24VDC. For Panic bars with other electrical functions, use power supply AD100, input 220V,
output 24VDC, 6 AMP
P.
ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLD OPEN

Use DORMA EM500A electromagnetic hold open, surface wall/floor mounted as specified,
400N holding force, Anti remanence pin, Test push button, Polarity reversal protection, 24v
AC/DC, 100% on-load factor, IP40 protection class, size 85mm X 85mm X 35mm.
Q.
DOOR STATUS SWITCH/DOOR CONTACT

Use DORMA MC-4 door status switch at top jamb of frame at locations where specified, to
monitor the door status remotely.
R.
CABLE LOOP
Where specified for power transfer use concealed cable loop KU 480
S.
SWITCHES
Where specified use Dorma manual release switch HT-UP wall concealed installation.
Where specified use Dorma Key switch TL-ST PZ S55, surface mounted to EN60947-5-1,
prepared for Euro-profile single cylinder DIN 18252, Locking cam centre 30-32mm, overall
length 40.5-43.5, locking cam position 90 degree.
T.
BREAK GLASS
TL-N S 55 Emergency break glass push button, System 55 format ,LED illuminated, red
emergency push button, with optical indicator of lock status( green/red), visual alarm with
yellow flashing light for tamper/sabotage attempts, emergency push button operation,
audible alarm via integral alarm siren, anti tamper emergency push button with glass lens of
shatter proof safety glass. System to have stainless steel cover unit with adapter frames.
There should be visual sign for indication of emergency exit , above the push button.
U.
FASTENERS
Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screw bolts and other fasteners as needed for
anchoring the hardware in position, for long life.
All fastenings shall harmonise with the hardware with respect to the material and finish.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 12
_______________________________________________________________________________
On lead lined doors no screws shall be used to fix door guard, push plate, kick plate, armour
plate etc. use double-sided adhesive tape to fix the protection plates to prevent damage to
the lead lining.
1.11
FINISHES
FINISH
1.12
SSS
Satin Stainless Steel finish
SCP
Satin Chrome Plated
SNP
Satin Nickel Plated
CH
Charcoal (for weather seals etc.)
SB
Satin Brass
Silver -
Silver finish
Mill
Aluminium finish.
KEY CONTROL
Provide an approved proprietary lockable key cabinet with adequate compartments, pockets
or hooks to accommodate all required keys
Each key shall be attached to an approved plastic key tag by a metal split ring, properly
labelled with the final room name or number.
1.13
APPROVED SUPPLIERS
As per approved List of Manufacturers.
PART 3: EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except
as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as
may be otherwise directed by Architect.
Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal,
storage and reinstallation or application or surface protection with finishing work specified in
the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
S.T.H.

HARDWARE
08700- 13
_______________________________________________________________________________
Drill and Countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Set thresholds for exterior
doors in fully bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
2. PROTECTION
Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the
handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that
the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
Contractor shall protect hardware as it is stored on the construction site in a covered and dry
place.
Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase.
3. ADJUST AND CLEAN
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operations or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installations is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in
such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and
finish of hardware and doors.
4. HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
BISUL
45434IS
TESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt

hinges, 4.5x 4x3.4mm
UL Listed, Fire
Rated, Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
4030E5SAI
TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm

Backset, 85mm C/C, Reversible Latch, 8 mm
Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti
Saw Dead Bolt, Anti-friction latchbolt for
smoother operation. For Fire Rated Doors,
Tested to performance EN1303. Satin
stainless steel finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TE6B3535NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder with

thumbturm 35x35mm. 6 Spring Loaded
Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied
with 3 Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel Finish.
Group Master Keyed.
No.
S.N.P.
MS0L885IS
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Long

plate, Stainless Steel Levers, 130mm Long,
55mm Projection on 228x43mm Long Plate.
With europrofile cylinder hole. Grade AISI
304L Stainless Steel. w/ anti bacterial coating.
Set
S.S.S.
Type-H1
TESA
TESA
TESA
TESA
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 14
_______________________________________________________________________________
GEZE
103392 /
102421
TS 2000 V BC closing force to EN 1154,

2/4/5, width upto 1250mm, adjustable closing
force, adjustable closing speed, adjustable
latching action via valve, integrated back
check hydraulick, fixed. Certifire approved.
No.
Silver
TESA
TOPINOX45IS
TESA Floor Door Stop, Half-dome, Satin

Stainless Steel finish, Supplied with fixing
screws.
No.
S.S.S.
NO OF DOORS
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
BISUL 45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
203450AI
TESA Bathroom Mortice Lock 2030 Series with

Latch and Deadbolt. Reversible, with 50mm
backset and 85mm between axes. 8mm Lever
Spindle Hole / 6mm Spindle hole for Locking
Trigger. Certified according to UNE 97-320-88
grade A. Forend and Strike Plate Finish in
Stainless Steel.
No.
S.S.S.
MS5R800IS-
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Rose,

Stainless Steel Levers, 130mm Long, 55mm
Projection on 50mm Diameter, 11mm Thick
Rose. Grade AISI 304L Stainless Steel. w/ anti
bacterial coating.
Set.
S.S.S.
TESA
MB0REMESSIS
TESA Bathroom Locking Trigger with

Emergency Release on the outside, 53x80mm
diameter, Grade AISI 304, Satin Stainless
Steel finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KO050
Kick plate stainless steel, 8"(200mm) high,

width as per door leaf Width - 36" width
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KM050
Mop plate stainless steel, 6"(152mm) high,

No.
S.S.S.
TESA
TOPINOX4320IS
TESA Wall Door Stop, Cylindrical with rubber

head, Satin Stainless Steel finish, Supplied
with fixing screws.
No.
S.S.S.
Type-H2
TESA
TESA
TESA
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 15
_______________________________________________________________________________
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
TESA
BISUL 45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
1001-3
4"x16"x0.05" push plate
No.
S.S.S.
No.
S.S.S.
PHOTO
Type-H2a
TESA
TR19150SSIS
TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 150x19mm Size,

Including M8x70mm Screw Thru-bolt Fixing
with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screws
included. Stainless Steel finish. w/ anti
bacterial coating.
GEZE
103392 /
102421

No.
Silver
TRIMCO
KO050

No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KM050

No.
S.S.S.
TESA
TOPINOX4320IS

with fixing screws.
No.
S.S.S.
NO OF DOORS
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
BISUL 45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
203450AI

Stainless Steel.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
MB0REMESSIS
TESA Bathroom Locking Trigger with

Emergency Release on the outside, 53x80mm
diameter, Grade AISI 304, Satin Stainless
Steel finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TSR350IM

Including M8x70mm Screw with Brass insert,
D-Shape, Fixing screws included. Stainless
Steel finish. AISI304 GRADE. w/ anti bacterial
coating.
No.
S.S.S.
TR19150SSIS

bacterial coating.
No.
S.S.S.
Type-H3
TESA
TESA
TESA
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 16
_______________________________________________________________________________
door stop over head Supplied by others
VISUALMINUSIS
TESA HANDICAPPED sign, Round shape,

Stainless Steel Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
MS5R800IS-
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Rose,

Projection on 50mm Diameter, 11mm Thick
Rose. Grade AISI 304L Stainless Steel. w/ anti
bacterial coating.
Set.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KO050
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KM050
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
TOPINOX45IS
No.
S.S.S.
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
TESA
Kick plate stainless steel, 8"(200mm)

high, width as per door leaf Width - 36"
width
Mop plate stainless steel, 6"(152mm)
high, width as per door leaf Width - 36"
width
screws.
NO OF DOORS
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Type-03A
BISUL
45434IS

hinges, 4.5x 4x3.4mm UL Listed, Fire Rated,
Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
203450AI

Stainless Steel.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
MB0REMESSIS
TESA Bathroom Locking Trigger with Emergency

Release on the outside, 53x80mm diameter,
Grade AISI 304, Satin Stainless Steel finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KO050

No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
KM050

No.
S.S.S.
TESA
MS0L885IS
TESA "SENA" type Lever Handle on Long plate,

Projection on 228x43mm Long Plate. With
europrofile cylinder hole. Grade AISI 304L
Stainless Steel. w/ anti bacterial coating.
Set
S.S.S.
TESA
TOPINOX45IS

screws.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 17
_______________________________________________________________________________
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
114548 /
50644 /
102127 / 7432
/ 6666
TS 500 N EN3 W/ SINGLE ACTION

ACCESSORIES according to EN 1154 (TS 500
N EN3) Back check closing speed adjustable.
No.
S.S.S.
403650AI
TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50 mm

Backset, 85mm C/C, Roller Latch with Dead
Bolt,
Tested to performance EN1303.
Certified according to UNE 97-320-88 grade A.
Forend and Strike Plate Finish in Stainless
Steel.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
TE6B3535NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder-two side

key. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to
DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated
brass Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master
Keyed.
No.
S.N.P.
TRIMCO
1001-3
No.
S.S.S.
No.
S.S.S.
No.
S.S.S.
PHOTO
Type-H4
GEZE
TESA
TESA
TR19150SSIS

bacterial coating.
TESA
TOPINOX45IS

screws.
NO OF DOORS
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
114548 /
50644 /
102127 / 7432
/ 6666
TS 500 N EN3 W/ DOUBLE ACTION

ACCESSORIES according to EN 1154 (TS 500
N EN3) Back check closing speed adjustable.
No.
S.S.S.
403650AI

Bolt,
Steel.
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
TE6B3535NAM

Keyed.
No.
S.N.P.
TRIMCO
1001-3
No.
S.S.S.
TESA
TOPINOX45IS

screws.
No.
S.S.S.
Type-H4 a
GEZE
TESA
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 18
_______________________________________________________________________________
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
TESA
BISUL
45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
3815L x 3825L
3815 automatic flush bolt on the bottom of

inactive leaf and 3825 semi automatic flush
bolt on the top of inactive leaf. UL Listed, for
fire rated Wooden Door
Set
630
TRIMCO
3911
Adjustable dust proof strike to receive bolt of

bottom flush bolt on in active leaf.
No.
630
4030E5SAI

No.
S.S.S.
TE6B3535NAM

Group Master Keyed.
No.
S.N.P.
MS0L885IS

Set
S.S.S.
GEZE
102789 /
102421
TS 4000 W/ STANDARD ARM - closing

force to EN 1154 size 1-6, leaf width upto
1400mm, suitable for fire & smoke doors,
adjustable closing speed adjustable latching
action via link arm, integrated back check,
integrated delay closing action. Certifire
approves.
No.
Silver.
TESA
TOPINOX45IS

screws.
No.
S.S.S.
Type-H5
TESA
TESA
TESA
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 19
_______________________________________________________________________________
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
BISUL
45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
3815L x 3825L
3815 automatic flush bolt on the bottom of

inactive leaf and 3825 semi automatic flush
bolt on the top of inactive leaf. UL Listed, for
fire rated Wooden Door
Set
630
TRIMCO
3911
Adjustable dust proof strike to receive bolt of

bottom flush bolt on in active leaf.
No.
630
4030E5SAI

No.
S.S.S.
TE6B3535NAM

Group Master Keyed.
No.
S.N.P.
MS0L885IS

Set
S.S.S.
GEZE
102789 /
102421
TS 4000 W/ STANDARD ARM - closing

force to EN 1154 size 1-6, leaf width upto
1400mm, suitable for fire & smoke doors,
adjustable closing speed adjustable latching
action via link arm, integrated back check,
integrated delay closing action. Certifire
approves.
No.
Silver.
TESA
TOPINOX45IS

screws.
No.
S.S.S.
UNIT
FINISH
PHOTO
Type-H5 B
TESA
TESA
TESA
TESA
NO OF DOORS
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
Type-H5C
10400/400
No.
Aluminium track, 51.5 x 47.5 mm 4m long

9643N
66
1101
1110/300
Set
No.
Bottom guide with a brass olive, on a

reinforced plate. Sealing type For U-profile
30 x 30 mm
No.
U-profile 30 x 30 mm 3m long
No.
Hanger
Screwing plate, top-fixing
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 20
_______________________________________________________________________________
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
BISUL 45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
TESA
MNBT101S09SGGT
TESA QUICK Series Rim Exit device for up to

900mm width door, reversible, One Lateral
Locking Point. Certified by AENOR according
to UNE-EN 1125, applicable to Fire Doors.
Silver finished.
TESA
MMNMTCSCPPT
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
S.S.S.
No.
Silver
TESA Outside lever handle for panic device.

With europrofile cylinder hole in Silver finish.
No.
Silver
TE653510NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Half Cylinder 45mm. 6

Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V
18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass
Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed
No.
S.N.P.
GEZE
103392 / 102421

No.
Silver
TESA
TOPINOX4320IS

with fixing screws.
No.
S.S.S.
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
S.S.S.
PHOTO
Type-H6
TESA
TESA
NO OF DOORS
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
BISUL 45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
TESA
MNBT101S09SGGT
TESA QUICK Series Rim Exit device for up to

900mm width door, reversible, One Lateral
Locking Point. Certified by AENOR according
to UNE-EN 1125, applicable to Fire Doors.
Silver finished.
No.
Silver
TESA
MMNMTCSCPPT
TESA Outside lever handle for panic device.

With europrofile cylinder hole in Silver finish.
No.
Silver
TESA
TE653510NAM
TESA Security TE-6 Half Cylinder 45mm. 6

Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V
18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass
Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed
No.
S.N.P.
GEZE
103392 / 102421

No.
Silver
TESA
TOPINOX4320IS

with fixing screws.
No.
S.S.S.
Type-H6'
TESA
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

HARDWARE
08700- 21
_______________________________________________________________________________
BRAND
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
FINISH
QTY
BISUL
45434IS

UL Listed, Fire
Finish.
No.
S.S.S.
403650AI

Bolt,
Steel.
No.
S.S.S.
TE6B3535NAM

Keyed.
No.
S.N.P.
TESA
TSCA300IM
TESA Solid bent curved Pull Handle, Size

300x30mm Size, Including M8x70mm Screw
bacterial coating.
No.
S.S.S.
TRIMCO
1001-3
No.
S.S.S.
GEZE
103392 /
102421

No.
Silver
TESA
TOPINOX45IS

screws.
No.
S.S.S.
Type-H7
TESA
TESA
TESA
NO OF DOORS
S.T.H.
PHOTO

GLAZING 08800-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2:
PRODUCTS
2.1.
MATERIALS
A. GROUND FLOOR , PODIUM AND TOWER:
The Glass to be 28mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
the following make up:
Outer lite
:
6mm EmiCool Solite Zircon M on EFG Clear (#2) treated with
Vitroglaze self cleaning nano-coating (#1) fully tempered or
equal approval.
Space
:
20 mm Argon filling
Inner lite
:
6mm EFG Clear Glass Fully Tempered
The Optical and thermal data for the above item including the frames should
be as follows:
Visible Light Transmittance : 50% Visible Light Reflectance-In : 12%
Visible Light Reflectance-Out : 12% Total U Value inc. Frame: 0.92 W/m/k
Solar Energy Transmittance : 24% Shading Co-efficient
: 0.33
CURTAIN WALLS AND WINDOWS:
VISION:
The glass to be hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of the
following make up:
The Glass to be 28mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
Outer lite
:
6mm EmiCool Solite Jar on EFG Clear (#2) treated with
Vitroglaze self cleaning nano-coating (#1) Heat Strengthened
Space
:
20 mm Argon filling
Inner lite
:
The Optical and thermal data for the above item including the frames should be as
follows:
Visible Light Transmittance : 36%
Visible Light Reflectance-In : 14%
Visible Light Reflectance-Out : 10% Total U Value inc. Frame: 0.92 W/m/k
Solar Energy Transmittance : 17% Shading Co-efficient
: 0.25
SPANDRELL:
The glass to be 28mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
Outer lite
S.T.H.
6mm EmiCool Solite Jar on EFG Clear (#2) treated with

Vitroglaze self cleaning nano-coating (#1) Heat Strengthened
or equal approval.

GLAZING 08800-2
______________________________________________________________________________
Space
20 mm Argon filling
Inner lite
Back Pane
: Powder coated aluminum sheet as per recommendation of curtain

wall Specialist, if required (colour, thickness, fixing) and as
approved by the Architect.
: 50mm thick rigid rockwool of density 50kg/m
Insulation
B. BASEMENT PARKING AND LIFT LOBBY ENTRANCES :

FOR HINGED DOORS:
FRG 90: 44mm pryrostop 90-100 integrity and insulation multilaminated with
intumescent interlayer fire rated glass for 90 minutes (average temperature on non
fire side not to exceed 140C above ambient temperature, as per BS 476- Part 22)
and meet NFPA requirements of passing hose stream test to be used with integrity
and insulation steel frames similar to forster fuego light steel el 90 or equal
approved system (finish up to the architects approval)
The above fire rated glass incorporates optiwhite low iron glass to achieve
maximum transparency (visible light transmittance: 76%) and has sound
perfotmance of 42 dB.
Independent fire test evidence form independent approved testing laboratory for the
full system confirming the specified rating duration and integrity and insulation
classification.
FOR FIXED SCREENS:
FRG 120: 52mm pryrostop 120-104 integrity and insulation multilaminated with
intumescent interlayer fire rated glass for 120 minutes (average temperature on non
fire side not exceed 140C above ambient temperature, as per BS 476- part 22) and
meet NFPA requirements of passing hose stream test to be used with integrity and
insulation steel frames similar to forster fuego classic steel ei 120 or equal approved
system (finish up to the architects approval)
The above fire rated glass incorporates optiwhite low iron glass to achieve
maximum transparency (visible light transmittance: 78% ) and has sound
performance STC of 42 dB.
Independent fire test evidence form independent approved testing laboratory for the
full system confirming the specified rating duration and integrity and insulation
classification.
S.T.H.

GLAZING 08800-3
______________________________________________________________________________
PARTICULAR NOTES:
1. All mentioned glass thickness & strength are minimum and indicative only. The
final glass thickness and strength will be determined based on glass strength
analysis and system structural calculation by the curtain wall fabricated and as
approved by architect.
2. Approved glass suppliers:
a. Emirates Glass. U.A.E.
b. Saudi American Glass. K.S.A.
c. Virakon U.S.A
3. Glass shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1036, quality Q3 unless
otherwise specified. Heat treated glass shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C1048. Tempered glass shall also conform to ANSI Z97.1-984. All heat
treating shall be by the horizontal process, and processed in such a manner as
installed on the building.
4. Glass should be processed in glass processor with experience more than 15
years and hold IGMA certificate
5. Single source of the glass where the raw glass, coating and double glazing
should happen in the same manufacture to secure the quality of the glass.
6. Insulating glass shall comply to the following Standards:
(1) E773 Test method for seal durability of sealed insulating glass units.
(2) E774 Specification for seal insulating glass units.
(3) E546 Test Method for frost point of sealed insulating glass units.
(4) E576 Test Method for dew/frost of sealed insulating glass units vertical
position.
7. Laminated glass shall comply to ASTM C1172
8. Glass should have 10 years warranty starting from the delivery date of the glass.
Warranty of the coated glass and the warranty of the double glazed unit should
be given from one single source. Warranty on the laminated glass, coating and
double glazed unit should be issued by the same manufacture.
2.2
FIRE RATED GLASS
1. General Guidance
All glazing beads, glazing tapes, strips or channel, sealants and setting blocks should be
used as specified in the appropriate approval document for the particular system being
used.
2. Glazing
The glazing pressure on the glass edges should be low and glazing tapes should be noncombustible and flexible.
Seal between glass and frame should be fully continuous without breaks, along the full
edge of the glass and frame.
Any direct contract between the glass and the frame material, or between glass and glass,
is not allowed under any circumstances.
Glass glaze should be clear multi0laminated fire-resistant glasses, composed of alternate
sheets of annealed glass and a special glassy interlayer which intumesces on expose to
S.T.H.

GLAZING 08800-4
______________________________________________________________________________
fire. The glass pane facing the fire cracks and the first interlayer foams evenly to provide a
uniform barrier against fire, hot gases and heat. In products with more than one interlayer,
the interlayers intumesce progressively in turn as heat travels gradually through the
structure. The whole laminate bonds together to give a resilient, tough and opaque shield
against fire, hot gases and heat.
Fire-resistant laminates, which differ in certain respects from other float glasses and
laminates, that attention needs to be given to certain basic guidelines in their handling and
use.
3. Edge Protection Tape
The edge tape is an integral part of the product as supplied. Insulating glass units also have
a second tape for further protection during handling.
4. Framing
Must only be used as part of an approved fire-resistant system, that is the glass in a
purpose-designed frame together with the associated glazing materials and fixings to the
surrounding structure. The system as a whole has to be approved as an integral fireresistant assembly, and the frame must be of the same equivalent fire rating as the glass,
as appropriate.
For insulating glass units the designed deflection of the unit in its frame under the maximum
potential design load should be no more than the span of the glass unit in mm divided by
300 or 8 mm, whichever of these two numbers is the lower.
S.T.H.

088113-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Glass Thickness: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.
COORDINATION
Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
2.
A.
S.T.H.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work
not exposed to view and for framing exposed to view.
Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish
carpentry.
Section 062020 - Interior Architectural Woodworks for installation of interlayer
laminated glass on front of greeter and nurses desks.
DEFINITION
1.
1.6
Laminated glass with graphic interlayer.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS

088113-2
______________________________________________________________________________
B.
Shop Drawings: For decorative glass. Show fabrication and installation details. Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Size and location of penetrations.

Glazing method.
Mounting method.
Attachments to other work.
Full-size details of edge-finished profiles.
Glass Samples: For the following products, 300 mm square:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Each type of decorative glass.

Each edge treatment on type of decorative glass.
Each decorative film overlay on type of decorative glass.
Each applied coating on type of decorative glass.
D.
Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 300-mm lengths.
E.
Decorative Glazing Schedule: List decorative glass types and thicknesses for each size
opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For decorative glass indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.7
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of decorative glass.
C.
Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
D.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.8
A.
1.9
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative glass and each decorative film overlay
and each applied coating to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project
who are certified under NGA's Certified Glass Installer Program or similar local
certification in UAE.
B.
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according

to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
C.

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
S.T.H.

088113-3
______________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
1.10
A.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each laminated decorative
glass product, glass with decorative film overlay, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory,
and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing
sealants.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.11
Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to
glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint
substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
A.
Protect decorative glass and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,
temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B.
Retain packaging and sequencing numbers for decorative-glass units.
1.12
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install decorative glass until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous

with decorative glass by field measurements before fabrication.
1.13
A.
S.T.H.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass
units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is
defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or
to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision

088113-4
______________________________________________________________________________
through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass
standard.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each type of decorative glass from single source
from single manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer, for each product and installation method.
2.2
A.
General Performance: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal

movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation;
deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B.
Structural Performance: Decorative glass installed adjacent to walking surfaces shall

withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Differential deflection of adjacent unsupported edges shall not exceed glass

thickness when subjected to 730 N/m applied horizontally to one panel at any point
up to 1067 mm above the adjacent walking surface.
Base design on thickness at thinnest part of the glass.
Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers, GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual," and "GANA's "Glazing
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of
glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
D.
Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heatstrengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with
S.T.H.

088113-5
______________________________________________________________________________
requirements indicated. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide heatstrengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with
requirements indicated. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide fully tempered
float glass.
2.4
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B.
Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3, and with visible light
transmission not less than 91 percent.
C.
Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.
D.
Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, QualityQ3.
1.
E.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2
(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
1.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated,
Form 3; finish, pattern, and quality as indicated.
G.
Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II, Class 1
(clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Form 3; finish, pattern, and quality as indicated.
H.
Patterned Ultraclear Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3, with visible
light transmission not less than 91 percent; finish, pattern, and quality as indicated.
I.
Tempered Patterned Ultraclear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II,
Class 1 (clear), Form 3, with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent; finish,
pattern, and quality as indicated.
J.
Ceramic-Coated Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2

(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's
"Engineering Standards Manual."
K.
Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency
to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and
installation.
2.5
A.
S.T.H.
DECORATIVE GLASS
Decorative Color Glass, Back-Coated (Code: SF10a)

088113-6
______________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Back-Coated Color Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036, back coated glass with color
coating applied to second surface.
High quality environmentally friendly water-based glass coating system
Smooth flat furniture quality finish on painted side of glass
Low-iron clear (gloss finish) glass, thickness as indicated
Low-iron acid etch (matte finish), thickness as indicated
Color and pattern: As indicated.
Decorative Glass Type:

1.
Laminated Glass with Graphic Interlayer.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Configuration: View
Pattern: Custom
Finish: Standard
Processing: Manufacturers standard.
Overall Nominal Thickness: 20.9 mm.
Associated Components
a.
Top Lite
1)
2)
3)
b.
Bottom Lite
1)
2)
3)
c.
A.
2.7
Type: Tempered
Thickness: As indicated.
Class: Clear
Interlayer
1)
2)
2.6
Type: Tempered
Thickness: As indicated.
Class: Clear
Design: As indicated.
Thickness: Not less than 2 mm.
GLAZING MATERIALS
Glazing Sealants, Tapes, and Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: As specified in
Section 088003 "Interior Glass and Glazing."
HARDWARE FOR GLASS INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: As indicated on interior design drawings and Control Book.
B.
Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
C.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard, compatible with decorative glass type indicated.
S.T.H.

088113-7
______________________________________________________________________________
D.
2.8
Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for hardware installation. Provide metal
expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide stainless-steel anchors and
inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.
DECORATIVE-GLASS FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate decorative glass and provide other glazing products in sizes required to glaze
openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface
conditions, and bite complying with product manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced glazing standard.
B.
Edge Finishing: Finish edges smooth and polished, without chips, scratches, or warps.
1.
2.
Finished Edge: Manufacturers standard.

Edge-Finished Glass Adhesive: Clear, nonyellowing, as recommended by
manufacturer.
C.
Lite Treatment: As indicated on Drawings with smooth, uniform edge.
D.
Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and
free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in pattern indicated on Drawings
to the back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including
surface preparation and application temperature limitations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine decorative-glass framing members, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of decorative-glass framing members.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate orientation of outer surfaces as indicated on Drawings.

Label or mark units as needed so that surface orientation is readily identifiable. Do not use
materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.
S.T.H.

088113-8
______________________________________________________________________________
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Set decorative-glass units in each series true in line with uniform orientation, pattern,
draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
B.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that each outer surface faces the direction
C.
Set decorative glass in locations indicated on Drawings. Install glass with hardware and
accessories according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions. Attach hardware
securely to mounting surfaces and building structure.
D.
Set decorative glass in locations indicated on Drawings and as specified in interior design
Control Book.
3.4
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Decorative Glass: Install glazing as specified in Section 088003 "Interior Glass and
Glazing."
B.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, gaskets, sealants,

tapes, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with
edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is more than 1270 mm.
1.
2.
H.
S.T.H.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless
gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
required face clearances, and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 3-mm- minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

088113-9
______________________________________________________________________________
3.5
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant
from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure
spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed
sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels and between glass-to-glass joints to eliminate voids
and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants smooth.
3.6
A.
Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
C.
Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in
writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

ALUMINUM - FRAMING, DOORS AND WINDOWS 08900-1
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
1.
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
03300:
07500:
07900:
08800:
09200:
Concrete
Roofing
Sealants
Glass and glazing
Plaster
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
The firm executing work of this section shall have a minimum of ten (10) years
continuous experience in successful installation of work of type and quality shown
and specified.
2.
Erection of the aluminum work and curtain wall system and component parts shall
be performed by workmen specially trained and experienced in this type of work.
Have a senior, qualified representative at the job to direct the various stages of
operations at all times.
3.
Conform to the requirements of the local authorities, latest BSI and ASTM
standards.
4.
Contractor's Responsibility: The contractor shall examine the contract drawings and
these specifications to ensure that the work is complete. If errors, omissions or
inconsistencies are discovered, he shall so notify the Engineer in writing before
executing a contract.
5.
Only original profiles, fittings and accessories may be used for fabrication. The fittings
shall be selected by the fabricating plant to withstand anticipated stresses.
1.4.
1.
1.5.
1.
1.6.
1.
EXAMINATION
Make thorough examination of drawings and details, check anchorage, structural
deflections, size and shape of glass, system of sealing, interfacing with work of other
sections and other factors influencing design and performance of the glazing system,
and be fully cognizant of requirements.
EQUIPMENT
Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, tools, plant,
safety protection, and other equipment required for the completion of the work.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Design aluminum work and glazing in strict accordance with the requirements
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
of the applicable Building Code requirements and applicable BSI and
ASTM standards specified.
2.
Design components to size and profiles indicated, reinforcement flange and

web thickness of aluminum shall be as required for adequate rigidity and
strength. The unit when tested at a minimum pressure of 35 P.S.F. in a
positive (inward) direction in accordance with the method specified in ASTM
E330 shall show no permanent deformation of any member nor any glass
breakage. Maximum permissible deflection of any member shall not exceed
1/200 of distance between fixing points. Frames shall be thermally broken
extruded sections.
3.
The method of assembly, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminum work

and glazing as indicated on the drawings is schematic and shows general
intent only. Location and methods of providing same shall be this contractor's
responsibility, who shall design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to
suit each specific condition in an acceptable manner.
4.
All component parts shall be fastened, connected or anchored together to

transmit wind loading and other stresses to the system or anchors. Provide
anchors which transmit wind loading to the anchorage system without
causing local over-stressing and distortion of the aluminum work at point of
attachment of anchor or to the anchor itself. Additionally, anchors shall
transmit uniformly distributed loads through structure.
5.
All fastenings shall be concealed.
6.
Provide and/or make allowances for free and noiseless vertical and horizontal
thermal movement, due to the contraction and expansion of any or all
component arts, for an ambient temperature range of from -25C to +40C.
Buckling, opening of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners,
failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to the thermal movement
of any or all component parts will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly
and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range
at the time of the respective operation.
7.
The design and installation of the aluminum work, including the glass, shall
accommodate all inherent building structure movements, expansion, creep and
deflections and the fabrication and installation tolerances of all related work not
included in this section, without the loss of, or detrimental effect to, the
performance requirements herein specified.
8.
There shall be no water infiltration into the building through the aluminum work and
glazing under the design wind loads.
1.7.
1.
DESIGN CRITERIA
Design components to sizes and profiles indicated having reinforcement, flange and
web thicknesses as required for adequate rigidity and strength to limit deflection to
L/200 maximum under positive and negative peak wind design gust pressures.
Design wind load shall be calculated by reference to B.P. 3: Chapter V: Part 2.
The maximum wind speed to be allowed for in calculations is 150 km/hr.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
2.
If, with a window casement open, a transom can be subjected to load by persons
leaning out, the necessary additional vertical load shall be taken into account.
3.
For visual reasons, deflection of glass shall be limited to L/1000.
4.
Make allowance in the design for localized zones where increased wind loads and
reactions will occur due to the building location and configuration.
5.
Resultant effects of structural elements on the indoor climate shall be taken into
account, particularly in regard to the type and arrangement of the air conditioning at
exterior wall surfaces and the solar radiation involved.
6.
No water infiltration when subjected to water spray at rate of 23 liters per .093 m2
per hour maintained for 15 minutes with static pressure difference across the glass
of 1.2 kPa.
7.
Air infiltration and exfiltration of 0.57 L/min/m2 for window areas and 0.57
L/min/m2 for spandrel and soffit areas, when subjected to static pressure of
0.075 kPa. Permissible air leakage shall not be cumulative between
windows, spandrels and soffits.
8.
Difference in temperature between central and edge portions of any inner pane of
sealed units shall be less than the maximum permissible difference recommended
by the manufacturer of sealed glass units.
9.
All sizes such as oversize, cutting sizes, glass sizes shall be established on the sole
responsibility of the fabricator, maintaining the design intent to the approval of the
Engineer. In all cases involving abnormal stresses, it is necessary to document
details, attachments, etc. in the form of drawings, and to carry out structural
calculations for stressed profiles and anchors and to have these checked and
approved by Professional Engineer licensed to work in place of work.
10. SYSTEM DRAINAGE: Provide complete system drainage for all water which has
penetrated.
11. All components must sustain the forces acting on them and be capable of
transmitting them to the load bearing part of the building structure, complying with
the requirements of B.S. 8200 and B.S. C.P. 118.
1.10.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Furnish complete shop and erection drawings required for the work of this section to
the Engineer for review prior to fabrication. Submit shop drawings in accordance
with General Conditions.
2.
Co-ordinate shop drawings for work of this section with those for other sections to
ensure correct interface details required to provide a water-tight installation.
3.
No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and all other related submittals,
documentation, certifications and samples as required by the specifications, have
been reviewed by the Engineer.
4.
Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, elevations, sections and details for all work in
this section. The details shall be at full scale as far as practical and shall show and
specify the construction of all parts of the work including metal and glass thicknesses,
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
jointing details, field connections, anchoring, fastening, types and finishes; areas to be
sealed, sealing methods and sealant materials; gaskets; glazing methods; direction
and magnitude of thermal expansion; type of construction including joinery, fasteners
and welds and all other pertinent information.
5.
All anchorage assemblies and components; the fabrication and erection tolerances
for the work in this section and the adjoining related work. Show connection details
of all work which is connected to or assimilated into the system.
6.
Furnish prototype unit consisting of the sections necessary to make the typical
intersection of the split vertical and split horizontal mullion condition. Unit shall be
approximately 460 mm X 460 mm and be complete with glazing, gaskets, thermal
barriers, tapes and sealants.
7.
On completion of work of this section, supply maintenance and glazing instructions

for insertion in maintenance manual.
8.
The profile dimensions of frame, casement, transom and mullion shall be determined
in accordance with the structural analysis tables for profiles and fittings and in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. Cavity profiles shall be used in all
cases for inner and outer frames.
9.
SAMPLES: Submit to Engineer for approval before fabrication of work, samples of all
materials, components and finishes to be used in the Work and typical frame jointing
method.
1.11.
MOCK-UP
1.
Supply and install to a location directed by the Engineer a mock-up panel, with
glazing, for approval prior to final production, consisting of one window units.
2.
When approved by the Engineer the mock-up panel may remain as part of the
building system and become the standard by which the Work of this section is
judged.
1.12.
1.
1.13.
WARRANTY
Warrant Work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in
accordance with the General Conditions but for an extended period of five (5) years
and agree to promptly make good defects which become evident during warranty
period without cost to the Client. Defects shall include but not be limited to, leaking,
deformation of members, loss of seal in sealed glass units, frame distortions and
thermal forces, discoloration of finishes and failure of sealants.
STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING & PROTECTION
1.
Before shipment, coat exposed portions of aluminum with SPV blue colored film
coating.
2.
strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, scaffolding,
staging, safety protection equipment, tools, plant and other equipment required for
the completion of the work.
4.
Protect the Work of other trades from soiling and damage during the execution of the
Work.
PART 2:
2.1.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
ALUMINUM WINDOW: Shall be suitable for glazing with insulated sealed glass units.
The general size and profile of the window units shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
2.
OPERABLE WINDOWS: All operable windows shall be hinged as indicated on

drawings.
3.
EXTRUDED SHAPES: Aluminum 6063 (HEQ TF) with a minimum yield of 139
MPa/25mm2 anodizing quality, free from defects impairing appearance, strength
and durability. Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings shall
not exceed the values in CP 118.
1.
Aluminum extrusions shall be in accordance with B.S. 8200

and B.S. C.P. 118.
4.
STEEL SECTIONS: BS 5950. All structural steelwork shall comply with the
requirements of the National Structural Steelwork Specification for building
Construction, publication No. 1/89 March 1989. All steel shall be hot dipped
galvanized. Welds shall be treated with "galvafroid" zinc rich paint.
5.
PREFINISHED ALUMINUM SHEET: BS 1470. Aluminum sheet to match finish of

extrusions. Minimum 2.4 mm thick.
6.
SETTING BLOCKS: Neoprene ASTM C542-69, 75 to 85 durometer A.
7.
POLYETHYLENE ROPE: Closed cell foamed polyethylene, 50% larger than joint.
8.
SEALANT: Silicone rubber type, conforming to BS 5889.
9.
PAINT: Bituminous, conforming to BS 6949.
10. GLASS AND GLAZING: Refer to Section 08800.

11. AIR SEAL PANELS:
class, 1.0 mm thick.
Fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having Z275 coating
12. INSULATION: Rigid fiberglass insulation. Fiberglass - Corning AF 530 or approved

alternate, with black facing.
13. FLEXIBLE FLASHING: EPDM sheet, 1.6 mm thick.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
14. SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, RIVETS AND OTHER FASTENING
DEVICES: Stainless steel with a chromium content of not less than 12%.
15. DOORS:
1.
Glazed doors as per drawings. Fastening shall be as inconspicuous as

possible, and to Engineer's approval.
2.
Hardware shall be offset pivot hinges and closers, provide a ms lock c/w
thumb turn. Provide aluminum thresholds and complete (4 sides)
weather stripping.
16. ALUMINUM FINISH: Surface treatment of aluminum components shall be carried

out in accordance with B.S. 1615 and B.S. 3987. Quality of film thickness and
subsequent densification shall be in accordance with B.S 1615. The surface with
respect to gloss, texture, hue and its uniformity and the necessary surface treatment
E6 shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All interior and exterior components
to be powder coated, to match color from standard color chart by 'Jotun Corro Coat', to later selection.
17. POWDER COATINGS: All components shall be chemically treated with a conversion
coating, and shall include a zinc chromate coat (for aluminum). The conversion coating
shall conform with ASTM D 1750 - 67, Method 7 (Amorphous Chromium Phosphate) or
method. Factory apply the polyester powder coat by electrostatic spraying to a dry film
thickness of 60 - 80 microns. As BS 6469, BS6497.
1.
Composition: Polyester powder coating shall consist of a polyester resin, a

curing agent and the appropriate light and heat resistance pigments.
2.
Processing: Electrostatic spraying of the powder, on a metallic substrate

subjected to heat, melts the powder to form a continuous film and a fully
cured coating.
3.
Application: Due to outstanding weather resistance, PES54 grades used shall

be especially suited for outdoor use. Where applicable, grades used for
indoor use shall be suitable for exposure to ultra violet light.
4.
Range: Color shall be selected from the full range of the shades on the
RAL color card. Sheen shall be selected by Engineer from high gloss (G)
with approximately 80-100% gloss and satin gloss (S) with approximately 6080% gloss.
5.
Material: Fine powder with grain size less than 100 microns, with a solid
content of 100%.
6.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply form: Fine powder, grain size less than 100 microns
Solid content: 100
Specific Weight: 1.3 1.6 kg./liter
Shelf Life: At least 6 months in dry air and at temperature not exceeding 25%.
7.
S.T.H.
EQUIPMENT

________________________________________________________________________________________
IG polyester powder coatings PES 54 grades can be sprayed with any
commercial powder spraying equipment.
8.
SUBSTRATE PRE-TREATMENT:
IG polyester powder coating PES 54 grades adhere direc. If applied for indoor
use, an iron phosphating on iron, zinc and aluminum or cleaning with trior
perchlorethylene. For outdoor use, a careful pre-treatment is essential.
Multigrade chromating is recommended on non-ferrous metal e.g aluminum,
magnesium zinc and the alloys thereof. Yellow green or transparent
chromating by dipping or spraying may be applied.
9.
CONTROL PROGRAMME:
Testing for water leakage should be done
Aluminum Sliding Doors

Supply and installation of Aluminum sliding doors, with 8mm tempered clear glass
Sliding Door Operator

Option 1: Corsa Operator manufacture by CAME S.P.A. Italy
Sliding door drive unit covering to be hinged up aluminum guide way profile. Drive unit with
direct current motor mains connection with plug 220 V, 50 Hz.
Motor max current
Nominal current
Power Automation
Drive System
Max force exerted
Opening speed
Opening Tempera
PIR sensor for opening
Safety photocells
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
6A.
(230V) 0.6A
70 W
HTD 8M toothed belt
5Kg.
from -20 to +70c
Aluminum Swing door

Aluminum Swing Door (1.80 x 2.50) (WxH) with 8mm tempered glass.
Operator
FLY-PB 2100 manufacture by CAME Italy
Max. weight 200 Kg. Per leaf, gear motor runs at 24V
Automatic closure, Obstacle detection stop the door movement.
Adjustment of the speeds of opening, closing and slowing down during closing.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
Power supply
Frequency
Nominal input
Motor power
Max. motor input
Absorbed input
Max. torque
Opening Time
Closing Time
Operation intermittence
230/24 V.A.C.
50/60 Hz.
0.6 A
24 V.D.C.
6A
Automation 276 W
Accessories 60 W
40 Nxm
from 2 to 5 second
from 1 to 6 second
Continuous duty
from -20 to 70 C
Operated Steel Sliding Gate

Supply, installation of operated Steel Sliding Gates as per the specification given below
Steel Gates (5.00 x 3.00) (WxH) 2 Nos.
Sliding Gate Motor BY -3500

Model 'BY -3500T' from M/s CAME S.P.A., Italy
High performance, rack and pinion type, industrial/ heavy duty sliding gate motor.
A three phase, self-locking electro-mechanical gear motor.
In case of power failure, the locking lever can be released by key manual release system/
Motor pinion
Limit stops.
Operating Limit
Operation
: Gate weight up to 3500 kg.

: By push button
Technical Data:
Duty cycle
Speed
Nominal current
Power
Power supply
Reduction ratio
Torque
Maximum thrust
Weight
2.2.
1.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
50%
10.5 m/min.
2A
0.75 Kw
380/220 V
1/30
135 N.m
3500 (adjustable)
74 Kg.
FABRICATION
Measurements submitted and reviewed during shop drawing review may change
due to site conditions. It is this Subcontractors responsibility to coordinate and
verify, by measurement at the job site, all dimensions affecting the Work.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Workmanship shall be the best modern shop and field practice known to
recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Joints and intersecting
members shall be accurately fitted to true planes, adequately and securely
fastened and made completely watertight. Cuts shall be machined and fitted to
form permanent hairline joints. Component fastenings shall be concealed of
adequate strength, fabricated from stainless steel or shall be concealed fusion
welds.
3.
Fabricate units from extrusions of profile and size indicated having wall thickness
required by design criteria (minimum 3 mm thick) and complete with rabbets,
interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required to interface
with work of other contracts.
4.
Connecting mullions shall be of special formed extruded aluminum sections

designed to provide a functional split without having a seam joint on the exterior
weathered face of the mullion. The design of the mullion shall provide and
maintain positive air and vapor seals against infiltration and exfiltration, prevent
water entry into the system, permit necessary movement required by the
expansion and contraction of the system and accommodate the structural creep
and deflections of the building structure.
5.
The windows shall be accurately sized to suit the window openings.
6.
Fabricate window sills from refinished sheet aluminum in color and finish to
match adjacent window framing. Accurately construct sills with mitered corners.
Construction of sills shall be to Engineer's approval. All fastenings shall be
concealed and stainless steel.
7.
Form accurate extrusions with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles free from
any defects.
8.
Joints between horizontal and vertical mullions shall be accurately cut and fitted.
Horizontal and vertical mullions shall be in true plane with interior and exterior
faces in line.
9.
Frame members shall be assembled together by means of sealed mechanical

joints produced by fitting formed butyl gaskets of correct profile between the
members and secured by means of self-tapping screws through the wall of one
member into specially formed grooves of the adjoining member. Screws shall
be driven home with gauged force to ensure proper uniform compression of
sealing gaskets and permanent securement of the components in place.
10. Glazing shall be from the exterior.

11. Framing members shall have integrally formed keyed slots to receive and retain
performed gaskets, seals and thermal separators.
12. Pressure plates shall be designed with integrally formed keyed slots to receive seals
and they shall be of thickness necessary to provide permanent, uniform, sealing
pressures for the glazing units and spandrels, without deformation.
13. Vapour air seal panels of spandrel areas shall be fabricated from galvanized steel
formed and braced as required to resist specified forces and maintain the required
convector plenum. Tack weld impaling pins to panels for securement of insulation
by means of speed clips.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
14. Fabricate all devices required for erection and adequate anchorage and attachment,
including but not limited to supplementary steel framing, brackets, inserts, clip angles,
anchors, straps, shims, stud bolts, nuts and washers. Attachments shall be designed
to provide for accurate adjustment and to compensate for structure tolerances and
permit unrestricted expansion and contraction of the framing members.
15. Provide inconspicuous, baffled weep holes to properly drain aluminum system
cavities to exterior.
16. Component fastenings, concealed
stainless steel.
throughout, of adequate
strength, should be
COMPOSITE ALUMINUM CLADDING:

1.
PANEL FABRICATION
Composition: The Aluminum composite cladding shall have two sheets of aluminum,
sandwiching a core of extruded thermo plastic, formed in a continuous process, with no glues
(or) adhesives between dissimilar materials. The materials shall be alucubond.
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Aluminum composite panels shall have thick aluminum on both the sides (PERALUMAN
100). The front shall be side stove lacquered with gloss approximately 30-35% according to
Gardner, with protective peel-off foil. The reverse side shall be mill finished.
3.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
Overall panel thickness
:
a. Rigidity of pane
:
b. Section modulus
:
c. Weight of panels
:
d. Average airborne sound
Transmission loss
:
(for frequency range of 100-3200 Hz)
e. Linear thermal expansion
:
f. Temperature resistance
:
4.
4mm
0.24 KN Sq. M/M
1.57 Cub. M/M
5.5 Kg./Sq.M
25 dB
2.4 MM/M/100 K
From -50C to +80C
FINISHES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Coil coated KYNAR based POLYVINYLDENE FLOURIDE (PVDF) resin.

Film thickness (E.C.C.A.T1) :
27mm
Specular Gloss (E.C.C.T2) :
30-35% according to Gardner
Pencil hardness: (E.C.C.T4 ):
HB-F
Firm adhesion after identation is lesser (or) equal to 44 in. lb, no cracks and no
removal of skin occurs.
Firm adhesion after bending (E.C.C.T7) T=1
Resistance to cracking after bending (E.C.C.T7) T = 1.5
Salt spray resistance tests(E.C.C.T8, din 50021 SS): No creeps, no blisters after
1000 hrs of sample exposure.
Acid and alkali have no effect on the material.
S.T.H.

________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3:
3.1.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1.
Check structural elements and adjoining work on which work is dependent, verify
governing dimensions, floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
between aluminum work and structural frame. Confirm conditions satisfactory before
proceeding. Commencement of work shall be deemed to be acceptance of existing
conditions.
2.
Anchor assemblies to structure, galvanized steel, adjustable to permit accurate

location of wall components, conforming to design criteria and fully detailed on shop
and erection drawings.
3.
Backpaint aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with concrete, surfaces between
dissimilar metals, one coat of bitumastic paint. Touch up field welds in steel with two
coats of zinc chromate paint.
4.
Joints and intersections shall be accurately fitted in true planes, free of distortion,
waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
Prevent damage to metal finish.
5. Fit flexible seals, tapes, formed neoprene deflectors and gaskets at locations required
to provide water, air, vapor and weathertight junction. Caulk junctions of system
components to themselves and other work with sealant to maintain effective vapour,
air and water barrier. Where joints are 12 mm deep or deeper, back with polyethylene
rope filler. Sealant bead depth shall be 1/2 width but not less than 6 mm. Apply
sealants with pressure gun. Caulk exterior junction of glass to mullion caps at sill and
100 mm up each jamb with neat bead of clear silicone sealant.
6.
3.2.
1.
Fixing
1.
Installation and anchoring shall be carried out in accordance with the highest
standards of safety and security.
2.
In the case of elements with movable casements, transoms and mullions, the
outer frames shall be anchored in such a way that the forces from the hinges,
pivots, transoms and mullions are transmitted to the building structure.
CLEANING
At completion of work remove all labels from glass and clean inner and outer faces of
glass and all exposed aluminum surfaces at interior and exterior. Replace scratched
or broken glass and make good any damaged materials, including operating hardware.
*** END OF SECTION 08900 ***
S.T.H.

PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD 09200-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1:
1.1.
1.
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.
1.
1.4.
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section 03200:
Section 04200:
Section 07500:
Section 07900:
Section 09900:
Masonry Units
Membrane Roofing
Joint Sealers
GENERAL:
The Contractor shall perform all attendance upon other trades and protect all works
specified under this section from damage during subsequent operations, make good
any defects, clear away upon completion, clean throughout and leave all work in
perfect condition to the approval of the Engineer.
MOCK UP
1.
Install a sample panel 2000 mm x 2000 mm in location directed by the Engineer.
2.
Panel shall show complete construction and exterior finish. When approved by the
Engineer sample shall become the standard for the project.
PART 2:
2.1.
1.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
CEMENT:
1.
Cement for plaster shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS 12, part 2 or

ASTM C150, type 1 or DIN 1164.
2.
White (non stain) cement shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specification for Masonry Cement of the AASHO Designation: M-150
(ASTM: C91): Latest Edition.
2.
WATER: Clean, potable, to meet requirements of B.S.3148.
3.
CONTROL JOINTS, PLASTER STOPS, DRIPS: zinc sheet, minimum 25 gauge or

aluminum .
4.
EXTERIOR FINISH: Ceratone stone finish by Caparol Japan, or approved

equivalent. Water based textured finish consisting of crushed inorganic colored
aggregates composed mainly of crushed stones bound with a synthetic resin binder.
5. PRIMER: Stoneprime by Caparol, Japan or approved equivalent high quality

pigmented acrylic resin primer for exterior finish, with excellent adhesion to
S.T.H

______________________________________________________________________________
plastered surfaces.
6. TOPCOAT: Capathane Polyurethane Clear Topcoat by Caparol Japan or approved
equivalent over exterior finish.
PART 3:
3.1.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION ( PLASTER WORK )
1.
All plaster work and the necessary substrate preparations shall comply with
the relevant BS, ASTM and DIN Standards.
2.
All surfaces to be plastered shall be clean and free from dust, oil, grease, loose or
projecting mortar, and all traces of salts are to be thoroughly sprayed with water. All
water shall be allowed to dry and disappear from the surface before the plaster is
applied.
3.
Plastering shall not be commenced until the background has been suitably prepared.
Blockwork joints shall be deeply raked out, efflorescence brushed off and all dust and
foreign matter removed. On all external surfaces and on all smooth internal surfaces
spatterdash of cement and sand which shall contain 500 kgs of cement per one meter
cube of sand shall be applied and allowed to dry before finishing commenced.
4.
The contractor shall form vertical and horizontal guide screeds 25 mm wide. The
spacing shall not exceed 1500 mm, or as instructed by the Engineer.
5.
The screeds shall be plumb and in the same plane with each other. The sides of the
screed shall be left rough to bond with plaster.
6.
The finished surface shall be true to shape and angle even in all directions, with
straight arises free from cracks and towel marks and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
7.
Cement Mortar:
Cement sand mortar shall consist of one part cement and 4 parts sand. The
ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until
the mix is homogeneous in color. Water shall then be added through a hose in
sufficient quantity to give no more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be
turned until perfectly mixed.
Mortar shall be remixed or worked up again after it has stiffed. Any mortar that has
commenced to set shall not be used in the works.
Mortar shall comply with B.S. 4551 and P.D. 6472.
3.2.
1.
S.T.H
INSTALLATION ( PLASTER WORK )

Plaster shall be thoroughly mixed with the proper amount of water until uniform in
color and consistency. Retempering will not be permitted and all plaster which has
begun to stiffen shall be discarded. All plastering shall be executed in neat
workmanlike manner and internal and external angles shall be true, straight and
plumb. Plaster shall be made good adjacent to metal frames, skirting and around
pipes or other fittings.

______________________________________________________________________________
2.
All surfaces shall be kept scrupulously clean at all times, and strict precautions shall
be taken to avoid the plaster or other materials from becoming contaminated by
pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the setting
time.
3.
Provide 150 mm x 450 mm long strip of diamond mesh reinforcing diagonally at

corners of openings exceeding .19 m2.
4.
At all junctions of dissimilar materials (i.e. concrete and blockwork) the joints shall be
covered by metal lath strip not less than 200 mm wide securely fixed to the surface.
5.
All metal lath work shall be performed before the application of the spatter dash
coat.
6.
Provide typical, closed control joints in soffit areas with insulation above, in areas
which are not covered by insulation use plaster stops back to back with 6 mm space
between. At perimeter use plaster stops 6 mm clear of surrounding materials to
allow air flow through soffits. Control joints shall be at least 4500 mm O.C. each
way unless otherwise shown on drawings.
7.
Cement sand plastering shall be applied in two coats:

1.
2.
S.T.H
"Splatter Dash Coat":

1.
A "Splatter Dash Coat" shall be first applied. The object of this coat is
to provide a firm surface on which the first coat of rendering can be
applied. The mix proportions for "Splatter Dash shall be:
1 part ordinary Portland cement.
2 parts clean sharp sand. If damp sand is used, allowance
shall be made for "bilking" up to 25%. The grading of sand shall
comply with table 1 of BS 1199 or with zones 2 or 3 of BS 882.
2.
The cement and sand shall be mixed with sufficient water to give a
consistency of a thick slurry.
The "Splatter Dash" coat shall not be more than 3 mm thick and shall
be cured.
Final Coat:
1.
The mix proportions for the final coat of rendering shall be:
1 part ordinary Portland cement.
3 parts clean dry sand to table 1 of BS 1199.
2.
The final coat shall be 12 mm thick and shall be floated with a wood
float to give a dense level and even surface. A tolerance of 3mm
under a 3000mm straight edge shall be achieved.
3.
It is important that the final coat shall be slightly weaker than the
preceding one. Otherwise, the former coat will tend to pull the lower
one off.

______________________________________________________________________________
3.3
1.
4.
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for rendering on concrete,

including hacking of concrete and the removal of dexterous
substances from concrete surface prior to plastering. The length of a
panel plastered in one operation shall not exceed 4500 mm.
5.
All batching shall be done by weight to help ensure uniform quality of

the mixed material.
EXTERIOR FINISH
Preparation:
1.
In order to avoid quality deterioration due to rise of temperature, store

materials indoors in cool dry surroundings, and not exposed to direct sunrays
or rainfall.
2.
In places where penetration of water is anticipated such as roof top water

penetration, joints surrounding of drain etc. make adequate inspection and
proper water proofing.
3.
Completely remove dust, stains, oil & flat, paints, powders, laitance etc.
sticking to base substrates.
4.
Avoid applying work under a temperature below 5 , during rainfall, strong

wind, sand storms, and humidity above 85% or when such conditions are
forecast.
5.
After a rain fall, wait till substrate surfaces are dried up uniformally and then
apply work, (Dampness to be totally avoided).
6.
For surroundings of spray-applied faces, apply protection covering.
7.
Before use of materials, adequately stir them in well ventilated areas, and use after
making them uniform.
8.
A manufacturers representative must be present during the preparation and

application of this product, to monitor the entire operation. At the conclusion of the
operation, the representative must certify the same.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
B.
This Section includes the following:

1.
Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2.
Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3.
Cementitious backer units installed with gypsum board assemblies.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to

this Section:
1.
Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel

framing.
2.
Division 7 Section "Fire stopping" for fire stopping systems and fire
resistance-rated joint sealants.
3.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for framing,

gypsum panels, and other components forming shaft wall assemblies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505

for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this
Section or in other referenced standards.
1.3 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with

STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
agency.
B.
Fire Resistance:
ratings indicated.
Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum

board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that
comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600
"Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
S.T.H.
Gypsum board Assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested

for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-2
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Deflection and Fire stop Track: Top runner provided in fire-resistancerated assemblies indicated is labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey,
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
includes.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions
indicated.
B.
Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type

indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or
loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1.
Cast-in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms.
2.
Expansion anchor.
C. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips
or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.6 mm thick.
E.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.1 mm
diameter.
F.
Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness of base (uncoated)

metal and 11.1 mm wide flanges, and as follows:
S.T.H.
1.
Carrying Channels: 38.1 mm deep, 70 kg/ 100 m, unless otherwise

indicated.
2.
Furring Channels: 19.1 mm deep, 45 kg/ 100 m, unless otherwise

indicated.
3.
Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Finish: ASTM A 653M, Z 180 hot-dip galvanized coating for framing

where indicated

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-3
_____________________________________________________________________
G. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs
bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 5 mm wide minimum lip
(return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth.
1.
Thickness:
0.45 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Depth:
3.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653M, Z 90 hot-dip galvanized coating.
H. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 22.2 mm,
and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
I.
1.
Thickness:
2.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653M, Z 90 hot-dip galvanized coating.
Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturers

standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and
cross-furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A.
General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following

requirements:
1.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653M, Z 90 hot-dip galvanized coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back
90 degrees and doubled over to form 5-mm wide minimum lip (return), and
complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and for depth.
1.
Thickness:
2.
Thickness:
0.84 mm as follows:
3.
a.
For head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and
other openings.
b.
In locations to receive cementitious backer units.
Depth:
92.1 mm, unless otherwise indicated or required.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner designed to prevent

cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from
deflection of the structure above fabricated from steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653M or ASTM A 568 M. Thickness as indicated for studs, and
width to accommodate depth of studs, and of the following configuration:
1. Top runner with 63.5 mm deep flanges that either have V-shaped offsets
that compress when pressure is applied from construction above or have
S.T.H.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-4
_____________________________________________________________________
slots 25.4 mm o.c. that allow fasteners attached to studs through the slots
to accommodate structural movement by slipping.
D. Deflection and Fire stop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads
to expand and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining
continuity of the assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except
configuration, of thickness indicated for studs and width to accommodate
depth of studs indicated with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate
depth of studs indicated with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate
gypsum board thickness.
1.
Offset Configuration: Shadow-line design with offset projecting out from

depth of stud.
2.
Offset Configuration: Reveal design with offset recessing in from depth

of stud.
E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
F.
1.
Thickness:
2.
Depth:
22.2 mm minimum.
Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosionresistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal of 0.84 mm, designed for screw attachment to steel studs
and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
G. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed

to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A
653 M or ASTM A 568 M to form 12.7 mm-deep channel of the following
configuration:
1. Single-or Doubled-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with
face connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web) or hatshaped channel, with 38.1 mm wide face connected to flanges by doubleslotted or expanded-metal legs (web).
H. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with
slotted or non-slotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM
A 653M or ASTM A 568M; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness
of 0.45 mm, face flange of 31.8 mm, wall-attachment flange of 22.2 mm, and
of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
I.
Steel Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness of base

uncoated metal and 11.1 mm wide flanges, 38.1 mm deep, 45 kg/ 100 m,
unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing
complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653 M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568
M), length and width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated)
thickness as follows:
1.
S.T.H.
Thickness:
0.84 mm where indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-5
_____________________________________________________________________
K.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size,

corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten
steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying
with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications
indicated.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS

A.
General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths

available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each indicated to receive
gypsum board application.
1.
B.
Widths:
Provide gypsum board in widths of 1200 mm,
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:

1.
Type:
Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Type:
Foil backed where indicated
3.
Type:
Type X where required for fire resistance-rated assemblies.
4.
Type:
Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
5.
Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for pre-filling.
6.
Thickness: 15.9 mm unless otherwise indicated.
C. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s) for Multilayer Applications: Gypsum wallboard

ASTM C 36, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type:
Foil backed indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated
assemblies.
4. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistance rated
assemblies.
D.
S.T.H.
4.
Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
6.
Thickness:
indicated.
12.7 mm, unless otherwise indicated, 15.9 mm where
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows:

1.
Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and

where indicated.
3.
Thickness: 15.9 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-6
_____________________________________________________________________
2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A.
Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness

and width indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize
end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 11.1 mm,
2.
B.
Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 800 mm.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious

backer units that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
The Original Wonde rboard; Custom Building Products.
Wonder board Multi+Board; Custom Building Products.
DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board; Domtar Gypsum.
DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner-bead, edge trim, and control joints
complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1.
Material: Formed metal, with metal complying with the following

requirement:
a.
2.
Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig.1 designations in ASTM C

1047:
a.
Corner-bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to
receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless
c.
L-bead with flange only; face flange formed to receive joint

compound. Use L-bead where indicated.
d.
U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left
without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
e.
One piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable
strip covering slot opening.
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
S.T.H.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-7
_____________________________________________________________________
A.
General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and
the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and the
joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
B.
Joint Type for Gypsum Board:

indicated.
Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise
1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber

reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by
manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for
application indicated.
C.
Joint tape for Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious

backer unit manufacturer.
D. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, jobmixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound
only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with
other joint compounds applied over it.
2.
For pre-filling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by

gypsum board manufacturer.
3.
For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing

board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by
gypsum board manufacturer.
4.
For topping compound, use sandable formulation.
E. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Units: Material recommended by

cementitious backer unit manufacturer.
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's

standard nonsag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM
C 834 and the following requirements:
1.
B.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by
testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical

sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.
AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
S.T.H.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-8
_____________________________________________________________________
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that

comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer.
B.
Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting type joint compound recommended for
spot-grouting hollow metal door frames.
C.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1.
Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.84 mm thick.
2.
Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to
steel members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
E. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for
fastening cementitious backer units.
F. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
non-perforated.
G.
Foam Gaskets: Closed-cell vinyl foam adhesive-backed strips that allow

fastener penetration without foam displacement, 3.2 mm thick, in width to suit
metal stud size indicated.
H. Sound Attenuation Blankets:

Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket insulation
produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without
membrane facing).
1.
I.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock

wool.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarder:

permeance rating as follows:
1.
ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum
0.15 mm, 7.5 ng/ Pa x s x sq. m.
J. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor

retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with

ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in

gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer or, if non available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum
Construction Handbook".
S.T.H.

GYPSUM BOARD
09250-9
_____________________________________________________________________
C.
D.
Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent

transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details
shown on Drawings.
1.
Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2.
Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
a.
Provide slip-or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral

support and avoid axial loading.
b.
Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid
axial loading.
c.
Install deflection and fire stop track top runner at fire-resistance-rated

assemblies where indicated.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing of
furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or
furring members.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards:

gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
Install and Finish

NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for interior non-load-bearing wall studs and
gypsum ceiling assembly.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICCES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate

non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing
agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Design Pressure and Maximum Deflections: Select steel studs in accordance with the
manufacturer's standard load tables:
S.T.H

______________________________________________________________________________
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Use Condition
Wall enclosing stairs, elevator hoistways, and

other vertical shafts
Wall enclosing vestibules, ground floor lobbies, and
similar spaces subject to intermittent exposure to
exterior wind conditions
Typical Interior Walls/Partitions (those not listed
above)
Walls scheduled with Cementitious Backer Board,
Moisture-resistant, or Abuse-Resistant Gypsum
Wallboard
Interior Soffits and Bulkheads
Design
Pressure
Maximum
1
Deflection
478.8 Pa
L/240
478.8 Pa
L/240
239.4 Pa
L/240
239.4 Pa
L/360
239.4 Pa
L/240
Footnotes:
1. Limit deflection to L/360 where wall cladding on either face is any of the
following: Ceramic Tile, Stone Tile, Porcelain Tile, Thin Brick,, Lath & Plaster,
Simulated Masonry or Veneer Plaster.
2. Where elements meet multiple conditions; Use most stringent Deflection and Design
Pressure values.
2.2
A.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized unless
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1.
Steel Studs and Runners:

a.
b.
2.
Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:

a.
b.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1.
2.
3.
S.T.H
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.84 mm.

Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 51-mm- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit
into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 300 mm of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 51-mm- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and
outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure

______________________________________________________________________________
above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate
depth of studs.
D.
Fire-stop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
E.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1.
F.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging:

minimum 13-mmwide flanges.
1.
2.
G.
3.
2.3

Depth: 38 mm.
13-mm- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 1.34-mm uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 13-mmwide flanges.
1.
2.
J.
Depth: 38 mm minimum.
Clip Angle: Not less than 38 by 38 mm, 1.72-mm- thick, galvanized steel.
Resilient Furring Channels:

sound transmission.
1.
I.
Steel, 1.34-mm minimum base-metal thickness, with
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1.
2.
H.

Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.8 mm.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mmdiameter wire, or double strand of 1.21-mmdiameter wire.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or non-slotted web, face flange of 32 mm, wall
attachment flange of 22 mm, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.45 mm, and depth
required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mmdiameter
wire, or double strand of 1.21-mmdiameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1.
S.T.H
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for

attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

______________________________________________________________________________
a.
2.
Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an
independent testing agency.
C.
Wire Hangers:
diameter.
D.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 25 by 5 mm by length indicated.
E.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of

1.34 mm and minimum 13-mmwide flanges.
1.
F.
2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 1.34-mm uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 13-mmwide flanges, 19 mm deep.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
3.
4.
S.T.H
13-mm- deep members designed to reduce sound
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Resilient Furring Channels:

transmission.
a.
A.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 22 mm deep.

a.
5.

Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a.
b.
2.4
4.12 mm in
Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1.
G.
ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

______________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 3.2 mm thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
B.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1.
2.
3.3
A.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 600 mm o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings
indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
2.
3.
4.
S.T.H
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation
in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in

apply to framing installation.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies:
Also comply with
ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies:
Also comply with
ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in
apply to framing installation.
ASTM C 841 that

requirements in
requirements in
ASTM C 840 that

______________________________________________________________________________
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
A.
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Single-Layer Application: 600 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

Multilayer Application: 600 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Backing Panels: 600 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from
floor to underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
6.
S.T.H
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 13mm clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
Fire-stop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fireresistance-rated assembly indicated.
Sound-Rated Partitions:
indicated.
Curved Partitions:
Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

______________________________________________________________________________
a.
b.
E.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
F.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
Screw to wood framing.

Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 600 mm o.c.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
G.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to
arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 150 mm o.c.
Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and

hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 600 mm o.c.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 600 mm o.c.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of
furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second
member no more than 300 mm from corner and cut insulation to fit.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 3 mm from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers: 1200 mm o.c.

Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1200 mm o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 600 mm o.c.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
S.T.H
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, counters playing, or other equally effective
means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

______________________________________________________________________________
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support and
requirements.
F.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members
to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m.
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H

GFRG FABRICATIONS
092714-1
______________________________________________________________________________
GLASS, FIBER, REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section includes factory-fabricated, glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications for interior
applications.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
A.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details, including locations of

attachments for fabrications suspended by tie wires from structure.
Detail fabrication and assembly of glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications.
Indicate requirements for joint treatment.
Indicate location of control joints.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.
2.
1.4
Include construction details, material descriptions, weights, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.
Linear Moldings: 600-mm- long section with finished joint. Show complete pattern.
Nonlinear Shapes: Full-size unit.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with one another, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1.
2.
3.
Ceiling suspension system members.

Structural members to which glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications will be
attached and method of attachment.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
S.T.H
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.

GFRG FABRICATIONS
092714-2
______________________________________________________________________________
e.
4.
1.5
A.
Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
3.
4.
A.
1.7
A.
Build mockup of each type of glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrication.

Paint mockups to match finish indicated and to comply with requirements specified
in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.

Comply with ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions:
1.
2.
B.
Perimeter moldings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
2.
1.6
Access panels..

Do not deliver or install glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications until building is
enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and continuously
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels intended for building
occupants.
Conditioning: Acclimatize glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications to ambient

temperature and humidity of spaces in which they will be installed. Remove packaging
and move units into installation spaces not less than 48 hours before installing them.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED FABRICATIONS
A.
Fabrications:
Molded,
ASTM C 1381/C 1381M.
B.
Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Fabrications (Code: SF11): Provide high density gypsum
reinforced with continuous filament glass fiber mat and structural reinforcing as required
complying with the following characteristics.
1.
2.
3.
S.T.H
glass-fiber-reinforced
Glass Content: 5 to 6 percent by weight.

Density: 1650 to 1795 kg/cu m.
Shell Thickness: 3 to 5 mm, nominal.
gypsum
units
complying
with

GFRG FABRICATIONS
092714-3
______________________________________________________________________________
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Flame Spread Index: 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

Flexural Strength: 22 to 27.5 MPa, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.
Modulus of Elasticity: 1450 to 1515 MPa, when tested in accordance with ASTM D
790.
Tensile Strength: 8.3 to 9.6 MPa, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.
Impact Strength: 13 to 14.4 J/sq mm, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256.
Hardness: M 72, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 785, Rockwell.
Variation from Dimensions Indicated on Drawings: Plus and minus 3 mm, maximum.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Variation from Plane Along Edge or Surface: Plus and minus 1.5 mm in 300 mm,
maximum.
Outside Corner Radius: 1.5 to 3 mm.
Draft Angle: 3 degrees, minimum, on returns, setbacks, reveals, and grooves.
Items Too Large or Heavy to be Adhesively Installed: Provide concealed anchorage
points for plaster type wire anchors.
D.
Embedments: As standard with glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrication manufacturer

and as required for reinforcement and for anchorage to substrates and framing.
E.
Finish: Proprietary multicoat plaster system:

1.
2.
2.2
Self-finishing, with light open texture, directional quality and partial self-polish.
Color and texture: To be selected from manufacturers full range.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives: As recommended in glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrication manufacturer's

written instructions.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1.
Screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum

fabrications to steel members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
C.
Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.
D.
Control Joints: ASTM C 1047, one-piece control joint with V-shaped slot and removable
strip covering the slot opening.
1.
E.
2.3
A.
S.T.H
Material: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mmdiameter
wire, or double strand of 1.21-mmdiameter wire.
FABRICATION
Fabricate glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum units in factory to comply with
ASTM C 1381/C 1381M, with smooth-finished surfaces; repair hollows, voids, scratches,
and other surface imperfections. Fabricate units in lengths and sizes that will minimize
number of joints between abutting units.

GFRG FABRICATIONS
092714-4
______________________________________________________________________________
B.
Embedments: Incorporate embedments into units to develop the full strength of glassfiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications. Cover embedments with not less than 5-mm
thickness of glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum composite.
C.
Connection Hardware: Designed and fabricated to support and connect glass-fiberreinforced gypsum fabrications to hangers, support framing, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications level, plumb, true, and aligned with
adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment.
C.
Attach glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications to framing and substrates with steel drill
screws unless otherwise indicated. Do not use pneumatic staple guns. Countersink screw
heads below adjoining finished surface.
1.
2.
Pre-drill fastener holes in units. Clean fastener holes to remove dirt and oil.
Locate fasteners not less than 7.9 mm from edges or ends of units.
D.
Suspended Systems: Attach suspended glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications to

structure with tie wire at each attachment point indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
Comply with requirements for hangers specified in Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal
Framing."
E.
Where glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications are joined to form composite units, join
fabrications with adhesive. Band or brace units together until adhesive cures.
F.
Install control joints between glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications where indicated.
G.
Use joint-treatment materials to finish glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications to

produce surfaces ready to receive primers and paint finishes specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
1.
2.
Finish glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum fabrications according to ASTM C 840 for

Level 4 or Level 5 and to match surface texture of units.
Repair hollows, voids, scratches, and other surface imperfections on units.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H

CERAMIC TILING
09300-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unglazed ceramic floor tiles.

Fully vitrified stoneware (Porcelain) tile.
Glazed ceramic wall tile.
Ceramic mosaics.
Glass Tiles (mosaic)
Metal Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
1.3
Metal Beads.
Metal Dividers.
Metal movement joint profiles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details,
and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and
finished tile surfaces.
C.

1.
2.
3.
Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish
required.
Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for
each color and finish required, at least 300 mm square and mounted on rigid panel.
Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
D.
Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F.
G.
Material Test Reports: For each tile type or model, tile-setting and -grouting product and
special-purpose tile.
S.T.H.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-2
______________________________________________________________________________
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tiles of same type and color or finish from one
source or producer.
1.
Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform
quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and
each aggregate from one source or producer.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.5
Build mockup of each type, color or finish of floor tile installation.

Build mockup of each type, color or finish of wall tile installation.
Include accents, motif, decoration, borders or special species in mockups.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section Project Management and Coordination.
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 or CE for labeling sealed
tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from
weather conditions.
E.
Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6
A.
S.T.H.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-3
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that conforms or exceeds with one of the following
Standard Specifications;
1.
2.
3.
B.
EN 14411:2003-Ceramic Tiles- Definitions. Classifications, characteristics and

marking.
ISO 13006: Ceramic Tiles- Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking
ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other
characteristics indicated.
Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials that conform or exceeds with
any of the following standards and classifications:
1.
Adhesive:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Grout:
a.
b.
c.
C.
2.2
ANSI A118
EN 13888:2009
IS0 13007
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for
tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and
other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with
the following requirements:
1.
D.
ANSI A118
EN 12004:2007
IS0 13007
As indicated on Drawings by manufacturer's designations.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: For matt finished or unglazed tile

surfaces, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat
unexposed tile surfaces.
TILES
A.
Ceramic Floor Tiles:
B.
Quality standards manufactured to ANSI A137.1 or EN 14411-group B1b tiles and meet
the following properties and characteristics:
1.
Characteristics
a.
b.
c.
S.T.H.
Manufacture:
Composition:
Size:
Dry- pressed, burning to vitrification.

White ware, ceramic mix.
As indicated on Drawings.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-4
______________________________________________________________________________
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Nominal Thickness:
ribs.
Surface Finish:
Colour and Pattern:
Back Condition:
Edge Condition:
Water Absorption:
Bending Resistance:
Abrasion Resistance:
Surface Hardness:
e.
Resistance Against
3)
4)
b)
5)
3.00%
27 N/mm2
205 mm3
Testing Method
ISO 10545.3
ISO 10545.4
ISO 10545.6
6
Chemical Agents:unaffected.
ISO 10545.13
Liner Thermal Expansion Coefficient:
9 MK
-1
ISO
10545.9
Stain Resistance:
ISO
10545.14
Floor Tile Slip Resistance: Comply with any of the following:
a)
Minimum value of R9 for dry and R10 for wet areas according to
DIN 51130.
Minimum value of 36 PTV according to BS 7976 standard, Rz
surface roughness value for wet areas shall be not less than 20
m according to Slip Assessment Tool.
Color Stability: No change in brightness or color. DIN 51094
Dimensional Tolerances: Tiles shall be tested to and meet requirements of EN ISO

13006.
Ceramic Wall Tiles (Code: W4a, W4b, SF9): Manufactured to ANSI A137.1 or BS EN
14411-Group B 2a tiles and meet the following properties and characteristics:
1.
Characteristics
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
S.T.H.
Value
a.
b.
c.
d.
1)
2)
C.
Unglazed.
Match basis of design product.
Raised pattern for keying.
Square
Performance Properties
Property
3.
Minimum 8.00 mm excluding keying
Manufacture:
Composition:
Size:
Nominal Thickness:
Surface Finish:
Colour and Pattern:
Back Condition:
Edge Condition:
Dry-pressed, burning to vitrification.

White ware, ceramic mix.
Minimum 6.00 mm excluding keying ribs.
Glazed.
Square or cushioned, to match design product.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-5
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
Property
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
D.
Testing Method
Water Absorption:
6.00%
ISO 10545.3
Bending Resistance: 27 N/mm2
ISO 10545.4
Abrasion Resistance: 205 mm3
ISO 10545.6
Surface Hardness
6
Liner Thermal Expansion Coefficient: 9 MK -1 ISO 10545.9
Stain Resistance:
resistant
ISO 10545.14
Color Stability: No change in brightness or color. DIN 51094
Dimensional Tolerances: Tiles shall be tested and meet requirements of ANSI

A137.1 or BS EN 14411.
Fully Vitrified Stoneware (Porcelain) Tiles: (Code: F2a, F2b, F2c, F2d, F2e, F2f, F2g, F2h,
F2i, S3, S4, W2a, W2b, W2c, W2d, W2e)
1.
Extremely compact-body impervious paver tiles, homogenous throughout the

thickness fabricated in the dust-pressed method from clay mixed with Kaolin, quartz
and flespar or other porcelain mix and vitrified with lowest porosity through cycles of
high-temperature firing in roller kilns. Stoneware tiles shall be manufactured to ANSI
A137.1 or BS EN 14411-group B1a tiles and meet the following properties and
characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Characteristics
Size:
Nominal Thickness: Minimum 9.00 mm excluding keying ribs.
Surface Condition:
Textured with matt finish.
Color and Pattern:
Back Condition:
Edge Condition:
Square
Property
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2)
h.
3.
Value
Testing Method
Water Absorption:
0.5%
ISO 10545.3
Bending Resistance: 27 N/mm2
ISO 10545.4
Resistance Against
Chemical Agents:
unaffected.
ISO 10545.13
Liner Thermal Expansion Coefficient: 9 MK -1 ISO 10545.9
Stain Resistance:
resistant
ISO 10545.14
Floor Tile Slip Resistance: Comply with any of the following:
1)
S.T.H.
Value
Minimum value of R9 for dry and R10 for wet areas according to DIN
51130.
Minimum value of 36 PTV according to BS 7976 standard, Rz surface
roughness value for wet areas shall be not less than 20 m according to
Slip Assessment Tool.
Color Stability: No change in brightness or color.
DIN 51094
Dimensional Tolerances: Tiles shall be tested to ANSI A137.1 or BS EN 14411.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-6
______________________________________________________________________________
E.
Glass Tile : Factory-mounted mosaic glass tile.

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Module Size: As indicated.

Sizing Category: Standard.
Tile Color and Pattern: Match Engineer's sample.
Grout Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
VOC Content of Ceramic Tile Adhesive: Comply with VOC content limits required by
B.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified
below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cement: Ordinary Portland to ASTM C 150, Type I.

Sand: ASTM C144, approved grading.
Mortar Mix: Job-mixed cement-sand mortar consisting of 1 part ordinary Portland
cement and 3-4 parts sand (by volume). Use Latex Additive as per manufacturers
printed recommendations.
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 50.8 by 50.8 mm by 1.57mm diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire
size.
a.
5.
Use reinforcing wire fabric for installations over compressible thermal

insulating materials.
Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847.

a.
Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated

(galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication
into lath.
1)
2)
6.
C.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber

water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type
specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed
Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
Latex-Portland Cement Adhesive (Thin Set Mortar):

following:
1.
2.
3.
ANSI A118.4, consisting of the
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, re-dispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate

additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadienerubber liquid-latex additive.
a.
S.T.H.
Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.

Weight: 1.4 kg/sq. m.
For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with

Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
Use product of waterproofing properties. Water absorption shall not exceed that of
adjoining tiles.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-7
______________________________________________________________________________
4.
D.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I or ISO 13007

1.
E.
Use for dry applications of counters.
Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3 and comply

with VOC content limits required by authorities having jurisdiction in Abu Dhabi.
1.
2.
F.
Use for floor and wall tiles installation, unless other material is specified.
Use for Installations subject to water exposure in bathrooms, showers, toilets,

pantries, kitchens, fountains and the like.
Provide grout of waterproofing properties. Water absorption shall not exceed 1.00%,
by volume
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7 or ISO 13007 color as indicated or directed by
Engineer.
1.
2.
Factory mixed and packaged dry-grout mix with latex additive in liquid form.
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for
addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3.00 mm and narrower.

Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 3.00 mm.
Use for installations in dry areas.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of

base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that
comply with the limits for VOC content required by authorities having jurisdiction in Abu
Dhabi.
C.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining
sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated or instructed by Engineer.
2.5
A.
Sand Beds: Siliceous natural sand from approved pits conforming to ASTM C33, not more
than 10% retained on 4.60 mm sieve and not more than 3% by weight of silt and clay.
Spread sand beds over 0.150mm thick polyethylene vapor barrier.
B.
Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile,
mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without
damaging grout or tile.
1.
S.T.H.
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is

specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for
tile.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-8
______________________________________________________________________________
C.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile
and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile
and grout manufacturers.
D.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does
not change color or appearance of grout.
2.6
A.
METAL ACCESSORIES
Metal Beads: Proprietary metal fittings, high quality metal profile products for use in
decorative applications of PVC, extruded aluminum alloy and temper 6063-T5, brass,
stainless steel. Install one integral piece for each application.
1.
2.
B.
Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and EPDM or neoprene base,
designed specifically for flooring applications, in longest lengths available, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Use for external corners and other locations as indicated on Drawings.

Size as approved by Engineer.
Exposed-Edge Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 302 or as indicated on

the Drawing.
Cross-Section Profile: as indicated on the Drawing or to be selected by Engineer
from manufacturers full range.
Height: Equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
Control-Joint Filler: EPDM or neoprene, in color selected by Engineer from
manufacturer's full range.
Provide movement and control joints through ceramic or stone floor tiles in
compliance with one of the referenced Code of Practice installation standards in this
Section.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of installed tile.
1.
S.T.H.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced

CERAMIC TILING
09300-9
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
B.
3.2
ANSI A108 Series of tile installation or corresponding European standards for

installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations;
if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Engineer.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap,
wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from
one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match
approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at
Project site before installing.
C.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated below under tile type or
needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them
with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile
surfaces.
1.
3.3
A.
Exposed surface of unglazed ceramic floor tiles and porcelain floor tiles.
Tile Installation Standard Codes of Practice: Comply with one of the following standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ANSI A108. 1 through A108.13 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic

Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated
in ceramic tile installation schedules.
BS 5385 series.
BS 8000 11.A
Installation methods recommended by Tile Council of America (TCA).
Installation methods recommended by tile manufacturer.
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in patterns indicated on Drawings or approved shop Drawings.
Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile
work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to
minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
S.T.H.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-10
______________________________________________________________________________
E.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
2.
3.4
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

Prepare sealant-filled expansion joints and apply sealants to comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install floor tile to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings, specified in
this Section and in the referenced installation standard.
B.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in Contract Documents, install tile on
floors with the following joint widths:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.5
Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles: 3.00 mm.

Porcelain floor tiles: 3.00 mm.
Ceramic Mosaics: Manufactures standard
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install floor tile to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings, specified in
this Section and in the referenced installation standard.
B.
Install metal lath and keying scratch (dash) coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A,
Section 4.1A or any of the corresponding Tile Installation Standard Codes of Practice
approved by Engineer.
C.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in Contract Documents, install tile on
walls with the following joint widths:
1.
2.
3.6
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING

Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so
they are free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
S.T.H.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Manufacturers standard.

Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: 3.00 mm.
Remove latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's
written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that
cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be
cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning.
Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

CERAMIC TILING
09300-11
______________________________________________________________________________
3.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating

manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove
coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to

completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09300
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of dimension stone:
1.03
1.
Interior flooring.
2.
Wall cladding.
3.
Interior column cladding.
4.
Bases (skirting).
5.
Thresholds.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI, American National Standards Institute.
B. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
C. ILI, Indiana Limestone Institute.
D. MIA, Marble Institute of America.
E. NBGQA, National Building Granite Quarries Association.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product/Technical Data:
1. For each variety of stone and for each type of product indicated.
2. Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, limitations and warranties.
3. Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, sections, details and attachments to other work.
2. Provide shop.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-2
__________________________________________________________________
C. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include three or more Samples in each set and
show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in
expected in completed Work.
2. For each color of grout required.
D. Certificates: Submit manufacturers certificates stating that materials supplied are
in accordance with this specification.
E. Maintenance Data: For dimension stone tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
B. Mockups: Build mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockup of typical wall cladding area as shown on Drawings.
3. Build mockup of typical column cladding area in area as indicated by
Architect.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time Substantial Completion.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 50 deg F (10 deg
C).
2. Maintain temperature at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above in installation areas
during installation and for 7 days after completion.
1.07
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Stone Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition color, pattern and size indicated.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-3
__________________________________________________________________
1.08
WARRANTY
The manufacturer and installer of stone tiles, adhesives, grouts, accessories and
mortars shall provide a comprehensive written Ten (10) years warranty against
defective products which covers replacement materials and labour costs for
demolition, tiles and installation systems.
PART 2- PRODCUTS
2.01
STONE
A. Acceptable marble, stone tile, adhesive and grout suppliers shall be as per list
manufacturers.
B. Marble flooring (MAR): Conforming to ANSI/ASTM C503.
1. Marble wall cladding to be fired.
2. Finishes: Polished, honed.
3. Pattern: To be selected by Architect.
4. Colors: Allow for four colors to be selected by the Architect from
manufacturers full range.
5. Marble types as follows:
a. MAR1: To be selected by Architect.
b. MAR2: To be selected by Architect.
c. MAR3: To be selected by Architect.
d. MAR4: To be selected by Architect.
6. Technical data of marble (Compressive strength, water absorption .etc.) shall
be proposed by the specialist supplier and approved by Engineer/Client.
C. Granite floor (GRAN): Conforming to ASTM C615.
1. Pattern: To be selected by Architect.
2. Finishes: Polished, honed.
3. Colors: Allow for four colors to be selected by the Architects.
4. Granite tile types as follows:
a. GRAN1: To be selected by Architect.
b. GRAN2: To be selected by Architect.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-4
__________________________________________________________________
c. GRAN3: To be selected by Architect.
d. GRAN4: To be selected by Architect.
5. Technical data of Granite (Compressive strength, water absorption, etc.) shall
be proposed by the specialist supplier and approved by Engineer/Client.
2.02
THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition
between adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slopes, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor
finish. Limit height of bevel to 12.7 mm or less and finish bevel to match face
of threshold.
B. Stone Thresholds: Free of cracks, seams and starts impairing their structural
integrity of function, and are from a single quarry for each type, variety, color and
quantity of stone specified.
1. Size and Profile: As required to provide transition between finished surface of
tile and that of adjacent finished flooring.
2. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503.
3. Color and Finish: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/ Client, color and
finish shall be white, honed marble classified Group A per definitions for
soundness classification in MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual IV.
2.03
BASE (SKIRTING)
A. Stone Base: Stone base tile to match floor or wall tile as indicated. Fabricate to
sizes and profiles indicated. Type, colors and styles to be selected by Architect.
Locations: As indicated in drawings.
2.04
MARBLE COLUMN AND WALL CLADDING

A. Provide marble as indicated to interior columns & walls as indicated on drawings.
B. Protect marble cladding for columns with wooden boards.
C. Provide all anchors, cramps, dowels, ties and other similar fastenings as required
for installation of interior marble cladding. All fixing, accessories shall be stainless
steel unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client.
2.05
MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-5
__________________________________________________________________
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested
according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing 1.18-mm (No.16) sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
durable stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
D. Latex Additive: Manufacturers standard water emulsion, serving as replacement
for part or all gagging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive
manufacturer for us with field-mixed Portland cement mortar bed and not
containing a retarder.
E. Thin-Set Mortar:
1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
F. Water: Potable.
2.06
GROUT
A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.
B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6.
1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3 mm and narrower.
2. Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 3 mm.
D. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Unsanded grout mix for 3 mm and narrower.
2. Sanded grout mix for joints wider than 3 mm.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
B. Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and PVC as per
selection of Engineer/Client, designed specifically for flooring applications, in
longest lengths available, and as follows:
1. Exposed-Edge Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 316, unless
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-6
__________________________________________________________________
2. Cross-Section Profile: Angle or L-shape, T-shape, single or two part, or

Straight shape as indicated.
3. Height: Equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
4. Width: 3.2 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Control-Joint Filler: Neoprene.
C. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
D. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes and
applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is
specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compound containing
acids, caustics, harsh fillers or abrasives.
E. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color
or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for
application indicated.
2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers written
instructions to produce mortar of uniform qualify and with optimum performance
characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium
chloride.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification,
Type N.
C. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
D. Latex-modified Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix Portland
cement, aggregate and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturers
2.09
STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks,
seams and starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
B. Fabricate stone to comply with requirements indicated and with the following
references:
1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQAs Specifications for
Architectural Granite.
2. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIAs Dimension StoneDesign Manual.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-7
__________________________________________________________________
3. For stone not otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations in MIs
Dimension Stone- Design Manual.
4. Cut stone to produce of thickness, size and shape indicated, including details
on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Stone Edges: As indicated.
2. Joint Width: 1.5 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other
natural markings to comply with the following requirement:
1. Cut stone from one block or continuous, matched blocks in which natural
markings occur.
2. Arrange units in blend pattern.
D. Fabricate stone threshold in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to provide
transition between adjacent floor finishes.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris and loose
particles.
B. Remove substrates from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushed
and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds.
3.02
A. Install stones in accordance with manufacturers instructions and TTMAC
Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual. Manufacturers installation
instructions govern over TTMA Installation Manual.
B. Do necessary filed cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish
field-cut edges to match shop-cut edges.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone except for stone that is
specified to have rough-split edges.
C. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings.
D. Align floor, base and wall grout joints.
E. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints
of size specified or indicated.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-8
__________________________________________________________________
F. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
3.03
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or of
nominal joint width, whichever is less.
B. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6m or 10 mm
maximum from level or slope indicated.
C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8-mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE

A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even
coating that completely covers the concrete. Do not exceed 1.5- mm thickness.
Limit area of mortar-bed bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting
bed.
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat/ Spread,
tamp, and screed to uniform thickness at elevations required for setting stone to
finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone
before initial set. Cut back, bevel edge and discard material that has reached
initial set before stone can be places.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone
on setting bed, apply uniform 1.5-mm thick bond coat to bed or to back of each
stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact
with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set
each unit in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas
already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surface or
adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as units are set.
3.05
STONE THRESHOLD INSTALLATION

A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of
setting bed as abutting stone flooring unless otherwise indicated.
B. At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in watercleanable epoxy adhesive to comply with ANSI A108.4.
S.T.H.

STONE TILES
09310-9
__________________________________________________________________
3.06
MARBLE COLUMN/WALL CLADDING INSTALLATION

A. Lay out work to reviewed shop drawings with marble units matched for grain,
color and shading.
B. All substrate shall treat with approved dampproofing bituminous primer as per
division 7.
C. Use dry fixed method for stone cladding.
D. Set marble units plumb, level and accurately in position with anchors securely in
place.
E. Make joints uniform.
F. Make joints water tight without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.
3.07
GROUTING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and with manufacturers written
instructions.
1. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.
2. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into
joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces.
After initial set of grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave
polished joint, free of drying cracks.
3. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days except as
otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
3.08

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
B. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures
recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
C. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturers written
instructions.
D. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
E. Protect installed stonework during construction with non-staining craft paper.
Where adjoining areas require construction work access, cover stonework with a
minimum of 20-mm untreated plywood over non-staining craft paper.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

EXTERNAL CLADDING
09320-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1- INTRODUCTION
Tiles to be first choice full-body porcelain stoneware with thickness of 14mm or
20mmSystem has been developed to be installed such ventilated cladding wall with
ceramic tiles, point-fixed with stainless steel clamps and longitudinal beads of
adhesive to the metallic structure.
Specialized company approved should install the system, being possible the
technical assistance. The inspection right of checking any installation of the system
described in this document.
The installer company will ensure that installation will be executed according to
conditions exposed in this document and tolerating the observations made by the
Technical Engineer.
Sizes to be a combination of 60x60 cm. and 60x120 cm. of structured finish,
withcolors of Architect / Consultants choice.
All tiles to be dry pressed and fired at a temperature of not less than 1200 C.
PART 2 -TECHNICAL DOCUMENT OF VENTILATED FAADE SYSTEM
System is a system of longitudinal hidden mixed fixation (chemical and mechanical),
which works for the compression made by the profiles on the back of the ceramic tile.
Tiles are industrially mechanized in longitudinal on the top and bottom of its back with
a double groove to 45, where a couple of aluminum profiles are inserted and fixed
with an adhesive MS putty, to give to the ceramic tile a higher safety. These profiles
constitute the tiling hanger the highlight for allowing an easy replacement.
These steel clamps hold the ceramic with the insertion of their clamps in the grooves
made previously on the ceramic borders. These grooves are with an industrial
machine under the highest safety control, to guarantee that depth and width are into
tolerances.
The whole contact surface between the ceramic and the vertical profile (that coincide
with the vertical joints), will be sealed with an adhesive MS cord.
Furthermore, the use of this adhesive allows to absorb movements of ceramic due to
wind and thats why the ceramic is not directly in touch with the structure, so the
adhesive is who absorb the dilations of the different materials. It also allow that, in
case of breaking it doesnt become detached.
2.1
OBJECT
System should install ventilated faade in new building or restoration, composed by
ceramic tiles fixed to the framework with chemical and mechanical anchors.
The framework is based in vertical profiles, fixations and its corresponding anchors.
They were developed to be installed on regular and vertical walls. These walls can
be done of concrete, bricks or metallic structure.
Anyway, anchors should be defined in the ventilated faade technical project
depending the support and loadings to transmit.
S.T.H.

EXTERNAL CLADDING
09320-2
__________________________________________________________________
2.2
DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM

System is composed by:
-
Vertical Aluminium profiles anchored to wall support with brackets and the
necessaries anchors. These profiles will be coincident with the vertical joints.
Stainless steel clips AISI 304
Single component elastic putty, based on polymer.
PART 3- COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS

3.1
Tile Fixing
Tiles to be clad to the external substrate by mechanical fixing using grade 304
stainless steel angles from approved manufacturer, as per the attached section
details.
3.2
SUBSTRUCTURE
3.2.1
Brackets
There exist two types:
-
Sustaining brackets, which support and transmit to the concrete structure

weight and wind burdens. Theyre usually fixed to slabs.
Retaining brackets, which they just transmit the horizontal wind burdens.
Theyre fixed to wall support.
All these brackets are minimum 3mm thickness.

Standard Bracket = 70 x 50 x 115
Standard Corner Bracket = 70 x 180 x 80
3.2.2
Vertical Profile
Dimensional and shape tolerances are agree with Norm UNE EN 755-9. To
special applications, the profiles to be non-standardized according to the needs.
3.2.3
Fasteners
The fasteners to join profiles together and also to the brackets are manufactured
with stainless on A2 or A4 alloy with the measurements and mechanical
properties according to this table.
3.2.4
Anchorages to support
Type, position and number of anchorages of the brackets to the wall support will
depend according to the support material and the efforts transmitted to it, being
reflected on the previous ventilated faade project.
The standard anchorages to the slabs are the mechanical plugs A2 M8x75 with
these main characteristics:
-
S.T.H.
Traction Resistance: 561 kg

Shear loading: 531 kg

EXTERNAL CLADDING
09320-3
__________________________________________________________________
PART 4 INSTALLATION
The structure is installed on the support with the brackets and necessary
anchorages.
The vertical profiles will be installed coincident with the vertical joints.
PART 5 STRUCTURAL CALCULATION
The action on the ventilated faade system will be calculated to CTE DBSE-AE
related to actions on edification.
For the system calculation, it will be considered that ceramic should support wind
loadings (pressure and suction) and transmit them, with its own weight and through
the structure and anchorages to the support.
Technical Specifications
Description
Sides
Standard
EN ISO 10545-2
Thickness
EN ISO 10545-2
Water Absorption
Modules of repture
EN ISO 10545-3
EN ISO 10545-4
Determination of the Breaking Load at

Dowel Hole
Impact Resistance
Abrasion Resistance
Co-efficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
Resistance to Thermal Shocks
Frost Resistance
Resistance to Chemicals
Resistance to Stains
Static Load
EN 13364 : 2002
Skid Resistance
EN ISO 10545-5
EN ISO 10545-6
EN ISO 10545-8
EN ISO 10545-9
EN ISO 10545-12
EN ISO 10545-13
EN ISO 10545-14
EN ISO 12825
DM. 236/89 BCRA

DIN 51130
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
S.T.H.
Specified Value
0.6% Max.
(2.0 mm Max.)
5.0% Max.
(0.5 mm Max.)
0.05%
R45 N/mm
6080 N
1,200 N
0.88
134 mm
6.3x10 C
No Damage
No Damage
UA ULA UHA
5
Center = 6.40 KN
Center Point of Side = 7.43 KN
Diagonal = 4.14 KN
R11

CEILINGS
09500-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
This Section includes mineral fiber, solid and perforated lay-in system acoustical
panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
B. CISCA, Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association.
C. NAAMM, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
D. NVLAP, National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.05
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design ceiling suspension systems
manufacturers printed directions.
in
accordance
with
ASTM
C636
and
B. Design tile ceiling system in away that allow adequate support of electrical fixtures as
required by the current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority. Acoustic panel
system is not designed to carry the weight of electrical equipment.
C. Design hanger anchor and entire suspension system static loading not to exceed 25%
of their ultimate capacity including lighting fixture dead loads. Acoustic panel system is
not designed to carry the weight of electrical equipment.
D. Design tile suspension system in away to allow rotation/relocation of light fixtures.
Acoustic panel system is not designed to carry the weight of mechanical and electrical
equipment.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
E. Design sub framing as necessary to accommodate, to avoid conflicts and interferences
where ducts or equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Suspension system layout including hangers and supports for acoustic tile system.
2. Acoustic panel system including suspension system, hangers, supports and panel
sizes and locations.
3. Conditions at abutting, intersecting and penetrating construction.
4. Dimensioned locations of lighting fixtures, diffusers, sprinkler heads and other
items that pierce the ceiling plane.
C. Samples for verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings and Trim: Set of 300-mm long
Samples of each, finish and color.
D. Certificates: Submit written certification stating that suspended ceiling system is
designed for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current bulletin
of Electrical Safety Authority.
E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an
NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories
must document accreditation, based on a Certificate of Accreditation and a Scope of
Accreditation listing the test methods specified.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with
the following requirements:
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel with the following
surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D. Mock-up:
1. Construct one 10 sq, m mock-up of each type of acoustical panel ceiling in location
acceptable to Consultant.
2. Arrange for Architects review and acceptance; allow 48 hours after acceptance
before proceeding with Work.
3. Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by Architect. Remove and
dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.
4. Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for the
balance of the work of this Section.
1.08

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.09
PROTECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the level indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.10
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system and partition assemblies.
1.11
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
contents.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to
2.0 percent of quantity installed.
1.12
WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer and installer of Acoustical Panel Ceiling shall provide a
comprehensive non pro-rated written Ten (10) years warranty against defective
products which covers replacement materials and labour costs for repair and
installation systems.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturers standard panels of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
2.02
MODULAR, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
B. Acoustic tile *ACT 1):
1. Basis of design products: Specialist manufacturer for Acoustical tile.
2. Classification: ASTM E 1264 for type, form and pattern as follows:
a. Type and Form: Type III, form 2,
1. Wet-formed mineral fiber with factory applied vinyl latex paint.
b. Pattern: CE (C-perforated, small holes; E-lightly textured).
3. Color: White.
4. LR: 0.83.
5. NRC: 0.50.
6. CAC: 35.
7. Edge Detail: Square.
8. Thickness: 15 mm.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-5
_____________________________________________________________________________
9. Size: 610 by 610 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Acoustic tile (ACT 2):
1. Basis of design product: Specialist manufacturer for Acoustical tile.
2. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form and
pattern as follows:
a. Type and Form: Type IV, Form 2.b Pattern: GH.
3. Description: Wet-formed mineral fiber with soil-resistant polyester film.
4. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.
5. LR: Not less than 0.79.
6. NRC: Not less than 0.60.
7. CAC: Not less than 35.
8. Edge Detail: Square.
9. Thickness: 16 mm.
10. Size: 610 by 610 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
11. Location: Provide acoustic panel type in operating rooms and additional areas as
indicated.
2.03
PLAIN METAL PANEL

A.

B.
Plain Metal Panel- un-perforated type (MT):

1. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and
pattern as follows:
a. Type and Form: Class A, Type XX with aluminum base material.
b. Pattern: G
2. Colors: Allow for four colors as follows as selected by Architect from
manufacturers full range:
a. MT1: To the later selection of the Architect.
b. MT2: To the later selection of the Architect.
c. MT3: To the later selection of the Architect.
d. MT4: To the later selection of the Architect.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-6
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. CAC: Not less than 36.
4. Acoustic Range:
a. NRC of 0.10, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Where requested, provide optional fiberglass infill to achieve NRC rating
0.90.
5. Surface finish: Factory-applied powder-coated finish.
6. Size: 600 x 600 x 0.7 mm thickness.
7. Edge detail: Square regular.
8. Location(s): Provide aluminum panel for wet areas such as ensuites, kitchen,
public washrooms and additional areas as indicated in drawings.
2.04
PERFORATED METAL PANELS

B. Perforated metal panel (MPT):
1. Size: 600 x 600 mm.
2. Base Material: 0.53 mm thick electro galvanized steel.
3. Edge Detail: Flush regular.
4. Perforations: Micro perforated with plain border.
5. Acoustic pad: Manufacturers standard acoustical fleece meeting NRC rating as
specified.
6. Finish: Factory-applied powder coated finish.
7. Colors: Allow for four colors as follows as selected by Architect from
manufacturers full range.
a. MPT1: To the later selection of the Architect.
b. MPT2: To the later selection of the Architect.
c. MPT3: To the later selection of the Architect.
d. MPT4: To the later selection of the Architect.
8. Acoustic Range: NRC of 0.65.
9. Location(s): As indicated in drawings.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-7
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.05
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturers standard lay-in metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications and finished indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMMs Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Provide manufacturers standard factory-applied finish for type of system
indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct hung unless otherwise indicated.
1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with
ceiling construction as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ADTM
C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not
less than 2.69-mm diameter wire.
E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mm thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90(Z275) coating
designations; with bolted connections and 8-mm diameter bolts.
G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturers
accommodate seismic forces.
standard
compression
struts
designed
to
H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturers standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panel in-place.
I.
Suspension system for metal panel ceiling to include the following:

1. Exposed Tee Grid system (Carrier rails):
a. Grid system to consist of 24 mm face dimension accurately punched extruded
aluminum tee bar, to form a 600 x 600 mm module with main runners at 600
mm centres.
b. All cross members to form flush level hairline joints with the main runners.
c. Finish & color: Total grid system to be finished in baked enamel to match the
color of ceiling tile.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-8
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Hanger clips: Cold formed zinc coated steel secured to threaded rod hangers with
locking nuts and clip to carrier rails.
2.06
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTIC CEILINGS

B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, pre-painted, electrolytically zinc
coated or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/653M, not less than G30(Z90)
coating designation with prefinished 15-mm wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
2.07
METAL EDGE MOLDING AND TRIM

B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if
not indicated, manufacturers standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit
acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet
of same material, finish and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension
system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that
forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and
flange at exposed suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and
manufacturers standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of
exposed runners.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-9
_____________________________________________________________________________
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
Measure each ceiling are and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than half-width panels at
borders and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.03
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic
requirements indicated, per manufacturers written instructions and CISCAs Ceiling
Systems Handbook. The Acoustical tiles shall be applied in one level, so no
deformation in level will be allowed.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from buildings structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other object within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, counters playing, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within plenum products hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spankings required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceilings suspension members and hangers to support
above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to
structures or to inserts, eye screws or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
corrosion or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type
of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, post installed mechanical or adhesive
anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-10
_____________________________________________________________________________
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 200 mm
from ends of each member.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on molding and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edged and fit accurately into suspension
system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and
penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom
of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings
and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for
cleaning and minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that
cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of
damage.
PART 4 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

4.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
4.02
A.
4.03
SUMMARY
Section includes acoustical panels and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
4.04
ACTION SUBMITTALS
C. Product Data: For each type of product.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 150 mm
in size.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-11
_____________________________________________________________________________
F. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
4.05
Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
Concealed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 150-mmlong Samples of each type, finish, and color.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Suspended ceiling components.

Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Lighting fixtures.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency.
D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and
fastener type, from ICC-ES or corresponding European code acceptable to Engineer.
E. Field quality-control reports.
4.06
A.
4.07
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
S.T.H.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity

installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed component equal
to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Impact Clips: Equal to 2 Insert number percent of quantity installed.

CEILINGS
09500-12
_____________________________________________________________________________
4.08
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Retain "Testing Agency Qualifications" Paragraph below if Contractor or manufacturer
selects testing agency or if Contractor is required to provide services of a qualified
testing agency in "Field Quality Control" Article. Qualification requirements are in
addition to those specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
I. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated or
European equivalent acceptable to Engineer.
J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
4.09
Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project

site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space
where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature
extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
4.09
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at
the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.
Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours
before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.01
L. Performance and other requirements standards indicated below are basic requirements
of the product/s in this Section. Subject to compliance with requirements, Contractor
may provide equivalent product that comply with similar or more stringent
international standards acceptable to Engineer.
M.
S.T.H.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

CEILINGS
09500-13
_____________________________________________________________________________
N. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or corresponding standard
acceptable to AHJ; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 or BS EN 13501 for Class A

materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
O.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
5.02
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall be not more than the limits
required by authorities having jurisdiction in Abu Dhabi.
B. Source Limitations:
1.
2.
C.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 or corresponding European standard
classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
A.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing

pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Engineer from each manufacturer's full
range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 or
corresponding European standard for type, form, and pattern as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
S.T.H.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 400 mm away from test surface according to
ASTM E 795 or corresponding European test method acceptable to Engineer.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
1.
5.03
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
Suspension System:
Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
Suspension: Exposed Grid System, Demountable Ceiling
Dimensions As indicated.

CEILINGS
09500-14
_____________________________________________________________________________
5.
6.
7.
B.
Technical Performance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C.
5.04
Thickness / Weight: As indicated

Color: White similar to RAL 9010
Edge details: As indicated.
Building material class A2-s1, d0 as per EN 13501-1

Class A as per ASTM E1264 (tested according to ASTM E84)
Fire protection REI 30 - REI 90 as per EN 13501-2 (according to test certificate)
Sound absorption EN ISO 354
w = 0.95 as per EN ISO 11654
NRC = 0.90 as per ASTM C 423
Sound attenuation Dn,f,w = 28 dB as per EN 10848 (19 mm thickness, according
to test certificate)
Light reflectance up to 88%
Thermal conductivity = 0.040 W/mK as per EN 12667
Humidity Up to 95% RH
Clean room classification ISO-class 4 as per ISO 14644-1
Color: As indicated on Drawings.
NRC: Not less than 0.75.
Edge/Joint Detail: Recessed.
Thickness: Min. 15 mm.
Modular Size: 600 by 600 mm unless otherwise indicated.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical

panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits
fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no
mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and
evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 or corresponding European
standards.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung
metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated
that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M or EN 13964.
8.
High-Humidity Finish:
Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for
"Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity
finishes are indicated.
T. Attachment Devices:
Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a.
b.
S.T.H.
Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.

Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

CEILINGS
09500-15
_____________________________________________________________________________
c.
d.
2.
Corrosion Protection:
Stainless-steel components complying with
ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304
or 316 for anchor.
Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods
complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
U. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties:

requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide wires complying with the following
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of
wire, but provide not less than 3.5-mmdiameter wire.
V. Hanger Rods or Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive
paint.
W.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mmthick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating
designation; with bolted connections and 8-mmdiameter bolts.
X. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to

accommodate seismic forces.
Y. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate
seismic forces.
Z. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panels in place.
AA.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down

clips spaced 610 mmo.c. on all cross tees.
BB.
Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system

designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
CC. Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard

system, including manufacturer's standard closed-cell PVC or
neoprene,
antimicrobial gasket and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention clips,
designed to seal out foreign material from and maintain positive pressure in clean
room.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-16
_____________________________________________________________________________
5.05
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Concealed Metal Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from coldrolled steel sheet; pre-painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than Z90 coating designation.
1.
2.
5.06
Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and
effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
3.
4.
5.
Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant.

Concealed Joints:
Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.
Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content that complies with the limits required
by authorities having jurisdiction in Abu Dhabi.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which

acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
6.02 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
6.03
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M or EN
13964 and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions or CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook" or similar European system
handbook or code acceptable to Engineer.
1.
S.T.H.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested firerated design.

CEILINGS
09500-17
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Install the main runners (t-profiles) with quick hangers at 1250mm centres,
depending on the tile width. These are fixed to the soffit using suitable, approved
fixings dependent on the soffit type. The installed profiles are aligned, levelled and
fixed in the chosen module size with spacer bars at twice the length of each tile.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated
ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
counters playing, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and
the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive
anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of
hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 1200 mmo.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than
200 mm from ends of each member.
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
D. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post installed anchors.
E. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
S.T.H.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs

of moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 400 mmo.c. and
not more than 75 mm from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 3.2 mm in 3.6 m. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

CEILINGS
09500-18
_____________________________________________________________________________
F. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
G.Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspensionsystem runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and
penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a.
b.
c.
2.
For chamfered or square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from
view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6.04
A.
C.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of
exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by
acoustical panel manufacturer.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and
fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections:
Compliance of seismic design.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical
panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages. Do not
proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until
test results for previously completed installations show compliance with
requirements.
1.
S.T.H.
The tile edge configurations for the long and short edges of tiles are
different. To secure the tiles in the system (supported on the main runners),
the tiles feature an (demountable) edge Push edge onto the T-profile
concealing the grid at the same time. On the opposite side, the tile simply
sits on the main runner. The tiles can be installed or demounted by gentle
lifting and shifting of the tiles. The long edge features a (grooved) edge and
is reinforced with L profiles.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1.
B.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of
space.
Install panels in a basket-weave pattern.
Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on

each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.

CEILINGS
09500-19
_____________________________________________________________________________
a.
b.
Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 poweractuated fasteners and post installed anchors used to attach hangers to
concrete and will test them for 890 N of tension; it will also select one of
every two post installed anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete
and will test them for 1957 N of tension.
When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with
requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested
until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
D. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective
if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
6.05
A.
CLEANING
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components
that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of
damage.
PART 7 - METAL PAN CEILINGS

7.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes plain, unperforated metal pans and associated suspension system for
interior ceilings.
7.02
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
7.03
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of seismic restraints and attachment devices.
7.04
A. Product test reports.
B. Evaluation reports.
7.05
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-20
_____________________________________________________________________________
7.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
1.
2.
Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

PART 8 - PRODUCTS
8.01
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints and attachment
devices.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or corresponding European

standard acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
2.
8.02
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

METAL PAN CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Ceiling Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
seismic design requirements.
D. Sheet Metal Characteristics: For metal components exposed to view in the completed
Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use
materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roughness, stains, or
discolorations.
1.
Aluminum Sheet: Rolled aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209M; alloy
and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and
finish indicated.
a.
8.03
Chemical/Mechanical Finishes: Uncoated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with luster or bright finish as required by finisher for
applying electroplating or other metallic-finishing processes.
ALUMINUM PANS FOR METAL PAN CEILING

A. Classification: Units complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type XX, other types described
as un-perforated aluminum facing (pan) units.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-21
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Square edged tiles which are 591x591 mm (module 600 x 600 mm) made of 1.0 mm
thick aluminum sheet. The square edged tiles are designed to lay in flush with the tee
bar.
C. Pan Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units of size, profile, and edge treatment
indicated, formed from metal indicated and finished to comply with requirements
indicated.
1.
Lay-in Pans: Formed to set in exposed suspension grid.
D. Pan Thickness: Not less than 1.0 mm.

E. Pan Edge Detail: Reveal, flush.
F. Pan Size: 600 by 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
G. Pan Face Finish: Painted White (RAL 9010).
8.04
DIRECT-HUNG, STANDARD-GRID, METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR PLAIN

METAL PAN CEILING
A. Suspension System: For lay-in pans.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners
roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytic zinc-coated or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z90 coating designation, with
prefinished, cold-rolled, 24-mmwide sheet metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range.
C. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide exposed members as indicated or as
required to comply with seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to
conceal edges of and penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of pans and
runners, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for
other conditions; of metal and finish matching metal pan ceiling units unless otherwise
indicated.
8.05
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
S.T.H.

CEILINGS
09500-22
_____________________________________________________________________________
8.06
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color-Coated Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat baked paint complying with
coating manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, pretreatment,
application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
8.07
STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A.
Electroplated Finish: Electroplating process complying with finish manufacturer's written

instructions for surface preparation, pretreatment, process, and minimum thickness.
PART 9 - EXECUTION
9.01
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal pan ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of metal pans.
C.
Install metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and
trim. Comply with installation tolerances according to CISCA's "Metal Ceilings Technical
Guidelines."
1.
D.
Install directionally patterned or textured metal pans in directions indicated.
Install sound attenuation panels in areas indicated by reflected ceiling plans or room
finish schedules.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

095447-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
7.01
A.
7.02
A.
7.03
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
This Section includes stretch membrane ceiling system complete with accessories for
interior installations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NRC: Noise reduction coefficient.
B.
SAA: Sound absorption average.
7.04
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Requirements, abbreviations, and acronyms for reference standards are defined in

Section 01095.
B.
Fire Rating: Stretch PVC ceiling shall have a fire hazard of Class 1 within the
requirements of the ASTM E84 Flame Spread Test or corresponding European
standards acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction in Abu Dhabi.
7.05
A.
7.06
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for stretch PVC system.
Include furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each stretch-PVC system. Include installation and system details;
details joints and corners; and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with
walls. Indicate frame edge and core materials.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of PVC facing from stretch-PVC system
manufacturer's full range.
D.

indicated below.
S.T.H.
For the following products prepared on Samples of size

095447-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.07
A.
PVC Membrane: Full-width by approximately 900-mm- long Sample, but not

smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for
the Work.
Frame System:
300-mm- square Sample(s) showing each edge profile and
corner.
Core Material: 300-mm- square Sample at corner.
Assembled System: Approximately 900 by 900 mm, including joints in mockup.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats.

Suspended ceiling components above stretch-PVC system.
Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached.
Items penetrating or covered by stretch-PVC system including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Lighting fixtures.
Speakers.
Alarms.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to

stretch-PVC system.
B.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of stretch-PVC ceiling system.
D.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
7.08
A.
7.09
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For stretch-PVC system to include in maintenance manuals.
Include PVC manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching,
recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of system required for this Project.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and
installation.
1.
S.T.H.
Build mockup of typical ceiling area as directed by Engineer. Include intersection

of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters.

095447-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.
C.
7.10
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
Source Limitations: Obtain stretch-PVC ceiling system from single source from single
manufacturer.
A.
Comply with stretch-PVC ceiling system manufacturers' written instructions for minimum
and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and
handling.
B.
Store all materials off the ground and protected from dirt and dust of construction
operations.
C.
Materials are to be acclimated to installation conditions for 48 hours prior to installations.
D.
Handle all materials in a manner that will protect them from damage.
7.11
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not begin installation until spaces to receive stretch ceilings have been enclosed,
sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead
mechanical and electrical work is completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
C.
Maintain uniform temperatures and humidity prior to, during and after installation.
D.
The ceiling cavity must be airtight.
E.
If a ventilation system is used, air intakes and outlets must have the right dimensions to
be correctly balanced.
7.12
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of
stretch-PVC system that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.

a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
S.T.H.
Acoustical performance.
PVC sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge.
Warping of core.
Warranty Period (PVC membrane): 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

Warranty Period (Installation): 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

095447-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
7.01
A.
7.02
A.
STRETCH-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEM

Stretch-PVC Ceiling System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of PVC
membrane stretch taught over a frame and secured in the frame.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
1.
Stretch PVC (polyvinyl chloride base, guaranteed cadium free) membrane-ceiling

sheet: A ceiling membrane will be custom produced according to exact field
measurements. The membrane will be connected together by factory welds to
achieve the appropriate size. The stretch PVC ceiling membrane shall comply with
the minimum characteristic requirements as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Thickness: 0.185 mm (8%) or manufacturers standard.

Weight: 200 (12) g/m2
Dimension Stability: -50C to +700C (No substantial deformation)
Finishes: As indicated
Water vapor permeability:
1)
2)
f.
g.
h.
Resistant to 15% concentrated sulfuric acid

Resistant to water, dampness, sea water, copper salt solutions and X-rays.
Waterproof, dust proof, and airtight.
2.
Harpoon: A semi rigid PVC harpoon (depending on rail type selected) is welded at
the factory onto the perimeter of the ceiling membrane.
3.
Seams / Welds: The seams will be lapped and factory welded. The seam location
to be specified by the Engineer.
4.
Rails:
a.
b.
S.T.H.
For hygrometric degree<65% RH= 0.0030 g/hr mm2 Hg

For hygrometric degree<65% RH= 0.0045 g/hr mm2 Hg
Visible rails: Aluminum or PVC

Concealed rails: Aluminum.
5.
Rings: Reinforcement rings in Class A PVC available in the shape and size to fit
light fixtures, sprinkler heads, HVAC, smoke detectors, etc.
6.
Acoustical Materials: Can be installed above the Stretch-PVC ceiling but not on it.
This acoustical material must meet the requirements of the acoustical specialist
and comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

095447-5
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
7.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Install PVC Stretch Ceiling System in accordance with approved submittals, reflected
ceiling plan in Architectural Drawings, manufacturers published recommendations and
Contract Documents.
B.
Examine the condition of the installation site and the conditions. Notify the Contractor or
Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until
such conditions have been corrected in a manner satisfactory to the PVC Stretch
Ceiling System installers.
C.
Survey the installation site for exact field measurements for custom production of the
ceiling membrane. Take actual field measurements for each ceiling.
D.
Inspect each space which is to receive wall fixed mounted rails. The surface where the
rails will be fixed must be smooth, flat, and finished prior to installation of the rails.
E.
The stretch ceiling should only be installed if the wet work is completed and dry, the
space is enclosed weather tight and dust-free, all painting and wall covering is
completed and dry, the work of other trades is completed included electrical work,
sprinkler system, HVAC, etc.
7.02
PREPARATION
A.
Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of sizes indicated on
Drawings within a given area.
B.
Before installation, allow PVC to adjust and become stable in spaces where it will be
installed in accordance with stretch-PVC system manufacturer's written instructions.
Acclimatize PVC for minimum of 48 hours at ambient temperature and humidity
conditions indicated for spaces when occupied for their intended use.
7.03
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install stretch-PVC ceiling system in accordance with system manufacturer's
1.
2.
3.
7.04
A.
Install framing around penetrations.

Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate.
Install stretch-PVC ceiling system vertical and plumb, unless otherwise indicated;
true in plane.
CLEANING
Clean PVC ceiling on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign
materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 2
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.6
A.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For stone flooring to include in maintenance manuals. Include
product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone
flooring.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone flooring.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing stone flooring similar

in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record
of successful in-service performance.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards
for fabrication and execution.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
A.
Build mockup of typical interior floor area about 3000 mm square.

the completed Work if undisturbed at date of Substantial Completion.

Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other
causes.
1.
2.
Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause
staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate
under covers to prevent condensation.
B.
Mark stone units, on surface that is concealed after installation, with designations used
on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels
so that they are right side up when units are installed.
C.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation

material manufacturers, but not less than 10 deg C during installation and for seven days
after completion.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Flooring: Do not use frozen materials or
materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove
S.T.H.
STONE FLOORING
096340 - 1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
1.4
Dimension stone interior flooring.

Dimension stone thresholds.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Show locations and details of joints both within stone flooring and between stone
flooring and other finish materials.
Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional patterns.
C.
Samples: Full size samples of the proposed products shall be submitted to Engineer
when requested.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.
E.

1.
2.
1.5
For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 300 mm square.
Include at least two four or more Samples in each set and show the full range of
color and other visual characteristics in completed Work.
For each color of grout or pointing mortar required.
A.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B.
Material Test Reports:

1.
S.T.H.
Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a
qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties,
according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing within previous
five years.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 3
_____________________________________________________________________________
and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with coldweather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Hot-Weather Requirements for Stone Flooring: Comply with hot-weather construction

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Maintain temperature of materials below 38 deg C.

Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 38 deg C and above.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 32 deg C, fog spray installed stone
flooring until damp at least three times a day until flooring is three days old.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
STONE FLOORING
Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, from single quarry with
resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
1.
2.
3.
For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same
variety from same source for each.
Make quarried blocks available for examination by Engineer.
Make stone slabs available for examination by Engineer.
a.
b.
c.
Engineer will select aesthetically acceptable slabs.

Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating
approval.
Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as
B.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of

varieties and from sources complying with Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding."
C.
Stone Flooring Slip Resistance: Comply with any of the following:

1.
2.
2.2
Minimum value of R9 for dry and R10 for wet areas according to DIN 51130.
Minimum value of 36 PTV according to BS 7976 standard, Rz surface roughness
value for wet areas shall be not less than 20 m according to Slip Assessment
Tool.
GRANITE
A.
Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615/C 615M.
B.
Finish: Polished unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Match Engineer's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
2.3
A.
S.T.H.
MARBLE
Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503/C 503M.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 4
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10, based on testing according to

ASTM C 241/C 241M or ASTM C 1353.
B.
Finish: Polished unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Match Engineer's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
2.4
A.
MORTAR MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
1.
Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according
to ASTM C 114.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with

ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a
record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar.
E.
Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement, hydrated lime,
and mortar pigments. Mix shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland
cement by weight.
F.
Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 6 mm and pointing mortar, use
aggregate graded with 100 percent passing 1.18-mm sieve.
1.
2.
White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
durable stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
G.
Latex Additive: acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as

replacement for part of or all gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latexadditive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not
containing a retarder.
H.
Thin-Set Mortar:
1.
2.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1, packaged.

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
a.
b.
I.
S.T.H.
Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared, packaged mixture of

portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other
ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site.
Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of packaged drymortar mix and styrene-butadiene-rubber or acrylic-resin liquid-latex additive.
Water: Potable.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 5
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.5
GROUT
A.
Grout Colors: Match Engineer's samples.
B.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and
white or colored aggregate to produce required color.
C.
Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, packaged.

1.
2.
D.
Polymer-Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, packaged.

1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
2.6
Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3 mm and narrower.

Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 3 mm.
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form,
packaged with other dry ingredients.
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for
addition to packaged dry-grout mix.
Unsanded grout mix for joints 3 mm and narrower.
Sanded grout mix for joints wider than 3 mm.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 packaged, chemical-resistant, watercleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
B.
Paver Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard paver support assembly, including fixedheight adjustable or stackable pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of 3
mm or 5 mm.
C.
Temporary Spacers: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.
D.
Cleavage Membrane:
Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397,
unperforated asphalt felt, ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15).
E.
Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded, 1.57-mmdiameter wire; 50-by-50-mm mesh;

comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M except for minimum wire size.
F.
Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base,
designed specifically for flooring applications, in longest lengths available.
G.
Abrasive Inserts for Stair Treads: Abrasive strips consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder, fabricated for installing in
routed grooves of stair treads to provide slip resistance. Provide epoxy-resin installation
adhesive compatible with inserts.
1.
2.
3.
H.
S.T.H.
0.1 mm thick; or
Width: 6.4 mm.

Depth: 12.7 mm insert dimension.
Length: 100 mm less than stair width.
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 6
_____________________________________________________________________________
I.
Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications
indicated, as recommended by stone producer and by sealer manufacturer. Do not use
cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
J.
Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or
physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application
indicated.
2.7
A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum
performance characteristics.
1.
2.
3.
Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
Combine mortar materials and thoroughly mix in a mechanical batch mixer unless
otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials
together before adding any water. Add only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that retains its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in
this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small
portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of
final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
B.
Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N

Type S Type N for interior applications and Type S for exterior applications. Use amount
of water to produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive
stone.
C.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written
instructions and to produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to
receive stone.
D.
Mortar-Bed Bond Coat:

consistency.
E.
Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement or cement and sand with water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
F.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written
instructions.
G.
Pointing Mortar: Comply with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including
type and the following:
1.
2.
S.T.H.
Mix neat cement and water or latex additive to a creamy
Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients
to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by
weight.
Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix Mortar: Use portland cement-lime mix of
selected color.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 7
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.
H.
2.8
A.
Joint Grout: Comply with mixing requirements in referenced ANSI standards and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
STONE FABRICATION
Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams,
and starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
1.
B.
2.
3.
4.
4.
2.
2.
S.T.H.
Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings
occur.
Number stone units and note numbers on Shop Drawings to designate installation
location of each unit.
Fabricate stone thresholds in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to provide

transition between adjacent floor finishes.
1.
F.
Stone Thickness: 25 mm unless otherwise indicated.

Pattern: As indicated.
Stone Edges: Square cut with top corner slightly eased to prevent snipping as
indicated.
Joint Width: 3 mm unless otherwise indicated.
Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural
markings to comply with the following requirements:
1.
E.
For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for

Architectural Granite."
For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design
Manual VII."
For stone not otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations in MIA's
"Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII."
Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated.

1.
2.
3.
D.
Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided
they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically
unpleasing, as judged by Engineer.
Fabricate stone to comply with requirements indicated and with the following references:
1.
C.
Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored

aggregates with portland cement of selected color.
Bevel edges of thresholds at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent
floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 13 mm or less, and finish bevel to match
adjacent surfaces of threshold.
Where difference in floor levels exceeds 13 mm, bevel edge of threshold at 1:12
slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Finish bevel to match
adjacent surfaces of threshold.
Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
appearance, material, and fabrication requirements. Replace defective units. Clean
sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 8
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
Grade and select stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match
range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved
Samples and mockups.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to receive stone flooring and conditions under which stone flooring will
be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone flooring.
B.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of stone flooring.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Vacuum or Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B.
Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including
curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced

mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1:50 toward drains.
D.
Before setting stone, clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and
foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then
drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or
harsh materials or abrasives.
3.3
A.
Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish field-cut
edges to match shop-cut edges.
1.
Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone except for stone that is
specified to have rough-split edges.
B.
Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Match stone for color and pattern by
using units numbered in sequence as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C.
Scribe and field cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints of size
specified or indicated.
D.
Provide control and expansion joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep control
and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and other rigid materials.
S.T.H.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 9
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.4
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation in Line: For positions shown in plan for edges of flooring, ramps, steps,
changes in color or finish, and continuous joint lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm
in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
B.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus
1.5 mm or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
C.
Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm

maximum from level or slope indicated.
D.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8-mm difference
between planes of adjacent units.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF STONE BONDED TO CONCRETE
A.
Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B.
Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even coating
that completely covers the concrete. Do not exceed 1.5-mm thickness. Limit area of
mortar-bed bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed.
1.
Place reinforcing wire mesh over concrete, lapped at joints by at least one full
mesh and supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of mortar bed. Hold
edges back from vertical surfaces about 13 mm.
C.
Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and
screed to uniform thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations
indicated.
D.
Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before
initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before
stone can be placed.
E.
Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on
setting bed, apply uniform 1.5-mm- thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each
stone unit.
F.
Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with
mortar bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a
single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb
stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G.
Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout or pointing mortar as units are set.
H.
Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat,
uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
3.6
A.
S.T.H.
STONE THRESHOLD INSTALLATION

At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of setting
bed as abutting stone flooring unless otherwise indicated.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 10
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
B.
3.7
Set thresholds in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to comply with

ANSI A108.5 at locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above
other adjacent flooring.
At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in thin-set, latexportland cement mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5 water-cleanable epoxy adhesive to
comply with ANSI A108.4.
STONE STAIR TREAD AND RISER INSTALLATION
A.
Install stone stair treads and risers to comply with "Installation of Stone Bonded to
Concrete" Article.
B.
Install stone stair treads and risers in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to comply
with ANSI A108.5 water-cleanable epoxy adhesive to comply with ANSI A108.4.
3.8
A.
GROUTING
Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
B.
3.9
A.
Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.

Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into
joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After
initial set of grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished
joint, free of drying cracks.
Grout stone joints with water-cleanable epoxy grout to comply with ANSI A108.6 and
with manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove and replace stonework of the following description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if

methods and results are approved by Engineer.
Defective joints.
Stone flooring and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups.
Stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.
B.
Replace in a manner that results in stonework matching approved Samples and

mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove grout smears

before tooling joints.
D.
Clean stonework after setting and pointing and grouting are complete. Use procedures
recommended by stone fabricator for application types.
E.
Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer's written

instructions.
S.T.H.

STONE FLOORING
09650 - 11
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.10
PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B.
Protect installed stonework during construction with non-staining kraft paper. Where
adjoining areas require construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of
20-mm untreated plywood over non-staining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

WALL COVERINGS
097200-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Woven fabric with polyethylene yarn wall covering.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and firetest-response characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate
pattern placement, seams and termination points.
C.
Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and
finish specified, full width by 914-mm- long in size.
1.
Wall-Covering Sample: From same production run to be used for the Work,
with specified treatments paint applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark
top and face of fabric.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern,
texture, and finish specified, full width by 914-mm- long in size.
1.
F.
1.5
A.
S.T.H.
Wall-Covering Sample: From same production run to be used for the Work,
with specified treatments paint applied. Show complete pattern repeat.
Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.

WALL COVERINGS
097200-2
__________________________________________________________________
B.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for installation.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Build mockups for each type of wall covering on each substrate required.
Comply with requirements in ASTM F 1141 for appearance shading
characteristics.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after
Project completion during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended
for occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall
covering.
C.
Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than
the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall
coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method
indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
a.
b.
S.T.H.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.


WALL COVERINGS
097200-3
__________________________________________________________________
2.
2.2
A.
WOVEN FABRIC WITH POLYETHYLENE YARN WALL COVERINGS

Description: Provide woven fabrics with polyethylene yarn of different sizes and
shapes that are inherently flame retardant. The yarns shall be solution dyed and are
totally free of chlorine, plasticizers, heavy metals, and chemical finishes complying
with the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
2.3
Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release

according to NFPA 265.
Pattern: As indicated
Color: As indicated
Contents 100% Xorel
Use Wallcoverings
Alternate Uses: Panels
Width: 132 cm
Useable Width: 132 cm.
Repeat: 51 cm- length x 43 cm- width
Finish: Microventing
Backing: Proprietary backing technology which prevents stains and moisture
from passing through the textile enabling the wall or seating
Flame Retardancy ASTM E84 Class A / Class 1
Cleaning Code WS & BC-Water/Solvent & Bleach Cleanable
ECO Info Cradle-to-Cradle Silver Certified by MBDC
SCS Indoor Advantage Gold
PVC Free
Anti Bacterial
Responsible Return Program
ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Use a heavy duty adhesive that should not be thinned with chemical
solvent. If paperbacked, apply the adhesive to the paper. If acrylic backed, apply
adhesive to the wall or as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
B.
Wall Liner: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
C.
Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
All wall coverings must be examined for pattern, color and quantity. Make sure that
multiple rolls match each other.
B.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C.
S.T.H.

WALL COVERINGS
097200-4
__________________________________________________________________
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including
dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
C.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free
of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and

concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime
with primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wallcovering manufacturer.
Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing
by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by
primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
D.
Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell
finish with fine sandpaper.
E.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light
fixture trims, and similar items.
F.
Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the

installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3
A.
3.4
WALL LINER INSTALLATION

Install wall liner, without gaps or overlaps. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for
finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried.
WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable

to products and applications indicated.
B.
Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at
partition breaks and corners.
C.
Install strips in same order as cut from roll.

1.
For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall coverings, reverse every

other strip.
D.
Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.
E.
Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt
seams without overlaps or gaps between strips.
S.T.H.

WALL COVERINGS
097200-5
__________________________________________________________________
F.
3.5
Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and
other defects.
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B.
Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
C.
Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
D.
Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light
fixture trims, and similar items.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
BURJEEL MED. CITY COMPOSITE ALUMINUM WALL AND CEILING PANELS

09720-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-formed and assembled, composite aluminum panels for
wall & soffit assemblies, exterior percales and canopy work as indicated at the
drawings.
1.03
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design exterior metal wall panel system to withstand live, dead, lateral, wind, seismic,
handling, transportation and erection loads, imposed and other loads.
B. Prevent rain penetration through wall system. Incorporate means of draining to the
exterior.
C. Design exterior metal wall panel system to support weight and the wind load, positive
and negative, prevalent for the location of the building, but no less than windgust
pressure calculated from the International Building Code. To minimize the potential for
dished panels after loading, permanent set of the panel, measured normal to the
panel surface after application and removal of the design load, must not exceeding
L/800 of distance between supported edges of panel or distance between stiffeners
where stiffeners are used. Stiffeners, where used, must not deflect more than L/90 of
span under load.
D. Design exterior metal wall panel system to accommodate thermal movements of the
components and structural movements to provide and installation free of oil canning,
buckling, delamination, and failure of joint seals, excessive stress on fasteners or any
other detrimental effects.
E. Design composite panel system to prevent rattling and vibration of panels,
overstressing of fasteners and clips and other detrimental effects on the system.
F. Panel removal: System design to allow removal of individual panels within wall
system.
G. Design miscellaneous, additional structural framing members as required to complete
composite panel system, where not indicated on Contract Drawings.
H. The attachment face of subgirls supporting the panel system must not deflect
vertically more than 3 mm due to the dead load of the panel system.
I.
S.T.H.
Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

09720-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Wind Loads: Minimum design wind pressure as indicated on Drawings, acting
inward or outward and conforming to the requirements of the International
Building Code.
2. Deflection Limits: Withstand test pressures with deflection no greater than 1/240
of the span and no evidence of material failure, structural distress or permanent
deformation exceeding 0.2 percent of the clear span.
J. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated aluminum wall and ceiling panel assemblies
with thermal-resistance value (R-value) indicated when tested according to ASTM C
236 or ASTM C 518.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of composite panels and canopies, including plans,
elevations, sections, details and attachment to other work.
1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages,
attachment system, trim, flashings, closures and accessories.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
3. Submit shop drawings for sunshades indicating elevations, sections, details,
dimensions, materials, gauges and finishes. Shop drawings and design
calculations shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in
the Place of Work.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating composite panel installation
with penetrations and wall-mounted items.
C. Samples: Submit two 300 x 300 mm samples panels in the selected colors and finish
for approval.
D. Reports: Submit written flied inspection and test report results after each inspection.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by
manufacturer.
1. Installers responsibilities include fabricating and installing composite panel
assemblies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility and perform the following:
1. Design of the composite metal panel system.
2. Review, stamp andsign shop drawings.
3. Conduct shop and field inspections and prepare and submit inspection
reports.
S.T.H.

09720-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide aluminum composite panels having
insulation-core materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Mock-up:
1. Fabricate, deliver and erect a 1200 mm wide x 1800 mm high mock-up panel of
composite panel system in location acceptable to Consultant.
2. Demonstrate finish, anchoring devices, air/vapor retarded sealing and quality of
workmanship.
3. Mock-up may from part of final Work, if acceptable to Consultant. Remove and
D. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.06

A. Handle aluminum Work in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or
sprayed coating which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
C. Do not remove before final cleaning of building.
1.07
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
contents.
1. Composite aluminum cladding: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal 2 percent
of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern and size indicated.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of composite panel assemblies that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking or puncturing.
2) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
S.T.H.

09720-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturers standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace composite panels that show evidence
of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
2.02
PANEL MATERIALS
A. Composite Material:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Composite Aluminum Panel.
2. Two sheets of 0.51 mm thick aluminum 3003, sandwiching a core of extruded
thermoplastic formed in a continuous process without the use of glues or
adhesives between dissimilar materials. Panel thickness: 4 mm. Bond integrity
testing to adhere to ASTM D1781.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended
by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. All aluminum sheet to come from
the same patch.
C. Finish:
1. Exposed to view:
1) Anodized Coating System: Manufacturers standard shall performance
requirements of AAMA 2605.
2) Color: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client, color to match color
Titanium C310.
2. Concealed Aluminum finish: Mill finish
D. Panel Sealant:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing; 13 mm wide and 3 mm thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by aluminum composite
panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
S.T.H.

09720-5
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.03
THERMAL INSULATION FOR FACTORY-ASSEMBLED COMPOSITE PANELS

A. Isocyanurate Insulation: Modified isocyanurate foam using a non-CFC blowing agent,
board or formed-in-place type as indicated, with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 45, respectively.
1. Closed-Cell Content: 90 percent when tested according to ASTM D 2856.
2.04
SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Glass-Matt Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; Type X, 16 mm thick.
B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
complying corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening
substrate board with substrate.
2.05
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for
metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
B. Subgirts: C- or Z-shaped sections fabricated from 1.5 mm bare steel thickness, shoppainted, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet.
C. Base or Sill Channels: 2.0-mm bare steel thickness, cold-formed, galvanized steel
sheet.
D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.79 mm.
2. Depth: 22 mm.
E. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 1.37- mm bare steel thickness, with minimum 13-mmwide flange.
1. Depth: 19 mm.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
bare steel thickness of 0.79 mm.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59- mm
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm diameter wire.
F. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flanged of 32 mm, wall
attachment flange of 22 mm, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.45 mm, and depth
required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
S.T.H.

09720-6
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.06
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts,, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of composite panels by means of plastic
caps of factory-applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel
hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing
on weather side of composite panels.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex
washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for
15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive
compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other deleterious impurities.
2.07
ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS FOR SOFFITS

A. General: Provide factory-formed aluminum composite soffit panels designed to be
field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and
mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and
factory- applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weather tight
installation.
B. Aluminum Composite Soffit Panels: Match profile and material composite wall panels.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of wall panels.
2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
2.08
ACCESSORIES
A. Composite Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete
composite panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner
units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Match material and finish of composite panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as
composite panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefinfoam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 25-mm-thick, flexible
closure strips; cut or premolded top match aluminum panel profile. Provide
closures strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.45-mm thick, metallic coated steel sheet. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs,
S.T.H.

09720-7
_____________________________________________________________________________
corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals and
fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent composite panels.
C. Downspouts: Formed from 0.45-mm-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; in 3-m long
sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match
composite panels.
2.09
CANOPIES & PERCALES

A. Provide all require framing in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings for exterior
canopies & percales consisting of composite panels, glazing and sun shades.
B. Canopy & percale support framing to include the following:
1. Structural channel, rod and angle framing continuously welded and securely
anchored back to structure.
2. System to incorporate steel rod tie- backs in diameter to support required loads
secured with yoke and fork connections.
3. Design framing and anchorage to support assembly dead loads and live loads
and lateral loads.
4. Finish: Prime painted unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client.
C. Fritted glass: In accordance with Section 08 80 00.
D. Sun shades (S1): In accordance with Section 10 99 90 Miscellaneous Specialties.
2.10
FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish aluminum composite panels and accessories at the
factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturers standard procedures and
processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated
by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
1. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication
tolerances and to withstand design loads.
B. Fabricate composite panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side
of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weather tight seals.
C. Where indicated, fabricate panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a
manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply to the
design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated.
S.T.H.

09720-8
_____________________________________________________________________________
E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
F. Maximum allowable tolerances shall be as follows:
1. Panel bow 0.8% panel dimension width and length.
2. Panel flatness:
1) Rises and falls across the panel, (local bumps and depressions) will not be
accepted.
2) 1.5 mm in a concave/convex direction, measured perpendicular to the normal
plane.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in
Division 07 Section Section Metal Flashing and Trim.
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring and other
miscellaneous panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and
composite manufacturers written recommendations.
3.02
COMPOSITE PANELS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install composite panels in orientation, sizes and locations indicated on
Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girls and subgirts, unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor composite panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provision for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of composite panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten base end of composite panels and allow eave end free movement
due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle)
and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated as necessary for
waterproofing.
6. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B. Fasteners:
S.T.H.

09720-9
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive,
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying rubberizes-asphalt underlayment to each contact
surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by composite panel
manufacturer.
1. Coat back side of aluminum wall panels with bituminous coating where wall
panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementations construction.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealant where indicated and where
required for weatherproof performance of panel assemblies.
1. Seal panel end laps with double beads of type or sealant, full width of panel. Seal
side joints where recommended by composite panel manufacturer.
3.03
EXTERIOR CANOPIES & PERCALES

A. Install canopies and percales in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. Composite
panels and glazing shall be 1 piece full length.
B. Coordinate work of this Section with Section 08 44 13- Curtain wall for the
securement of structural steel canopy & percale framing to vertical curtain wall
mullions as indicated in drawings.
C. Prime surfaces and apply sealant around joints between materials in accordance with
manufacturers printed directions for a weatherproof assembly. Tool caulked joints
and remove excess sealant.
3.04
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings
and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete composite panel assembly including
trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturers written installation
instructions, and SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide
concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams that will be permanently
watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
S.T.H.

0972010
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.05

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as composite
panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation
instructions. On completion of composite panel installation, clean finished surfaces as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
B. After composite panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt and sealant.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

09800-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 11.1
GENERAL
RELEATED DOCUMENTS
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
1. Lead sheet, strip, and plate.
2. Lead glass.
3. Lead-lined building materials and products including the following:
a. Gypsum board.
b. Wood doors.
c. Steel doors.
d. Observation windows frames.
e. Modular shielding partitions.
4. Neutrons-Shielding Doors and Frames (Linear Accelerator Swinging Doors
and Frames).
5. Radio Frequency Shielded Glass.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
B. NAAMM, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A. Lead Equivalences: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation
(reduction of radiation passing through) as the material in question under the
specified conditions.
1. Lead equivalence specified for materials used in diagnostic x-ray rooms is as
measured at 100 kV, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide materials and other workmanship, including joints and fasteners, that
maintain continuity of radiation protection at all points and in all directions
equivalent to materials specified in thickness and locations indicated.
1. Materials, thicknesses, and configurations indicated are based on radiation
protection design prepared by Owners radiation health physicist. This design
is available to Contractor on request.
S.T.H.

09800-2
_________________________________________________________________________
B. Lead-Lines Assembles: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead thickness in
doors, door frames, window frames, penetration shielding, joint strips, film
transfer cabinets, and other items located in lead-lines assemblies not less than
that indicated foe assemblies in which they are installed.
C. Lead Glazing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead equivalence not less than
that indicated for assembly in which glazing is installed.
D. All work of this Section requiring special design shall be designed by a qualified
Professional Engineer registered in the Place of Work and who is employed or
retained by the manufacturer.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of radiation-protected areas. Indicate lead thickness
or lead equivalence of components. Show components and installation conditions
not fully dimensioned or detailed in Product Data.
1. Show ducts, pipes, conduit and other objects that penetrate radiation
protection together with details of penetrations.
2. Show details of neutron-shielding doors and frames, including anchorage to
and coordination with other work. Show locations of electrical conduit and
boxes for connecting door operators, door operator switches and door
interlock switches.
3. Show details of radio frequency shielding glass, including anchorage to and
coordination with other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type prefinished item indicated.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of radiation protection product through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B. Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a
minimum of five years proven experience in Work of Similar size and nature and
that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to Consultant, applicators current
certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of compliance.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in the Conditions of Contract. Reviews methods and procedures
related to radiation protection including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Sequence and schedule of radiation protection work in relation to other work.
S.T.H.

09800-3
_________________________________________________________________________
2. Supplementary lead shielding at duct, pipe and conduit penetrations of
radiation protection.
3. Methods of attracting other construction and equipment to lead-lines finishes.
4. Notification procedures for work that requires modifying radiation protection.
D. Mock-up:
1. Construct mock-up of all materials specified in this section, in location
acceptable to the Engineer/Client.
2. Arrange for Engineers/Clients review and acceptance, allow 48 hours after
acceptance before proceeding with Work.
3. Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by Consultant. Remove and
4. Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for
the balance of the work of this Section.
1.8

A. General: Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles
bearing the brand name and identification of manufactures or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,
construction traffic and other causes.
C. Lead-Lined Gypsum Panels: Neatly stack panels flat to prevent deformation.
D. Lead-Lines Wood Doors:
Comply with manufacturers written instruction
and requirements in NWWDA I.S.1.A.
1.9
1.
Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles or

doors in plastic sheeting.
2.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on
Shop Drawings.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Radiation Protection materials: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 3
percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color and size
indicated.
S.T.H.

09800-4
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 22.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet, Strip and Plate:
copper lead).
ASTM B 749, alloy UNS No. L51121(chemical-
B. Borated Polyethylene:
Manufactured specifically for neutron shielding and
containing not less than 5 percent boron.
C. Lead Glass:
Lead-barium, polished plate glass containing more than 60
percent heavy metal oxides, including 55 percent lead oxide by weight. Thickness
of glazing shall provide the protection required, equal to the lead thickness
occurring in the adjacent wall.
D. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board:
12.7 mm-thick gypsum board complying with
Division 9 Section Gypsum and Calcium Silicate Board, of width and length
required for support: spacing and to prevent cracking during handling, and with
single sheet of lead laminated to the back of the board.
1. Provide lead lining full width and length of board.
2. Provide 75-mm-wide lead strips for wrapping metal stud tangles.
3. Provide 50-mmwide lead strips for backing lots.
4. Provide 8 mm lead disks tore covering screw heads.
E. Radio Frequency Shielded Glass:
1. Double glazed unit with two panes of 6.4 mm thick high impact resistant
laminated glass specifically designed to give increased electromagnetic
shielding using the Faraday Principle.
2. Color: As selected by Consultant.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, with a slump of 200 to 280 mm as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143 M.
1. For grouting frames of neutron-shielding doors, use coarse grout made from
aggregate having a density not less than that used for concrete walls in which
frames are installed.
G. Accessories and Fasteners: Provide manufacturers standard fasteners and
accessories as required for installation, maintaining same lead equivalence as
rest of system.
S.T.H.

09800-5
_________________________________________________________________________
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Lead-Lined Steel Door Frames: Steel door frames complying with NAAMM
HMMA 861 and lined with lead sheet of thickness not less than that required for
doors and walls where frames used.
1. Provide additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately (carry
the weight of lead-lined doors. Install reinforcements and supports before
installing lead lining).
2. Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each Jamb and across
the head, lapping the stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to
receive hardware. Fabricate lead lining wide enough to install an effective lap
with lead of adjacent shielding.
B. Lead-Lined Wood Doors: Flush wood doors with lead lining.
1. Door Construction: Veneer face, five ply, bonded wood block core.
2. Lead Lining: One or more continuous sheets of lead extending from top to
bottom and edge to edge, constructed either in the core or between the core
and faces at manufacturers option.
3. Comply with Division 08 Section Flush Wood Doors for grade, faces, veneer
matching, fabrication, finishing and other requirements, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening indicated with 1.5-mm clearance at
heads and jambs and minimum clearance at bottom. Factory machine doors
for hardware not surface applied.
5. Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used in door. Lap
lining of cutouts with door lining.
6. Prepare doors to receive view windows and louvers as indicated. Provide
removable wood stops for glazed openings.
7. Provide lead-lines astragals for pairs of doors.
C. Lead-Lines Observation-Window Frames: Fabricate from 1.1-mm thick, formedsteel sheet or 1.6-mm thick aluminum extrusions with mitered corners, welded or
bolted with concealed fasteners.
1. Line with lead sheet formed to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb
and across head and sill, lapping the stops and fabricated wide enough to
maintain an effective lap with lead of adjoining assemblies.
2. Construct so lead lining overlaps glazing materials perimeter by at least 9.5
mm and provide removable stops.
S.T.H.

09800-6
_________________________________________________________________________
3. Form sill with an opening for sound transmission. Offset sound passage to
make opening lightproof and to maintain required lead equivalence at all
points and in all directions.
D. Neutron-Shielding Doors and Frames: Steel plate doors lined with lead and
borated polyethylene and hung from structural-steel door frames.
1. Shielding Requirements: 19-mm thick lead plate on therapy room side of
door, 100 mm of borated polyethylene on other side of door and 6.35-mm
thick lead plate in sill.
2. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/ASTM A 36M.
3. Door Construction: Fabricate from 6-mm thick steel plate faces, reinforced
at hinge locations and 13-mm thick, steel flat-bar edges fully welded together.
Continuously weld exposed joints and finish smooth, matching adjacent
surfaces.
a.
Apply filler to interior of door faces to provide smooth, even surfaces for
applying lead and polyethylene. Bond lead to interior of door face with
permanent adhesive.
b.
Install lead in one piece and polyethylene in single or multiple sheets, all
full height and width of door interior.
4. Door Frame Construction: Fabricate from 6-mm thick steel plate to dimensions
indicated, fully welded together. Continuously weld exposed joints and finish
smooth, matching adjacent surfaces.
a.
Fabricate frames with depth equal to thickness of shielding wall in which

door is installed. Rabbet frame to receive door and to provide a 100-mm
overlap between door and to provide a 100-mm overlap between door
and edges remaining frame depth. Make frame faces 100 mm wide with
19-mm depth backbends.
b.
Reinforce frames and drill and tap as needed to accept finish hardware.
c.
Provide steel strap anchors using 3-by-50-mm wide straps of length

required for a minimum 200-mm embedment. Weld anchors to frame
members not more than 200 mm from both bottom and top of jambs and
from end of head, and space anchors not more than 600 mm apart.
d.
Provide channel-shaped sill fabricated from 6-mm thick steel plate lined
with lead. Make sill 38 mm deep by same width as jambs and weld to
door jambs.
5. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP

3 (Power Tool Cleaning) and apply an alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.
a.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds and sharp edges.
6. Hardware: Provide the following hardware for each door.
S.T.H.

09800-7
_________________________________________________________________________
a.
Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Type A8391; weld- or bolt-on type at

manufacturers option; sized for door weight; 2 or 3 per door
manufacturers option.
b.
Pulls: BHMA A156.6, Type J401, 2 per door.
c.
Operator: Power-opening and spring- or power-closing unit; with

automatic hold-open; complying with BHMA A156.10; sized for door
weight and width; and adjustable for opening, closing and checking
speeds. Unit shall have an emergency release to allow door to be
opened manually and a disconnect switch to prevent power operation
when door is in emergency-release mode.
d.
Controls: Provide two wall-mounted, recesses, push-plate switches for

opening door and one push-button switch for closing door. Provide
motion or presence sensors to detect persons or objects in path of
door and, if these are detected, to stop and reverse action of door
operator.
7. Door Interlock Switch: Provide electric switch in frame jamb to prevent

operation of radiation therapy equipment when door is open and to shut off
power to equipment if door is opened while equipment is in use.
a.
Provide rough box for installing switch, fabricated from 6-mm thick
steel plate welded to frame and lined on all sides with 6-mm thick lead
plate.
E- Lead-Lined Modular Shielding Partitions: Partial height modular partitions

assembled from factory-finished standard components consisting of lead lined
enameled steel framing members, lead-lined opaque panels, lead glazing plastic
vision panels, and hardware necessary for assembly and for securing to other
construction. Fabricate opaque panels from honeycomb-core metal panels with
polyurethane paint finish. Lead-lined modular shielding partitions to include the
following criteria:
1. Lead Equivalence for Opaque Panels:-15mm.
2. Lead Equivalence for Framing Members: 1.5 mm.
3. Lead Equivalence for Vision panels: 1.0 mm.
F. Informational Signs:
1. Informational Signs, General: Fabricate signs by engraving lettering in
hi-pressure laminate engraving stock with contrasting face and core.
2. Machine engraves copy using high-speed cutters mechanically
positioned by master templates for accurately formed letters, numbers
and symbols.
3. Color: As selected by Architect form manufacturers full range of
colors.
4. Provide copy indicated or as directed. Provide signs of sufficient size to
contain required information.
S.T.H.

09800-8
_________________________________________________________________________
5. Indicate lead equivalence in millimeters and heights of radiation
protected in millimeters.
6. Room where the Level of Protection is Uniform Throughout: Provide one
sign for each room indicating lead equivalence of partitions, ceilings,
floors, doors and other portions of radiation protection enclosure.
Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or indicate that
partitions are radiation protected to full height.
PART 33.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates in areas to receive radiation protection, with Installer

present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance of radiation protection.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF LEAD SHEET

A.
Supplier shall provide information and templates required for installation of work
of this Section, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage
devices, and construction of other work incorporated with products specified in
this Section in order that they function as intended.
B.
Install work to meet manufacturers recommended specifications, true, tightly

fitted and level or flush to adjacent surfaces as suitable for installation.
C. Provide lead sheet envelope to enclose back and sides of all items and
equipment recessed in solid masonry walls and in locations so noted. Form lead
so as not to reduce the effective thickness at any location. Lead shall not be
pierced for fastening unless essential and pierced areas shall be covered with
sheet lead lapped to ensure continuously of protection.
D.
All cabinets, pipes conduits or any other materials built into or projection through
lead lining shall be shielded with 1.6 mm thick sheet lead. Overlap sheets a
minimum of 50 mm.
E.
Complete room installation shall provide a continuous uninterrupted membrane

protection of heights and areas indicated and are free of holes, cracks or areas
of penetration by radiation.
3.3
S.T.H.
INSTALLATION OF LEAD LINED GYPSUM BOARD

A.
Install with long edge parallel to supports and lead lining facing support. Provide
blocking at end joints. Install using construction adhesive and supplementary
fasteners.
B.
Fastening to Metal Supports:

Use steel drill screws spaced as recommended
in writing, gypsum-board manufacturer. Install lead strips covering face of
framing and wrap around flange to cover points of screws.

09800-9
_________________________________________________________________________
1. Where possible, install lead, lined gypsum board before installing gypsumboard on other side of partition, and do not fold lead strips back over inside of
flange until after lead-lined gypsum board is applied.
2. Apply lead disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws
securing trim.
C. Two layer System: Apply a facing sheet of gypsum board vertically over base
sheet using laminating adhesive recommended in writing by gypsum-board
manufacturer. Offset joint in finish layer from joint in base layer and fasten at top
and bottom of sheet to support finish panel until adhesive has set.
1. Locate fasteners above ceiling or behind wall base and cover fasteners with
lead disks recessed flush with surface of board.
3.4
D.
Openings: Extend lead lined gypsum board into frames of openings, lapping
lead lining with lead frames or frame linings at least 25 mm. Arrange board
around opening so neither horizontal nor vertical joints occur at corners of
openings.
E.
Install control and expansion joints where indicated with appropriate trim
accessories. Install lead strip on face of framing, extending across joint and lap
with lead lining of gypsum board.
INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FRAMES

A.
Install lead-lined wood doors in accordance with manufacturers written

instructions.
B.
Install lead-lined steel door frames in accordance with manufacturers written

instructions and according to Division 08 Section Steel Doors and Frames,
1. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in door frames where
lead will come in contact with masonry or grout.
C.
Frames: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840, unless otherwise indicated. Except
for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before
constructing walls. Set frames accurately in position, plumb and brace securely
until permanent anchors are set.
1. Provide three anchors per jamb, located adjacent to hinge on hinge jamb and
at corresponding heights on strike jamb.
2. In masonry construction, use wire or T-strap anchors and apply a coat of
asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining where lead will come in contact with
masonry or grout.
S.T.H.
D.
Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 25 mm.
E.
Lead Lining of Frames: Line inside of Frames with lead of thickness not less
than that required in doors and walls where frames are used. Form lead to

09800-10
_________________________________________________________________________
match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the head, lapping the
stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware. Lap lining
over lining in walls at least 25 mm.
F.
Install doors in frames level and plumb, aligned with frames and with uniform
clearance at each edge.
G. Line astragals with lead sheet.
3.5
H.
Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons and plates to provide effective shielding at

cutouts and penetrations of frames and doors. See Division 08 Section Door
Hardware for other installation requirements.
I.
Touch up damaged finished with compatible coating after sanding smooth.
J.
Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving doors and frames
undamaged and in proper operating condition.
INSTALLATION OF LEAD GLASS
A.
3.6
3.7
S.T.H.
Install lead glass in accordance with drawings and manufacturers written

instructions.
INSTALLATION OF NEUTRON-SHIELDING DOORS AND FRAMES

A.
Install frames in concrete forms before concrete is placed. Adjust frames as

needed so they are square and within 1.5 mm of plumb. Secure frames to forms
and brace to resist forces resulting from concrete placement.
B.
In renovation construction install frames in concrete openings and adjust as

needed so they are square and within 1.5 mm of plumb. Secure frames to
concrete and brace to resist forces resulting from weight and movement of
shielding door. Grout frames, consolidating grout to solidly fill spaces between
frame and opening.
C.
Install doors in frames and install door operators, doors controls, interlock
switches and other components according to manufacturers written instructions
and Shop Drawings.
D.
Touch up damaged primer with compatible coating after sanding smooth.
E.
Check and readjust operators and controls for opening, closing, latching and
back-checking speeds and for open-and closed-door positions.
INSTALLATION OF PENETRATION ITEMS

A.
At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields to maintain continuity of

protection.
B.
Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields and other protection in thickness not less
than that required in assembly being penetrated.

09800-11
_________________________________________________________________________
3.8
3.9
3.10
C.
Secure shields at penetration using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating
fasteners unless indicated on Drawings.
D.
Outlet Boxes and Conduit Cover of line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent
lead lining at least 25 mm. Wrap conduit with lead sheet for 250 mm from box.
E.
Duct Openings: Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet
for distance from partitions/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening
dimension, Lap lead sheet with adjacent lead lining at least 25.
F.
Piping: Unless otherwise indicated, wrap piping with lead sheet for 250 mm from
point of penetration.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO FREQUENCY SHIELDED GLASS

A.
Install radio frequency shielded double glazed unit in accordance with approved
shop drawings and manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Ensure that periphery of glass is conductively connected to the window frame

which in turn is connected to the wall screening of the enclosure in accordance
with manufacturers requirements.

A.
Field Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and

inspection agency to perform field test and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that inspection

reports indicate does not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Testing: After radiology equipment has been installed and placed in operating
condition, Owner will engage a radiation health physicist to test radiation
protection.
D.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that testing

indicates does not comply with specified requirements, including finished and
other work covering defective work.
PROTECTION
A.
Lock radiation-protected rooms once doors and locks are installed and limit
access to only those performing work in the rooms.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
PART 1:
1.1.
09900-1
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in conjunction herewith.
1.2.

Read carefully all other sections of specifications to determine extent of prime and finish
coats applied by others.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.
Section 07900:
Section 08210:
Section 09200:
Division 15:
Division 16:
Sealants
Wood Doors
Plaster
Mechanical
Electrical
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER: The paint products shall be the .manufacturers

premium grade.
2.
QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICATORS: Contractor shall have minimum of ten (10) years

proven satisfactory painting experience of projects of similar size and nature.
3.
Paints shall be factory manufactured and delivered to the site in unbroken containers
which show the designated name, formula, colour, manufacturers directions and name
of manufacturer all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. All paints shall be
products that have a minimum of 5 years satisfactory field service.
1.4.
1.
SUBMITTALS
COLORS:
1.
2.
SAMPLES:
1.
1.5.
Paint colors will be selected by Engineer, from manufacturer's full color range
including light and dark tones.
Submit samples of various finishes for Engineer's approval, at least thirty days
before materials are required. Submit samples in triplicate for approval.
1.
Deliver materials to site in sealed original containers with labels intact. Keep stored
materials covered at all times. The presence of any unauthorized material or containers
for such on the site shall be sufficient cause for rejection of all paint materials on the site
at that time.
2.
Exercise extreme caution in the storage of materials to prevent fire or which may create
fire hazards. Thinners and solvents shall be stored in safety containers in accordance
with local requirements and governing fire and safety regulations.
S.T.H.
1.6.
09900-2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.
All areas shall be clean and dust free before painting is commenced.
2.
In all areas where interior painting and decorating work is proceeding, provide a
minimum of 269 lux lighting on the surfaces to be painted.
3.
In all areas where interior painting and decorating work is proceeding, provide adequate
continuous ventilation. Relative humidity shall be below 85%.
4.
Make thorough examination of drawings, details and schedules, determine the intent,
extent, materials, types of surfaces, locations and be fully cognizant of requirements.
5.
Use sufficient clean drop cloths and protective coverings for full protection of floors,
furnishings and work not being painted. Protect components of building which do not
require painting from paint spotting and other soiling during painting process. Mask
adjoining work adjacent to work being painted or carefully cut in without overlaps.
6.
Be responsible for damage to the Work of this section until the contract is complete and
accepted by the Client.
1.7.
1.
EXTRA MATERIAL
Provide five sealed cans, one litre capacity of each paint product in each colour used in
the work for maintenance use. Containers shall be new, clearly labelled with
manufacturer's name, type of paint, colour and colour number.
PART 2:
2.1.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
1.
Paint, varnish, stain, and fillers shall be of type and brand herein specified, and shall be
manufacturers premium grade products.
2.
Provide safe and adequate equipment, scaffolding, ladders, plant, tools, brushes, rollers,
clean drop cloths and other items required for the completion of the Work.
3.
Ensure the proper use of proprietary materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
4.
Undercoating and primers shall be made for the purpose by the manufacturer of the
finishing materials being used.
5.
Paint shall dry to uniform, smooth, appearance. There shall be no laps, skips, highlighted spot or brush marks.
6.
Stopping: (Putty filler): Cement based putty consistency proprietary filler product
obtained from an approved supplier, with compatible acrylic based topcoat.
2.2.
PAINTING FORMULA SCHEDULE
1.
Interior Painted Wood

Finish Carpentry, Millwork and Cabinets, Section 06 20 00 Wood Doors, Section 08 14
00.
A.
Formula 1:
Wood Painting - Alkyd System
Non yellowing lead free alkyd Finish

S.T.H.
09900-3
All kind of wood sanding, sound surface
One coat of wood primer, alkyd based flat primer, vol. solids >45% as per ISO
3233 : 1998 E
2 coats PVA Co-polymer based stucco/filler, vol. solids> 50% as per ISO 3233 :
1998 (E)
1 coat enamel matt lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish flat, based on a special
alkyd resin with volume solids >49% as per ISO 3233 : 1988 (E)
2 coats enamel semi-gloss lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish semi gloss, based
on a special alkyd resin with volume solids >41% as per ISO 3233: 1988 (E)
2.
Interior Stained Wood

Finish Carpentry, Millwork and Cabinets, Section 06 20 00 Wood Doors, Section 08 14
00.
Formula 2:
Wood Painting Natural Stain Finish
Wood shield Stain / Varnish

All Kind of wood Sanding, sound surface
1 coat of wood preserver to protect against fungus, termites (Solids % by volume : >14)
2-3 separate coats of fungus resistant Woodshield stain based on penetrating oil (Solids
% by volume : >30)
2 coats of Woodshield matt/glossy varnish based on Alkyd Resin. (Solids % by volume:
>41)
3.
Interior Gypsum Board

Gypsum Board, Section 09 29 00
Formula 4
Non yellowing Lead Free Alkyd Finish
All kind of wood sanding, sound surface
One coat of Wood Primer, alkyd based flat primer, vol. solids >45% as per ISO 3233 :
1988 (E)
2 coats PVA Co-polymer based Stucco/filler, vol. solids >50% as per ISO 3233:1988 (E)
1 coat enamel matt lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish flat, based on a special alkyd
resin with volume solids >49% as per ISO 3233;1988 (E)
2 coats enamel semi-gloss lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish semi gloss, based on a
special alkyd resin with volume solids >41% as per ISO 3233:1988 (E)
4.
Interior Painted Cementitious Substrates

Concrete, Section 03 90 00
Concrete Unit Masonry, Section 04 22 00
Portland Cement Plaster, Section 09 24 00
a.
S.T.H.
FORMULA 5
09900-4
Acrylic Co Polymer based highly washable silk emulsion with excellent colour retention
properties for internal walls.
Emulsion- Silk
Cement Plaster/Concrete
Refer to Manufacturers Technical Data Sheet
Roller/Spray/Brush
Once coat PVA Primer, a PVA co-polymer based primer/sealer, vol. Solids> 14% as per
ISO 3233: 1998 (E), VOC in gms/ltr: 0 as per USA EPA Methods 24, Maximum
allowable limit in gms/ltr:<50 as per LEED.
2 coats Stucco a PVA co-polymer based putty, vol. Solid>50% as per ISO 3233: 1998
(E), VOC in gms/ltr: 18 as per USA-EPA Method 24, Maximum allowable limit in gms/ltr:
<50 as per LEED.
2 full coats Emulsion Silk, and vinyl acrylic co-polymer based highly washable emulsion
in silk finish, vol. Solids >42% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E) VOC in gms/ltr: 0 as per USAEPA Methods 24, Maximum allowable limit in gms/ltr:<150 as per LEED.
Tested independently as per BS 7719 for drying time, low temperature film formation
appearance and opacity, scrubbing test, mud cracking, sieve residue & wet adhesion.
Abrasion resistance tested as per ASTM D 2486 > 8000 scrubs.
Opacity as per ASTMD D 2805.
Tested at Warrington Fire Research Institute for surface spread of flame as per BS- 476:
Part 7: classified as Class 1 Y.
b.
FORMULA 5A
Alkyd Enamel Finish with Filler
Once coat of Wood Primer, alkyd based flat primer, vol. Solids >45% as per ISO 3233:
1998 (E)
2 coats PVA Co-polymer based stucco/filler. Vol. Solids>50% as per ISO 3233: 1998
(E).
1 coat enamel matt lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish semi gloss, based on a special
alkyd resin with volume solids > 41% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E).
c.
FORMULA 5B
Alkyd Enamel Finish, Filler
Once coat of Wood Primer, alkyd based flat primer, vol. Solids >45% as per ISO 3233:
1998 (E).
2 coat PVA Co-polymer based Stucco/filler, vol. Solids>50% as per ISP 3233: 1998 (E)
resin with volume solids >49% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
2 coats enamel semi-gloss lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish semi-gloss, based on a
special alkyd resin with volume solids >41% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E).
5.
Interior Black Steel Piping

Including hangers and supports:
S.T.H.
09900-5
Mechanical Systems, Division 23

FORMULA 6- Alkyd Enamel System
Mild Steel
Blast cleaning to Sa 2.5
Stripe coating and, One full coat of primer @ 40 microns (Solids % by volume : >41)
One coat of alkyd enamel @ microns (Solids % volume :> 45)
One coat of alkyd enamel @ microns (Solids % volume :> 45)
FORMULA 7
Enamel Finish
One coat of Wood Primer, alkyd flat primer, vol. Solids > 45% as per ISO 3233:1998 (E)
2 coats PVA Co-polymer based Stucco/filler, vol. Solids > 50% as per ISO 3233: 1998
(E)
1 coat Enamel matt lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish flat, based on a special alkyd
resin with volume solids > 49% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
2 coats Enamel semi-gloss lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish semi gloss based on a
special alkyd resin with volume solids > 41% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
6.
Interior Plastic
FORMULA 10
Alkyd Enamel Finish
One coat of Wood Primer, alkyd based flat primer, vol. Solids > 45% as per ISO 3233:
1998 (E)
2 coats PVA Co-polymer based Stucco/filler, vol. Solids>50% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
resin with volume solids> 49% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
2 coats on enamel semi-gloss lead free non-yellowing alkyd finish semi gloss based on a
special alkyd resin with volume solids > 41% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
7.
Interior Fabric Insulation Covering:

Mechanical Work, Division 23
FORMULA 11
Alkyd Enamel System
Mild Steel
Blast cleaning to Sa 2.5
Stripe coating and, One full coat of Primer @ 40 microns (Solids % volume : >41)
One coat of alkyd enamel @ 40 microns (Solids % by volume :> 46)
One coat of alkyd enamel @ 40 microns (Solids % by volume :> 46)
8.
Exterior Painted Cementitious Substrates

Portland Cement Plaster, Section 09 24 00
FORMULA 12
S.T.H.
09900-6
Waterbased co-polymer system with highly durable silicone acrylic based top coat which
gives long lasting gloss finish with low dirt pick up.
Acrylic Texcotile System
Cement Plaster/Concrete
Refer Manufacturer Technical Data Sheet
Roller/Trowel/Spray/Brush
One coat water based alkali resistant primer/ sealer, vol. Solids > 35% as per ISO 3233:
1998 (E) VOC in gms/ltr: 24 as per USA- EPA Methods 24
One coat, acrylic co-polymer based intermediate coat specifically formulated to be
applied by spray equipment to achieve a textured surface, vol. Solids > 60% as per ISO
3233: 1998 (E) VOC in gms/ltr: 24 as per USA-EPA Method 24.
Independently tested for following properties.
Static Crack bridging abilility, Taywood UK Certificate no. 9568 Up to 0.6mm
Carbon Dioxide Diffusion Resistance- Taywood UK Certificate no. 9567 2.44 x 10-8 cm2
s-1
Equivalent Air layer Thickness R Value 151 m
Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate Taywood UK Certificate no. 9566 AVG 4.6 x 10.-5
cm2 s-1.
9.
Exterior Galvanized Metal:

Metal Fabrications, Section 05 50 00
FORMULA 13: Epoxy- Polyuthane System
Special/Hardtop System
Mild & Galvanized Steel/Aluminum
Blast cleaning to Sa 2.5 for Mild Steel
Stripe coating and, one full coat of Special system @ 100 microns as a primer (Solids %
by volume:> 48, Mixing ratio: 4 : 1)
Two coats of Hardtop System each @ 50 microns (Solids % by volume: >48, Mixing
ratio: 4 : 1)
10.
Exterior and Interior Galvanized Piping and Conduit:

Including hangers and supports:
Electrical Conduit, Divsion 26
Epoxy Polyurethane System
S.T.H.
09900-7
Mild & Galvanized Steel / Aluminium
Stripe coating and, One full coat Special System @ 100 microns as primer
(Solids % by volume: >48, mixing ratio: 4:1)
Two coats of Hardtop System each @ 50 microns
(Solids % by volume: >48, Mixing ratio; 4:1)
FORMULA 14: Enamel Finish
Mild & Galvanized Steel Aluminium
Stripe coating and, one full coat of Special system @ 100 microns as a primer
(Solids % by volume: > 48, Mixing ratio: 4:1)
Two coats of Hardtop system each @ 50 microns
(Solid % by volume: > 48, Mixing ratio: 4:1)
Colour selection to be based on pipe identification requirements of BS1710. Coordinate
with mechanical sub-contractor for each mechanical service. Use Rust-Oleum Federal
Safety Colour whenever possible. Fire pipes to be coloured to Abu Dhabi Department of
Civil Defense Regulations.
11.
Exterior Black Steel Piping

FORMULA 15: Enamel Finish
Special/ Hardtop System
Mild & Galvanizes Steel/Aluminium
Stripe coating and, One full coat of Special system @ 100 microns as a primer
(Solids % by volume :> 48, Mixing ratio: 4: 1)
Two coats of Hardtop systems each@ 50 microns
(Solids % by volume: > 48, Mixing ratio: 4: 1)
12.
Car Park Wall & Ceiling Finishes

FORMULA 16: Flexible pure acrylic silk smooth coating system,
S.T.H.
09900-8
Pure acrylic water based, highly reflective, crack bridging, breathable, anticarbonation
coating with long lasting colours.
Surface(s): Cement Plaster/Concrete
Preparation: Refer Manufacturer Technical Data Sheet
Application: Roller/Spray/Brush
Initial Coat/Primer: One coat water based alkali resistant primer/ sealer, vol. Solids >
35% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E) with the following properties in Silk finish, VOC in
gms/ltr: <200 as per LEED.
Independently Tested for following properties.
Crack bridging ability (ASTM C 836:95) from Bodycote Up to 0.72 mm
Carbon Dioxide Diffussion Resistance- Taywood UK Certificatea no. 7934 2.44 x 10-8
cm2 s-1
Equivalent Air layer Thickness R Value 626 m
Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate- Taywood UK Certificate no, 7933. Avg1 .55 x 10-3
cm1 s-1
Equivalent Air layer Thickness SD 1.3 m
Chloride lon Diffusion- Taywood UK Certificate no. 6428 6.20 x 10-9 cm2 s-1
Reduction in water absorption- Taywood Lab UK Certificate no. 7949 99.9%
Tensile Strength certificate Al Futtaim Tarmac 2.86 N/mm2
Elongation certificate Al Futtaim Tarmac 51%
Light reflectivity certificate- Al Futtaim Tarmac 97.3 %
Warrington Fire Global Safety Certificate No. 188861 for surface spread of flame
products as per BS 476: Part 7- Bodycote Classified as Class 1 Warrington Fire Global
Safety Certificate No. 158860 for fire propagation of products as per BS 476: Part 6Bodycote Fire Propagation Index I-1.36.
13.
Anti-Bacterial Paint
Self-sterilizing solvent based elastomeric polymeric membrane with polyester top coat
showing self-sterilizing Bacteria with UV resistance.
As a self-sterilizing topcoat over the self-sterilizing base and undercoat for concrete,
masonry and steel to Kill/inhibit bacterial and fungal growth for the life of the
coating.Final coat in conjunction with the correct base and undercoat coat. All paints
must have the Following Characteristics:
S.T.H.
Non Static
High abrasion, crack and flake resistance
Acid and alkali and solvent resistant
Unaffected by ionizing radiation in excess of 1000 mrad
Superior protection of concrete against carbonation
Non-toxic in the dry film state.

-
(a)
Conforms to BS 476 Spread of Flame Class 1

Kills and inhibit all known Bacterial and Fungi found in building environment.
Technical Data
Part A
Solids on W/W
Density at 25C
Colour
Minimum storage Life
Storage Temperature
Application Temperature
Intercoatable
Sandable
Below the Waterline
Potable Water
(b)
09900-9
Part B
67% 1
40% 1
1.35% 0.05
1.00% 0.05
All Colours
Clear
12 Months in unopened
12 Months in unopened
container
container
4 to 45 C
4 to 45 C
4 to 45 C
Yes must be sanded
Yes
No
Yes after first good rain
Application
Stir before use. Application is by brush, roller, or suitable spray equipment. Part A and Part B
to be mixed together at the ratio of 7 Part A to 4 Part B. The rate of application of the mix (Part
A and Part B) is 250um per m (0.32kgs/m). Drying time is dependent on temperature and
humidity. However at 25C and 85% humidity allow 2 hour to touch dry and 44 hours for
through dry. Only one coat is required on the surface of the undercoat. Provide adequate
ventilation during use.
Apply final coat over the self sterilizing undercoat basecoat.
application and the undercoat to be at least 1 hour old.
(c)
Surface to be dry before
Clean up
Clean all equipment in exylene or equivalent immediately after use whilst the coating is still wet.
All spillage cleaned whilst coating still wet.
14.
1 EPOXY PAINT
Constructed as followings:
A- PRIMER
B- TEXTURE EPOXY
C- FINAL COAT (2 COATS)
Primer is a tow0 pack, Epoxy coating based on a high molecular weight epoxy resin.
S.T.H.
09900-10
TECNICAL DATA:
Color: red, grey and white
Specifc Gravity: 1.30+0.05
Solid 55% by volume
Drying time: Touch dry 5-6 hours. Fully cured after 6 days.
Theoretical spreading rate I 5-8 m2/Ltr.
Dry film thickness: 75-100 microns.
APPLICATION DATA
Surface Preparation: surfaces must be clean, dry and free from any damaged coats
application methods: brush or Airless spry
B- TEXTURE EPOXY
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
Epoxy is a two pack Epoxy based product specially processed for decorative purpose &
to be applied by special spray equipment to give an attractive textured from/
TECHNICAL DATA:
Colour: Off white
Specific Gravity: 1.45 + 0.05 after mixing with hardener 1.3
Viscosity: thick paste
Solid: 58% by volume
Flash point: 20 C
Drying Time: Touch dry 4 hours. Dry for recoating 24 hours.
Fully cured 6-7 days
Theoretical spreading Rate: 1-2 m2/Ltr. According or the textured required
APPLICATION DATA:
Surface: surfaces must be dry and primer
Application methods: By special spry gun.
Mixing Ratio: 4 Paint: 1 Handler
Mixing just before application
C-FINAL COAT:
S.T.H.
09900-11
PRODUCT DECSRIPTION:
Two component product base on Epoxy resin. Used as a top coat to give a long lasting
elastic, anticarbonation weather resistance and Ultra-Violet light resistance coat.
TECHNICAL DATA:
Colour: Limited colours and clear
Specified Gravity: 1.01 + 0.05
Flash point 20C.
Drying time: Touch dry 1 hour. Hand dry 8 hours.
Theoretical spreading rate: 9 m2/Ltr.
APPLICATION DATA:
Surface preparation: Themedium coat must be dry.
Thinning: flaco Thinner 2020
Application Methods: Brush, roller, spray
Mixing ratio: 4 paint: 1 Hardener
Mixing just before application.
PART 3:
3.1.
EXECUTION
CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
1.
Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine all surfaces

scheduled to be painted. Check all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not
proceed if reading is higher than 12-15%.
2.
Inspect surfaces to be coated for gouges, marks, nibs, and other defects and properly
prepare by patching, filling, smoothing or other surface preparation necessary to ensure
satisfactory finish.
3.
Report in writing any condition adversely affecting this work.
4.
Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of
first-class job. Remove dust, grease, rust, scale and extraneous matter, tool and
machine marks from all surfaces which could be detrimental to a satisfactory and
acceptable finish.
3.2.
PREPARATION
1.
Equipment adjacent to or against walls shall be disconnected by workmen skilled in

these trades and moved to permit the wall surfaces to be painted. Following completion
of painting the equipment shall be replaced and reconnected.
2.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with current British Standards.
S.T.H.
3.
09900-12
1.
MILLWORK: Inspect millwork to assure surfaces are smooth and free from
machine marks and that nailheads have been countersunk. Seal all knots and
sapwood in surfaces to receive paint with a sealer compatible with the finish
specified. Sand smooth all woodwork which is to be finished and clean surfaces
free of dust before applying first coat. Fill nail holes, splits and scratches with nonshrinking filler after first coat is dry. Where these occur on a transparent surface,
stain filler to match finish.
2.
METAL: Clean unpainted and shop primed metal to provide satisfactory surfaces
to receive overcoats and provide permanent adhesion of coatings. Clean metal
surfaces with a mordant solution which shall be slightly acidic in nature and
containing solvents to remove grease, organic soaps and to provide a physical key
to new smooth metallic surfaces.
PLASTER:
Ensure that plaster is clean and free of extraneous matter.
3.3.
APPLICATION
1.
After the Contractor receives approval to a brand of paint, he shall use the primers,
undercoats, etc. manufactured or recommended by the manufacturers of that brand and
carry out the work in accordance with the manufacturers specification to give the best
result.
2.
Mixing and application of paint shall be in accordance with the specifications of the
manufacturers concerned and to the approval of the Engineer.
3.
The mixing of paints or paint related products of different brands before or during
application shall not be permitted.
4.
Apply interior finishes to all surfaces scheduled to be finished. Finishes shall be free of
defects in materials and workmanship affecting appearance and performance.
5.
Apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and specifications

and be familiar with those directions and specifications.
6.
Permit paint to dry before applying succeeding coats, touch up suction spots and sand
between coats with No. 00 sandpaper, Remove dust of sanding.
7.
Finishes and number of coats specified are intended to cover surfaces completely. If
they do not, apply further coats until complete coverage is achieved as required, Paint
entire plane of areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage. Patching will not
be acceptable.
8.
Prime woodwork designed for painting as soon as possible after woodwork is delivered
to site.
9.
Prime wood doors, reseal all cut edges of wood to be painted or finished, if material was cut subsequent to initial sealing, Seal or prime tops and bottoms of wood .doors.
10.
Apply primer coats to ferrous metal surfaces that have not received shop coat of primer.
11.
Touch up shop primed metal work after loose paint and scale have been removed.
12.
Painting shall be three coat work throughout. Priming coat shall be colour toned lighter
than second coat; second lighter than finish coat; finish coat shall be approved colour.
Each coat shall be inspected by the Engineer.
S.T.H.

3.4.
09900-13
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK
1.
Finish paint primed mechanical and electrical equipment, electrical cabinets, louvers,
grilles, diffusers and other items with two coats of paint.
2.
Prime and paint insulated pipes and ducts.
3.
Co-ordinate the painting of pipes, ducts and coverings with mechanical contractor to
ensure that he does not install pipe colour banding, flow arrows and pipe identification
until the painting of the pipes, coverings and ducts has been done.
4.
Remove grilles, covers, access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from
installed locations and paint separately, if these items are not factory finished.
5.
Paint metal access panels while open and keep open until dry.
6.
Air diffusers shall be primed and finished with two coats of paint of same colour and
sheen as ducts and/or ceiling as instructed by the Engineer.
3.5.
1.
3.6.
1.
PATCHING
Do all retouching to ensure that the Work is handed over to the Employer in perfect
condition, free of runs, spatter, finger marks, rust, watermarks, scratches, blemishes or
other disfiguration.
CLEANING
Promptly as the Work proceeds and on completion of the Work, remove all paint where
spilled, splashed or spattered; during the progress of the Work keep the premises free
from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at
the conclusion of the work leave the premises neat and clean to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
099123-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of interior items and
surfaces.
1.
2.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not
specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials
or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Engineer will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
1.
C.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats of high performance anti-bacterial
paint systems as specified in this Section.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces
of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final
finish.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating
parts, and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a.
b.
c.
2.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally

inaccessible spaces:
a.
3.
Utility tunnels or trenches.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
S.T.H.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

Light fixtures.
Any other item specified to have factory applied colored paint or coating
system.
Anodized aluminum.
Stainless steel.
Chromium plate.
Copper and copper alloys.
Bronze and brass.
Powder coated aluminum
PVDF coated aluminum

4.
1.3
A.
3.
4.
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when
measured at an 85-degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Abbreviations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
2.
1.4
Valve and damper operators.

Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
Similar operating items
DEFINITIONS
1.
B.
099123-2
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
DFT: Dry Film Thickness.

UL: Underwriter Laboratories.
SSPC: Society of Protective Coatings
NCS: Natural Colour System
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1.
2.
Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each

material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating
material.
B.
Samples: Full size samples of the proposed products shall be submitted to Engineer
when requested.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to
simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1.
S.T.H.
After color selection, Engineer will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2.
3.
099123-3
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label
each Sample for location and application.
Submit three Samples on the following substrates for Engineer's review of color
and texture only:
a.
b.
c.
1.5
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
Concrete: 100-by-150-mm Samples for each color and finish.

Concrete Unit Masonry: 150-by-250-mm Samples of masonry, with mortar
joint in the center, for each finish and color.
Ferrous Metal: 100-mm square Samples of flat metal and 200-mm long
Samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and

coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, fillers, putties, undercoats, and primers for
each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Furnish paint
materials as comprehensive integral paint system with all materials from same
manufacturer or from sources recommended by top coat manufacturer in products
technical data sheet.
1.6
A.

Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at an

ambient temperature as recommended by manufacturer in technical datasheet
Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
S.T.H.
Product name or title of material.

Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
WARRANTY
Contractor shall furnish minimum 5 years warranty on material and workmanship.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 10 and 32 deg C.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
099123-4
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air are between 7 and 35 deg C.
C.
Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various

coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer
for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
C.
Colors:
1.
2.
2.2
Colors: Color of any paint system covered under this Section shall be as
indicated on Drawings or as selected by Engineer from manufacturers full range
of colors for the system.
Paints shall be factory prepared in computerized mixers.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All interior paints to be used in this Project shall be free from cadmium and lead
meeting Green Seal Criteria or corresponding European certification acceptable to
B.
Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anticorrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are
applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1.
2.
Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings).
Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
S.T.H.
Acrolein.
Acrylonitrile.
Antimony.
Benzene.
Butyl benzyl phthalate.
Cadmium.
Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
Di-n-butyl phthalate.
Di-n-octyl phthalate.
1,2-dichlorobenzene.
Diethyl phthalate.

l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
2.3
A.
099123-5
Dimethyl phthalate.
Ethylbenzene.
Formaldehyde.
Hexavalent chromium.
Isophorone.
Lead.
Mercury.
Methyl ethyl ketone.
Methyl isobutyl ketone.
Methylene chloride.
Naphthalene.
Toluene (methylbenzene).
1,1,1-trichloroethane.
Vinyl chloride.
INTERIOR FINISH COATS

Portland Cement Plaster and Gypsum Board surfaces:
1.
Acrylic Emulsion Paint (Code: W1a): Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion

latex (water-borne) paint of fine granular texture or smooth finish for interior
application suitable for repeated washing. Paint shall be interior emulsion paint,
of acrylic binder, of high leveling and hiding properties with anti-fungal and antibacterial properties.
a.
Properties:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
2.
3.
Refer to Part 3 for Paint Schedule.
Alkyd paint System on Portland Cement Plaster: Top and under coats are to be
alkyd based, oleo resinous, non-toxic, drying to a smooth, highly opaque surface
to produce a durable flexible and water-resistant coating with excellent adhesion
and color retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive further coatings. Finish
is to be gloss or semi-gloss as selected by the Engineer.
a.
4.
Crack Bridging Ability: Maximum 1 mm.

Washability Criteria: DIN 53778 < 10000 scrubs.
Surface spread of flame: BS 476: Part 7: 1997, classified Class 1
Y.
Anti -bacterial/Anti-fungal properties: BS:3900 Part G6 for
Fungus
growth-Rating 0 (No Growth); JIS Z 2801:2000(E)
for Bacterial
growth Inhibits the growth of E coli & Staphaureus on moist surfaces.
Textured Acrylic (Code: W1b): Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint

for interior application that create stylish walls with pearlescent finish. Paint shall
be highly recognized as interior emulsion paint, of acrylic binder and specially
formulated binders and pigments. Paint shall be suitable for stippled application
with normal roller or thick napped rollers to obtain textured finish to sample
a.
S.T.H.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
Epoxy paint on Portland Cement Plaster: Top coat and primer are to be based on
a high molecular weight epoxy resin. Finish is to be gloss, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings or directed by Engineer.

a.
B.
1.
Alkyd Paint System for Woods: Top and under coats are to be alkyd based, oleoresinous, non-toxic, drying to a smooth, highly opaque surface to produce a
durable, flexible and water-resistant coating with excellent adhesion and color
retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive further coatings. Finish is to be
gloss or semi-gloss as selected by the Engineer.
2.
Stained Varnish System: Wood stains for interior applications, which dries to a
tough durable coating; and moisture-curing, single-component, polyurethanebased, clear varnish with gloss or flat finish. Color of stain and finish of varnish
are to be to the selection of Engineer. Fillers are to be to manufacturers
recommendations.
3.
Clear Varnish: Moisture-curing, single-component, polyurethane-based, clear

varnish with gloss finish.
Ferrous Surfaces:
1.
Acrylic Aliphatic-Polyurethane Enamel: Two-pack acrylic resin based enamel

cured with aliphatic polyisocyanate applicable on steel surfaces, steel surfaces
primed with epoxy-based primers and steel surfaces coated with zinc. Dry
enamel film shall exhibit excellent gloss and color retention, durability, scratch
and abrasion resistance and chemical resistance. Comply with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Binder: Acrylic\aliphatic polyurethane.

Pigments: Rutile titanium dioxide and/or color pigments and functional
extenders.
Appearance:
High Gloss..
% Solids:
68, by volume, minimum.
Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturers full range of colors.
Application:
Air spray or brush.
Primer: Epoxy-zinc-rich or epoxy-based as specified for substrate to be
coated.
Thinners: As recommended by manufacturer.
1)
Exceeds SSPC Paint Spec 36; Level 3.
j.
VOC Content:
k.
2.
Dry Film Thickness: Apply two coats over primer at spreading rate
recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 75
microns per coat, minimum.
i.
1)
2)
Primer: Not more than 340 g/L, (thinned).

Coating: Not more than 250 g/L, (thinned).
Epoxy Paint System for Steel Items: Top coat and primer are to be based on a
high molecular weight epoxy resin. Finish is to be gloss, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings or directed by Engineer.
a.
S.T.H.
099123-6
Wood Surfaces:
a.
C.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS

3.
Pavements:
1.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Fast-drying non-bleeding factory-formulated weatherresistant pavement marking paints based on alkyd resin and chlorinated rubber
with color-stable pigments and tough inert extenders. Specific gravity shall not be
less than 1.45 kg/L and minimum solids contents is 53%.
a.
Color: White and Yellow as indicated on Drawings.

1)
b.
2.4
A.
Use Yellow for spaces accessible to people with disabilities.
HIGH PERFORMANCE ANTI-MICROBIAL PAINT SYSTEM

Provide high performance anti-microbial coating system based on nano-silver
technology paint systems on areas as scheduled and on areas where stringent
hygienic condition is highly required. The anti-bacterial paint systems shall be chemical
resistant against harsh cleaning agents, abrasion-resistant, self-sterilizing and having
the capability to control the growth and spread of microbes. The high-performance antimicrobial shall be pure acrylic, aseptic, self-sterilizing, non-toxic, with multifunctional
properties. The anti-microbial paint system shall have an excellent protection against
mould and fungus and reduces effectively and permanently reduced the hospital
bacteria due to the usage of nano-silver particles with an average diameter of 10 - 15
nano-meters.
1.
Performance Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Low-emission and VOC-free.

Reduction of antibiotic resistant hospital germs (Staphylococcus Aureus,
Enterococcus Faecium): 99.999% (5-log).
The coating shall be permeable to water vapour, washable (wet abrasion
resistance Class 2 according to DIN EN 13300) and provide a good
coverage (Class 2 according to DIN EN 13300).
The coating shall be resistant against disinfectants.
Fire rating class: A2 as per DIN 4102-1
Resistance to Flame Spread: Class A2 according to DIN 4102-1
Physical Properties:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Specific gravity: 1.15 g/cm3

Solids by volume 58%: 2
Color: as indicated.
Gloss: matt
Acrylic Primer
a.
b.
S.T.H.
099123-7
Alkyd Paint System for Steel Items: Top and under coats are to be alkyd based,
oleo-resinous, non-toxic, drying to a smooth, highly opaque surface to produce a
durable, flexible and water-resistant coating with excellent adhesion and color
retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive further coatings. Finish is to be
semi-gloss. Primer is to be to the manufacturers recommendations.
a.
D.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
Solvent free acrylic based primer with excellent properties of penetration

and very good adhesion. The primer shall be permeable to water vapour
and alkali-resistant.
Physical Properties:

1)
2)
3.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
099123-8
pH value: 8
Specific gravity: 1.01 g/cm3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
a.
3.
3.2
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,

lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
2.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
All substrates that exhibit signs of bacteria or fungal growth prior to application
must be treated with proprietary cleaning compound prior to application of antibacterial paint primers.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to

requirements of BS 6150:2006 and manufacturer's written instructions for each
particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
S.T.H.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items

removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of

substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.
1.
C.
Notify Engineer about anticipated problems when using the materials specified
over substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
1.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are

provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates.
On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to
ensure use of compatible primers.
Remove and reprime incompatible primers.

Cementitious Materials: Prepare cement plaster, and mineral surfaces to be
painted as follows:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
d.
e.
S.T.H.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of
white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including
cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
If transparent finish is required, back prime with spar varnish.
Back prime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other
wet wall construction occurs on back side.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat
of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
SSPCs recommendations.
a.
b.
5.
Use compatible acrylic or PVA based filler under acrylic emulsion

paints.
Use oil-based filler under alkyd paints. Use of copolymer-based fillers
under alkyd paints shall be subject to written approval of Engineer
based on manufacturers certification, submitted samples and
mockups executed on Site.
Use alkyd based filler under epoxy based paints, unless otherwise
Sand after setting of filler and patch remaining spots or irregularities
and lightly sand to obtain perfect smooth uniform surface suitable for
receiving paint coats.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a.
4.
099123-9
Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents.
Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been
used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint
manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
Prepare surfaces with two coats of filler or putty that is compatible with
under coats and finish coats and obtained from same manufacturer of paint
coats:
1)
3.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
Treat metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based

solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants.
Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.

6.
8.
D.
2.
3.
3.3
A.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
APPLICATION
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators
and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint
schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used, always check
compatibility prior to commencing coating.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, louvers and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these
areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated,
or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
S.T.H.
Gypsum Boards: Comply with requirements specified in Division 9, Section

Gypsum Boards.
Fiber-Cement Wood Boards: Refer to Division 9, Section Wood Stains and
Transparent Wood Finishes.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the
finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
1.
B.
Treat metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's

1.
E.
099123-10
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
recommendations of referenced standard specification.
a.
b.
7.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured
as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth,
2.
3.
C.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
099123-11
even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between

applications.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat
of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment:
Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated, unless higher
thickness is recommended by manufacturer. Provide total dry film thickness of the
entire system as recommended by manufacturer but not less dry film thickness
specified.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited
to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not
been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of
suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no
burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
G.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a

smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
H.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Refer to Division 9, Section Wood Stains and

Transparent Wood Finishes.
I.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
J.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4
A.
S.T.H.

Employer reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as
often as the Engineer deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
099123-12
B.
Engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material
being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in the presence of the Engineer and Contractor.
C.
The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as
required by the Engineer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Quantitative material analysis.

Abrasion resistance.
Apparent reflectivity.
Flexibility.
Washability.
Absorption.
Accelerated weathering.
Dry opacity.
Accelerated yellowness.
Recoating.
Skinning.
Color retention.
Alkali and mildew resistance.
D.
Engineer may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being
used does not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Contractor shall remove non-complying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint
surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be
required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
3.5
A.
CLEANING
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from Project site.
1.
3.6
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove

spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging
adjacent finished surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
1.
S.T.H.
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.

3.7
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
099123-13
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Coordinate the following paint coats with surface preparation steps as specified.
B.
Special Paint System: Apply in compliance with recommendations of the paint

manufacturer. Comply with the higher number of coats when more than one option are
included.
C.
Concrete: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick
masonry surfaces:
1.
Acrylic Paint Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

a.
2.
D.
First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic latex-based, interior paint applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 0.060 mm per coat.
Gypsum Board:
surfaces:
1.
b.
Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of
not less than 0.031 mm.
First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic-latex-based, interior paint applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 0.060 mm.
Portland Cement Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new, interior
Portland cement plaster surfaces:
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

a.
b.
c.
2.
Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading

rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness
of not less than 0.036 mm.
Undercoat: same material for finish coats specified hereafter diluted to the
manufacturers recommendations.
First and Second Finish Coats: Flat, acrylic-latex, interior paint applied at
film thickness of not less than 0.064 mm per coat.
Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish:

primer.
a.
b.
S.T.H.
Provide the following finish system over interior gypsum board
Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

a.
E.
Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading

One finish coat over an undercoat and a
Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd- or latex-based, interior primer, as

recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading
First and Second Coats: Semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at

3.
F.
Epoxy-Based Coating: Comply with manufacturers printed instructions.
Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater.

a.
b.
Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoater applied at spreading rate

First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
1.
Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoat and
a primer.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended

by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
0.031 mm.
Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semi-gloss, interior, alkydenamel finish coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this
substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.031 mm.
Finish Coat: Full-gloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
Acrylic\Polyurethane Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.

a.
Primer: Primer for Galvanized Steel:

1)
2)
b.
H.
Washing Primer: Polyvinylbutaryl (PVB) etching primer.

Primer: Polyamide epoxy primer or other epoxy
recommended by manufacture.
resin
as
Finish Coats: Acrylic polyurethane coating as specified.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1.
Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat over a primer.

a.
b.
2.
Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer at spreading rate recommended by

the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.031
mm.
Finish Coat: Full-gloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
not less than 0.031 mm per coat.
Full-Gloss, Epoxy-Based Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.

a.
b.
S.T.H.
099123-14
Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish system over new, interior
wood surfaces:
1.
G.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
Primer: High-molecular-weight, epoxy-resin primer at spreading rate

Finish Coats: High-molecular-weight, epoxy-resin topcoat at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer.

3.
099123-15
Acrylic\Polyurethane Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.

a.
b.
I.
INTERIOR PAINTINGS
Primer: Epoxy polyamide or other epoxy resin as recommended by

manufacture.
Finish Coats: Acrylic polyurethane coating as specified.
High Performance Anti-Microbial Paint Coatings:

1.
- Three coat system
a.
b.
Acrylic Primer: 1- coat

Antimicrobial Nanotechnology based pure acrylic paint: 2-coats
J.
Traffic Markings: Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical
equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended
rates for a 0.2-mm- minimum dry film thickness.
K.
Acrylic\Urethane Coatings: Apply minimum two coats to obtain dry film thickness
recommended by manufacturer but not less than 35-micron DFT per coat.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

10150-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments.
B.
Type and style includes metal, baked enamel finish, ceiling-hung toilet
compartments.
C. Style of screens includes wall-hung type.

D. Supports for attaching compartments to overhead structural system are
specified in a Division 5 Section.
E.
Toilet Accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, and purse
shelves, are specified in another Division 10 Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.

Available Manufacturers:
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
include.
1.
Steel Baked Enamel Finish:
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness
and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stain, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other
imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B.
Steel sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanizedbonderized, of the following minimum thicknesses:
1.
Pilasters (un-braced):
1.3 mm.
2.
Panels and Screens:
1.0 mm.
3.
Doors:
0.85 mm.
C.
Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 2.8 mm, galvanized steel

sheet.
D.
Concealed Tapping Reinforcement:

sheet.
E.
Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening

honeycomb of impregnated Kraft paper in thickness to provide finished
dimension of 25 mm minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 31 mm
minimum for pilasters.
S.T.H.
Minimum 2.0 mm, galvanized steel

10150-2
_____________________________________________________________________
F.
Pilasters Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/ 304 stainless steel, not
less than 76 mm high, 1.0 mm, finished to matched hardware.
G. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturers standard design, for attaching panels to

walls and pilasters, either chromium-plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac")
or anodized aluminum.
H.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty

operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated, nonferrous cast
alloy ("Zamac").
I.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of

stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware,
with theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A.
General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated

for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and
internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories,
and grab bars; as indicated.
B.
Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 600 mm wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 800 mm wide (clear opening) outswinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
C.
Metal Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face

sheets to core material and seal edges. Weld edges and corners with
exposed welds ground smooth.
D.
Ceiling-Hung Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices

complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Furnish
devices which are designed to support pilasters from structure without
transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide 76 mm high stainless steel trim
piece, finished ceiling. Finished to match hardware, at each pilaster.
E.
Wall-Hung Screens: Furnish panel units of same construction and finish as

partition system panels.
F.
Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI

A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows:
1.
Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up
to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed
torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards.
2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, designed for emergency
access, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and
rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted
accessories.
S.T.H.

10150-3
_____________________________________________________________________
4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out-swinging doors.

Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors.
2.4 FINISH
Color: Custom color to match Employer Representative's sample.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
10210-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02

Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes cubicle curtains, tracks and accessories.

1.
2.
3.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
1.04
NFPA, National Fire Protection Agency.

BS, British Standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturers Data: Submit copies of manufacturers detailed technical data

for materials, fabrication and installation of cubicle curtain tracks specified
herein. Include catalog cuts of fittings, anchors, fastenings and accessories.
B.
Samples:
1.
2.
C.
1.05
S.T.H.
Intravenous cubicle curtains, tracks and accessories.

Curtains
Curtain Tracks
Submit samples of cubicle curtains and tracks complete with rollers,

hooks, slides, end caps and gate for the approval of the Architect.
Submit 500 mm (width) by 1800mm (height) sample of patient cubicle
curtain of approval by Architect for selection of patterns and colors.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cubicle tracks in each room, anchoring to

structure and required structural backing above ceiling.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Delivery cubicle curtains and tracks in manufacturers original unopened

protective packaging.
B.
Store to prevent soiling and physical damage.
C.
Maintain protective covers on units until installation is complete.

10210-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.06
COORDINATION
A.
1.07
All work under this Section shall be closely coordinated with framing and
mechanical and electrical work and other work that affects or is affected by
work included herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator/Installer Qualification: Firm experienced in producing curtains similar

to those indicated for this Project that have a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide curtains that are certified to be antimicrobial and flame resistant according to requirements of NFPA 701.
Permanently attach label to each curtain indicating whether curtain is
permanently and inherently flame resistant, or whether it will require retreatment after dry cleaning.
C.
Mock-up:
1. Provide mock-up work for each type and color in accordance with
requirements specified in Contract Documents.
1.08
MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.09
1.10
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish 2 additional sets of curtains for each set installed. Provide each
additional set of curtains in a separate package, labeled describing contents.
B.
Furnish additional curtain carriers equal to 5-percent of the number provided for
the first complete set of curtains.
WARRANTY
A.
S.T.H.
Take all necessary measurements to assure proper fitting and fabrication of

work. Variations of adjacent construction shall be taken into account and
properly provided for. All work under this Section shall be closely coordinated
with that of other trades whose work affects or is affected by the work included
herein to assure complete assemblies and installations.
Provided a written warranty, signed and issued in the name of the Owner,
stating that the curtain and tracks is warranted against defects and failure
under normal usage for a period of five (5) years from date of Certificate of
Substantial Completion.

10210-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

CUBICLE CURTAIN ASSEMBLIES

A.
Curtains and Curtain Tracks:

1. Cubicle curtain track assembly shall meet or exceed to items listed at the
list of manufacturers.
2. Curtain tracks shall be fabricated from 5 micron satin finish extruded
aluminum as indicated in drawings and as approved by Architect.
3. Cubicle Curtain Tracks and glider hooks (C8):
a. Tracks with P.V.C. dust covers and glider hooks at rate of 10 per meter,
complete with connecting bridge and end covers. Tracks, dust covers,
glider hooks, connecting bridge and end covers to be provided as
indicated in drawings.
b. Location: Refer to the drawings.
4. Patient Cubicle Curtains:
a. Curtain fabric shall be 100% flame retardant fibers or filament in
accordance with NFPA No.701. Fabric to have inherent anti-bacterial
properties.
b. Stitching and tailoring shall be of a high quality, suitable for heavy duty
applications and done by a reputable firm subject to approval.
c. Fabric Weight: Fabric weight to be not less than 200 g/m. Fabric to be
of stable dimensions and shrinkage shall not exceed 3% in each
dimension when repeatedly washed with hospital grade detergent.
d. Fabric Color: Fabric shall be either woven or printed in color patterns
decreasing upward. Color and pattern of fabric to be selected by
Architect from manufacturers full color range. Patient cubicles curtain
types as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
C1: To be selected by Architect.

e. Curtain track to be fixed at ceiling at height of 300 mm floor finish level.
S.T.H.

10210-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
f.
Length of curtain in to be 20% more than the length of track hem.
g. Curtain shall be double folded 200 mm and heading to include triple

pocket heavy duty flame retardant tape. Each curtain to be one piece in
height.
h. Curtain length: To be actual dimensions on site, unless otherwise
indicated.
i.
Netting Material: Mesh fabric fabricated from 100% polyester inherently

flame resistant with 50 mm same fabric banc along the top of the mesh,
complete with 13 mm stainless steel, two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof,
gromments every 150mm machined into top hem.
1) Height: 450 mm of mesh on top of curtain.
2) Color: To match curtain color.
5. Full coordination between track and curtain in detailing, heading tape,

stitching and tailoring to be Contractors responsibility.
2.03
INTRAVENOUS ASSEMBLY
A.
Track: Surface mounted, anodized extruded aluminum track with nylon glider.
B.
Bottle-Holding Pendant: Adjustable shaft with vertical height adjustment,

equipped with not less than 4 stainless-steel arms.
C.
Carriers: Ball bearing with chrome-plated steel hook.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install tracks, curtains, and intravenous bottle-holding pendant and track in

accordance with manufacturers installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.

hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Include Samples of
Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 156-mm
square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
Each type of hardware and accessory.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.
F.
Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
A.
S.T.H.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." or
corresponding European code acceptable to Engineer.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according

to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
1.5
A.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1 for

toilet compartments designated as accessible.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings,
and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements
before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MATERIALS
Phenolic Panels: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of solid phenolic core decorative plastic laminate with multiple
resin-impregnated kraft and surface sheets fused at high temperature and pressure and
quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS
A.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
B.
Entrance-Screen Style: Floor anchored.
C.
Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with
melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not
separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 13-mm
thick doors and pilasters and minimum 13-mm thick panels.
D.
Phenolic-Panel Finish:
1.
2.
Facing Sheet Finish: As indicated.

Color and Pattern: As indicated.
E.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
F.
Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
S.T.H.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.3
A.
ACCESSORIES
Hardware and Accessories:
hardware and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating
Material: Stainless steel.

Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to
hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed
for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at
compartments designated as accessible.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper,
sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging
doors.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, stainless steel, type 316 tube
top/head rail and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless

steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with
theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For
concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant,
protective-coated steel.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,

leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 610-mm wide, in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 914-mm wide, out-swinging doors with a
minimum 813-mm wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1.
S.T.H.
Maximum Clearances:

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
a.
b.
2.
Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three
brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a.
b.
B.
3.2
A.
Pilasters and Panels: 13 mm.

Panels and Walls: As indicated.
Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set
pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 44 mm into structural floor unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to
each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with
tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors
are in closed position.
ADJUSTING
Hardware Adjustment:
Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware
manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors
to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set
hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS 102123-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
B.
Curtain tracks and carriers.

Cubicle curtains.
Include durability, laundry temperature limits, fade resistance, applied curtain

treatment, and fire-test-response characteristics for each type of curtain fabric
indicated.
Include data for each type of track.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Show layout and types of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers, anchorage
details, and conditions requiring accessories. Indicate dimensions taken from field
measurements.
Include details on blocking above ceiling and in walls.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 254 mm in
size.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of curtain material indicated.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
S.T.H.
Curtain Fabric: 254-mm-square swatch or larger as required to show complete

pattern repeat, from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied.
Mark top and face of material.
Mesh Top: Not less than 254 mm square.
Curtain Track: Not less than 254 mm long.
Curtain Carrier: Full-size unit.
Curtain and Track Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For curtains, track, and hardware to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
2.
3.
Build mockup of typical cubicle, complete with track, curtain, as shown on

Drawings.
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CUBICLE TRACK SYSTEM:

Cubicle Tracks: Surface-mounted tracks of heavy extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T4, 1
9.5 mm x 19 mm, slotted to receive roller carriers, complete with accessories and
components required for complete and secure installations including splicers, end caps
and corner bends.
1.
2.
B.
Carriers: General Cubicles virgin nylon axle with nylon wheels, complete with nickelplated brass bead-chain and hook assembly.
1.
2.2
A.
A.
S.T.H.
Provide one carrier for each 150 mm of cubicle curtain width.
CUBICLE CURTAINS
Curtain Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Corner Bends: Shall have a 300 mm radius fabricated in one continuous L shape.
Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
Fabric: In solid net and upper area to be mesh.

Fiber Content: 100% FR Polyester.
Treatment: Inherently
WINDOW CURTAINS
Curtain Materials:

_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fabric: As indicated
Fiber Contents: 100% Trevira CS Polyester
Width: 300 cm
Flame Retardancy: NFPA 701
Cleaning: Codes WS - Water / Solvent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Up to 6.0 m in length, provide track fabricated from single, continuous length.

1.
C.
Curtain Track Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.
Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended by

manufacturer. Fasten tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each corner.
Center fasteners in track to ensure unencumbered carrier operation. Attach track to
ceiling as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mechanically fasten directly to bottom of concrete deck with post-installed anchors.

Mechanically fasten directly to finished ceiling with toggle bolts.
Mechanically fasten to furring through suspended ceiling with screw and tube
spacer.
Mechanically fasten to suspended ceiling grid with screws.
Attach track to suspended ceiling grid with manufacturer's proprietary clip.
D.
Suspended-Track Mounting: Install track with manufacturer's standard tubular aluminum

suspended supports at intervals and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
Fasten supports to structure. Provide supports at each splice and tangent point of each
corner. Secure ends of track to wall with flanged fittings or brackets.
E.
Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining
sleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.
1.
2.
S.T.H.
Provide one locking switch unit for each pair of beds.

Provide one hinged loading unit for each bed or pair of beds with locking switch
unit.

_____________________________________________________________________________
F.
Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 152-mm spacing along full length
of curtain plus an additional carrier.
G.
Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

WALL & DOOR PROTECTION 102600-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
Structural Performance: Provide handrails capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Wall guards.
Impact-resistant handrails.
Corner guards.
Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.

Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, firetest-response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and
extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
C.

indicated.
1.
D.
S.T.H.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit
Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples
of size indicated below. Include Samples of accent strips to verify color selected.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Wall and Corner Guards: 300 mm long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end
caps, top caps, and field splices.
Door-Surface Protection: 150 by 150 mm square.
Handrails: 300 mm long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices.
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer.
C.
Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.
D.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.
1.7
Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining

optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions.
Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be
detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from
single manufacturer.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
D.
Revise subparagraph below to suit Project.

1.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval.
If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineers for review.
E.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units

with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.
F.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.
G.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1.8
A.

Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and
containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, and humidity.
1.
2.
3.
Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 21 deg C during
the period plastic materials are stored.
Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.
Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic
material attains a minimum room temperature of 21 deg C.
a.
b.
1.9
A.
1.10
A.
Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

Store wall-guard and handrail covers in a horizontal position.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units
until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature at 21 deg C for not less than 72 hours
before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.

a.
b.
2.
Structural failures.
Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
PVC Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or
acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded or sheet material,
thickness as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
S.T.H.
Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635 or corresponding

European standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

_____________________________________________________________________________
B.
Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant;

with a minimum impact-resistance rating of 800 J/m of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221M for Alloy 6063-T5.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
E.
Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M for extruded shapes and ASTM B 36/B 36 M for sheet.
F.
Particleboard:
formaldehyde.
G.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws,

bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type
fasteners where exposed to view.
H.
Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and

with a VOC content complying with the limits required by authorities having jurisdiction in
Abu Dhabi.
2.2
A.
WALL GUARDS:
Crash Rail: Curved wall protection system made of smooth PVC rails project 30 mm, are
200/120 or 60 mm deep and snap-fix to aluminum brackets or continuous aluminum
core, 3 mm thick, class 0 fire-rated and solid color, the PVC rails provide a smooth
surface finish with decorative grooves. Finish is provided by end pieces, external and
internal 90 smooth PVC angle pieces and aluminums joint blocks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
A.
S.T.H.
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
Section depth: 200/120 or 60 mm

Projection: 30 mm
Length: 4 m
Material: 3 mm thick PVC, antibacterial and fire-rated, solid color
Surface finish: smooth with decorative grooves
Fixing components: aluminum brackets (optional: continuous aluminum core)
Colors: As indicated
HANDRAILS:
Impact-Resistant Plastic Handrails. Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover
installed over continuous retainer. Hand and wall protection rail comprising 3 mm thick
smooth PVC profile with a depth of 140 mm achieving, class 0 fire-rating and solid color.
The mounting system combines a completely smooth tubular upper part and a lower wall
protection rail with decorative grooves. The PVC profile snap-fixes to a continuous
aluminum section and finish is provided by smooth PVC finishing accessories with
decorative grooves (wall returns, external 90 and variable angle pieces from 91 to

_____________________________________________________________________________
135). The unit is fitted in the spacer with an adjustable aluminum clamp. Overall
projection is adjustable, minimum 105 mm.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
A.
CORNER GUARDS:
Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on
plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware. Corner
guards shall be 90 corner protector with contrast strip on aluminum core comprising
smooth 2.5 mm thick PVC profile, class 0 fire-rating with solid color. Wings are 60 mm
wide (internal measurement) and snap-fix to continuous predrilled aluminum core. The
central rounded bead forms a decorative and harmless contrast strip. Smooth PVC caps
are provided for ends.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.5
Section depth: 140 mm

Length: 4 m
Tubular upper part diameter: 40 mm
Overall projection: Minimum 105 mm adjustable
Stand-off from wall: Minimum 55 mm adjustable
Material: 3 mm thick antibacterial PVC, Bs2d0 fire-rated, solid color
Surface finish: Smooth upper handrail, smooth wall protection rail with decorative
grooves
Fixing components: Adjustable fixing on composite spacers to be fitted at 1.20 m
centers, 0.80 m centers in heavy traffic corridors and on light partitions like
plasterboard.
Colors: As indicated
Angle: 90
Wing width: 60 mm (internal measurement)
Thickness: 2.5 mm
Length: 1.30 m, 2.00 m or 4.00 m
Material: Antibacterial and fire-rated PVC, solid color
Surface finish: smooth
Fixing system: continuous pre-drilled aluminum core
Colors: As indicated.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B.
Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C.
Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide
surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
D.
Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.6
A.
METAL FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B.
Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking,
grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for
secure attachment of support fasteners.
1.
C.
3.2
For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape,
verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
PREPARATION
A.
Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall

protection system components.
B.
Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line
without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other
defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
1.
S.T.H.
Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights


_____________________________________________________________________________
2.
Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a
complete installation.
a.
b.
c.
3.4
Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.

Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 6.1 m, splice aluminum
retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer
than 305 mm.
Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
CLEANING
A.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

FIRE EXTIGUISHERS AND CABINETS
10522-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
3. Fire hose valve cabinets.
4. Combination fire extinguisher/ fire hose valve cabinets.
5. Mounting brackets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
includes.
B.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets for this project are based upon the #7225-F-HB (7902) cabinet for extinguishers as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc.
C. Fire Hose Valve Cabinets for this project are based upon the #8220-F-B-HB
(7915) cabinet for valves as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc.
D. Combination Fire Extinguisher/ Hose Valve Cabinets for this project are
based upon the #8225-F-B-HB (-7901-7915) cabinet for valves and
extinguishers as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc. Naming of
manufacturer is not intended to limit selection. Other equipment similar in
appearance as described below and meeting specification may be proposed
for use on this project.
2.2 FIRE EXTIGUISHERS
A.
General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet, each

combination extinguisher/ hose valve cabinet, and other locations indicated,
in colors and finishes selected by the Employer Representative from
manufacturer's standard, which comply with requirements of governing
authorities.
1. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL
classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of
extinguishing material contained in extinguisher.
B.
S.T.H.
Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 2.3 kg. Nominal

capacity in enameled steel container. Provide for all locations except kitchen
areas, as noted below.

10522-2
_____________________________________________________________________
C. Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 10B:C, 2.3 kg. Nominal capacity, in enameled
steel container. Provide for kitchen areas only.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher,
of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated
finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets and for those
located in cabinets, where indicated or required.
2.4 FIRE EXTIGUISHER CABINETS, FIRE HOSE VALVE CABINETS, AND
COMBINATION EXTINGUISHER/ HOSE VALVE CABINETS:
A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets and combination extinguisher/
hose valve cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire
extinguishers of types and capacities indicated, plus fire hose valves
specified in Division 15 where applicable.
B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box (tub), with trim,
frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style
indicated. Weld all and joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter
door frames.
C.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following

type:
1.
D.
Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to

suit style of trim indicated.
Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
1. "Trim-less": One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
recessed in surrounding wall surface with frame face covered by
overlapping door, with finished door surface flush with finished wall
surface.
E.
Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard finish, unglazed,

hollow steel flush panel door construction, coordinated with cabinet types and
trim styles selected.
F.
Identify extinguisher cabinets and combination extinguisher/ hose valve

cabinets with horizontally arranged, black, adhesive backed vinyl die cut
lettering spelling "FIRE EXTIGUISHER" applied to door. Provide additional
line of lettering spelling "FIRE DEPT. VALVE" for boxes containing only fire
hose valves. Provide lettering to comply with requirements indicated for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location or, if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by the Employer Representative from manufacturer's standard
arrangements.
G.
Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with black letter decals spelling 'FIRE

EXTIGUISHER" applied to wall surface. Letter size, style, and location as
selected by the Employer Representative.
S.T.H.

10522-3
_____________________________________________________________________
H.
Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, hollow metal flush door panel
without glazed opening.
I.
Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of

proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or
concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge
permitting door to open 180 deg.
2.5 STEEL FIRE DISTINGUISHER AND VALVE CABINET FINISHES

A.
Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces in compliance with SSPS-SP 1

to remove dirt oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint
bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel in
compliance with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8
(Picking).
B.
Factory-Priming for Finish Painting: Apply shop primer specified below

immediately following surface preparation and pretreatment.
1.
C.
Shop Priming for Finish Painting: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's

standard, fast-curing, lead-free , "universal" primer, selected for
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with
substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for
capability to provide a sound foundation for applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply

manufacturer's standard 2-coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for
application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
1.
Color and Gloss: Manufacturer's standard color and gloss for interior
and exterior of cabinet, white color.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

10800-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1.
1.
1.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3.
1.
1.4.
1.
1.5
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section 07900:
Section 08800:
Section 09200:
Section 09300:
Sections 09900:
Joint Sealers
Glazing
Tile
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor executing work of this section shall have a minimum of five (5) years
continuous experience in successful manufacture/fabrication and installation of
work of type and quality shown and specified.
SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and describe in
detail, materials, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings,
elevations, plans, sections, and any other pertinent information.
1.
Coordinatedeliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for off
the ground, under cover storage location. Do not load any area beyond the design
limit.
2.
Materials shall be carefully checked, unloaded, stored and handled to prevent

damage. Protect materials with suitable non-staining waterproof coverings.
3.
Store material in original, undamaged containers or wrappings with manufacturer's

seals and labels intact.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1.
MATERIALS
1.
Products are listed as a standard of quality. Manufacturers are required to certify to

meet the intent of the specifications in terms of design, function, quality of
materials and workmanship.
2.
All Sanitary wares shall comply with Estidama requirements with regard to flow and
pressure for all mixers and dual flushing for all water closets, contractor has to
comply with the following sanitary ware performance:
3.
Vitreous China shall conform to BS 3402: 1969 (high grade ceramic ware used for
sanitary appliances).
STH

10800-2
_________________________________________________________________________
4.
Stainless Steel Fixture Shall Confirm :

Material : Stainless steel - chrome/nickel V2A
Material-No.:1.4301
DIN-Designation : X 5 CrNi 189
AISI : 304
Composition : 18 Cr/10 Ni
Characteristics:very good level of corrosion-resistance
8 - 10 % addition of nickel improves the corrosion-resistancenon-magnetic
Materials thickness: Depend on the items 0.8 - 2 mm.
5.
All fittings and accessories are to be to the approval of the Hospital Authority and
the Engineer.
Quality Standards
Above all a functional and economic use of water, hence, developed a number of water
saving closet plans and w.c. suits, that flush with only 6 litres of water.
Guarantee
Sanitary guarantee a durable and reliable quality of all vitreous-china sanitary ware that is
manufactured and sold by our company.
SANITARY UNITS ACCESSORIES
a cistern for wall hung WC
Rapid SL flushing cistern for Wall Hung WC GD 2 with small maintenance access 1.13 m installation
height for on-the-wall installations or studded walls powder coated steel frame, self for drycladding, completely with fixed connections for single or rail installation quick adjustment, lockable
fixing material TV approved 2 WC fixing bolts fixing device for ceramic distance of fixing bolts
180/230 mm outlet bend 80 mm, depth adjustable reducer 80/100 mm inlet and outlet
connecting set flushing cistern GD 2, 6 - 9 l adjustment ex factory 6 l and 3 l pneumatic discharge
valve offering modes of operation: dual flush start/stop or non-interruptible water supply from
left/right or back low noise (group I acc. To German Noise Specification) DIN approved insulated
against condensation " water supply connection including integrated angle valve and push fit
flexible hose union no tools required for the installation of the inspection shaft incl. protection
during construction phase for vertical or horizontal use without accessories for on-the installation
self-supporting pre-assembled (6/3l)orcl. Water consumption shall be 6.0/4.0 liters/flush cycle
(full/low) as part of PW-R1 Minimum interior water use reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning
Council's Estidama Pearl Rating System.
STH

10800-3
_________________________________________________________________________
b Shower Column with External Bath / Shower Mixer
Bath Shower mixer X=Combination Consisting of exposed single-lever shower mixer with
diverter allows change between head shower Euphoria Cosmopolitan (27 492 000)
horizontal swivable 450 mm shower arm with ball joint rotation angle 15 hand shower
Euphoria 110 Massage (27 239 000) 9.5 l/min. flow limiter Silverflex shower hose 1 750
mm (28 388 000) minimum flow rate 7 l/min. technology for less water and perfect flow
46 mm ceramic cartridge chrome finish adjustable in height with gliding element (12 140
000) suitable for instantaneous heaters from 18 kW/hc.
Water consumption shall be 9.5 liters/minute at 551.6 KPa as part of PW-R1: Minimum
interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl rating
system.
STH

10800-4
_________________________________________________________________________
d Single lever bidet mixer
Single-lever bidet mixer 1/2" single hole installation metal lever 35 mm ceramic cartridge
chrome finish adjustable flow rate limiter adjustable minimum flow rate 2.5 l/min balljoint mousseur pop-up waste set 1 1/4" flexible connection hoses GROHE QuickFixTM
installation system optional temperature limiter ref. no. 46 375 noise classification 1 in
accordance with DIN4109.
system.
e Single lever basin mixer
Single-lever basin mixer 1/2"single hole installationmetal lever35 mm ceramic

cartridgechrome finishadjustable flow rate limiteradjustable minimum flow rate 2.5
l/minmousseu pop-up waste set 1 1/4"flexible connection hose GROHE QuickFixTM
installation system optional temperature limiter ref. no. 46 375 noise classification 1 in
accordance with DIN4109.
system.
STH

10800-5
_________________________________________________________________________
f Clinical - lever basin mixer
Infra-red electronic basin mixer battery supply6V lithium-battery, type CR-P2 single hole
installationrapid installation systemexternal batterysafety stop after 60 sec.multistage
battery status displayfunctions to activate with remote control 36 206 and with IR sensor:
3 min temporary off-function (cleaning mode)automatic flushing after 1 or 3 days without
usethermal disinfection for 3.5 or 11 minbattery capacity request possible mixing device
with temperature limiteradjustableflow limiter 6 l/minflexible connection hoses with
non-return valve 3/8"dirt strainersCE approvedtype of protection IP 56technology for less
water and perfect flow chrome finish.
system.
g - Ablution - Electronic wall tap mixer
Electronic wall Spout with Integrated sensor, vandal proof aerator to be combined with
electronic boxes or thermostat kit. Water flow regulator shall be 6.0 liters/minute at 413.7
KPa as part of PW-R1: Minimum interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning
Council's Estidama Pearl rating system.
STH

10800-6
_________________________________________________________________________
TOILET ACCESSORIES
The chrome finish on the entire range does not alter overtime and is granted certificate.
Articles not made of brass are AISI 304 Stainless Steel, a guarantee of strength and
durability should be cover. Also consider the excellent quality of mirrors which silvering
has a 10 years guarantee.
a Mirror :
size = 60 x 80 x 0.6 cm.
Complete with stainless steel hunger & screw with adjustable top lock.
b Wall bracket :
constructed of brass chrome.Complete with all screw & nuts.
c Grab bar: Grab rail for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin finished, rough
polishing for better surface feel, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness 1.2 mm,
inspected and certified product, with two stainless steel covers for hidden mounting, incl.
stainless steel screws and dowels.Size 60cmx32mm in diameter
d Cloth wall bracket:Double hook for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, 18 mm pipe diameter, drilled hole on bottom for fixation, incl. stainless steel
screws and dowels.Material thickness: 18.00 mm
Surface finish: satin finished
Gross weight: 0.1 kg
Net weight: 0.1 kg
Type of fixing: screw
Type of mounting: wall mounting
Number of hooks: 2
Overall width: 69 mm
Overall height: 18 mm
Overall depth: 60 mm
e Soap holder : Soap dish for wall mounting, 304 stainless steel, round covers with
drilled hole on bottom for fixation, incl. stainless steel screws and dowelsSurface finish:
satin finished
Net weight: 0.5 kg
STH

10800-7
_________________________________________________________________________
f Soap dispenser :Soap dispenser for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, material thickness 0.8 mm, folded front cover, cylinder lock with Franke standard
key, suitable for liquid soaps and lotions, 1 liter soap tank, push button on front, incl.
stainless steel screws and dowels.
Filling quantity: 1.00 liter
Material thickness: 0.80 mm
Net weight: 1 kg
g Tissue dispenser : Jumbo roll holder for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, material thickness 0.8 mm, cylinder lock with Franke standard key, closed round
casing with inspection window, paper withdrawal over two tear-off edges, for 1 roll with
max. 260 mm, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.
Filling quantity: 1.00 rolls
Maximum depth/diameter of consumable: 260 mm
Maximum width of consumable: 105 mm
Spindle: yesMaterial thickness: 0.80 mm
h Paper holder : Toilet roll holder for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, material thickness 0.8 mm, folding cover, for 1 roll with max. 130 mm, incl.
stainless steel screws and dowels
Filling quantity: 1.00 rolls
Maximum depth/diameter of consumable: 150 mm
Maximum width of consumable: 130 mm
Spindle: yes
i Folding seat :Foldable shower seat for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness 1.2 mm, mounting through eight
drilling holes, two prefixed white seat battens made of polyethylene, incl. stainless steel
screws and dowels.
Colour: white
Net weight: 3.5 kg
STH

10800-8
_________________________________________________________________________

Bending angle: 0.00
Back: no
Pipe diameter: 32
Hidden fixing: no
Hinged: yes
Number of fixing points: 2
j Bath tub seat :Foldable shower seat for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness 1.2 mm, mounting through eight
drilling holes, two prefixed white seat battens made of polyethylene, incl. stainless steel
screws and dowels.
Colour: white
Net weight: 3.5 kg
Bending angle: 0.00
Back: no
Pipe diameter: 32
Hidden fixing: no
Hinged: yes
Number of fixing points: 2
k Shower rod (angle)
Shower rod constructed in aluminium
Size = 80x80 cm.
l Shower rod (linear)
Shower rod constructed in aluminium
Size = 200 cm.
m Shower curtains :
Polyester shower curtains
Size = 180x200 cm.
n Rubber :
Free standing mat rubber
o Waste receptacle :Waste bin for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin finished,
material thickness 0.8 mm, selfclosing lid, folding bag holder, cylinder lock with Franke
standard key, approx. 30 liter capacity, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.
STH

10800-9
_________________________________________________________________________
Net weight: 4.8 kg

Lock: key-lock
Filling volume: 30.000 liter
Lid: yes
Bag holder: integrated
p Multi support arm with folded projection:Foldable grab rail without toilet roll holder
for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin finished, rough polishing for better surface
feel, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness 1.2 mm, prevention against unmeant
folding, gum rubber stop absorber, inspected and certified product, 4 mm thick mounting
plate with three fixing holes, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.(600mm)
Bending angle: 180.00
q Safe hand grips support : Grab rail for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, rough polishing for better surface feel, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness
1.2 mm, inspected and certified product, with two stainless steel covers for hidden
mounting, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.
Pipe diameter: 32
Hidden fixing: yes
STH

10800-10
_________________________________________________________________________
1.) Wallhung closet-pan type 1:(Location: staff, patient & Visitor toilets)
Washdown WC without Flushing Rim 4.5/6 Liters Wall hung 540mm Projection , for
concealed cistern or concealed pressure flush combinable with prewall element .
CE, EN997-cl1-6A-6C,EN 33
Water consumption shall be 6.0/4.0 liter/flush cycle (full/low) as part of PW-R1 Minimum interior
water use reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl Rating System.
2.) Wallhung closet-part type 2: (Location: VIP toilets)

Washdown WC without Flushing Rim, 6 Liter Wall Hung for concealed cistern or concealed
pressure flush including hidden wall fixing an extended outlet connector is required for
installation. Combination with prewall element. CE,EN 997-CL1-6A-6C, EN33
Water consumption shall be 6.0/4.0 liter/flush cycle (full/low) as part of PW-R1 Minimum interior
water use reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl Rating System.
STH

10800-11
_________________________________________________________________________
3.) WallhungBidet :(Location: VIP toilets)

Wall hung Bidet only for single-hole taps with flexible connection pipes
CE, DIN EN 14528-CL25 EN36
system.
4.) Wallhung Bidet Type 1 :(Location: staff, patient & Visitor toilets)
Wall hung bidet for Single-Hole Taps
CE, DIN EN 14528- CL25- EN36
system.
5.) Wallhung Wash Basin Type 1:(Location: staff, patient & Visitor toilets)
Hand Rinse Washbasin Wall Hung with Semi-pedestal with Tap Hole without Overflow
500x380mm. Water consumption shall be 1.9 liters/minute at 417.7 KPa as part of PW-R1:
Minimum interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl
rating system.
STH

10800-12
_________________________________________________________________________
6.) Wallhung Wash Basin Type 2: (Location: VIP toilets)

Wall hung washbasin with Semi-pedestal with One Tap-Hole and Overflow.
rating system.
7.) Hand Wash Basin: (Location: Consultant & treatment room)

Hand Rinse Washbasin Wall Hung with Semi-pedestal with Tap Hole without Overflow
rating system.
8.) Under Counter Washbasin:

Plan Under counter washbasin without tap-hole bench, with over flow
rating system.
STH

10800-13
_________________________________________________________________________
9.) Sink:
Single Bowl Kitchen sink Large bowl sizes ;Functional design ;Specific drainboard
patternWith 3 1/2'' stainless steel basket strainer (Width of base unit : 45 cm Bowl
depth: 160 mm ) (waste fitting, 3 1/2'' basket strainer). Water consumption shall be
6 liters/minute at 417.7 KPa as part of PW-R1: Minimum interior water reduction in
Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl rating system.
10.) Washbasin: (Location: Scrub)

Traditional Heavy Duty Fireclay High Back Cleaners Sink. Easy Clean Stain Resistant Glazed
Surface. Stainless Steel Hinged Grating Over The Sink Helps To Support The Bucket.
Additional Information: Screw to wall brackets are not suitable to support this fixture.
Build-in brackets can be used when fixing to masonry walls
Height525 mm
Width470 mm
Depth400 mm
system.
STH

10800-14
_________________________________________________________________________
11.) Shower Tray: (Location: VIP toilets)

Acrylic Shower Tray Square with or without Panels-White Color
80x80cm
12.) Bathtub: (Location: VIP toilets)

Acrylic Bathtub Unique ultra gloss sanitary ware grade cast acrylic sheet conforms to
SANITARY GRADE and meets:

British standard BS-7015 (1989)

American National Standard Institute ANSI.Z. 124
European National Standard Institute EN.263 (1989)
Bathtub conforms to British Standard (BS-4305)

Reinforcement of Bath structure is achieved by using special resin to give exclusive
bonding to the acrylic tub.
Advanced colouring process adds richness, durability and unique decor designs.
Timber baseboard laminated and sealed with special G.R.P materials, adds extra rigidity.
STH

MIRROR UNITS
10810-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Type of mirror units required include frameless mirrors.
B.
Toilet Accessories are specified in Division 10 "Toilet Room Accessories"

section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
Mirror Glass: 6.4 MM thick, Type 1, Quality q2, conforming to FS DD-G-451,

with silvering, copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with
FS DD-M-411.
B.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.
2.2 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate mounting devices for glass mirrors to

Edge Protection:
accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material.
B.
Backing: Provide mirror backing and support system which will permit rigid,
temper-proof glass installation and prevent accumulation of moisture, as
follows:
1.
Air space backing provided by resilient pads or grommets attached to

hanger assembly.
C. Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units which will permit rigid,
temper-proof and theft-proof installation, as follows:
1.
One-piece galvanized steel wall hanger device with spring action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or
bolts.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

SHEDS 10900-1
________________________________________________________________________
CAR SHEDS
PART 1:
GENERAL
1. General
Shading System for Car Sheds and around the building cover shall be glass reinforced
plastic units consisting of single homogeneous laminate of glass fiber reinforced polyester
resin, with a uniform gel finish on the exposed surfaces, to sizes, shapes, colors and textures
as detailed on drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
The support structure shall be of galvanized steel pipe columns with "I" beams and tubular
welded sections, welded to each other as detailed on drawings. The galvanized steel support
structure shall be prepared, primed and painted with epoxy paint to a DFT of minimum 290
microns as specified under painting to ferrous surfaces.
2. Quality Assurance
The manufacture and assembly of all GRP elements shall be executed by a specialist firm
having at least 5 years experience in the manufacture and installation of materials described
herein. The specialist shall provide evidence of successful completion of similar works for the
approval of the Engineer before commencing any work.
All laminating shall be carried out in a well ventilated, temperature and humidity controlled
environment.
Full quality control records are to be kept and full records made available on request. The
structural steel support structural shall be as specified under Structural Steel Work.
3. Submittals
The Contractors shall submit the following for the approval of the Engineer.
Large scale shop drawings.
Sample of all materials and minimum 60 x 60 size of finished product.
Shop drawings and design calculation as applicable.
4. Materials
The materials for the GRP units shall be as follows:
Gelcoat: Gelcoat shall be a thixotropic isophthalic polyester gelcoat resin ultra violet
stabilized with excellent durability and resistant to water and chemicals and conforming to BS
3532:1962. All covers elements shall be in compliance with ASTM E1980 - 01 (Standard
Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces)
and all shed shall have a minimum Solar Reflective Index (SRI) of 29.
Laminating Resin: Laminating resin shall be a pre-accelerated, general purpose polyester
resin, conforming to BS 3532:1962 to suit the requirements of the spaces they are used in, to
meet the Authorities requirements and to meet the relevant codes and standards.
Glass Reinforcement: Glass reinforcement shall be Chopped strand mat of continuous
filament E glass manufactured to BS 3496:1973. 450 gm/m2 piles.
S.T.H.

SHEDS 10900-2
________________________________________________________________________
Glass Reinforcement:
5. Product
GRP Elements: GRP Elements shall consist wholly of glass reinforced polyester of minimum
6 mm thickness with a tolerance of 1 mm. It shall contain a minimum of 30% glass fibre
reinforcement with the remaining 70% comprising of polyester resin and an external gel coats
of minimum 0.4 mm thickness. The actual thickness shall be designed to meet the wind
loads, spans to be covered, fixing details, thermal expansion and other relevant requirements
in accordance with the relevant codes and standards and local authorities dictates. It shall be
the Contractors responsibility to submit design details and calculations to the approval of the
Engineer.
Tolerances: All panels shall be manufactured in accordance with the following tolerances
All resin shall be stored in the dark in the containers in which they are supplied. Storage
temperature shall be as per the resin manufacturers' recommendations. The containers shall
not be opened until required.
Colour: Colour shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The light
fastness to be 6 or 7 in accordance with BS 1006:1961 on a 2-7 scale. All gel coat used for
the Contract shall be manufactured and pigmented in one batch.
The colour shall not only be uniform throughout the gel coat and polyester resin layers in
each element, but also between all interchangeable components or elements.
6. Manufacture
The elements shall be factory produced using conventional hand lay and shall be cured to
give a dimensionaly stable and stress-free product. The mould shall be so designed as to
enable production of a flat element of uniform thickness without any surface blemishes such
as blowholes, air inclusions, voids and surface undulations.
S.T.H.

SHEDS 10900-3
________________________________________________________________________
The element-design shall be based on the modular principle of construction, whereby
common components are interchangeable and flexibility in assembly of the components at
site is assured.
Fixing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.
Surface Characteristics: The GRP element surface shall be pore-free with a light textured
stain finish and without irregularities, cracks, entrapped air bubbles, flow-marks, visible joints,
parting lines and high spots. The surface shall be perfectly flat and plain when tested with
500 mm straight edge. When tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM-D2583
(hardness test for glass fibre reinforced polyester by means of the Borcol impresser), it shall
exhibit a punch resistance of minimum 35 Borcol hardness corresponding to a rock well
hardness of D85.
Draining The element shall be fixed to provide proper draining of water through PVC spots
provided at suitable location as per the approved shop drawing
TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURE

1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1
This Section includes PVC coated polyester-fabric covering for Shaded areas of
Walkways and Public open space as indicated on drawings.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
.2
.3
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
Section 09 90 00 - Painting
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4.2
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for fabric covered panels,
including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Include
attachment devices; and details at head, base, joints, corners, and intersections with
other components. Indicate panel edge and core materials.
1.4.3
Samples: For the following products. Prepare Samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.4.4
S.T.H.
Material:
a. Fabric:
Full-width 1000-mm-long Sample to be used for the Work, with

specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric.
Fabric Panel Edge: 300-mm-long Sample showing edge profile.
Attachment Device: Full-size Sample.
Sample Panels: No larger than 1000 by 1000 mm. Show joints and attachment
methods.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures.

SHEDS 10900-4
________________________________________________________________________
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
1.6
1.6.1
Store materials inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry,
and protected from moisture, soiling and abrasion.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7.1
Field Measurements: Where items of work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delayning of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
Refer to approved List of Manufacturers.
2.2
FABRIC MEMBRANE
2.2.1
MATERIAL
Fabric panels shall be constructed out of Valmex FR1000 Mehatop F fabric,
manufactured by MEHLER of Germany or equal approved. This is a type III PVC-coated
Polyester fabric with PVDF lacquer finish on both faces. Its main properties are:
Tensile strength
Tear strength
Total Weight
Finish
Colour
:
:
:
:
:
Warp/Weft 6000/5500 N per 5cm strip as per DIN 53354.

Warp/Weft 900/800 N per 5 cm strip as per DIN 53363.
1050 g/m2 as per DIN 53352.
PVDF lacquer on both sides.
Off white
All covers elements shall be in compliance with ASTM E1980 - 01 (Standard Practice for
Calculating Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces) and
shall have a minimum Solar Reflective Index (SRI) of 29.
2.2.2
DESIGN
The stresses in the fabric due to initial tension (pre-stress), self weight and wind loads
(140km/hr gust wind speed) shall be checked by a structural engineer experienced in
the design of fabric structures using a suitable finite element design analysis package.
The fabric stresses shall be checked, and reinforcing added where required keeping
fabric stresses to allowable values. The supporting cables, hardware and steel structure
shall be designed for the loads calculated by the analysis.
2.2.3
DETAILING
Fabric shall be reinforced at corner plates, bale rings and other locations as specified by
the patterning engineer, so as to avoid over-stressing the fabric during erection and
service.
2.2.4
S.T.H.
FABRICATION

SHEDS 10900-5
________________________________________________________________________
The fabric seams, pockets and reinforcing shall be welded with special RF (Radio
Frequency) welding machines operated by experienced operators, and working under a
quality assurance system. Seam welds shall develop a minimum of 90% of the tensile
strength of the fabric. Welding shall produce a smooth uniform surface, with a minimum
of wrinkles and abrasions.
2.3
STEEL CABLES
2.3.1
MATERIAL
Steel cables shall be made of 1x19 galvanized strand, to AS2841-1986, with a breaking
strength of 1570 MPa. Cable end fittings to be in Grade 316L stainless steel.
2.3.2
FABRICATION AND ERECTION

Cable terminations shall be hydraulically swaged by experienced operators, working
under a quality assurance system. Cable terminations shall be able to develop 90% of
the strength of the connected cable. Cables and terminations shall not be damaged
during erection. Any cable with a permanent kink shall be replaced.
2.4
STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.4.1
GENERAL
Structural steelwork shall comply with BS5950.
2.4.2
MATERIAL
Steel sections shall be Grade 43, with yield strength = 275MPa, complying with BS4848,
unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
Bolts and nuts shall be Grade 8.8, complying with BS4190 or BS3692, unless noted
otherwise on the drawings.
2.4.3
FABRICATION
Unless noted otherwise on the drawings:.1
Join all components with 6mm continuous fillet weld.
.2
Plates are 10mm thick.
.3
Cap plates for hollow sections shall be 6mm thick.
.4
Exposed edges and corners shall be ground to a radius of approximately 2mm.
2.4.4
CORROSION PROTECTION
Below is the proposed corrosion protection system for all structural steel components:
.1
Sandblast all steel surfaces to SA2 .
.2
Apply one coat of inorganic zinc-rich primer to 60 DFT.
.3
Apply two coats of high-build epoxy to 160 DFT.
.4
Apply one topcoat of polyurethane to 50 DFT.
.5
Total protection cover to be minimum 260 DFT.
2.5
STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDING
2.5.1
MATERIALS
Welding electrodes shall be Grade E51 to BS639.
2.5.2
S.T.H.
WORKMANSHIP

SHEDS 10900-6
________________________________________________________________________
Welding shall comply with BS5950 and BS5135.
Welding shall be carried out by qualified welders with evidence of having been trained
and assessed for competence by a recognized authority.
2.5.3
INSPECTION
All welds shall be visually inspected. 10% of full strength butt welds shall be
ultrasonically tested to BS3923. Weld inspection shall be carried out by qualified
operators with evidence of having been trained and assessed for competence by a
recognized authority.
2.6
WARRANTY
2.6.1
The whole structure will be covered by a Ten years warranty covering its structural
integrity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.1.1
Examine fabric, substrates with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fabric systems.
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
The installation procedure shall be designed to avoid damaging the fabric, damaging the
steelwork, damaging the steel paint system, or putting workers in unsafe situations. The
fabric shall be tensioned and adjusted to produce a taut, smooth surface, as free of
wrinkles as possible. It is the Contractors responsibility to leave the fabric clean of
stains or marks.
3.3
CLEANING
3.3.1
Clean panels on completion of installation according to fabric manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.3.2
Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation, on completion
of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition.
3.4
PROTECTION
3.4.1
Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by

Engineer, before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
10950-1
INTERIOR DECORATION CONTROL BOOK
GENERAL NOTE
This booklet should be read and evaluated as part of all approved and submitted
drawings, details, specification documents, bill of quantity and samples.
Swatches and sample image colors may vary due to printing quality; actual material
sample should be submitted by the contractor to the designer or client for approval.
Any differences or exclamation marks about any item in the booklet should be
communicated with STH for approval to avoid any kind of misunderstanding or
discrepancy.
1|P a g e
10950-2

INDEX
(FINISHES)
CODE
F
F1a
F1b
F2a
F2b
F2c
F2d
F2e
F2f
F2g
F2h
F2i
F3a
F3b
F4a
F4b
F5a
F5b
FA
FA1
MATERIAL
FLOORING
Vinyl Flooring
Vinyl Flooring
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Ceramic Tile
Ceramic Tile
Granite
Granite
Marble
Marble
FLOORING ACCESSORIES
Full Coving
S
S1
S2b
S3
S4
SKIRTING FINISH
Stainless Steel
Vinyl
Porcelain
Porcelain
C
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
CEILING FINISH
Gypsum Board-Painted
Acoustic Ceiling Tile
Lay-in Aluminum Ceiling Tile
Gypsum with anti-microbial paint
Lighting Stretch Ceiling
W
W1a
W1b
W2a
W2b
W2c
W2d
W2e
W3b
W4a
W4b
WALL FINISH
Interior Wall Paint
Textured Paint
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Porcelain Tile
Mosaic Tile
Ceramic Tile
Ceramic Tile
2|P a g e
10950-3

INDEX
(FINISHES)
CODE
TP
TP1
TP2
MATERIAL
TOILET PARTITION
Phenolic Board
Phenolic Board
SF
SF1a
SF1b
SF2
SF3
SF6
SF7a
SF7b
SF8a
SF9
SF10a
SF10b
SF11
SPECIAL FINISH
Solid Surface Countertop

Solid Surface Countertop
Resin Panel-Privacy Partition
Inter-layered Glass
Inter-layered Glass
Wallcovering
Ceramic tile
Back-painted Glass
Inter-layered Glass
Glassfiber Reinforced Gypsum (GRG)
WP
WP1
WP2
WP3
WALL PROTECTION
Corner Guard
Handrail
Crash Rail
CB
CB1a
CB1b
CB3
CB4
CURTAINS, BLINDSAND FABRICS

Fabric
Fabric
Privacy Curtain Track
Roller Blind Mechanism
High Pressure Laminate (HPL)

High Pressure Laminate (HPL)
3|P a g e
10950-4
FLOOR
FINISHES
4|P a g e
10950-5
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F1a
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
1
../../..
Material: Vinyl
Description:
- Highly flexible homogenous flooring, 20% lighter weight than standard product, durable, stain resistant.
- Composed of 75% sustainable or renewable raw material
- 100% bio-based plasticizer
- Evercare Revolutionary patented surface treatment which will not require waxing throughout the lifetime of
the product& high stain resistance
- TVOC after 28 days < 10g/m3 => indoor air quality
- To be installed with Acrylic adhesives ES 12 from BCIC and using FG 70 surface leveling if necessary.
Thickness: 2.00mm
Width of Sheet: 2000m
Length of Sheet: 20lm
Pattern: Non-directional design with colored chips
Area of Application: Please refer to ID Finishing Schedule

Sample Image:
NOTE:
5|P a g e
10950-6
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F1b
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
1
../../..
Material: Vinyl
Description:
- Highly flexible homogenous flooring, 20% lighter weight than standard product, durable, stain resistant.
- Composed of 75% sustainable or renewable raw material
- 100% bio-based plasticizer
- Evercare Revolutionary patented surface treatment which will not require waxing throughout the lifetime of the
product & high stain resistance
- TVOC after 28 days < 10g/m3 => indoor air quality
- To be installed with Acrylic adhesives ES 12 from BCIC and using FG 70 surface leveling if necessary.
Thickness: 2.00mm
Width of Sheet: 2000m
Length of Sheet: 20lm

Sample Image:
NOTE:
6|P a g e
10950-7
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
F2a
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
- High quality fine porcelain stoneware,
-Water absorption less than 0.02%
- Solid and vitrified throughout the mass.
Dimension: 600 x 600 mm
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Golden Cream Evolution Marble Collection
Surfaces: Natural

Sample Image:
NOTE:
7|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-8
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F2b
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Dimension: cut to size
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Bronzo Amani Evolution Marble Collectioni
Surfaces: Natural

Sample Image:
NOTE:
8|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-9
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F2c
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Dimension: Cut to size
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Calacatta Evolution Marble Collectioni
Surfaces: Natural

Sample Image:
NOTE:
9|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-10
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F2d
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
- High quality fine porcelain tile,
Color: as per sample approval
Size: 600 x 600 mm
Thickness: 5.0% Max
Collection: Ethnic 1.0

Sample Image:
NOTE:
10|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-11
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F2e
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Color: Marrakech Catarina Aqua
Size: 300 x 300 mm
Thickness: 5.0% Max
Collection: Ethnic 1.0

Sample Image:
NOTE:
11|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-12
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F2f
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Pattern: Flower
Size: 300 x 300 mm

Sample Image or similar approval:
NOTE:
12|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-13
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F2g
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Pattern: as per sample approval
Size: 300 x 300 mmt
Application: Please refer to ID Finishing Schedule

Sample Image as per sample approval:
NOTE:
13|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-14
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
F2h
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Pattern: Custom
Size: 1400 x 1400 mm
Colors: A. Opera Beige
B. Emperador
C. Elegant White

NOTE:
14|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-15
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
F2I
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Pattern: Custom
Size: As per flooring layout (Main Lobby)
Colors: A. Opera Beige
B. Emperador
C. Elegant White

NOTE:
15|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-16
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
F3a
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
1
../../..
Material: Ceramic
Description:
- Glazed ceramic floor tile with anti-slip (increased static friction) surface protection.
- Provided with antibacterial glaze containing silver ions which create a surface that severely inhibit the growth
and spread of bacteria. Silver ions in the glaze render surfaces 99% bacteria free within 24hours.
- To be installed with Ceramic tile adhesives PF 12 from BCIC and matching grout color to the ceramic tile PFJ
350.
Size: 300 x 300 mm
Thickness: 10mm

Sample Image:
NOTE:
16|P a g e
10950-17
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F3b
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
1
../../..
Material: Ceramic
Description:
350.
Size: 300 x 300 mm
Thickness: 10mm

Sample Image:
NOTE:
17|P a g e
10950-18
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F4a
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Granite
Description:
- Natural stone tile flooring, polished finish with straight edges.
- Water absorption 1atm left Compressive resist. (MPA) - left Resist. bending stress (MPA) - left
Size: Cut to size
Thickness: 10mm
Item: Black Galaxy

Sample Image:
NOTE:
18|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-19
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
F4b
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Granite
Description:
- Natural stone tile flooring, polished finish with straight edges.
- Water absorption 1atm 0,40 % Compressive resist. (MPA) - 112 Resist. bending stress (MPA) - 12,2
Size: Cut to size
Thickness: 10mm

Sample Image:
NOTE:
19|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-20
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
F5a
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Marble
Description:
Natural stone tile flooring, warm cream and beige color, and polished finish with straight edges.
Minimum Thickness: 20mm
Finish: Matt
Color: Crema Marfil

Sample Image:
NOTE:
20|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-21
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
F5b
Rev. No.
Flooring
Date
Material: Marble
Description:
Natural stone tile flooring, polished finish with straight edges.
Minimum Thickness: 20mm
Finish: Matt
Color: Dark Emperador

Sample Image:
NOTE:
21|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-22
FLOORING
ACCESSORIES
22|P a g e
10950-23
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
FA1
Rev. No.
FLOORING ACCESSORIES
Date
Material: Full Coving

Description:
- Rigid PVC profile, combining cove former and capping strip.
- Hygienic, specific for hospital application requiring water tightness and waterproof skirting.
- Adaptable to minimum floor covering thickness of 4mm.
- Plain color to match flooring.
Blanc
Beige
Aluminium
Noir

Sample Image:
NOTE:
23|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-24
SKIRTING
24|P a g e
10950-25
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
S1
Rev. No.
SKIRTING FINISH
Date
Material: Stainless steel Skirting

Description:
- Stainless steel sheet for different application
- Good formability and weldability, good corrosion resistance
- Polished finish, has 150-180 grit grain in one direction

Sample Image:
NOTE:
25|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-26
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
S2b
Rev. No.
SKIRTING FINISH
Date
Material: Vinyl
Description:
- Continuously coved vinyl (F1b) flooring.
Total thickness: 2mm
Width of sheet: 2000mm
Length of sheet: 20lm
Coverage/roll: 40sq.m.

Sample Image:
NOTE:
26|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-27
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
S3
Rev. No.
SKIRTING FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain Skirting

Description:
Size: 150 x 300 mm
Thickness: 10mm
Color: To match flooring tile

Sample Image:
Size of tiles = 30 x 15 cm and design as per consultant approval
NOTE:
27|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-28
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
S4
Rev. No.
SKIRTING FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain Skirting

Description:
Size: 200 x 90 x 9mm Cove (Square Top).
Color: as per consultant approval
Collection:

Sample Image: or equal approval
NOTE:
28|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-29
CEILING
FINISHES
29|P a g e
10950-30
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
C1
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
Material: Gypsum Board

Description:
- Suspended ceiling, Gypsum Board
Board Dimension:
Thickness: 12.5mm
Width: 1200mm
Length: 2400 or 3000mm
Finish: Matt (Acrylic based emulsion paint , antibacterial, stain and moisture resistant paint)
Color: White
Sample Image:
NOTE:
30|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-31
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
C2
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Acoustic Ceiling Tile

Description:
- THERMATEX dB Acousticis the ideal solution for high sound attenuationrequirements. Additionally good levels
of sound absorption are achieved andthe white unperforated surface creates an excellent appearance.
- The combination of high density, bio-soluble mineral wool with clay andstarch provides excellent physical
characteristics, particularly for acousticperformance.
System: Exposed Grid System, demountable ceiling
Dimension: 600mm X 2000mm
Thickness/Weight: 24mm (c. 8.4 kg/m)
Color: White
Edge Detail: AW

Sample Image:
NOTE:
31|P a g e
10950-32
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
C3
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
1
../../..

Description:
- THERMATEX dB Acousticis the ideal solution for high sound attenuationrequirements. Additionally good levels
of sound absorption are achieved andthe white unperforated surface creates an excellent appearance.
- The combination of high density, bio-soluble mineral wool with clay andstarch provides excellent physical
characteristics, particularly for acousticperformance.
Color: White
Edge Detail:

Sample Image:
NOTE:
32|P a g e
10950-33
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
C4
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
1
../../..

Description:
- THERMATEX Acoustic Medical is a 19mm thick ceiling made from a special perforated mineral board with
acoustic fleece facing. The combination of high density, bio-soluble mineral wool with clay and starch provides
excellent physical characteristics, particularly for acoustic performance.
- Anti-microbial treatment against bacteria and fungi.
Color: White
Edge Detail: Sealed edges

Sample Image:
NOTE:
33|P a g e
10950-34
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
C5
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
Material:Lay-in Aluminum Ceiling Tile

Description:
- Fully accessible Lay-in exposed grid metal suspended ceiling.
- Aluminum substrate
- Class A Fire rated, per ASTM E-84
- Easily assembled and fully demountable
- Square edged
- Non-perforated
Thickness: 1.016 mm
Color: White

Sample Image:
NOTE:
34|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-35
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
C6
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Gypsum with anti-microbial paint

Description:
- Suspended ceiling, moisture and fire resistant gypsum board with antibacterial, stain and moisture resistant
emulsion paint finish.
Thickness: 12.5mm
Color: White
Finish: Matt (Acrylic based emulsion paint , antibacterial, stain and moisture resistant paint)

Sample Image:
NOTE:
35|P a g e
10950-36
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
C7
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Lighting Stretch Ceiling

Description:
- A Stretch Ceiling is a suspended ceiling system consisting of two basic components a perimeter track and
lightweight fabric membrane which stretches and clips into the track. In addition to ceiling the system can be
used for the wall coverings, light diffusers, floating panels, exhibitions and creative shapes.
- Stretch ceilings allow the incorporation of all types of all types of light fixtures, grilles and fixing points by the use
of proprietary background support.
- Fabric material isa a 0.2mm thick PVC based fully recyclable stretch membrane.
- Entirely waterproof, washable and impermeable to vapour.
- The material is maintenance free, hygienic, non toxic and is fire rated to new euroclass standard B s1 d0 in
accordance with the EN 13501.1 equivalent in the UK to class 0.
Finish: Translucent
Color: White

Sample Image:
NOTE:
36|P a g e
10950-37
WALL FINISH
37|P a g e
10950-38
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
W1a
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Interior Wall Paint

Description:
- Hygiene Emulsion , vol.solids >30 % as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E) ,VOC in gms/ltr : 5 as per ISO EU, Maximum
allowable limit in gms/ltr:<30 as per Estidama.which ensures good air quality.
- Matt finish.
- Anti bacterial and anti fungal.
- Crack briding.
- Superior Covering.

Sample Image:
NOTE:
38|P a g e
10950-39
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
W1b
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Textured Paint

Description:
-Is a high quality waterborne product which is ideal to create stylish walls with a pearlescent finish. It comes in
numerous colours, carefully selected for you.
-Theoretical spreading rate obtained is 8 - 10 sq. m/lit/coat. * Spreading rate will vary depending on the film
thickness applied and the type of finish.

Sample Image:
NOTE:
39|P a g e
10950-40
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
W2a
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Opera Beige JW 10 (Jewel Encore Collection)
Surfaces: Natural

Sample Image or equal approval color:
NOTE:
40|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-41
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
W2b
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Emperador Selected JW 05 (Jewel Collection)
Surfaces: Natural

Sample Image or equal approval:
NOTE:
41|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-42
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
W2c
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Elegant White JW 09 (Jewel Encore Collection)
Surfaces: Natural

NOTE:
42|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-43
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
W2d
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Elegant White JW 09 (Jewel Encore Collection)
Surfaces: Natural

NOTE:
43|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-44
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
W2e
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
Material: Porcelain
Description:
Thickness: 10mm
Color: Mosaico
Surfaces: Natural

NOTE:
44|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-45
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
W3b
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Mosaic Glass Tile

Description:
- Ebony Gold Streaky Glass also called and quot;Aventurine, and quot; these tiles have copper metallic highlight
for that extra sparkle. The beautiful marbled streaking is created from a mineral additive that is stirred directly into
the molten glass, resulting in a unique piece every time. Square tiles measure 3/4 and quot; and are about 1/8
and quot; thick. Packaged in half-pound bags containing about 72 tiles each.

NOTE:
45|P a g e
10950-46
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
W4a
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Ceramic Tile

Description:
350.
Size: 300 x 300 mm
Thickness: 10mm

NOTE:
46|P a g e
10950-47
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
W4b
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Ceramic Tile

Description:
350.
Size: 300 x 300 mm
Thickness: 10mm

NOTE:
47|P a g e
10950-48
TOILET PARTITION
48|P a g e
10950-49
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
TP1
Rev. No.
TOILET PARTITION
Date
1
../../..
Material: Phenolic Board

Description:
- Phenolic panels or compact phenolic panels (also known as phenolic boards) for plates consisting of a core
made with resin and high-density, thermosetting cellulose fibers, covered by a decorative melamine face on
both sides. The result is an extremely durable, impact and water resistant material.
- Phenolic is also highly impact resistant, making it a good choice for vandalism prone areas.
Panel Thickness: 13mm
Overall Height: 2100mm
Floor Clearance: 100mm
Colors
Door and Partition Panel: Walnut (Wood grain)
Pilaster: Sycamore (Laminate)
Hardware: Stainless Steel (including wall brackets, pedestal or adjustable foot with cover rose, door knobs,
hinges, coat hook/door stopper with rubber buffer)
Top Rail: 34mm dia. Stainless Steel tube grade 316
Finish: Satin
SYCAMORE
Sample Image:
NOTE: Indicative of Required Aesthetic Only.
49|P a g e
WALNUT
10950-50
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
TP2
Rev. No.
TOILET PARTITION
Date
1
../../..
Material: Phenolic Board

Description:
- Phenolic panels or compact phenolic panels (also known as phenolic boards) for plates consisting of a core
made with resin and high-density, thermosetting cellulose fibers, covered by a decorative melamine face on
both sides. The result is an extremely durable, impact and water resistant material.
- Phenolic is also highly impact resistant, making it a good choice for vandalism prone areas.
Panel Thickness: 13mm
Overall Height: 2100mm
Floor Clearance: 100mm
Colors
Door and Partition Panel: Sycamore (Laminate)
Pilaster: Walnut (Wood grain)
Hardware: Stainless Steel (including wall brackets, pedestal or adjustable foot with cover rose, door knobs,
hinges, coat hook/door stopper with rubber buffer)
Top Rail: 34mm dia. Stainless Steel tube grade 316L
Finish: Satin
SYCAMORE
Sample Image:
50|P a g e
WALNUT
10950-51
SPECIAL FINISH
51|P a g e
10950-52
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
SF1a
Rev. No.
WALL / COUNTER FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: High Pressure Laminate (HPL)

Description:
- Is composed of layers of craft and decorative paper impregnated with thermosetting resins.
- Outstanding durability with superior resistance against impact, abrasion and general surface wear. Its surface
is impervious to water and maintains its integrity even in the most heavy duty applications.
- Hygienic
- Fire retardant grade (on request)
Finish: Walnut Wood Finish

Sample Image:
NOTE:
52|P a g e
10950-53
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
SF1b
Rev. No.
WALL / COUNTER FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: High Pressure Laminate (HPL)

Description:
- Is composed of layers of craft and decorative paper impregnated with thermosetting resins.
- Outstanding durability with superior resistance against impact, abrasion and general surface wear. Its surface
is impervious to water and maintains its integrity even in the most heavy duty applications.
- Hygienic
- Fire retardant grade (on request)
Finish:
Light Brown Wood Finish

Sample Image:
NOTE:
53|P a g e
10950-54
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
SF2
Rev. No.
SOLID SURFACING
Date
Material: Solid Surface Countertop

Description:
- Solid, non-porous, homogeneous surfacing material composed of acrylic resin and natural minerals.
Characteristics:
- Stain resistant
- Hygienic and antibacterial
- Repairable
- Non-toxic
- Thermo-formable and workable
Nominal Thickness: 12.3mm for horizontal application, 6mm for vertical application
Color: Savannah
Area of Application: Please refer to Enlargement Drawings

Sample Image:
NOTE:
54|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-55
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
SF3
Rev. No.
SOLID SURFACING
Date
Material: Solid Surface Countertop

Description:
- Solid, non-porous, homogeneous surfacing material of acrylic resin.
Characteristics:
- Stain resistant
- Hygienic and antibacterial
- Repairable
- Non-toxic
- Thermo-formable and workable
Nominal Thickness: 12.3mmfor horizontal application, 6mm for vertical application
Color: Cocoa Brown

Sample Image:
NOTE:
55|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-56
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
SF6
Rev. No.
RESIN PANEL- Privacy Partitions
Date
Material: Resin Panel Privacy Partition.

Description:
- Optical grade engineered resin-cast polymethyl methacrylate.
- Produced in brilliant colors that can be layered to create different hues, opacity and effects.
- Rhythm: create with intriguing pattern, scale and order with distinctly architectural design.
Thickness: 25.4mm
Front Finish: Sandstone
Back Finish: Sandstone
Color: Maze Sisal White
Rhythm: create with intriguing pattern, scale and order with distinctly architectural design.
Gauges:9.5mm, 12.7mm, 19.0mm, 25.4mm
Pattern: n/a
Maximum width: 48" / 1219mm
Maximum length: 96" / 2438mm or 120" / 3048mm
Maximum surface area: 32-40 sq.ft. / 3-3.7 sq.m

Sample Image:
56|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-57
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
SF7a
Rev. No.
Inter-layered Glass
Date
1
../../..
Material: Inter-layered Glass

Description:
- Comprised of one or more color graphic interlayers between two transparent lites of glass or transparent lite of
glass and reflective glass backer.
- Single sided view.
- Backlit for headboard application and bottom /edge lit for low partition application (see enlarged drawings).
- Standard finish (clear).
- 20.9mm nominal thickness of interlayer
Color: White
Pattern Custom
Configuration: View
Finish: Standard

Sample Image:
White
View
Custom Pattern
Standard Finish
NOTE:
57|P a g e
10950-58
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
SF7b
Rev. No.
Inter-layered Glass
Date
1
../../..
Material: Inter-layered Glass

Description:
Color: Brown
Pattern Custom
Configuration: View
Finish: Standard

Sample Image:
White View
Custom Pattern
Standard Finish
NOTE:
58|P a g e
10950-59
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
SF8a
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Wallcovering
Description:
- 100% Xorel,
- Cradle-to-Cradle Silver Certified by MBDC
- SCS Indoor Advantage Gold
- PVC Free
- Anti Bacterial
-X-Protect: Proprietary Xorel backing technology which prevents stains and moisture from passing through the
textile enabling the wall or seating surface to be aggressively cleaned
Product Name: Genome Embroider W
Pattern No.: 6727W
Color code: 100 (White)
Area of Application: Please refer to Enlargement Drawings/ID Finishing Schedule

Sample Image:
NOTE:
59|P a g e
10950-60
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
SF9
Rev. No.
CEILING FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Mosaic Tile

Description:
- Glazed ceramic tile
350.
Area of Application: Please refer to Enlargement Drawings/RCP Plans

Sample Image:
NOTE:
60|P a g e
10950-61
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
SF10a
Rev. No.
DOME FINISH
Date
Material: Back-Painted Glass

Description:
Custom manufactured to your size specifications (ASTM C1036 flat glass dimensional tolerances apply)
High quality environmentally friendly water-based glass coating system
Smooth flat furniture quality finish on painted side of glass
Low-iron clear (gloss finish) glass in 4mm, 6mm, 10mm & 12mm thicknesses
Low-iron acid etch (matte finish) glass in 4mm & 12mm thicknesses
100% tempered safety glass (when diagonal > 17)

Sample Image:
NOTE:
61|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-62
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
SF10b
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Inter-Layered Glass

Description:
Color: Brown
Pattern Custom
Configuration: View
Finish: Standard

Sample Image:
White View
Custom Pattern
Standard Finish
NOTE:
62|P a g e
10950-63
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
SF11
Rev. No.
WALL FINISH
Date
1
../../..
Material: Glassfiber Reinforced Gypsum (GRG)

Description:
- Glassfiber Reinforced Gypsum (GRG) Panels are prefabricated with high density gypsum free of asbestos
and resin reinforced with standglassfiber or continuous filament glassfiber material.
- GRG panels are thin, light weight with much higher strength thantraditionalgypsum panels.
They offer better performance under point loads, impact loads, weathering and thermally induced movement
- GRG elements can generally be produced as much longer elements,lighter in weight, reinforced with builtin ribs and stiffeners and with reduced fixing points.
Finish: Marble effect paint finish (ARMOURCAOT Surface Finishes)

Sample Image:
NOTE:
63|P a g e
10950-64
CONTINUATION OF SF11. . .
NOTE:
64|P a g e
10950-65
NOTE:
65|P a g e
10950-66
NOTE:
66|P a g e
10950-67
NOTE:
67|P a g e
10950-68
NOTE:
68|P a g e
10950-69
NOTE:
69|P a g e
10950-70
NOTE:
70|P a g e
10950-71
NOTE:
71|P a g e
10950-72
NOTE:
72|P a g e
10950-73
NOTE:
73|P a g e
10950-74
ENDOF SF11. . .
NOTE:
74|P a g e
10950-75
WALL PROTECTION
75|P a g e
10950-76
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
WP1
Rev. No.
WALL PROTECTION
Date
Material: Corner Guard

Description:
Cornea
On aluminium core - High impact strength - Heavy traffic
Wall - Corner protection
Efficient protection for 90 angles exposed to heavy impact from trolleys
and carts
Effective protection and harmless spine due to unique rounded
design
Protection of the angle with the U shape aluminium core
High impact resistance thanks to a 2.5 mm optimal thickness
Pre-drilled in staggered rows aluminium core
Wing width: 60 mm (internal measurement)
Thickness: 2.5 mm
Length: 1.30 m, 2.00 m or 4.00 m
Material: Antibacterial and fire-rated PVC, solid colour
Surface finish: smooth

Sample Image:
Walnut
NOTE: All recommended installation dimension are for reference only.
76|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-77
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
WP2
Rev. No.
WALL PROTECTION
Date
Material: Handrail 1
Bumper handrail - Hygiene - Heavy traffic
Wall - Handrails
Model: Escort round
PVC-sheathed handrail
Diameter: 40 mm
Length: 4 m
Overall projection: 80 mm
Stand-off from wall: 40 mm
Material: Antibacterialand Bs2d0 fire-rated PVC,solid colour,
on continuousaluminium section,bactericidal joints
Fixing components: 2-pointself-locking perforatedbrackets,
satin silveranodised aluminium finish,screwed to wall at 1.20
mcentres
(0.80 m centresin heavy traffic areasand on light partitionslike
plasterboard)

Sample Image:
Walnut
77|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-78
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
WP3
Rev. No.
WALL PROTECTION
Date
Material: Crashrail1
Description:
Impact
3 heights available - Easy cleaning - Heavy traffic
Wall - Wall protection
Horizontal wall protection against intensive wheeled traffic for corridors,
kitchen and logistic areas
Impact resistance due to optimal PVC thickness 3 mm
Impact energy dissipated through 4 internal ribbing reinforcements
Quick installation with end cap serving as first clip
Easy cleaning due to rounded design and smooth surface

Sample Image:
Walnut
78|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-79
CURTAINS, BLINDS
AND FABRIC
79|P a g e
10950-80
Proj. No. & Name
P01-HD-067
Code
CB1a
Rev. No.
PRIVACY CURTAIN
Date
Material: Fabric
Description:
-51% Polyester, 49% Flame-Retardant Polyester
- Stain Repellent Finish/ Antimicrobial
Product Name: Current
Pattern No.: 4396
Color code: 3 (White)

Sample Image:
NOTE:
80|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-81
Proj. No. & Name
Code
P01-HD-067
CB1b
Rev. No.
WINDOW CURTAIN
Date
Material: Fabric
Description:
-100% Trevira CS Polyester
Product Name: Santana
Pattern No.: 100235
Color code: 10 (Beige)

Sample Image:
NOTE:
81|P a g e
1
../../..
10950-82
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
CB3
Rev. No.
CURTAIN TRACK
Date
1
../../..
Material: Privacy Curtain Track

Description:
- Surface mounted anodized aluminum track.
- Carrier: combination of nylon axle and a wheel with nickel plated brass bead chain and polished aluminum
hook.
- All accessories such as stops, carrier gate, splice, wall sockets as per manufacturer requirement.
Dimension: 1-3/8 wide x 3/4 deep
Manufactured by C/S / Mecho Shade / Verosol

Sample Image:
82|P a g e
10950-83
Proj. No. & Name

Code
P01-HD-067
CB4
Rev. No.
ROLLER BLIND
Date
1
../../..
Material: Roller Blind Mechanism

Description:
- White powder coated steel brackets
- Spring loaded end plug
- Aluminum extruded tubes
- Aluminum extruded oval shaped bottom rail, white anodized
- UV stable plastic parts
Controls: Ball chain
Width: 300mm min 3600mm max
Height: 500mm min. 4000mm max
Surface: Single blind: 10m
l

Sample Image:
Bracket Side View
Back rolling
A:on face, B:ceiling mounted, C:on the frame, D: recessed
83|P a g e

11014-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This section includes supply, installation, testing, commissioning, training of operators and one
year warranty period for the maintenance of the Faade Cleaning Equipment.
The primary purpose of the facade cleaning equipment is to regularly clean the facades of the
building.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Facade cleaning system shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
Horizontal Face Mounted Monorails
Monorail trolleys
Powered cradle with a safe working load of 200kg or two persons
SUBMITTALS:
Upon awarding the Order, the contractor shall submit a complete technical proposal for the
approval by the Consultant, which shall include the following:
Scaled shop drawings for the proposed system including:
Proposed system layout
Bracket spacing and maximum loads
Reactions at point of support
Location of the power supply points
Services to be provided by the other related sub contractors.
Upon completion of works, Operational and Maintenance manual in English shall he submitted
along with As Build Drawings for the system in 3 copies
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
Design the system such that the cradle is clear of the face of the building. Fenders to allow the
cradle to rest lightly against the facades at the time of cleaning
All assemblies and components shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1 against failure as a
minimum.
Wire Ropes shall be completely capable of supporting the intended loads and have a factor of
safety of at least 10.
Each equipment shall be completely pre-assembled and thoroughly tested in factory prior to
dispatch for final installation.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
General:
Construct all components of heat treated aluminium alloy or stainless steel or hot dip galvanised
structural steel. Dissimilar metals, when used, shall be protected against electrolytic action.
S.T.H.

11014-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
Consider the materials size and thickness shown on the drawings as for conceptual design
purposes. The facade access system contractor is to provide the final design and detailing of the
equipment and all connections.
Welding:
All welding shall comply with BS requirements and shall be performed by welders qualified in
accordance with BS procedures.
Bolting:
Comply with the relevant codes and standards requirements.
Materials:
All work including bolts and fasteners shall be fabricated from structural steel, structural
aluminium or structural stainless steel.
1 .5 WARRANTY
The warranty signed by the supplier/ installer to be provided for the following.
Repair and replacement of defects in materials and workmanship - 1 year.
Structural warranty - 10 years.
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION GENERAL

Quality of work shall be best trade modern shop and field practice known to recognised
manufacturers specialising in this type of work. Accurately fit joints and intersecting members in
true planes with adequate fastening.
Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute according to details and
reviewed shop drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop.
Fabricate finished work free from distortion, weld spatter and defects detrimental to appearance
and performance.
Weld all connections unless otherwise permitted.
Where welding is not possible use approved bolted connections. Fastenings shall be at adequate
spacing. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials, colour and finish of the base metal
on which they occur.
3.
SYSTEMS:
3.1 MONORAIL SYSTEM:

The monorail shall be provided with horizontal access system, fixed around the perimeter of the
building structure. The traversing trolleys, from which the cradle is suspended, shall travel along
the monorail to reach the various parts of the building. The effort required to traverse the trolleys
should be as minimum as possible so that it is possible to move by hand. The trolleys are
equipped with separate connection shackles for primary and secondary hoist ropes. The rail is
Aluminium profile. The brackets shall be galvanised steel and fixed to the building structure by 3
mounting bolts.
S.T.H.

11014-3
_____________________________________________________________________________
Specifications:
Track section Type
Track material
Support bracket
Mounting of Track
Design load for the track support
Support spacing of track
Monorail trolley type
Suspended height
Monorail surface finish
Support bracket surface finish
colour)
: Face mounted type extruded track

: Aluminium
: Hot dip galvanised steel
: Horizontal support from the parapet wall
: To be confirmed during shop drawings.
: 2000 mm typically and 250mm at corners and bends
: Manually traverse
: To suit the building height
: Powder coated (standard RAL colour)
: Hot dip galvanised and epoxy Painted (standard RAL
MONORAIL BRACKET GENERAL PARAMETERS

Material
Mild steel plates/sections
Dimension
As per project shop drawing
Quantity
Surface treatment
As per project shop drawing

Hot dip Galvanized.
Finish:
Epoxy painted to standard RAL color.
MONORAIL GENERAL PARAMETERS

Material
Aluminum
Alloy
6082.
Temper
T6
Weight of the Monorail
6.4 Kg/ mtr.
External Dimension
6000 mm x 45.4 mm x 131.4 mm
UTS
220 N/mm
Elongation % in50 mm
Finish:
8
Powder coated to standard RAL color.
3.2 BMU CRADLE

The Cradle to be constructed from fully welded mild steel sections, Galvanised. Aluminium alloy
cladding is to be fitted to the outside of the Cradle to give a good appearance & protection for the
operator. The cradle to have power operated steel wire climbing winch. The winch to be push
button operated & to have comprehensive safety devices.
In the event of a break down or power failure provision should be there for manual operation. One
secondary safety wire is to be provided in addition to the winch wire of the cradle with Safety
device.
S.T.H.

11014-4
_____________________________________________________________________________
BMU CRADLE SPECIFICATIONS

Model:
TRANSWILL-TW-C
Unladen Weight of the Cradle:
280 Kg(Excluding wire ropes & power cables)
Carrying capacity (SWL):
200 Kg
Carrying capacity-Number of persons
2 Persons
External Dimension:
2250 mm x 950 mm x 1680 (Overall)
Total Power Consumption :
3 Kw
Hoisting Speed
8.5 m/min
HOISTING SYSTEM
Make/ Model
Number of Winches
Motor Type
Rated Power
Phase
Rated Voltage
Motor
Insulation Class
Method of starting
Enclosure
Wire Rope Diameter
POWER CLIMBER,BELGIUM
2
TEFC Brake Motor
0.75 KW
3
380-415 V
1400 rpm
F
Direct On line
IP 55
8.4 mm
WIRE ROPE REELER MOTOR

Make/ Model
Type
Number of reeler Motors
Rated Power
Phase
Rated Voltage
Motor
Insulation Class
Method of Starting
Enclosure
Reduction Gear Ratio
GHIRRI MOTORS, ITALY

Power Operated
2
0.18 Kw
3
380-415 V
1360 rpm
F
Direct on line
IP 55
1:80
REELER DRUM & WIRE ROPE

Number of drums
Diameter
Width
2
400 mm
120 mm
S.T.H.

11014-5
_____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Ropes
Wire rope diameter
Wire rope construction
Material of Wire rope
Weight of Rope
Breaking Load
Rope Factor of safety
POWER SUPPLY
Supply
CONTROL SYSTEM
Control
4 (2 Suspension 2 Safety)
8.40 mm
5X26 RH cross lay, Light Performed
Galvanized Steel
0.255 Kg/mt
47 KN
10:1
380-415V, 3ph, 5 Pin, 50 Hz, 16 Amp 4Core 1.5

Sq.mm Insulated Trailing Cable
Control voltage 24 V/48V controlled Via power

cable
POWERED OPERATED CRADLE FEATURES:

The Cradle to be equipped with:
Twin traction hoist
two power operated wire rope realer drum
four galvanised steel wire ropes stored on powered reefers
four castor wheels are to be provided at the bottom.
aluminium cladding all over
rubber beading at front and sides
two fenders to allow cradle to rest lightly against the facade
anti collision bar to detect obstructions while lowering the Cradle
control box complete with emergency stop
emergency descent facility
SAFETY FEATURES:
The following safety features shall be installed on the cradle.
Emergency Stop
Lower limit safety device
Upper limit safety device
Emergency manual descent
Overload safety device
Safety harness points
Anti-collision bar
WORKS PROVIDED BY OTHER SECTIONS
Power supply for the system including power sockets
Support structure for the monorail brackets
Casting of all cast in anchors
Crane for Unloading, loading of material, assembly and installation of the equipments at
the site.
Temporary power supply during installation works
All civil works as and when required.
S.T.H.

11014-6
_____________________________________________________________________________
Readily erected Scaffolding/Access for the installation works
Safe Storage of the materials at site
CRADLE RESTRIANT SYSTEM ON EXTERNAL FACADES (WHEREVER APPLICABLE)

For lateral restraining of the cradle while in operation, provide required nos. of Restraint
sockets and Restraint Lanyards in accordance with the EN 1808. For location and spacing
co-ordinate with the faade sub contractor. Restraint sockets shall be provided to the
faade sub contractor for incorporating the same in to building faade by them.
Type of sockets
Vertical spacing
: Plate type stainless steel grade 316

: First level +40m and thereafter every 20 m max.
4. EXECUTION
EXAMNATION:
1. Examine work of other sections where such work influences the work of this section and report
unsuitable conditions to the Engineer
2. Supply anchors, inserts and templates required to be build-in by other sections in adequate
time
3. Proceed with the installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4.1
INSTALLATION
1 . 0 Window washing equipment shall be installed by the manufacturer of the equipment or his
authorized representative.
2. Erect work true to dimensions, square, plumb, level, free from distortion or defects detrimental
to appearance and performance and tightly fitted, flush and level to adjacent surfaces.
3 Isolate metals as required to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.
4 Supply and install all equipment and all necessary electrical work from power outlets provided
by other trade.
4.2
ADJUSTMENT, TESTING, TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
1. When requested, run tests on machinery and safety devices to show their proper operation for
design specified and/or shown. Upon completion of the work, leave all apparatus in proper
adjustment and operation.
2. Provide competent instructors to train employees of the Owner, or others as directed, who will
be responsible for the care, adjustment and operation of the equipment. Forward a statement to
Engineer designating the personnel given the instructions and certifying that the instructions were
furnished.
S.T.H.

11014-7
_____________________________________________________________________________
4.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Furnish full warranty period maintenance and call back service on equipment for a period of one
(1) year from the date of handing over of the equipment. Service shall include regular
examinations by a competent and trained mechanic to clean, oil and adjust the apparatus, making
repairs, as may be required and replacing worn parts when necessary, except such parts
necessitated by misuse, accidents or negligence not caused by those doing the work of this
section in which case cost of such parts shall be paid for by the Owner.
Carry out maintenance services including emergency call back during regular working hours and
days. Firm performing work of this section shall be able to show successful experience in the
complete maintenance of such equipment and that it employs competent personnel to handle this
service. Perform all maintenance by personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of
the firm doing work of this section.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
RECEIVING/WEIGHING DEBOXING
1.
Heavy duty electronic platform scale, mild steel with digital indicator. Capacity
500 kg. x 200 grams.
-
2.
Custom fabricated. 16 gauge stainless steel heavy duty platform trolley with
handle. On 4 castors, 2 swivel. Dim. 98 x 58 x 90 cm.
3.
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height heavy stainless steel,
reinforced wire shelves on 4 stainless steel corner post with adjustable feet.
Dim. 153 x 61 x 188 cm. Model 2460SHD.
4.
Polycarbonate food-tote storage box with lid. Cap 81.5 gls. Crack resistant. NSF,
USDA and FDA approved. Dim 46 x 66 x 38 cm. Model 3301+3302.
5.
Heavy duty, polymer, bushel laundry truck; with 4 castors. Capacity 250 Ltr. Dim
97 x 667 x 74 cm. Model PT02.
B.
VEGETABLE STORE, PRE-WASH & COLD ROOM

1.
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height heavy chrome plated,
reinforced steel wire shelves on 4 corner posts with adjustable feet. Dim 122 x
61 x 188 cm. Model 2448HD.
2.
Heavy duty, dunnage rack. Weight capacity 3000 lbs. rotationally molded grey
polyethylene construction. Slotted top for air circulation. Slots run front to back
for easy loading and unloading. All rack edges have generous radius to prevent
product snagging or marking. Dim 122 x 55 x 31 cm. Model HP2248PD.
3.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table, with all
welded frame. Reinforced, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4
adjustable feet. Dim 120 x 70 x 85 cm.
4.
S.T.H.
Platform size 100 x 100 cm. With Ramp.

Piece weighing, check weighing, counting, totalizing &
peak hold functions.
Three weight-based trips for simple process control.
Large LCD display for clear weight indication.
Intuitive graphics display ensures fast, accurate check weighing.
Serial port for easy connectivity to PCs, printer, etc.
The flexibility of battery operation, as standard.
Voltage 240/50/1ph.
Model E1005+H400.
With the following:

Undershelf.
Backsplash.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, pot wash sink with
backsplash and 3 sides apron. 2 bowls each size 95.5 x 51 x 38 cm. With heavy

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-2
___________________________________________________________________________
duty shower group, overflow stand pipe, with drain fitting and elbow. Stainless
steel tubular legs, with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 210 x 70
x 85 cm.
5.
Custom fabricated 16 gauge stainless steel. Heavy duty, pot wash sink with
backsplash and 3 sides apron/ 1 bowl size 95.5 x 51 x 38 cm. fitted with heavy
duty mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow stainless steel tubular
legs with adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 120 x 70 x 85 cm.
6.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with all
With the following:

Undershelf.
Backsplash.
7.
Stainless steel, heavy duty, electric, tilting basket vegetable washer. Stainless
steel 18/10 perforated drum, capacity 600 litres, with a load capacity of up to 70
kgs. Low tension (24v) control panel with automatic/manual controls and pilot
lights. 4 Adjustable feet. Dim 157 x 126 x 114 cm. 415/50/3. 1.85 Kw. Model
ATIR-I TILTING.
7a.
Stainless steel transportation trolley Dim. 92 x 52 x 68.5 cm.
8.
welded frame. Polyethylene top 2.5 cm. thick, thermal properties 80C, Density
0.95 g/cm. On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 200 x 70 x
85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash.
9.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel. Heavy duty, work table, with all
welded frame. Reinforced, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with
-
S.T.H.
With the following:

Undershelf
Backsplash.
10.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf
on stainless steel wall brackets. Dim. 200 x 40 cm.
11.
Heavy duty, polymer, bushel laundry truck; with 4 castors. Capacity 250 Ltrs.
Dim 97 x 67 x 74 cm. Model PT02.
12.
Heavy duty, 18/10 stainless steel, electric, quick onion peeler. Load capacity 7
kg. Output 140 kg/hour. Standing pedestal model, complete with wall timer with
pilot light. Direct coupled motor with remote control protection. Dim dia 82 x 101
cm high. 415/50/3. Model MAXIM- 0.7 kw.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-3
___________________________________________________________________________
13.
Heavy duty, 18/10 stainless steel, electric, potato peeler with stainless steel
filters. Load capacity 15 kgs. Output 300 kgs/hour. Standing pedestal model,
complete with wall timer with pilot light. Geared motor, complete with magnetic
starter, overload and under voltage protection. Dim dia 57.5 x 102 cm high.
Voltage 415/50/3. Model PIONEER K 15. 0.55 KW.
14.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, sink unit with
backsplash and 3 sides apron. 1 bowl size 60 x 50 x 32 cm. fitted with heavy
duty mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. On stainless steel
tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelft. Overall dim 80 x 70 x 85
cm.
15.
Custom fabricated. 16 gauge stainless steel , heavy duty, work table, with all
With the following:

Undershelf
Backsplash
Left sidesplash
16.
on stainless wall brackets. Dim. 200 x 40 cm.
17.
Heavy duty modular Vegetable Coldroom.

Chiller type.
Panelling system with the following specifications:
Panels
===
Thickness 10 cm.
Made of non toxic plasticized galvanized sheet iron with an interposition of
polyurethane injected with a density of 40 kgs/M3, closed by a double (male and
female) profile of PVC equipped with drawing hooks for the assembling of
refrigerating room. The whole structure is joined in fixed way, by means of its
perimeter profiles, self supporting structure being able to bear the weight of
eventual hook sets and of the other loads hanging from the ceiling.
Floors
===
Recessed reinforced floors at 3000 kg/per square inch.
Doors
===
Supplied with gasket, strong hinges with internal safety latch. Room supplied
with temperature control light. Dim. Of doors 190 x 80 cm.
Hook
===
The hook joining the panels, made wholly of non ageing PVC, in order to
resolved all the problems being common to all the production i.e.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-4
___________________________________________________________________________
-
C-
D-
Electric voltage 415/50/3.

Overall dim 490 x 390 x 240 cm.
Complete with:
Door lock.
PVC transparent plastic curtains.
18.
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slats- shelving system. As
per Drawing.
19.
Heavy duty, stainless steel, rack trolley. Square stainless solid rod frame. Good
for 18 trays to GN 2/1 or 36 trays to GN 1/1 size. On 2 fixed and 2 swivel
castors, 2 with locking brakes. Comes with corner bumpers. Size 59 x 67 x 163
cm Model RWRE 161.
20.
Greens keepers container. Its built-in reservoir lets water drain continuously
through colander holes in the bottom, so you can wash green right in the
container. Add thin layers of ice to crisp prepped lettuce. The Brute Greens
Keeper container can be emptied quickly with its spigot when and where its
convenient. And its rolls easily from receiving to sink to cooler, no need to
transfer goods from one container to another. Capacity 32 gallons. Model 2636.
DRY STORES
1.
Heavy duty, dunnage rack. Rotationally molded grey polyethylene construction.

Slotted top for air circulation. Slots run front to back to easy loading and
unloading. All rack edges have generous radius to prevent snagging or marking.
Dim 152 x 55 x 31 cm. Model HP2260PD.
2.
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height non corrosion epoxy coated,
reinforces wire shelves on 4 epoxy coated corner posts with adjustable feet. Dim.
183 x 53 x 188 cm. Model 2172 EHD.
3.
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height non corrosive epoxy coated,
reinforces wire shelves on 4 epoxy coated corner posts with adjustable feet. Dim
122 x 53 x 188 cm. Model 2148 EHD.
COLD STORES
1.
S.T.H.
Real corrosion strength with warranty of disassembling and reassembling the

refrigerating room.
Its large translation and its strength assure a perfect bond between the panels
having to be joined.
Chiller Temperature +2/+10C.
Cooling unit: Semi-hermetic
Remote
Tropicalized ar +43C
Power 2.1 HP.
Heavy duty modular Combination

Coldroom. Chiler/ Freezer type.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-5
___________________________________________________________________________
Panels
===
Thickness 10 cm.
Made of non toxic plasticized galvanized sheer iron with an interposition of
eventual hook sets and of other loads hanging from the ceiling.
Floors
==
Recessed reinforced floors at 3000 kg/per square inch.
Doors
==
Supplied with gasket, strong hinges with internal safety latch, Room supplied with
temperature control light. Dim. Of doors 190 x 80 cm.
Hook
==
The hook joining the panels, made wholly of non ageing PVC, in order to resolve all
the problems being common to all the production i.e.
-

refrigerating room.
Separation wall with separation door.

-
S.T.H.
Dairy Chiller Temperature +2/+10C.

Remote
Tropicalized at +43C
Power 1.5 hp.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.
Egg Chiller Temperature +2/+10C
Remote
Power 2 hp,
Voltage 415/50/3ph.
General Chiller Temperature +2/+10C
Remote
Power 2 ho.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.
Poultry Freezer Temperature- 15/-20C
Remote
Tropicalized +43C.
Power 2.1 hp.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-6
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Meat Freezer Temperature -15/-20C

Remote
Tropicalized +43C
Power 3hp.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.
Fish Freezer Temperature -15/-20C
Remote
Tropicalized +43C
Power 2.1 hp.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.
Electric voltage 415/50/3+N.
Overall dim (625 x 1280) + (470 x 495) x 240 cm.
Complete with:
- Door lock
- PVC transparent plastic curtains.
- Pressure release valve.
- A/C for the SAS (supplied by Main Contractor).
2.
E-
F-
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slats- shelving system. As
per Drawing.
FLOUR STORE
1.
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height heavy chrome plated,
reinforced steel wire shelves on 4 corner posts with adjustable feet. Dim 153 x 61
x 188 cm. Model 2460HD.
2.

Slotted top for air circulation. Slots run front to back for easy loading and
unloading. All rack edges have generous radius to prevent product snagging or
marking. Dim 152 x 55 x 31 cm. Model HP2260PD.
3.
Heavy duty, dunnage rack. Weight capacity 3000 lbs. Rotationally molded grey
polyethylene construction. Slotted top for air circulation. Slots run front to back for
easy loading and unloading. All rack edges have generous radius to prevent
4.
Heavy dutym dunnage rack. Capacity 1500 lbs. Rotationally molded grey
PASTRY/BAKERY
1.
Heavy duty modular Combination Coldroom.

Chiller/Freezer type.
Panels
===
Thickness 10 cm.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-7
___________________________________________________________________________
eventual hook sets and of the other loads hanging from the ceiling.
Floors
==
Recessed reinforces floors with at 3000 kg/per square inch.
Doors
==
Supplied with gasket, strong hinges with internal safety latch. Room supplied with
temperature control light. Dim. Of doors 190 x 80 cm.
Hook
==
The hook joining the panels, made wholly of non ageing PVC, in order to resolve
all the problems being common to all the production i.e.
-

refrigerating room.
Separation wall with separation door.

Remote
Power 1 hp.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.
Freezer temperature-15/-20C
Remote
Tropicalized +43C.
Power 2 hp.
Voltage 415/50/3ph.

Complete with:
- Door lock.
- PVC transparent plastic curtains.
- Pressure release valve.
2.
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slats- shelving system. As per
Drawing.
3.
Heavy duty, stainless steel, rack trolley. Square stainless solid rod frame. Good for
18 trays to GN 2/1 or 36 trays to GN 1/1 size. On 2 fixed and 2 swivel castors, 2
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-8
___________________________________________________________________________
with locking brakes. Comes with corner bumpers. Size 59 x 67 x 163 cm Model
RWRE 161.
4.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table, with all
welded frame. With left side bowl, fitted with heavy duty mixer tap, overflow stand
pipe, drain fitting and elbow. Reinforces, insulated top on stainless steel tubular
legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 150 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash.
5.
Stainless steel. Electronic bench scale, digital type. Capacity from 3 kgs. Platform
size 300 x 220 mm. 4 levelling feet. Overall dim. 314 x 337 x 370 mm.H.
Model FX 220.
6.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf on
stainless steel wall brackets. Dim. 150 x 40 cm.
7.
Electric, heavy duty beating mixer. Stainless steel bowl capacity 40 litres.
Continuous electronic changing speed system. Electronic timer control. Simple
speed adjustment to the required type of mixture. Safety guard. Set of stainless
steel mixing tools (hook, whip and beater) Asynchronous motor. Steel body.
Emergency stop button. Heavy duty painting. Dim 59 x 93 x 135 cm. 415/50/3+N.
Model BTF 040. 1.5 kw.
8.
Wall mounted water meter. Automatic dosing for a 99 lts. Maximum with possibility
to stop it any time and restart the closing from stopping point. Minimum working
pressure: atmospherical. Dim. 24 x 15 x 31 cm.H. 240/50/1ph. Model DAF0001.
9.
Electric, heavy duty, confectionery and bakery, spiral; mixer. Capacity 35 kgs, flour.
Digital control manual and automatic with 49 memories of desired working time.
Wheel mounted steel body. Independent electric motors for stainless steel on
stainless steel spiral. Two speed on stainless steel bowl. Heavy duty painting.
Asynchronous motor. 415/50/30+N. Dim 130 x 110 x 60 cm. Model AEF 035.
10.
Heavy duty, electric dough sheeter on stand for croissants, soft pastry and puff
pastry. Inlet/outlet belts and two speed motor with reverse motion and differential
speed between input and output belts. Working width 600mm. Both belts can be
removed and washed. S/S Rollers Dia. 69mm with an adjustable distance from 0 to
30mm. Easily removable roll scraper. Pastry Roll in PE HD 500 according to food
regulations. Safety grid in S/S, to prevent accidents. Emergency Stop button,
motor protection, fused. Anti Vibration support and Wheels. Overall dim when open
2300 x 940 x 1200 mm. 415/50/3. Model LMA620. Motor 0.75 kw. Weight 230kg.
11.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with Granite
Top, and all welded frame. On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet.
Dim 115 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-9
___________________________________________________________________________
12.
13.
Stainless steel heavy duty refrigerated counter with reinforced top. Capacity 390
litres. Three hinged doors. 0/+10 deg. C. Forced-air cooling. Thermostat control/
Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation. Inside with rounded edges for easy
cleaning and 1 chrome plated shelf per compartment. Hinged control panel and
easily removable condenser unit for maximum access to components. CFC free
refrigerant R134a. Tropicalised compressor up to +43C. Dim. 185 x 70 x 84 cm.
550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUB.
14.
15.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with Granite
Dim 170 x 80 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
16.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table withGranite
Dim 170 x 80 x 85 cm.
17.
Heavy duty, electric, commercial triple deck, bread pizza and pastry oven.
Stainless steel doors for the proofing cabinet. Each deck: internal Dim. 92 x 55 x 18
cm. high. Capacity 2 trays, each 46 x 66 cm. total cap. 6 trays 46 x 66 cm. each
oven. Oven doors fitted with view glass. Digital control panel with thermostat
control, digital temperature gauge, internal deck light switch, steam injection button,
pilot lights and timer. Complete with steam generator. Complete unit on proofing
cabinet base. Overall Dim. 132 x 100 x 182 cm. high. Voltage 415/50/3+N. 17 kw.
450 kgs.
18.
Heavy duty range match fryer. Stainless steel front and sides. 14 kgs. Shortening
capacity. 1 piece deep drawn, heavy gauge nickel plated steel tank equipped with
lift handles for east cleaning. 1 drain valve is located at the bottom. 2 chrome wire
baskets. Electromechanical thermostat with temperature control range or 200F to
375F. Incology sheath heating elements that swing up out of the way for tank
removal. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. 415/50/3ph. 12 kw. Dim. 45.7 x 91 x 91
cm. 120 kgs. Model 36ES11.
19.
Heavy duty spreader cabinet. Stainless steel front and sides. Stainless steel front
rail. Stainless steel spreader work top. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. Low
profile stainless steel backguard. Dim. 45.7 x 91 x 91 cm.H. 31 kgs. Model
36ESC18.
20.
Heavy duty electric range with full size oven. Stainless steel front and sides/
Stainless steel front rail. 91 x 61 cm. top consists of two 45.7 x 61 cm. boiling
plates with four heat zones, each controlled by three-heat switch. Standard oven is
controlled by a heavy duty electromechanical thermostat. Oven interior is 67 x 53 x
34 cm.H. with removable four position chrome plated over rack guides and one
oven rack, front and rear stainless steel grease troughs. Heat resistant, cool to
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-10
___________________________________________________________________________
touch oven door handle. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. Overall dim. 91 x 91 x
91 cm. Voltage 415/50/3ph. 18.5 kw, 272 kgs. Model 36ER35.
21.
Stainless steel Island type fresh air hood with capture air stream technology & filter
cassette & lights.
Model V-JET-STREAM A-90.
Suitable for all types of cooking equipment whether wall mounted or in an island
arrangement. The canopy features a double skin design which allows air to be
delivered through slots arranged along the inner front face and if required inner
sides of the canopy to effectively and efficiently contain the thermal plume and
direct it towards the grease filters. Supply air is also discharged through the
perforated front face of the canopy to ensure the ventilation system of the kitchen is
correctly balanced.
CONSTRUCTION
The canopy is fabricated entirely in type 304 stainless steel (1.0-1.2mm) thick. All
visible surfaces are ultra fine grain polished (320 grit) and polythene protected. The
canopy is cut, punched and folded into seamless sections up to 6m in length and
factory assembled by means of computer controlled seam welds and non visible
mechanical fixings. Joints are provided with internal coverplates so that no joints or
mechanical fixings are visible.
All metal edges are rolled smooth and are free from sharp edges and projections.
The canopy lower edge is formed into a condensation channel with inclined internal
elevation to simplify cleaning and the inner edges are crush folded for safety
purposes.
The canopy is equipped with Vianen Fecon grease extraction baffle filters. The
filters are designed to allow the grease to run off the filters into an integral grease
collecting channel and then into easily removable grease trays. The canopy has a
constant exhaust pressure drop of 100 Pa, an Jet Stream supply air pressure drop
of Pa and a front face supply pressure drop of 40 Pa.
SUPPLY AIR
Tempered supply air is ducted (by others) to the factory fitted spigot(s) on the top of
the canopy where it passes through the insulated supply plenum, over a perforated
diffuser plate and is delivered through a series of slots arranged along the internal
front edge of the canopy into the canopy. The air is delivered from these slots at a
maximum velocity of 8m/s and at a rate of 75 m3/h per linear metre, which
represents less than 15% of the total extract airflow rate. This ensures a positive
capture and containment of the thermal plume generated by the cooking process. A
proportion of the supply airflow is also discharged through the vertical perforated
front of the canopy. This ensures an even distribution of supply air over the full
length of the canopy at low velocity without any draughts. Air is also available to be
discharged through the ABS spot coolers located on the underside of the front lip of
the canopy for personal comfort of the cooking staff.
To suit various styles of cooking and canopy installation the Jet Stream canopy can
be offered with slots just along the inner front face or extended down both sides of
the canopy to enhance the capture and containment efficiency.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-11
___________________________________________________________________________
Technical Details
-
Exhaust capacity
Jet supply air capacity
Supply air capacity
:
:
:
3978 m/h
330 m/h
3251 m/h
Hanging brackets are fitted on the top corners of the canopy for easy installation.
Canopy dimensions
440 x 140 x 60 cm.
Filters
the
Designed to remove grease particles from

Extract air stream of the ventilation
system.
Constructed entirely in stainless steel.
Proven
And certified fire barrier (DIN 4102 &
TNO).
Lights
:
-
22.
V-ITL integrated tube light fittings

IP-54 rated.
TLD fitting
Electrical supply is 220/240V
50Hz
Electrical box
Custom fabricated. 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with all welded
frame. Reinforced, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable
feet. Dim 170 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Set of 3 Drawers.
23.
Electric, stainless steel, AISI 304/ 18-10, double door reach-in Refrigerator.
Capacity 1500 litres. Temperature -2/+8 deg. C. Fitted with 6 plasticized steel
heavy duty wire shelves to GN 2/1. Each door fitted with self closing hinges, full
length stainless steel handle and magnetic gasket. Digital control panel with on/off
switch, electronic thermometer/thermostat. Automatic defrost and condensate reevaporation. 4 adjustable feet. Dim 150 x 83.5 x 204 cm. 240/50/1. 650 W.
Tropicalized refrigerating units to +43C ambient. Refrigerant R404a. Model
VD150.
24.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with all welded
frame. Reinforces, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Sidesplash.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-12
___________________________________________________________________________
25.
26.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, pot wash sink backsplash
and 3 sides apron. 2 bowls each size 95.5 x 51 x 38 cm. With heavy duty Shower
group, overflow stand pipe, with drain fitting and elbow. Stainless steel tubular legs,
with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 210 x 70 x 85 cm.
27.
frame. Reinforced, insulated top in stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
28.
G-
Custom fabricated, stainless steel heavy duty, 4 tier solid shelving unit. 4 reinforced
solid stainless steel shelves on adjustable corner posts. Dim 140 x 60 x 160 cm.
MEAT PREPARATION
1.
Custom fabricated, stainless steel heavy duty, work table with all welded frame.
Polyethylene top 2.5 cm. thick, thermal properties 80C, Density 0.95 g/cm.
On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. On stainless steel tubular legs
with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 60 x 60 x 85 cm.
2.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash.
3.
Heavy duty, electric, vertical meat saw machine.

-
4.
S.T.H.
3 HP motor.
Saw blade : 5/8 wise x 126 long
Direct gear drive transmission
Tri-Rail Carriage
Open frame stainless steel construction.
Center Crown Pulley.
Removable double flanged pulleys,
Split rear table
Direction grain stainless steel.
Pivoted automatic tension.
Adjustable legs.
Voltage 415V/50HZ/3Ph.
Model 6614-5
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty work table with all welded

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-13
___________________________________________________________________________
With the following:
- Undershelft
- Backsplash
5.
Electric, table top refrigerated meat mincer. Capacity 600 kgs/Hr. are made with
material following CE laws, solid, easy to clean and the maintenance. Mincing group
by melting stainless steel for perfect cut of the meat used. Refrigerated parts include
hopper, feed tube and cutting set. Electronic thermostat for temperature control,
optimum working temperature 0C/+2C. Removing cover in plexiglass. Dim 41 x 57
x 58 cm. Voltage 240/50/1ph. 1,85 KW. Model TC 32/R ALASKA.
6.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Set of 3 drawers.
7.
Electric meat slicer, in anodized aluminum allow finish. Gravity feed. Chrome steel
blade 35 cm. Suction cups feet. Dim. 75 x 62 x 50 cm.H. Voltage 415/50/3ph. W.
Model G350N.
8.
Stainless steel heavy duty refrigerated counter with reinforced top and stainless
backsplash. Cap. 530 litres. Four hinged doors. Temperature 0/+10 deg. C. Forcedair cooling. Thermostat control. Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation.
Inside with rounded edges for easy cleaning and 1 chrome plated shelf per
compartment. Hinged control panel and easily removable condenser unit for
maximum access to components. CFC free refrigerant R134a. Tropicalised
compressor up to +43C Dim. 230 x 70 x 90 cm. 550 watts.
9.
Electric, heavy duty table top cutter mixer equipped with an electronic speed
variation which allows to adapt the speed depending on each type of food
preparation. The machine has speed controls from 1500 to 3000 rpm. 11.5 litre
stainless steel bowl. Motor braking system. New patented knife design for optimum
quality. Dim 36 x 56.5 x 57 cm. 415/50/3. Model R10. 2.2 kw.
10.
frame. Polyethylene top 2.5 cm. thick, thermal properties 80C, Density 0..95
g/cm. On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 200 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
11.
feet. Dim 170 x 70 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-14
___________________________________________________________________________
12.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty single solid wall shelf on
stainless steel wall brackets. Dim 150 x 40 cm.
13.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, sink unit with backsplash
and 3 sides apron. 2 bowls, each bowl size 60 x 50 x 32 cm. fitted with heavy duty
mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. On stainless steel tubular
legs with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 140 x 70 x 85 cm.
14.
feet. Dim 140 x 70 x85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
15.
H-
Electric, stainless steel, AISI 304 / 18-10, double door reach-in Refrigerator.
Capacity 1500 litres. Temperature -2/+8 deg c. Fitted with 6 plasticized steel heavy
duty wire shelves to GN 2/1. Each door fitted with self closing hinges, full length
stainless steel; handle and magnetic gasket. Digital control panel with on/off switch,
electronic thermometer/thermostat. Automatic defrost and condensate reevaporation. 4 adjustable feet. Dim 150 x 83.5 x 204 cm. 240/50/1. 650 W. Model
VD150. Tropicalised refrigerating units to +43C ambient. Refrigerant R404a.
POULTRY PREP.
1.
frame. Reinforced, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet.
Dim 160 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Set of 3 drawers.
2.
Heavy duty table top poultry cutter with stainless steel bard and chrome-steel blade.
Stainless steel base, support column and shaft, enameled cast aluminum fully
enclosed motor housing and blade guard. Size of blas is 20 cm. dia. Blade guard is
equipped with micro switch that turns off the unit if the guard is not in place. Over all
dim. 37.5 x 45 x 40.5 cm. H. Voltage 240/50/1. HP motor. Model PCI.
3.
stainless wall brackets. Dim. 180 x 40 cm.
4.
Dim 150 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
5.
S.T.H.
Stainless steel heavy duty refrigerated counter with reinforced top and stainless steel
backsplash. Cap. 530 litres. Four hinged doors. Temperature 0/+10 deg. C. Forced-

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-15
___________________________________________________________________________
air cooling. Thermostat control. Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation.
compressor up to +43C. Dim. 230 x 70 x 90 cm. 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUCA.
6.
frame. Reinforced, insulated top stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet.
Dim 180 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
7.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, sink unit with backsplash
mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitted and elbow. On stainless steel legs with 4
adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 140 x 70 x 85 cm.
8.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel heavy duty, work table with all welded
Dim 120 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
9.
I-
Electric, stainless steel, AISI 304/18-10, double door reach-in Refrigerator. Capacity
1500 litres. Temperature -2/+8 deg c. Fitted with 6 plasticized steel heavy duty wire
shelves to GN 2/1. Each door fitted with self closing hinges, full length stainless steel
handle and magnetic gasket. Digital control panel with on/off switch, electronic
thermometer/thermostat. Automatic defrost and condensate re-evaporation. 4
adjustable feet. Dim 150 x 83.5 x 240/50/1. 650 W. Model VD150. Tropicalized
refrigerating units to +43C ambient. Refrigerant R404a.
FISH PREP.
1.
Dim 230 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Set of 3 drawers.
2.
3.
backsplash. Cap. 530 litres. Four hinged doors. Temperature 0/+10 deg. C. Forcedair-cooling. Thermostat control. Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-16
___________________________________________________________________________
compressor up to +43C. Dim. 230 x 70 x 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUCA.
4.
5.
Dim 160 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
6.
Electric, countertop meat and bone band saw. Anodised cast aluminum body
machine. Complete with portioner and meat pusher. Band saw 170 cm long. 0.75 kw
motor. Dim 49 x 51 x 88 cms. 240/50/1. Model SO 23 2000.
7.
backsplash and 3 sides apron. 1 bowl size 128 x 51 x 38 cm, fitted with heavy duty
mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. Stainless steel tubular legs
8.
Stainless steel, heavy duty, wall type, faucet with swing nozzle and spray unit.
Complete with 30 cm swing nozzle, 244 cm flexible stainless steel hose. Built in
spring check valve to prevent back floor.
9.
frame. Polyethylene top 2.5 cm. thick, thermal properties 80C, Density 0.95 g/cm.
On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 140 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
10.
Fish scaling machine. Stainless steel tool case. Double electrical insulation. Flexible
length with tool 1820 mm. Rotating tool with 8 blades. East to use. Fir to be moved.
Easy cleaning. No maintenance. Very compact machine. All outside parts are rustproof. Overall dim of motor block 31 x 21 x 85 cm.H. 240/50/1phase. Model V 108.
11.
Electric, stainless steel, AISI 304/18-10, double door reach-in refrigerator. Capacity
1500 litres. Temperature -2/+8 deg C. Fitted with 6 plasticized steel heavy duty wire
handle and magnetic gasket. Digital control panel with on/off switch, electronic
adjustable feet. Dim 150 x 83.5 x 204 cm. 240/50/1.650 W. Model VD150.
Tropicalised refrigerating units to +43C ambient. Refrigerant R404a.
J-
VEG. AND SALAD PREP.

1.
S.T.H.
Electric, stainless steel, AISI 304/18-10, double door reach-in Refrigerator. Capacity
1500 litres. Temperature -2/+8 deg C. Fitted with 6 plasticized steel heavy duty wire
handle and door fitted with self closing hinges, full length stainless handle and

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-17
___________________________________________________________________________
magnetic gasket. Digital control panel with on/off switch, electronic
adjustable feet. Dim 150 x 83.5 x 204 cm. 240/50/1. 650 W. Model VD150.
Tropicalised refrigerating units to +43C ambient. Refrigerant R404a.
2.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with backsplash
mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. On stainless steel tubular legs
3.
Dim 230 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Sidesplash
- Set of 3 drawers.
4.
Heavy duty automatic countertop orange juicer. Squeezing rate 21 fruits/minute and
up to 70 ltrs. Per hour. Stainless steel squeezing cylinders. Good for medium
operations such as small hotels, health clubs, restaurants etc. Dim. 24 x 56 x 67 cm.
240/50/1. Model OR M5 ELITE.
5.
Custom fabricate, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf on
6.
Heavy duty electric operated centrifugal juicer for all fruits and vegetables, except
citrus. Output approximately more than 1 ltr./min. Good for hotels, canteens,
restaurants etc. Stainless steel bowl and base. Dim. 47 x 33 x 51 cm.H.
240/50/1phase. Motor 1 HP. 740W. Model No. 28.
7.
High performance food blender. 2 speeds with pulse option for blending, mixing
chopping and pureeing a wide variety of food and drink mixtures. Powerful 1 HP,
motor with the torque needed to blend thick, heavy mixtures. Timer with automatic
shut off. 64 oz. Stainless steel container. Removable closing cup. Stainless steel
blades. Comes with blade assembly unit. Dim: dia 18 x 46 cm high. 240/50/1. Model
HBF400-CE. UL & NSF listed.
8.
9.
backsplash. Cap. 530 litres. Four hinged doors. Temperature 0/+10 deg. C. Forced-air
cooling. Thermostat control. Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation. Inside
with rounded edges for easy cleaning and 1 chrome plated shelf per compartment.
Hinged control panel and easily removable condenser unit for maximum access to
components. CFC free refrigerant R134a. Tropicalised compressor up to +43C. Dim.
230 x 70 x 90 cm. 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUCA.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-18
___________________________________________________________________________
10.
frame. Polyethylene top 2.5 cm, thick, thermal properties 80C. Density 0.95
g/cm. On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 190 x 65 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
11.
Heavy duty food processor (vegetable preparation machine) with a pusher feed-head
with full size opening hopper, including a feed tube and a stainless steel movable
stand. The gastronorm container perfectly designed for a high output ejection. Full
size opening head, specially designed for bulky vegetables. Two speed 375 to 750
rpm. Hourly output 150-400 kgs. Dim. 30 x 38 x 84 cm. 415/50/3+N. Model CL55. 1.1
kw.
Complete with the following discs:
- 2 mm. and 5 mm. slicers
- 2 mm. grater
- 3 mm. dicing
- 10 mm. slicer + dicing grid 10 x 10 mm.
- 20 mm. slicer + dicing grid 20 x 20 mm.
- Complete with wall disc holder.
12.
Electric, heavy duty tiltable cutter mixer. Stainless steel frame with system of three
sturdy built-in legs. The machine has two speed motors from 1500 to 3000 rpm. 23
litres stainless steel bowl with a transparent polycarbonate watertight lid. 0-15 minute
timer. Stainless steel control buttons flush with the casing. Safety indicator light. Motor
braking system. New patented knife design for optimum quality. Dim 60 x 70 x 125
cm. 415/50/3+N. Model R23. 4.5 kw.
13.
Custom fabricate, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty work table with right side
bowl. Fitted with heavy duty mixer tap. Overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow.
Reinforces, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim
120 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
14.
Dim 210 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Sidesplash
15.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf steel
wall brackets. Dim. 180 x 40 cm.
16.
Custom fabricated, Stainless steel heavy duty, refrigerated cold pans with refrigerated
cupboard base. 4 adjustable feet. Overall Dim 147 x 70 x 85 cm. 240/50/1phase.
-Containers not included.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-19
___________________________________________________________________________
17.
K-
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height heavy chrome plated, reinforced
steel wire shelves on 4 corner posts with adjustable feet. Dim 152 x 45 x 188 cm.
Model 1860HD.
POT WASH AREA
1.
Dim 240 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Backsplash
- Left sidesplash
2.
Custom fabricated 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf on
3.
Stainless steel food waste disposer with 15 sink receptable. 3 HP induction motor.,
1725 RPM, totally enclosed to provide protection against outside moisture. Built-in
thermal overload protection. All stainless steel construction. 415/50/3ph. Model SS300.
4.
backsplash and 3 sides apron. 2 bowl each size 95.5 x 51 x 38 cm. With heavy duty
Shower group, overflow stand pipe, with drain fitting and elbow. Stainless steel
tubular legs, with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 210 x 70 x 85 cm.
5.
Dim 120 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
6.
Custom fabricated, stainless steel heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. 4 reinforced solid
stainless steel shelves on adjustable corner posts. Dim 180 x 60 x 160 cm.
7.
8.
9.
stainless steel shelves on adjustable corners posts. Dim 140 x 60 x 160 cm.
L-
BREAKFAST PREP.
1.
S.T.H.
Electric, heavy duty, stainless steel AISI 304/18/10, reach-in refrigerator. Capacity
700 litres. Temperature -2/+8 deg C. Fitted with 3 plastized steel heavy duty wire
shelves to GN 2/1. 1 full length door, fitted with self closing hinges, full length integral
handle and magnetic gasket. Ventilated cooling with automatic defrost and

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-20
___________________________________________________________________________
condensate re-evaporation. Thermostat control with pilot light and thermometer. 4
adjustable feet, Dim 75 x 83.5 x 204 cm. 240/50/1 450 W. Model VD70.
Tropicalised refrigerating units to 43 degree C ambient.
2.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with single bowl
sink. Fitted with heavy duty mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow.
Reinforced, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim
140 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
- Left sidesplash
3.
4.
Multi purpose 1 gallon blender. Super heavy duty 2 speed 0.75 HP motor, at 15,000
high and 11,500 low rpm. Zinc aluminum alloy housing with stainless steel 1 gallon
container, fitted with removable surgical steel blade cutting assembly. Permanently
lubricated ball bearings and self lubricating motor to meet all commercial blending
requirements. Dim 24 x 22 x 55 cm. 240/50/1. Model 990-800 W. UL, NSF listed.
5.
Dim 155 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash
6.
Stainless steel duty refrigerated counter with reinforced top and stainless steel
backsplash. Cap. 390 litres. Three hinged doors. 0/+10 deg. C. Forced-air cooling.
Thermostat control. Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation. Inside with
rounded edges for easy cleaning and 1 chrome plated shelf per compartment.
Hinged control panel and easily removable condenser unit for maximum access to
components. CFC free refrigerant R134a. Tropicalised compressor up to +43C.
Dim. 185 x 70 x 98.5 cm. 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUBA.
7.
Commercial electric conveyor toaster. Stainless steel housing and radiant reflector.
Metal sheathed heating elements. Stainless steel wire conveyor belt. Stainless steel
front wire guard. High temperature insulation protects control panel and exterior.
Each unit is equipped with a 39, three wire grounded power cord. Fully insulated and
air cooled. The toaster has a 13 wide conveyor, allowing the placement of 3 slices of
bread. Capacity approx. 900 slices/hour. Dim 46 x 54 x 36 cm.H. 240/50/1. Model
XTRM-3. 3.34 kw.
8.
Commercial Stainless steel microwave oven with New exclusive rota wave cooking
system for even cooking without Turning. Fully flexible, automatic electronic control
panel for programmable cooking with direct temperature readout. Cap. 34 litres. 1.2
cu. Ft. size 55 x 50 x 36 cm. 240V/50Hz/1ph. Model RC S511TS. 1100 W. (Relying
on operator awareness, the unit carries no warranty whatsoever besides being
delivered in working condition).
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-21
___________________________________________________________________________
M-
COOKING AREA
1.
Self contained double single door roll-in refrigerator, 2 sections. Stainless steel
interior and exterior. Built-in door locks with heavy duty strikes. Recessed metal door
handles. Exterior digital thermometer. East to use electronic control. Easy access
flip up shroud. Three chrome plated wire shelves per section. Tough ABS interior
door liners. Stainless steel exterior ramp. HP. 240/50/1ph. Dim. 76 x 768 x 226
cm.H. 404A refrigerant. Model SSRR12-S.
-Complete with trolley.
2.
Self contained double single door roll-thru refrigerator, 2 sections. Stainless steel
interior and exterior. Built-in door locks with heavy duty strikes. Recessed metal door
handles. Exterior digital thermometer. East to use electronic control. East access flip
up shroud. Three chrome plated wire shelves per section. Tough door heater switch.
Inclined stainless steel exterior ramp. HP. 240/50/1ph. Dim. 76 x 168 x 226 cm.H.
404A refrigerant. Model SSRRT2-S.
3.
Heavy duty spice trolley with strong frame of rigid square tubing 25 x 25 mm. Push
handle at one end. At the opposite end, a dispensing frame is attached to take 3
spice containers GN 1/6 -150 with hinged transparent plastic lids. Next to these there
are 4 spice dispensers of 8 litres each, with a foldable pouring flap in the lid. The
main body is equipped with 2 titling drawer compartments, each fitted with 5 litre
plastic containers. Below these there are 3 pull out spice drawers on telescopic
runners, each with 3 stainless steel gastronorm containers GN 1/3-150 and 3 GN
1/3-100. On the rear side, there are two shelves to take 8 spice jars. Movable on 4
corrosion- resistant steering castors dia. 125 mm, 2 with locking brakes. Overall dim.
86 x 67 x 98 cm. Model GW: 8 x 6.
4.
Heavy duty, stainless steel, rack trolley/ Square stainless solid rod frame. Good for
18 trays to GN 2/1 or 36 trays to GN 1/1 size. On 2 fixed and 2 swivel castors, 1 with
locking brakes. Comes with corner bumpers. Size 59 x 67 x 163 cm. Model RWRE
161.
5.
Heavy duty, electrically heated combi steamer.

General Features:
- Advanced Closed System
- Sturdy model in Stainless steel.
- Height adjustable feet 120-160 mm.
- Anti wear door contact switch.
- Steam generator is automatically ready to operate, low maintenance, Electronic
water level check and dry heat protection.
- Oven has rounded corners.
- Pivoting rack and removable suction plate.
- Hygienic plug-in gasket for day-to-day cleaning, easy to remove.
- Self emptying condensate trip tray.
- Oven light with shock resistant glass cover,
- Permanent self-diagnosis for error recognition.
- System with full text error description.
- Emergency programmed mode: appliance operates with limited functionality
even when technical defects arise.
- Detailed documentation, spare parts lists, circuit diagrams in appliance.
- Steam generator version.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-22
___________________________________________________________________________
Standard Features:
- Disappearing door.
- Butterfly valve: less steam escape when oven door is opened.
- Hand shower with continuously variable setting.
- Automatic flushing of steam generator.
- Door rotary lever lock with raised position, supplementary function and safety
function.
- Fan with auto-reverse and two speed settings.
- Seamlessly welded high-shine oven chamber.
- Multi point core temperature sensor.
- Lengthwise shelf (GN 2/1)
- Double glass door with integrated lock position and self-emptying Condensate
drip tray.
- Module based processor control with plain text display and module Autocontrol.
- Auxiliary timer.
- Easy to operate with menus/icons.
- Bright graphic display.
- Digital dial makes it easy to set temperatures, time and core Temperature.
- Pre-set start time in real-time mode.
- Programmed in 250 recipes of up to 20 steps each.
- Cook & hold and Delta-T cooking.
- Reduced fan speed for cooking sensitive products (programmable).
- Reduced heat output for operating at peak period (programmable).
Capacity 40 x GN 1/1 or 20 GN 2/1.
Dim. 123.2 x 105.5 x 195 cm.H.
686 kw,
Voltage 415/50/3phase.
Model OEB 20.20
Complete with:
-Roll-in trolley for racks.
6. Stainless steel Island type fresh air hood with capture air steam technology & filter,
cassette & lights.
Model V-JET STREAM A-90.
arrangement. The canopy features a double skin design which allow air to be
direct it towards the grease filters. Supply air is also discharged through the
perforated front face of the canopy to ensure the ventilation system of the kitchen is
correctly balanced.
CONSTRUCTION
The canopy is fabricated entirely in type 304 stainless steel (1.0-1.2mm) thick. All
mechanical fixings. Joints are provided with internal cover plates so that no joints or
mechanical fixing are visible.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-23
___________________________________________________________________________
The canopy lower edge is formed into a condensation channel with inclined
internal elevation to simplify cleaning and the inner edges are crush folded for
safety purposes.
filters are designed to allow the grease to run off the filters into an integral grease
collecting channel and then into easily removable grease trays. The canopy has a
constant exhaust pressure drop of 100 Pa, an Jet Stream supply air pressure
drop of 90 Pa and a front face supply pressure drop of 40 Pa.
SUPPLY AIR
Tempered supply air is ducted (by others) to the factory fitted spigot(s) on the top
of the canopy where it passes through the insulated supply plenum, over a
perforated diffuser plate and is delivered through a series of slots arranged along
the internal front edge of the canopy into the canopy. The air is delivered from
these slots at a maximum velocity of 8m/s and at a rate of 75 m3/h per linear
metre, which represents less than 15% of the total extract airflow rate. This
ensures a positive capture and containment of the thermal plume generated by
the cooking process. A proportion of the supply airflow is also discharged through
the vertical perforated front face of the canopy. This ensures an even velocity
without any draughts. Air is also available to be discharged through the ABS spot
coolers located on the underside of the front lip of the canopy for personal
comfort of the cooking staff.
To suit various styles of cooking and canopy installation the Jet Stream canopy
can be offered with slots just along the inner front face or extended down both
sides of the canopy to enhance the capture and containment efficiency.
Technical Details
-
Exhaust capacity
Supply air capacity
:
:
:
3503 m/h
248 m/h
3030 m/h
Canopy dimensions
330 x 140 x 60 cm
Filters
Designed to removed grease

Particles from the extract air
Steam of the ventilation system.
Constructed entirely in stainless
Steel. Proven and certified fire
Barrier (DIN 4102 & TNO).
Lights

IP 54 rated
TLD fitting
50 Hz
Electrical box
7.
S.T.H.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, sink unit with
backsplash and 3 sides apron. 2 bowls, each bowl size 60 x 50 x 32 cm. fitted

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-24
___________________________________________________________________________
with heavy duty mixer tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. On
stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim.
140 x 70 x 85 cm.
8.
9.
With the following:

Undershelf.
Backsplash
Sidesplash
10. Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf
13. Stainless steel duty refrigerated counter with reinforced top and stainless steel
backsplash. Cap. 390 litres. Three hinged doors. 0/+10 deg. Forced-air cooling.
rounded edges for easy cleaning and 1 chrome plated shelf per compartment.
Hinged control panel and easily removable condenser unit for maximum access
to components. CFC free refrigerant R134a. Tropicalised compressor up to
+43C. Dim. 185 x 70 x 98.5 cm. 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUBA.
14. Fabricated, 16 gauge Stainless steel, heavy duty wall benched chefs table with
backsplash. Reinforced, insulated work top with inset bowl left hand side.
Complete with heavy duty mixer tap, drain fitting and elbow. Reinforces
undershelf. Stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 180 x 70 x 85
cm.
15. Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with all
welded frame. Reinforces, insulated top on stainless steel tubular legs with 4
With the following:

Undershelf
Backsplash
Set of 3 drawers
16. Heavy duty electric range on open cabinet base. Stainless steel front and sides.
Top consists of one piece smooth griddle plate with three thermostatically
controlled heat zones. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. Overall dim. 91 x 91 x
91 cm. 415/50/3ph. 15 kw. 249 kgs. Model 36ES38.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-25
___________________________________________________________________________
17. Heavy duty electric range with full size oven. Stainless steel front and sides.
plates with four heat zones, each controlled by three-heat switch. Standard oven
is controlled by a heavy duty electromechanical thermostat. Oven interior is 67 x
53 x 34 cm.H. with removable four position chrome plated oven rack guides and
one oven rack, front and rear stainless steel grease troughs. Heat resistant, cool
to touch oven door handles. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. Overall dim. 91 x
91 x 91 cm. Voltage 415/50/3ph. 18.5 kw. 272 kgs. Model 36ER35.
18. Heavy duty spreader cabinet. Stainless steel front and sides. Stainless steel
front rail. Stainless steel spreader work top. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs.
Low profile stainless steel backguard. Dim. 45.7 x 91 x 91 cm.H. 31 kgs, Model
36EC18.
19. Heavy duty electric range with full size oven. Stainless steel front and sides.
plates with four heat zones, each controlled by three-heat switch. Standard oven
is controlled by a heavy duty electromechanical thermostat. Oven interior is 67 x
53 x 34 cm.H. with removable four position chrome plated oven rack guides and
one oven rack, front and rear stainless steel grease troughs. Heat resistant, cool
to touch oven door handle. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. Overall dim. 91 x
91 x 91 cm. Voltage 415/50/3ph. 18.5 kw. 272 kgs. Model 36ER35.
20. Heavy duty, electric stock pot stove, floor model. Black baked enamel front, two
sides, back and tubular legs, with stainless steel control panel. Boiling capacity 8
gallons per hour. 19 mm. thick polished steel plate. Plate elements are
thermostatically controlled from 150 to 950 F. with indicator light. Thermostat is
controlled from one to ten. Two metal sheath elements rated at 2.6 kw. And 2.9
kw. Are clamped to underside of plate. Complete with metal housing, heavy
insulation and radiation shield ensures efficient even heat. Adjustable 29 mm.
high zinc plated leveling feet. Dim. 50.8 x 50.8 x 61 cm. 240/50/1ph. 5.5 kw..
Model E20-SP.
21. Stainless steel Island type fresh air hood with capture air steam technology &
filter, cassette & lights.
Model V-JET STREAM D-90.
direct it towards the grease filters. Supply air us also discharged through the
perforated front face of the canopy to ensure the ventilation system of the
kitchen is correctly balanced.
CONSTRUCTION
The canopy is fabricated entirely in type 304 stainless steel(1.0 1.2 mm) thick.
All visible surfaces are ultra fine grain polished (320 grit) and polythene
protected. The canopy is cut, punched and folded into seamless sections up to
6m in length and factory assembled by means of computer controlled seam
welds and non visible mechanical fixings. Joints are provided with internal
coverplates so that no joints or mechanical fixings are visible.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-26
___________________________________________________________________________
All metal edges are rolled smooth and are free from sharp edges and
projections. The canopy lower edge is formed into a condensation channel with
inclined internal elevations to simplify cleaning and the inner edges are crush
folded for safety purposes.
filters are designed to allow the grease to run off the filters into an integral
grease trays. The canopy has a constant exhaust pressure drop of 100 Pa, and
Jet Stream supply air pressure drop of 90 Pa and a face supply pressure drop of
Pa.
SUPPLY AIR
Temperedsupply air is ducted (by others) to the factory fitted spingot(s) on the
top of the canopy where it passes through the insulated supply plenum, over a
perforated diffuser plate and is delivered through a series of slots arranged
along the internal front edge of the canopy into the canopy. The air is delivered
from these slots at a maximum velocity of 8m/s and at a rate of 75 m3/h per
linear metre, which represents less than 15% of the total extract airflow rate.
This ensures a positive capture and containment of the thermal plume generated
by the cooking process. A proportion of the supply airflow is also discharged
through the vertical perforated front face of the canopy. This ensures an even
distribution of supply air over the full length of the canopy at low velocity without
any draughts. Air is also available to be discharged through the ABS spot
coolers located on the underside of the front lip of the canopy for personal
comfort of the cooking staff.
To suit various styles of cooking and canopy installation the Jet Stream canopy
can be offered with slots just along the inner front face or extended down both
sides of the canopy to enhance the capture and containment efficiency.
TECHNICAL DETAILS
-
Exhaust capacity
Supply air capacity
:
:
:
9667 m/h
930 m/h
7770 m/h
Hanging brackets are fitted on the top corners of the canopy for easy
installation.
Canopy dimensions
620 x 260 x 60 cm
Filters
Designed to remove grease particles

From the extract air stream of the
ventilation system. Constructed
entirely in stainless steel. Proven and
certified fire barrier (DIN 4102 & TNO).
Lights

IP 54 rated
TLD fitting
50Hz
Electrical box
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-27
___________________________________________________________________________
21.1
Stainless steel Island type fresh air hood with capture air stream technology &filter,
cassette - lights.
Model V-JET STREAM D-90.
delivered through slots arranged along the inner front face and if required inner sides
of the canopy to effectively and efficiently contain the thermal plume and direct it
towards the grease filters. Supply air is also discharged through the perforated front
face of the canopy to ensure the ventilation syste, of the kitchen is correctly
balanced.
CONSTRUCTION
The canopy is fabricated entirely in type 304 stainless steel (1.0- 1.2 mm) thick. All
mechanical fixings. Joints are provided with internal; cover plates so that no joint or
mechanical fixings are visible.
The canopy lower edge is formed into a condensation channel with inclined elevation
to simplify cleaning and the inner edges are crush folded for safety purposes.
The canopy is equipped with Vianen Fecon grease extraction baffle filters. The filters
are designed to allow the grease to run off the filters into an integral grease collecting
channel and then into easily removable grease trays. The canopy has a constant
exhaust pressure drop of 100 Pa, an Jet Stream supply air pressure drop of 90 Pa
and a front face supply pressure drop of 40 Pa.
SUPPLY AIR
Tempered supply air is ducted (by others) to the factory fitted spingot(s) on the top of
diffuser plate and is delivered through a series of slots arranged along the internal
front edge of the canopy into the canopy. The air is delivered from these slots at a
maximum velocity of 8ms and at a rate of 75 m3/h per linear metre, which represent
less than 15% of the total extract airflow rate. This ensures a positive capture and
containment of the thermal plume generated by the cooking process. A proportion of
the supply airflow is also discharged through the vertical perforated front face of the
canopy. This ensures an even velocity without any draughts. Air is also available to
be discharged through ABS spot coolers located on the underside of the front lip of
the canopy for personal comfort of the cooking staff.
To suit various styles of cooking and canopy installation the Jet Stream canopy can
be offered with slots just along the inner front face or extended down both sided of
the canopy to enhance the capture and containment efficiency.
TECHNICAL DETAILS
-
S.T.H.
Exhaust capacity
10442 m/h

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-28
___________________________________________________________________________
-

Supply air capacity
:
:
930 m/h
8468 m/h
Canopy dimensions
620 x 260 x 60 cm.
Filters
Designed to remove grease

particles from the extract air
stream of the ventilation system.
Constructed entirely in stainless
steel. Proven and certified fire
barrier. (DIN 4102 & TNO).
Lights
V-ITL integrated tube light

Fittings IP 54 rated.
TLD fitting
50Hz
Electrical box
21.2
Stainless steel central service distribution unit. Length 620 cm. The unit shall be
manufactured entirely from (1.20 mm thick), type 304 stainless steel.
- All external surfaces shall be ultra fine grain satin polished to 320 grit.
- All polished surfaces shall be clad with polythene protective film. The unit shall be
formed into sub sections, integrally supporting and not requiring any form of sub
frame. All exposed or accessible metal edges shall be rolled smooth and be free
of sharp edges.
- Each section shall be mechanically fitted to the floor space and extended up to
the lower elevation of the ceiling;
The unit shall comprise:
- Vertical riser sections.
- Support legs.
Each section shall be mechanically fitted to the floor space and extended up to
the lower elevation of the ceiling;
- Horizontal raceway sections.
The unit will be incorporated with a full length removable top sections- hipped to
eliminate the unit being used as storage shelf. This top section can be hinged at
an additional cost. Removable top section gives full access to an integral full
width cable tray. The raceway shall incorporate a full length pipe work chamber
with internal dividing plate to provide a fixing point for services.
Access panels are fitted along the length of the piping section.
- All mechanical and electrical services and their immediate support system
to be provided by others on site upon completion of our works.
Excl.: piping & wiring
22.
Electric boiling Kettle, 2/3 steam Jacketed. Capacity 40 gal.
Standard features:
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-29
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Steam jacket filled with treated water.

Accurate, consistent solid state temperature controls.
Operating temperature range from 145-260F(63-C-127C)
LED indicator for heat cycle. LED indicator for low water.
Power on/off switch. Adjustable temperature control dia.
Water resistant control, splash-proof construction.
Large pouring lip for high capacity and chunky products.
Re-inforced rolled rim design prevents damage to kettle rim, eliminates bar rim
designs.
Welded in heating elements.
Rear mounted easy access pressure gauge and pressure relief valve to prevent
tampering.
50 psi safety valve.
Solid state water level control.
Splash proof elements cover with a double gasket seal,
Tilt mechanism of roller bearings and case hardened self locking work and
segment gear.
1 5/8 O.D. tri0leg support with level adjustable feet for floor bolting.
Voltage: 415/50/3Ph+ N
18 kw.
Overall dim. 106 x 109 c.
Model KEL40T
Complete with:
- Spring assisted, hinged, rotatable, domed stainless steel cover (CHS)
- 2 Tangent draw-off valve Draw-off valve.
23.
Powerpan, electric tilting skillet. Capacity 40 gal. Model SEL40TI.

Standard features:
-
24.
High efficiency cooking system with even heat distribution.

18KW Heating Elements
Open base design for easy cleaning and maintenance
5/8 stainless steel Bead Blaster cooking surface prevent warping and keeps
food from sticking.
Durable 12 ga., 304 stainless steel pan construction. Stainless steel plate for
even temperature distribution.
Splash proof controls and construction.
Easy-to-turn manual hand tilt.
Gallon/Liter markings and vented spring assist cover.
10 cooking feature. Tilt unit up to 10 without power being turned off.
Adjustable, electronic thermostat accurately controls temperature from 100 to
450 F.
2 Tangent Draw-OFF valve. (TD2SK)
Open leg frame.
Voltage: 415/50/3Ph+N.
18 kw.
Overall dim. 130W. x 104 D. x 99 cm.H.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty work table with all welded
Dim 210 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:

S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-30
___________________________________________________________________________
25.
Undershelf
Set of 3 drawers.
frame. Reinforced, insulated top in stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet.
Dim 240 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Set of 3 drawers.
26.
Heavy duty spreader cabinet. Stainless steel front and sides. Stainless steel front rail.
Stainless steel front rail. Stainless steel spreader work top. 6 adjustable chrome
plated legs. Low profile stainless steel backguard. Dim. 61 x 91 x 91 cm.H. 34 kgs.
Model 36ESC24.
27.
Heavy duty electric fryer unit consisting of 3-Nos. fryers with solid state controllers
and stainless steel spreader cabinet with heat lamp. Open-pot design, easy to clean.
Frypot has an oil capacity of 80 ltrs. (160 lbs.), frying area of 61 x 63.5 cm. and a
variable cooking depth of 15 cm. Stainless steel frypot, sides and front. Redesigned
elements that rotate and lift up. Ribbon type, low-watt density, long life heating
elements. Multi-product computer. Built-in filtration system/ On cabinet with legs.
Voltage 415/50/3ph. 36 kw. Overall dim. 246.7 (W) x 100 (L) x 114 c. (H.) 589 kgs.
Model FPCI128/236S.
28.
SPARE NO.
29.
SPARE NO.
30.
Heavy duty spreader cabinet. Stainless steel front and sides. Stainless steel front rail.
Stainless steel spreader work top. 6 adjustable chrome plated legs. Low profile
stainless steel backguard. Dim. 91 x 91 x 91 cm.H. 35 kgs. Model 36ESC36.
31.
Electric, stainless steel, heavy duty pasta cooker with electronic programmable
controls. Bright LED cook time display. Digital entry cooking time. 8 kw. Incology
heating elements at rated voltage. Stainless steel cookpot. Enamel cabinet. Bulk
cooking basket each capacity 33 litres. Water inlet and outlet tap. 4 adjustable feet.
Dim. 91 x 83 x 109 cm. 415/50/3phase. 12 kw. Model 8SMSSC.
32.
Heavy duty electric range on open cabinet base. Stainless steel front and sides. Top
consists of one piece grooved griddle plate with three thermostatically controlled
heat zones. 6 adjustable chrome plate legs. Overall dim. 91 x 91 x 91 c. 415/50/3ph/
15 kw. 249 kgs. Model 36ES38.
33.
Electric salamander range mounted with six metal sheath elements, 1.16 kw. each.
Stainless steel front and splashwall, with black enamel top and sides. Removable full
width drip tray. Pull out rack with lock position for broiling. Two control switches each
controlling temperature over half of the broiler grid. Overall Dim. 91 x 41 x 35.6 cm.H.
240/50/1phase. 7kw. CE certification. 107 kgs. Model ER36.
34.
36E Series range, heavy duty, electric range with full size oven. 91 x 61 cm. top
consists of one boiling plate with six heat zones. Each controlled by a three-heat
switch. Stainless steel front and sides. Standard oven is controlled by a heavy duty
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-31
___________________________________________________________________________
electromechanical thermostat. Oven interior is fully porcelain 66.7 W. x 34 H. with
removable four-position chrome plated over rack guides and one oven rack, front and
rear stainless steel grease troughs. 6 chrome plated legs. Overall dim. 91 x 91 x 91
cm.H. Voltage 415V/50HZ/3PH. 18.5 kw. 272 kgs. Model 36ER39.
35.
Dim 140 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
Under shelf
Backsplash.
Single drawer.
36.
Commercial Stainless steel microwave oven with New exclusive rotawave cooking
system for even cooking without turning. Fully flexible, automatic electronic control
cu. Ft. size 55 x 50 x 36 cm. 240 V/50Hz/1ph. Model RCS511TS. 1100 W. (Relying
on operator awareness, the unit carries no warranty whatsoever besides being
37.
backsplash. Cap. 530 litres. Four hinged doors. Temperature 0/+10 deg C. Forcedair cooling. Thermostat control. Automatic defrost and condensate evaporation.
compressor up to +43C. Dim. 230 x 70 x 90 cm. 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model KUCA.
38.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy dutym wall benched chefs table
with backsplash. Reinforced, insulated work top with inset sink bowl left hand side.
Complete with heavy duty mixer tap, drain fitting and elbow. Reinforced under shelf.
Stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 120 x 70 x 85 cm.
39.
With the following:
Under shelf.
Backsplash
40.
Heavy duty, 4 tier shelving unit. Adjustable height heavy stainless steel reinforced
wire shelves on 4 stainless steel corner post with adjustable feet. Dim 122 x 61 x
188 cm. Model 2448SHD.
40.
Electric, automatic ice flaker, stainless steel finish. Modular stacking type with
unique ice production method that creates large, slow melting flakes steadily and
efficiently. Production upto 305 kgs/day (671 lbs). Air cooled. Fitted over a stainless
steel storage bin, capacity 195 kgs. (430 lbs.) Insulated with one piece seamless
polyliner. Non-marking, full length, hinged door, Rugged, corrosion-free base. 4
adjustable feet. Overall dim 62 x 86 x 197 cm. 230/50/1 ph. NSF, UL and CSA
Approved. Model RF-0650A+B-570.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-32
___________________________________________________________________________
41.
Heavy duty complete water filtering system, for removal of particle deposits, odors
and chemicals from water supply lines to ice cubers, and water coolers. The unit is
completely pre-piped, with all mounting bracket, in-let/outlet valves, pressure relief
button, filter change gauge. The unit consists of one pre-filter and two primary filter
assemblies, for maximum recommended output of 2 gpm @ 2.5 psid, thus achieving
sub-micron (0.2) rating of filtering efficiency. Maximum pressure 80 PSI. Maximum
water temperature 125 degree F. Dim 42 x 23 x 60 cm. Model TRIL25.
42.
Stainless steel, electric, automatic, ice cube maker. Production upto 682 kgs/day
(1500 lbs). Ice shape: Dice. Air cooled. Fitted over a stainless steel storage bin,
capacity 322 kgs. (710 lbs.) Insulated with one piece seamless polyliner. Nonmarking, full length, hinged door, Rugged, corrosion-free base. 4 Adjustable feet.
Overall dim 122 x 86 x 194 cm. H. Voltage 230V/50Hz/1pahse. NSF. UL and CSA
approved. ISO 9001 quality systems certified. Model IDI 402A + B970.
42.1
Heavy duty complete water filtering system, for removal of particle deposits, odors
and chemicals from water supply lines to ice cubers, and water coolers. The unit is
completely pre-piped, with all mounting bracket, inlet/outlet valves, pressure relief
button, filter change gauge. The unit consists of one pre-filter and two primary filter
assemblies, for maximum recommended output of 2 gpm @2.5 psid, thus achieving
sub-micron (0.2) rating of filtering efficiency. Maximum pressure 80 PSI. Maximum
water temperature 125 degree F. Dim 42 x 23 x 60 cm. Model TRIL25.
43.
Self contained double single door roll-thru refrigerator, 2 sections. Stainless steel
interior and exterior. Built-in door locks with heavy duty strikes. Recesses metal door
handles. Exterior digital thermometer. Easy to use electronic control. Easy access
flip up shroud. Three chrome plated wire shelves per section Tough ABS interior
door liners. Stainless steel beaker strips. Energy saving door heater switch. Inclined
stainless steel exterior ramp. 240/50/1ph. Dim. 86 x 167 x 226 cm.H. 404A
refrigerant. 16 AMPS. Model SSHRT2-S.
-Completely with trolley.
44.
Heavy duty modular Cold room, Chiller type. Paneling system with the following
specification:
Panels
===
Thickness 10 cm.
polyurethane injected with a density of 40kgs/m3, closed by a double (male and
perimeter profiles, self supporting structure being able to bear the weight of eventual
hook sets and of other loads hanging from ceiling.
Floors
==
Recessed reinforced floor at 3000 kg/per square inch.
Doors
==
Supplied with gasket, strong hinges with internal safety latch. Room supplied with
temperature control light. Dim. of doors 190 x 80 cm.
Hook
==
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-33
___________________________________________________________________________
The hook joining the panels, made wholly of non ageing PVC, in order to resolve all
the problems being common to all the production i.e.
-

refrigerating room.
Remote
Power hp.
Complete with:
Door lock.
PVC transparent plastic curtains.
45.
Heavy duty Roll-in Blast Chiller. With floor and ramp. Chilling Capacity 140 kgs. The
blast chiller makes it possible to reduce the core temperature from + 90C to + 3C in
less than 90 minutes.
GENERAL FEATURES:
- Outside stainless steel AISI 304 18/10 mm Scotch-Brite satin Finish
- Inside stainless steel AISI 304 18/10 with rounded corners
- Inside bottom and floor die-formed leak proof
- High-density expanded polyurethane insulation (about 42 kg/m) with thickness of
80 mm, without HCFC
- Copper-aluminum evaporator, protected with non toxic epoxy resins through
cataphoresis painting systems
- Anti-condensation heating element fitted on the door under the gasket
- Horizontal ergonomic handle with inside security lock
- Door with rubber sweeper gasket with closing hinges
- Door with lock
- Heated core probe in blast freeze for an easy extraction
INTERNAL SET-UP
- Internal bumpers in stainless steel to prevent damage by trolleys
- External guards in stainless steel to prevent damage to control panel
COOLING UNIT
- Remote condensing unit and possibility to have stainless steel protective cover
- Evaporator fitted with high rate fan for maximum cooling efficiency
- R401a refrigerant liquid
Z CONTROL FUNCTIONS
- Soft and Hard timed or core probe blast chilling
- Automatic blast chilling cycle with product density recognition (multipoint probe)
- Automatic pre-cooling key, disconnects when the door is opened
- Infinite timed cycle with settable room set-point
- 67 pre-set programs
- 30 free positions for saving customized programs
- Automatic storing at end of blast chilling cycle
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-34
___________________________________________________________________________
46.
Automatic recognition of the core probe, if inserted into the product to blast chill.
Core probe heating
Timed manual defrosting
LCD
Connection through electric clamp RS 485 to printer or PC (HACCP)
Registration/display of the haccp alarms
Adjustment of the evaporator fan speed during chilling cycle
Voltage 415/50/3ph. 2 x 500 W.
Overall Dim. 120 x 195 x 223 cm. H.
Model BC 401 DZ
Heavy duty, stainless steel, rack trolley. Square stainless solid rod frame. Good for 18
trays to GN 2/1 or 36 trays to GN 1/1 size. On 2 fixed and 2 swivel castors, 22 with
locking brakes. Comes with corner bumpers. Size 59 x 67 x 163 cm Model RWRE 161.
N TRAY MAKE UP
1.
Electric, single track powered tray make-up conveyor. Conveyor belt to consist of dual
dia. Dura-San belting. Belting itself is USDA accepted. Highly resistant to abrasion,
dirt, oil and most chemicals. Start end to be provided with 6 long tray rest. Discharge
end to have 20 long tray pick-up area, with limit switch activated by stainless steel
lever protruding through slot in belt bed. Belt to be driven only on top surface of
conveyer bed. No drain pans. Caddy-veyor bed to be constructed of #14 gauge
stainless steel type 304. Drive housing to consist of #8 gauge stainless steel enclosure
on two sides. Motor to be controlled manually through an on/off push button switch and
automatically through a limit switch. Both located at discharge end. On Castors.
Voltage 240/50/1ph. Model XL-1.
2.
Mega-Temp rack caddy. Designed for easy dispensing of under plates in the tray
make-up line. Four shelf type. Capacity 240 plates. Each Mega-Temp rack shelf is
fitted with 2 removable plastisol coated cradles which can be placed piggy back on
standard dishwasher racks, where rack type dishwasher is used. Soiled Mega-Temp
under plates are then placed into cradles ready for dishwashing and removable in bulk
to storage racks. Mega-Temp rack 40-1/2 long x 20 wide with frame work of 1. #16
gauge stainless steel tubing with 3/8 Dia. Stainless steel cross rod supports. On
Castors, 2 with brakes. Model T-540.
3.
Parallel overhead tray starter to work in conjunction with model T-566. Provided with
fixed sloped shelf mounted on top of conveyor. Can be slid to any location. Model T565.
4.
Cantilever tray starter. Sloped shelf mounted on conveyor. Model T-566.
5.
Heavy duty, stainless steel mobile tray lowerators, Good for 150 trays. Max. dim. of
trays 53 x 37 cm. Overall dim. 80 x 55 x 90 cm. Model CCE-A Art No. 590198
6.
Heavy duty, 18/10 stainless steel service trolley. 2 shelves, each 80 x 50 cm with all
round raised profile edge with sound deadening coat underneath. Space between
shelves 58 cms. Stainless steel dia. 25 mm tubular frame with 4 x 125 mm dia casters,
2 with brakes. Rubber bumper guards on 4 corners. Overall Dim. 90 x 60 x 95 cm.
Mod. SW8x5x2.
7.
SPARE NO.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-35
___________________________________________________________________________
8.
Stainless steel, heavy duty, electric heated, mobile meal distribution trolley. Dry or wet
use. 3 wells to GN 1/1 size or divisions thereof; each with separate thermostat control.
One stainless steel under shelf. Rubber bumper guards on all corners. 4 casters, 2 with
brakes. Dim 127,6 x 71 x 93 cm. Voltage 240/50/1. Model SAW 3. 2100 W.
9.
Stainless steel, heavy duty, electric, mobile double plate dispenser round. Capacity
approximately 120 plates from 26 to to 31 cm. dia. With heavy duty plexiglass plate
covers. With 4 casters, 2 with brakes. Interior dim 51 x 102 x 93 cm. Voltage 240/50/.
1.8 kw. Model 2 SHE 26-31.
10.
Stainless steel, heavy duty, electric, mobile meal distribution trolley. Dry or wet use. 4
wells to GN 1/1 size or divisions thereof; each with separate thermostat control. One
stainless steel under shelf. Rubber bumper guards on all corners. 4 casters, 2 with
brakes. Dim 161,5 x 71 x 93 cm. Voltage 240/50/1. Model SAW 4. 2.8 kw
11.
Stainless steel, electric, automatic twin urns coffee machine. 2 urns, each cap 3 gls of
coffee, with continuous hot water supply. 3 non-drip faucets with sight level gauge
each. Automatic water fill and coffee brewing. Timer. Coffee agitator. Thermostat
control. Total hourly output 22 gls of boiling water for coffee or tea brewing (about 565
cups). On 4 adjustable feet. Dim 85 x 45 x 73 cm. 240/50/1. 7Kw. Model CL-100N.
12.
Heavy gauge all stainless steel stationary, with legs, for safety. With single drainer.
Storage shelf below.132 x 66 x 86 cm. H. Model T-504.
13.
Commercial electric conveyer toaster. Stainless steel housing and radiant reflector.
Metal sheathed heating elements. Stainless steel wire conveyer belt. Stainless steel
front wire guard. High temperature insulation protects control panel and exterior. Each
unit is equipped with a 39, three wire grounded power cord. Fully insulated and air
cooled. The toaster has a 13 wide conveyor, allowing the placement of 3 slices of
bread. Capacity approx. 900 slices/hour. Dim 46 x 54 x 36 cm.H. 240/50/1. 3,34 kw.
Model XTRM-3.
14.
Bread, roll and toast cart. Stainless steel all-welded construction to support conveyer
and pop-up toasters. Lower shelf will accommodate two drawer roll warmer. Model T790.
15.
Mega-temp rack caddy. Designed for easy dispensing of under plates in the tray makeup line. Five shelf type. Capacity 300 plates. Each Mega-Temp rack shelf is fitted with
2 removable plastisol coated cradles which can be placed piggy back on standard
dishwasher racks, where rack type dishwasher is used. Soiled Mega-Temp under
plates are then placed into cradles ready for dishwashing and removal in bulk to
storage racks. Mega-Temp rack 40-1/2 long x 20 wide with frame work of 1. #16
gauge stainless steel tubing with 3/8 Dia. Stainless steel cross rod supports. On
Castors, 2 with brakes. Model T-545.
16.
Refrigerated dessert & salad unit with double frost tops. Unit accommodates 6 46 x
66 cm. sheet pans on lower and upper levels. Refrigerated under compartment will
hold up to 18 back-up 46 x 66 cm. sheet pans. User friendly for operator with 180
degree vision without turning. Refrigerated over shelf sloped with 2 deep frost pan,
strategically positioned over tray conveyor. Full length food service rated fluorescent
light illuminates lower frost top and conveyor surface. Overall dim. 224 x 91 x 165
cm.H. HP. Model RF-525.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-36
___________________________________________________________________________
17.
Frost top unit to accommodate 66 cm. sheet pan front to back. Capacity 3 sheet
pans. Overall dim. 150 x 84 x 89 cm.H. HP. Mode; RF-403.
18.
Stainless steel heavy duty open mobile basket dispenser. Capacity 6-10 basket. Size
of basket 50 x 50 cm. Easy to maneuver. On 4 swivel castors, 2 with brakes with 4
corner bumpers. Dim. 80.5 x 54.5 x 90 cm.
19.
Sliding removable work and storage shelf. Shelf supported by stainless steel tubular
leg, with 2 sides turned up. Can be used for coffee, cookies and miscellaneous items
for plating. Cane be located on either side of conveyor at any location. Size 51 (L) x 25
cm. (W). Model ACC-2010.
O-
DIET KITCHEN
1.
Self contained double single door roll-in refrigerator, 2 sections. Stainless steel interior
and exterior. Built-in door locks with heavy duty strikes. Recessed metal door handles.
Exterior digital thermometer. Easy to use electronic control. Easy access flip up
shroud. Three chrome plated wire shelves per section Tough ABS interior door liners.
Stainless steel beaker strips. Energy saving door heater switch. Inclined stainless steel
exterior ramp. HP. 240/50/1 ph. Dim. 76 x 168 x 226 cm. H. 404A refrigerant. Model
SSRR12-S.
2.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, work table with all Welded
Dim 220 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Under shelf
- Backsplash
- Sidesplash
3.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, sink unit with backsplash and
3 sides apron. 2 bowls, each bowl size 60 x 50 x 32 cm. fitted with heavy duty mixer
tap, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. On stainless steel tubular legs with 4
adjustable feet. With under shelf. Overall dim. 140 x 70 x 85 cm.
4.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel. Heavy duty, single solid wall shelf on
5.
6.
Dim 100 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Under shelf
- Backsplash
- Sidesplash
7.
S.T.H.
Dim 180 x 70 x85 cm.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-37
___________________________________________________________________________
With the following:
- Under shelf
- Backsplash
8.
9.
10.
Heavy duty blender, electric motor base with speed controller. Housing made of
chromed zinc die-casting. Safety cut-off. 1000 to 15000 rpm. Dia 24 cm. Die cast body.
240/50/1. Model GT-800. 800 W.
Complete with:
- 4 ltr. Polycarbonate jug. Code 1123021.
11.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, low level table with all
welded frame. On stainless steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim190 x 70 x 70
cm.
With the following:
- Under shelf
- Backsplash
12.
Heavy duty, electrically heated combi steamer.

Special Features:
- Advanced Closed System.
- Automatic optional moisture-regulation, energy-efficient
- Press and Go: easy to use for perfect results.
- Requires minimum space: fits anywhere, saving expensive floor Space flexible use.
Standard Features:
- Crisp and tasty (multi-level demoisturising)
- Double glass doors with integrated door lock position and self Emptying
condensate drip tray (door drip tray)
- Tray timer (time-delayed loading for each level)
- Menus and icons make the appliance easy to operate.
- Bright graphic interface with full-text display.
- Digital dial for easy adjustment of temperature, time and core temperature.
- Programme in 250 recipes of up to 20 steps each.
- Cook & Hold and Delta-T cooking.
- Core temperature sensor (multi-point)
- Robust stainless steel design
- Zero wear door contacts switch
- Injection version
- Rotary lever door lock and slam function
Capacity : 6 x GN2/3
Dim. 51.5 x 59.9 x 62.7 cm
Connected load : 5.7 kw.
Voltage 415/50/3 phase.
Model MINI OES 6.06
13.
S.T.H.
Table top, 2/3 steam jacketed, electric tilting boiling kettle. Capacity 11 ltrs. (3 gallons).

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-38
___________________________________________________________________________
Standard features:
- Manual tilting, balanced design.
- Self-contained, easily installed needs only an electrical hook-up.
- Steam jacket filled with treated water.
- Accurate consistent solid state temperature control.
- Operating temperature range from 145 - 260 F (63 C-127 C)
- LED indicator for heat cycle. LED indicator for low water
- Power on/off switch. Adjustable temperature control dial.
- Water resistant controls, splash-proof construction.
- Large pouring lip for high capacity and chunky products.
- Re-inforced rolled rim design prevents damage to kettle rim. Eliminates bar rim
designs.
- Welded in heating elements.
- Rear mounted easy access pressure gauge and pressure relief valve to prevent
tampering.
- 50 psi safety valve.
- Solid state water level control.
- Splash proof element cover with a double gasket seal.
- Voltage: 240/50/1ph.
- 5.4 kw.
- Overall dim. 51 x 34 x 73 cm.H.
Model KET-3-T.
14.
Stainless steel, heavy duty, electric, table top, short order stove, with 2 removable fast
heating solid hot plates with thermostat control each and pilot light. 4 Adjustable feet.
Dim 39 x 64 x 34 cm. 240/50/1. Model EL 24 SH 5,2 Kw.
15.
Stainless steel Island type fresh air hood with capture air stream technology & filter,
cassette & lights.
Model V-JET STREAM A-90.
delivered through slots arranged along the inner front face and if required inner sides
of the canopy to effectively and efficiently contain the thermal plume and direct it
towards the grease filters. Supply air is also discharged through the perforated front
face of the canopy to ensure the ventilation system of the kitchen is correctly balanced.
CONSTRUCTION
The canopy is fabricated entirely in type 304 stainless steel (1.0 1.2 mm) thick. All
visible are ultra fine grain polished (320 grit) and polythene protected. The canopy is
cut, punched and folded into seamless sections up to 6m in length and factory
assembled by means of computer controlled seam welds and non visible mechanical
fixings. Joints are provided with internal cover plates so that no joints or mechanical
fixings are visible.
All metal edges are rolled smooth and are free from sharp edges and projections. The
canopy lower edge is formed into a condensation channel with inclined internal
elevation to simplify cleaning and the inner edges are crush folded for safety purposes.
The canopy is equipped with Vianen Fecon grease extraction baffle filters. The filters
are designed to allow the grease to run off the filters into an integral grease collecting
channel and then into easily removable grease trays. The canopy has a constant
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-39
___________________________________________________________________________
exhaust pressure drop off 100 Pa, an Jest Stream supply air pressure drop of 90 Pa
and a front face supply pressure drop of 40 Pa.
SUPPLY AIR
Tempered supply air is ducted (by others) to the factory fitted spigot(s) on the top of
diffuser plate and is delivered through a series of slots arranged along the internal front
edge of the canopy into the canopy. The air is delivered from these slots at a maximum
velocity of 8m/s and at a rate of 75 m3/h per linear meter, which represents less than
15% of the total extract airflow rate. This ensures a positive capture and containment of
the thermal plume generated by the cooking process. A proportion of the supply airflow
is also discharged through the vertical perforated front face of the canopy. This
ensures an even distribution of supply air over the full length of the canopy at low
velocity without any draughts. Air is also available to be discharged through the ABS
spot coolers located on the underside of the front lip of the canopy for personal comfort
of the cooking staff.
To suit various styles of cooking and canopy installation the Jet Stream canopy can be
offered with slots just along the inner front face or extended down both sides of the
canopy to enhance the capture and containment efficiency.
Technical details
-
Exhaust capacity
Supply air capacity
:
:
:
1107 m/h
150 m/h
846 m/h
16.
Canopy dimensions
Filter
:
:
Lights
:
-
200 x 110 x 60 cm
Designed to remove grease particles from the
extract
Air stream of the ventilation system. Constructed
entirely in stainless steel. Proven and certified fire
barrier (DIN 4102 & TNO).
V-ITL integrated tube lights fittings IP 54 rated
TLD fitting
Electrical supply is 220/240V 50Hz
Electrical box
Dim 110 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Under shelf.
- Backsplash.
- Sidesplash.
17.
S.T.H.
backsplash. Cap. 390 litres. Three hinged doors. 0/+10 deg. C. Forced-air cooling.
rounded edges for easy cleaning and 1 chrome plated shelf per compartment. Hinged
control panel and easily removable condenser unit for maximum access to

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-40
___________________________________________________________________________
components. CFC free refrigerant R134a. Tropicalised compressor upto + 43C. Dim
185 x 70 x 98.5 cm. 550 watts. 240/50/1. Model Kuba
18.
Commercial Stainless steel microwave oven with New exclusive rotawave cooking
system for even cooking without Turning. Fully flexible, automatic electronic control
cu.ft. size 55 x 50 x 36 cm. 240V/50Hz/1ph. Model RCS511TS. 1100 W. (Relying on
operator awareness, the unit carries no warranty whatsoever besides being
19.
Dim 130 x 60 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Under shelf.
- Backsplash.
- Sidesplash.
P DISH WASH AREA

1.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, storage cabinet with 3
intermediate shelves and 2 suspended sliding doors. 4 Adjustable feet. Dim 140 x 60 x
180 cm.
2.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, receiving table. On stainless steel square
section, tubular legs with adjustable feet. Dim 220 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Backsplash.
- Sidesplash.
3.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, wall rack shelf. Dim 110 x 45 x 65 cm.
4.
Stainless steel soaking trolley, Extractable basket-shaped strainer to take out the
cutlery. Floodgate for the drain at the end of the operation. Placed on spinning wheels
for an easier movement. Dim. 57 x 57 x 65 cm. Model VAP.
5.
Stainless steel food waste disposer with 15 sink receptable. 3 HP induction motor,
1725 RPM, totally enclosed to provide protection against outside moisture. Built-in
thermal overload protection. All stainless steel construction. 415/50/3ph. Model SS300.
6.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, heavy duty, sink unit with backsplash and
3 sides apron. 2 bowls and 1 drainer. Each bowl size 60 x 50 x 32 cm. Fitted with
heavy duty shower group, overflow stand pipe, drain fitting and elbow. On stainless
steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. With undershelf. Overall dim. 210 x 70 x 85
cm.
7.
Custom fabricated, 16 gauge stainless steel, receiving table. On stainless steel square
section, tubular legs with adjustable feet. Dim 240 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Backsplash.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-41
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Left sidesplash.
8.
9.
Rack trolley complete with wheels and handle. Trolley base 540 x 540 x 50 mm. Model
RDOLLY1.
10.
Heavy duty electric operated belt conveyer. Two speed 2325 and 3800 or equivalent
trays.
- Body and tank in stainless steel construction18/10 AISI 304, 12/10 thick
Tunnel composition:
-
Pre-Wash - wash arms : 2 upper + 2 lower

1 Wash wash arms : 4 upper + 4 lower
1 Ecorinse (additional rinse) rinse arms : 1 upper + 1 lower
1 Rinse rinse arms : 1 upper + 1 lower
Completely automatic.
Upper and lower fixed pre-washing ( 40 C )
Upper and lower fixed washing ( 60 C )
Ecorinse system for reduction in consumption of water, energy, detergent
Upper and lower fixed rinsing ( 85-90 C )
Stainless steel wash and rinse arms, easy to disassemble and interchange
Double skin with thermic and acoustic insulation
Slanted tank with rounded edges
Stainless steel Auto draining washing pumps
Counterbalanced doors
Front panel composition:

1.
2.
Low tension keyboard drives

A Digital display indicates the temperatures of different tanks sequential
visualization of inlet/washing/rinse water temperature Single visualization of the
other temperatures through push selector switch
3. PCB- board programming according to the type of machine and to the customers
demand
4. Alerts and functions showed on a display
Warning light indicating door open or absence of overflow (when present)
Limit switch alarm
Water fail alarm (tank loading)
Flux meter alarm (when present)
Thermic relays alarm motors
Signaling of various functions and cycles starting
5. Rinse boiler filling at daily starting
6. Speed selection push button or machine running with motor drive off
7. Drying push button and light (when present)
8. Pre-rinse push button and light (when present)
9. Rinse light
10. Flux meter entry light (when present)
11. Basket entry light (when present)
12. Washing tank water level light
-
S.T.H.
Belt conveyor with stainless steel chain and nylon rolls for a silent sliding

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-42
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Frontal maintenance
Water protection
Loading modular bracket with table for dishes bearing
Automatic tank loading
Electronic Thermometers for automatic control of wash and rinse temperatures
Start and Stop button in entry exit machine
Rinse economizer
Tank and pump filters
Insulated Boiler
Total Dim. 510 x 104 x 156 cm.
Voltage 415/50/3ph. 42.3 kw.
Model LINEAR 40 PRC.
Complete with:
Tunnel dryer 12 kw.
Steam condenser.
13.
Heavy duty side loading dish and tray cart. Adjustable dividers accommodate a
variety of different sized dishes and trays. Corrosion free polymer construction. 4
Casters 2 with brakes. Overall size 51 x 99 x 81 cm. Model SSD 16.
14.
Heavy duty polymer dish dolly. 4 Columns dolly, each with a capacity of up to 60
plates of maximum 28 cm (11) diameter. Total capacity 240 plates. Seamless
molded polymer construction with rigid polyurethane foam core; cracking, peeling
and chipping resistant; on 4 swivel casters, two with brakes. Dim 68 x 68 x 81
cm. Model PCD11. NSF Approved.
15.
Heavy duty, aluminum dish rack dolly with handle. Size 54 x 54 x 84 cm. Model
DH 2020N.
16.
Professional, 25 compartment base for high ball glasses. Rack moulded in one
piece with double wall construction from PP Co-polymer. Overall dim 50 x 50 x 10
cm. Model RBC25.
17.
Heavy duty, aluminum dish rack dolly with handle. Size 54 x 54 x 84 cm. Model
DH 2020N.
18.
Heavy duty polypropylene dishwasher cutlery rack. Dim. 50 x 50 x 10 cm. Model

RBFS.
19.
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slats shelving system. As
per Drawing.
CHEMICAL STORE
S.T.H.
1.
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slats shelving system. Dim
182.5 x 45 x 170 cm.
2.
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable ply slats shelving system. Dim
152.5 x 60 x 170 cm.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-43
___________________________________________________________________________
R-
3.
Heavy duty, dunnage rack. Weight capacity 3000 lbs. rotationally molded grey
4.

Slotted top for air circulation. Slots run front to back for easy loading and
unloading. All rack edges have generous radius to prevent product snagging or
marking. Dim 152 x 55 x 31 cm. Model HP2260PD.
UTENSILS STORE
1.
S-
4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slats shelving system. As
per drawing.
ACCESSORIES
S.T.H.
1.
Electronic flying insects exterminator. With 2 tubes and 6 pack of glue board. 40
watts. For indoors or undercover use only. Dim 61.5 x 10 x 28 cm. 240/50/1.
Model 806967.
2.
Hand wash basin with up stand height 540 mm Stainless steel construction.
Well 345 x 245 mm, depth 120 mm
Knee operated control
Mixer tap with non-return valves
Supplied with siphon and flexible connecting hose for connection of mitigated
water to swan neck.
Dim: 44 x 34 x 54 cm
Model: 806382
3.
Mobile step-on container, cap. 23 gal. (87 litres). Ideal for hand-free, sanitary
refuse disposal. Factory Mutual System and California State Fire Marshal
approved for fire safety. Deodorant block holder to help combat odour. Tightfitting, overlapping lid to help contain odour. Rounded corners and smooth
contours for easy cleaning and disinfecting. Tough, puncture-resistant, all-plastic
construction wont rust or dent, chip or peel. Dim. 51 x 41 x 83 cm. Model 6146.
4.
Step-on Container, cap 18 gal (68 litres). Ideal for hand-free, sanitary refuse
disposal. Factory Mutual System and California State Fire Marshal approved for
fire safety. Deodorant block holder to help combat odor. Tight fitting, overlapping
lid to help contain odor. Rounded corners and smooth contours for easy cleaning
and disinfecting. Tough, puncture-resistant, all-plastic construction wont rust or
dent, chip or peel. Dim 50 x 41 x 68 cm. Model 6145. Meet OSHA requirements
for blood borne pathogenic materials.
5.
Heavy duty, triple wall, seamless, mobile food storage bin, with sliding/swinging
lid. Cap 26 gls. NSF, USDA and FDA approved. Dim 75 x 39 x 71 cm. Model
3602.
6.
Heavy duty, wall type, retractable hose reel. Open coated hose reel 3/8 x 35 ft.
long. Fitted with blue handle grip and ring lock. Pull/push lock/retract action of
extended hose. Approx. Dim. 36.8 Dia. X 42 x 45.8 cm. Model B-7232-01.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-44
___________________________________________________________________________
7.
Wall mount high pressure spray cleaner 800 psi with gravity fed soap and
sanitize injection. 50 ft hose. Stainless steel manual hose reel. 240/50/1ph. Model
SW-081-05R.
8.
UV knife sterilizing cabinet. Capacity up to 20 knives.
- Stainless steel construction

- Transparent colorlessPlexiglas door with rounded edges and magnetic lock,
stainless steel hinge.
- Automatic UV radiation cut-off system when door is opened
- Magnetized bar for holding knives
- Removable stainless steel grill for knives.
-Timer adjustable from 0 to 2 hours
-Tension: 230 V
- 240/50/1ph.
-Dim. 54 x 15 x 64.5 cm.
Model 816420.
9.
Stainless steel floor grating with stainless steel trough 60/65 mm. deep. Finish:
Electro polish surface: serrated. With center vertical discharge pipe of 101.6 mm.
dia. The grid size 22 x 33 mm. Discharge should have a double removable
strainer with siphon to keep the food particles from being discharged into the
main drains. Dim. 300 x 20 cm.
-Installation by others.
10.Stainless steel floor grating with stainless steel trough 60/65 mm. deep. Finish:
11.
12.
strainer with siphon to keep food particles from being discharged into the main
drains. Dim. 100 x 20 cm.
13.
S.T.H.
Stainless steel floor grating with stainless steel trough 60/65 mm. deep. Finish: Electro
polish surface: serrated. With center vertical discharge pipe of 101.6 mm. dia. The
grid size 22 x 33 mm. Discharge should have a double removable strainer with siphon
to keep the food particles from being discharged into the main drains. Dim. 80 x 20
cm.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-45
___________________________________________________________________________
14. Stainless steel floor grating with stainless steel trough 60/65mm. deep. Finish: Electro
polish surface: serrated. With center vertical discharge pipe of 101.6 mm. dia. The grid
size 22 x 33 mm. Discharge should have a double removable strainer with siphon to
keep the food particles from being discharged into the main drains. Dim. 120 x 20 cm.
- Installation by others.
15. Stainless steel floor grating with stainless steel trough 60/65 mm. deep. Finish: Electro
size 22 x 33 mm. Discharge should have a double strainer with siphon to keep the food
particles from being discharged into the main drains. Dim. 180 x 30 cm.
17. Stainless steel floor grating with stainless steel trough 70/75 mm. deep. Finish : Electro
keep the food particles from being discharged into the main drains. As per Drawing.
20. Stainless steel electric hot and cold transport trolley. Capacity 30 trays (trays
included).
- Refrigerated compartment for holding cold food and regeneration compartment for
hot food.
- Can be used for the generation of chilled food on the hot section of the tray while
keeping the food on the cold section cold.
- GR controls use the classic Moffat digital arrangement ( a non PCB Module).
- Overall dim. 97.5 x 83 x 161 cm. H.
- Voltage 415/50/3ph
- Power 7.25 kw.
Model VTSH30GR
21. Heavy duty, 18/10 stainless steel service trolley. 3 shelves, each 80 x 50 cm. With all
shelves 28 cms. Stainless steel dia. 25 mm tubular frame with 4 x 125 mm dia casters.
2 with brakes. Rubber bumper guards on 4 corners. Overall Dim. 90 x 60 x 95 cm.
Mod. SW8x5x2.
S.T.H.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
11600-46
___________________________________________________________________________
22. Heavy duty, 18/10 stainless steel service trolley. 3 shelves, each 80 x 50 cm. With all
shelves 28 cms. Stainless steel dia. 25 mm tubular frames with 4 x 125 mm dia
casters, 2 with brakes. Rubber bumper guards on 4 corners. Overall Dim. 90 x 60 x 95
cm. Mod. SW 8x5x3
23. Plastic curtains. As per Site.
S.T.H.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
S- CHEMICAL STORE
1. Rotationally molded grey polyethylene construction. Slotted top for air
circulation. Slots run front to back for easy loading and unloading. All rack
edges have generous radius to prevent product snagging or marking. Dim 152
x 55 x 31 cm.
2. 4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly slat- shelving system. As
per Drawing.
B.
T- LINEN SORTING, SOAKING & MARKING

1. Heavy duty truck for soiled linen. Truck purpose designed for soiled linen sack
collection and transport. Front door with the first part fixed, the second sliding
and the third hinged. Lid with hinges in the middle and 2 restraining straps in
the opening position. Once handle on a short side. Rubber wheels dia. 160, 2 of
which are locked and 2 swivel.
Internal dim.100 x 600 x 1190 height.
External dim. 1040 x 65 x 1415 cm.
2. Light allow anodized truck, perforated finish with stiffening ribs on wall,
anodized. Capacity 420 ltrs. Light alloy bottom buffer. Very strong, light and
handy, this truck is suitable for all transport inside the laundry. You can use it
for the sorting of soiled linen, for drying machines loading, etc. 2 fixed and 2
swiveling rubber wheels diam. 14 Dim. 133 x 73 x 88 cm. (H).
3. Heavy duty electronic platform scale, mild steel with digital indicator. Capacity
500 kg. x 200 grams.
-
Platform size 100 x 100 cm. With Ramp.

Piece weighing, check weighing, counting, totalizing & peak fold Functions.
Three weight-based trips for simple process control.
Large LCD display for clear weight indication.
Intuitive graphics display ensures fast, accurate check weighting.
Serial port for easy connectivity to PCs, printers, etc.
The flexible of battery operation, as standard.
Voltage 240/50/1ph.
4. Stainless steel, heavy duty, work table. Reinforces, insulated top on stainless
steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feel. Dim 140 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf
- Backsplash.
S.T.H.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-2
___________________________________________________________________________
5. Heavy duty laundry and dry cleaning manual marking machine for fast, clean
and permanent marking. Prints tags from fibre rolls, of up to 16 alpha numeric
characters. Prints up to 4 lines, up to 16 characters per line, in sharp, clear,
easy to read characters. Maximum prints sharpness and clarify is assured by
printing on Thermopatch Q Label Tapes, plain or printed, offered in many
widths and colours (for colour code systems). These tapes are specially woven
from 100% cotton fiber to provide maximum ink absorption for permanent mark
durability.
Equally important, Q Label Tapes remain firmly bonded to the fabric-yet,can
be easily removed when desired.
-Provides clear, sharp marking on label tape, or prints directly on garments or
linens.
-Ink Ribbon reduced maintenance, no handling of wet inks, no need to clean
wicks or tape.
-Easy manual operation. No air electricity required.
-Can print from one to four lines, with 10 to 16 characters per line.
- Ink Ribbon advances automatically. Ribbons are easily replaces.
- Marks remain permanently legible through industrial and institutional
laundering and dry cleanings.
- A low cost way to identify code or route.
- Helps speed sorting and eliminate errors.
- Widely used wherever permanently legible, fast marking is required.
- Overall dim. 710 (D) x 305 (W) x 560 mm. (H).
- Gross Net Weight: 35 kgs/78 lbs.
6. Stainless steel, heavy duty, work table. Reinforces, insulated top on stainless
steel tubular steel legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 160 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf.
- Backsplash.
- Sidesplash.
7. Stainless steel, heavy duty, pot wash sink with backsplash and 3 sides apron. 2
bowls each size 95.5 x 51 x 38 cm. With heavy duty shower group, overflow
stand pipe, with drain fitting and elbow. Stainless steel tubular legs, with 4
adjustable feet. Overall dim. 210 x 70 x 85 cm. Model LVP 2172V.The unit
conforms to the main international safety and hygiene standards,
including ISO 9001.
8. Stainless steel, heavy duty, single solid wall shelf on stainless steel wall
brackets. Dim. 120 x 40 cm.
S.T.H.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-3
___________________________________________________________________________
9. Stainless steel, heavy duty, work table. Reinforced, insulated top on stainless
steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 240 x 70 x 85 cm.
With the following:
- Undershelf.
- Backsplash.
- Sidesplash.
10. Heavy duty, professional Steam & Cold spotting board in stainless steel
vacuum spotting boards with stainless steel vacuum spotting arm, with one air
spotting gun; and two chemical spotting guns with chemical container each and
overhead hanging rod, coplte with built-in Vacuum Unit. White enamel finished
under shelf and unit balance. Dim . 126 x 49 x 91 cm. Model SFC.
- Requires connection to an air compressor and central steam.
C. U- WASHING & DRYING
1. Rigid mounted washer extractor, steam heated.
-
Front loading, rigid (bold down).

Load capacity 16,5 kg. (ratio 1/10) 18,3 kg. (ratio 1/3).
Frame, vat and drum in stainless steel.
Electronic control 9 preset programs.
Cycle advance button, pause inserting button, working time and
temperature display.
Speed inverter motor 0,75 kw.
Drum 650 x 500 mm.
Volume 165 ft.
Door opening 300 mm.
G-force 82.
Spin speed 475 RPM.
Steam heating 25 kg/h.
Steam working pressure 2-5,5 bar.
Steam connection 3/8.
Drain gravity 2.
Outflow 80 1/min.
3 water inlets .
Water pressure 3-5 bard.
Overall dimensions 780 x 860 x 1175 mm.
Net weight 298 kg.
Voltage 400/50/3ph.
Model 1597.
2. High spin hygienic Barrier Washer Extractor, steam heated. Capacity 49 kgs.
-
S.T.H.
Stainless steel front panel with epoxy finish.

Front loading and rear unloading.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-4
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Electric heating 45 kw.

Microprocessor control 7 preset programs and 23 free programmable,
electronic frequency controlled drive motor.
2 drums with 2 bearing.
Spin speed 900 RPM
G force 360
Free standing, drum, vat, front panels stainless steel.
Drums dimensions 800 x 1347 mm.
Volume 667 dm3.
Temperature regulation by probe.
Drum doors dimensions 305 x 450 mm.
Loading doors lock with patented safety device (CDV) easy to handle and
improved safety.
Height of loading 800 mm.
Motor power 7,5 kw.
Drain by gravity 80 mm.
2 water inlets 1.
Noise level 65 db.
Overall dimensions 1965 x 1053 x 1665 mm.
Net weight 1570 kg.
Voltage 415V/50Hz/3phase + N
Model ASEPII/49.
CE standards.
3. Heavy duty, Steam heated tumbler dryer. 2 Capacity 120 lbs. (54-55 kgs.)
Manual digital timer control with reversing basket. Model CT120.
-
S.T.H.
Easy to load for large door opening.

Easy to install- cabinet leveling legs.
Easy to maintain, pillow block and flange bearing.
Galvanized drum.
Self cleaning lint screen filter.
Basket size 1118 dia. X 1041 mm. depth.
Door opening: 683 mm.
Loading height: 851 mm.
Fan motor: 1-1/2 HP.
Drive motor: 1 HP.
Steam inlet: 3/4 NPT (DN20)
Steam outlet: NPT (DN20)
Boiler HP @ 100 psi: 11.70 BHP
Exhaust duct Dia.: 10 (254 mm.)
Exhaust duct height: 1613 mm.
Approx. Floor space: 1651D. x 1181 W. x 2172 mm. H.
Approx. Net weight: 1375 lbs/624 kgs.
Voltage 415V/50Hz/3PH. + N. 60 kw.
ISO 9001:2000 certified company.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-5
___________________________________________________________________________
4. Heavy duty, steam heated, tumbler dryer with manual dual timer. Capacity 75
lbs. (34 kgs.) With Reversing basket, With built drive system. Model CT075.
-
Easy to load for large door opening.

Easy to install cabinet leveling legs.
Easy to maintain, pillow block and flange bearing.
Galvanized drum.
Self cleaning lint screen filter.
Basket size 940 dia. X 914 mm. Depth.
Steam pressure: at 100 PSI (6.9 Bar)
Steam inlet: 3/4 NPT
Drum volume : 634 liters.
Air flow: 750 CFM @ 354 lits/sec,
Exhaust ducting: 8 (203 mm).
Floor space: 981 W x 1346 D x 1946 mm. H.
Voltage 415V/50HZ/3Ph.
Net weight: 615 lbs/279 kgs.
Manufactured with ISO 9001 quality certification.
To be connected to natural gas supply.
5. Lint collector for dryer. Voltage 415V/50Hz/3ph. 400 CFM. Model FRP-4.
6. Light alloy anodized truck, perforated finish with stiffening ribs on walls,
anodized. Capacity 430 ltrs. Light alloy bottom buffer. Very strong, light and
handy, this truck is suitable for all transports inside the laundry. You can use it
for the sorting of soiled linen, for drying machines, etc. 2 fixed and 2 swiveling
rubber wheels diam. 14 Dim. 133 x 73 x 83 cm. (H).
7. Light alloy truck, solid finish with stiffening ribs on walls, anodized. Capacity 430
ltrs. Light alloy bottoms buffer. Very strong, light and handy, this truck is
suitable for all transports inside the laundry. You can use it for sorting of soiled
linen, for drying machines loading, etc. 2 fixed and 1 swiveling rubber wheels.
Dim 133 x 73 x 88 cm. (H).
D. V-IRONING & PRESSING

1. Heavy duty, air operated hot head rectangular laundry press for flatwork
pressing, built in vacuum. Completely self-contained. Maxi large shape
pressing bucks size 145 x 46 cm. with vaporization from bottom buck.
Overall dim. 130 x 110 x 125 c. 415V/50HZ/3ph. + N. Model S/IDS-Special.
2. Stainless steel, heavy duty, work table. Reinforced, insulated top on stainless
steel tubular legs with 4 adjustable feet. Dim 240 x 70 x 85 cm.
S.T.H.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-6
___________________________________________________________________________
With the following:
- Undershelf.
3. Heavy duty utility laundry press. Steam heated, to be connected to central
steam and compressed air. Pneumatically operated (particularly suitable for
finishing leather, fur, cotton, linen etc.) Steam heated polished top buck.
Vacuum lower buck with pad and cover. Single adjustable timer. Safety guard
on top buck. Steam consumption: 18 kgs./Hr. Compressed air: 6 Bard/80 Lt./m.
Basic dim.130 x 115 cm. Voltage 415V/50HZ/3PH.With built-in vacuum.Model
SIGP4-V.
4. Heavy duty steam operated universal steam press, to be connected to the
central steam boiler with built-in vacuum. Universal shape pressing bucks size
120 x 38 x 22 cm with built-in vaporization from top and bottom bucks. With
steam gun and steam iron set. Hydraulically operated bucks by means of a
push button. Steam working pressure 4.5 ATE. Steam consumption 20 KG/H,
connection . Air working pressure 7ATE. Overall Dim 130 x 110 x 112 cm.
Model S/EP4.
5. Light alloy truck, solid finish with stiffening ribs on walls, anodized. Capacity
430ltrs. Light alloy bottom buffer. Very strong, light and handy, this truck is
suitable for all transports inside the laundry. You can use it for the sorting of
soiled linen, for drying machines loading, etc. 2 fixed and 2 swiveling rubber
wheels. Dim. 133 x 73 x 88 cm. (H).
6. Heavy duty dry linen open end truck. Model FO 26, Style #2, 4 swivel casters,
2 with brakes. Colour: Natural.
7. Heavy duty flatwork ironer with integrated folder 1 making 2 primary plus 3
cross folds and with stacker and conveyor. On-premise laundries with limited
floor space can enjoy the productivity and quality of high production drying and
ironing with the added convenience of built-in measured automatic folding,
crossfolding and stacking in less than half the floor space required for individual
machines. Powerful, versatile performers provide, in less space, the all-in one
answer to your complete finishing needs.
-
S.T.H.
Choice of Tri-Start 24: (600 mm) ironing cylinders to match exact production
needs.
Mirror-finish ground and polished ironing cylinder with 120 (3050 mm)
usable ironing width for even and efficient heat transfer.
Ironed and crossfolds items are delivered to left side receiving shelf or
optional stacker/ conveyor for added labour saving.
Primary folded or bypassed (ironed only) items are returned to front table
for removal.
Touch control AC frequency inverter variable speed drive with soft start and
jof features.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-7
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Heat-lock system including exhaust canopy with insulated rear heat shield,
two blowers and motors to remove excess moisture, raise Ironing
temperature, reduce energy consumption and improve laundry room
comfort.
User friendly controls with speed and temperature indicators to monitor
ironing conditions and alert operators of situations requiring attention.
Traditional method of heating with exceptionally low maintenance
requirements.
Temperature display and steam pressure gauge monitor heating system
performance.
Dependable rotary steam union admits steam and discharge condensate.
Environmentally-safe Nomex high temperature ironing textiles for long
service life and easy replacement.
Complete protection by safety covers, guards, stop buttons and bilingual
safety labels.
Safety finger bar protects full- width of ironer.
Complete finishing up to 800 lbs. (360 kgs.) per hour.
Overall Ironer dim. 164 (4166 mm) W x 92 (2324 mm.) D x 98 (2489 mm.)
H.
Stacker dim. 24 (610 mm) H x 43 (1081 mm.) D x 30 (762 mm.) W.
Voltage 415V/50HZ/3Ph. +N.
Model TRI-STAR 24 PCS.
8. Poly buck shelf truck. Model 90P Regular. 32 2 bushels. 3 casters, 2 swivel
and 2 stationary. Size 48 x 28.5 x 62 H. Grids can be turned horizontally to
act as shelves or vertically to make bulk carts.
9. Electrically heated, professional, steel ironing board. Complete with 3.3 kw
steam generator and air vacuum motor 0.3 HP. Supplied with 800 watts steam
electric iron. Enamel finished steel. Wire and hose hanging rod. Undershelf.
Work table size 112 x 42 x 26 cm. Overall dim 160 x 50 x 95 cm.
415V/50HZ/3ph. Model S/AAR.
10. Steam heated vacuum rectangular ironing table. With built-in vacuum, steam
gun, iron arm and attachment. Enamel finished steel. 415/50/3ph+N. Overall
dim 160 x 79 x 104 cm. Model S/AARM 3.3 kw.
E. W-BOILER ROOM
1. Water softener. Model FB-450-900
- Description: Time clock controlled water softener complete with:
S.T.H.
Timed downflow brining saves salt ad provides greater iron removal

capacity.
Salt usage is fully adjustable.
Guest button for temporary additional soft water needs.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-8
___________________________________________________________________________
Automatic built-in by-pass for uninterrupted water service during

regeneration cycle.
Fiberglass mineral tanks and polyethylene brine tanks.
2. Condensate Return System.

3. Blow Off Separator.
4. Heavy duty, 50 BHP, vertical oil fired steam 2 boilers. Model ICS-50.
-
Capacity 783 kgs/hr.

Fuel type: oil
Burner voltage: 415/50/3.
Type: Steam.
Output (bhp): 50
Design pressure: 150 psi (10.55 kg./cm2 or 10.34 bar)
Control voltage: 220/50/1.
Standard Features:
-
Complete Fulton burner assembly.

Control panel with wiring diagram.
Operating pressure control.
High limit pressure control.
2 x probe type water cut off devices.
Fulton water guage glass assembly.
Pump motor starter relay.
Designed and built to ASME code.
Standard Trim:
5.
Heavy duty, electric driven, air compressor.

-
S.T.H.
Blowndown valves for water column.

Steam safety valve.
Water stop valve.
Y-type blowdown valve.
Stack adapter with gasket.
Steam pressure guage with inspection cocks.
Water guage glass protector.
Instruction manual with ASME certificate.
Feed water inlet: 25 mm.
Boiler dia.: 1400 mm.
Overall boiler depth: 1981 mm.
Boiler height: 2223 mm.
Shipping weight: 6526 lbs./2966 kgs.
Tank
Displacement
:
:
500 Ltrs.
635 L/M (29.7 CFM)

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-9
___________________________________________________________________________
-
Work Pressure
:
10 BAR
Stages
:
Two
Cylinders
:
Two
Motor
:
7.5 HP.
Power
:
400/50/3ph.
Model PARTNER 500/BK 119-7.5
X-LINEN STORE, SEWING & UNIFORM STORE

1. Wooden cupboard
By OTHERS.
2. Wooden cabinet
BY OTHERS.
3. Single needle lockswitch sewing machine, automatic

lubrication, reverse lever, 5,000 s.p.m. With table and
motor 220/50/1ph. Model 2491D.
4. 4 tier anodized aluminum frame with removable poly

slats-shelving system. As per Drawing.
Lot
5. Flat garment conveyor. 250 slots. 400 cm. length. White

colour. Hand control, Emergency/Certified control box &
inverter.
6. Counter
(BY OTHERS)
F-
Y- ACCESSORIES
1. Electronic flying insects exterminator. With 2 tube
and 6 pack of glue board. 40 watts. For indoors or
undercover use only. Dim 61.5 x 10 x 28 cm. 240/50/1.
Model 806967.
2. Hand wash basin with upstand height 540mm

Stainless steel construction.
Well 345 x 245 mm, depth 120mm
Knee-operated control
Mixer tap with non-return valves
Supplied with siphon and flexible connecting hose for
connection of mitigated water to swan neck.
Dim: 44 x 34 x 54cm.
Model: 806382
3.
S.T.H.
Heavy duty, polymer, bushel laundry truck; with 4 castors.

Capacity 250 Ltrs. Dim 97 x 67 x 74 cm. Model PT02.

LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
11650-10
___________________________________________________________________________
4.
Collapsible garment rack. 1 tubling, 48, hangrail with

12 pull-out rods. Height is adjustable at 55, 60 and 65.
Includes clips for hangrail storage and protective rubber
bumpers. Model RCS/1.
16
5.
-
Stainless steel grating top grid with frame only.

Installation by others.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

MATERIALS/SUPPLIERS SCHEDULES
11950-1
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1.
1.
1.2.
1.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The tender documents and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this
SCHEDULES
The following schedules have been prepared for the guidance of the Contractor,
and generally indicate three choices. The Contractor is required to use these
schedules in conjunction with all the Drawings, Specifications and Bills of
Quantities.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.
1.3
A.
Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation

accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller
shades.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including
shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 250 mm
long.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
1.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1.
2.
3.
F.
S.T.H.
Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
Shadeband Material: Not less than 250 mm square. Mark inside face of material
if applicable.
Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 400 mm wide by 900 mm long
for each type of roller shade indicated.
Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 250 mm long.
Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1.4
A.
B.
Product Certificates:
manufacturer.
C.
Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1.5
A.
1.6
For each type of shadeband material, signed by product
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
1.7
A.
1.8

Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work
in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable
glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Engineer of installation conditions
that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS

Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch
that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and
lubricated.
1.
Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.

a.
b.
c.
2.
Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade

weight and lifting heavy roller shades.
a.
B.
Crank-Handle Type: Permanently mounted.

Crank-Handle Length: Manufacturer's standard.
Spring Operating Mechanisms: Roller contains spring sized to accommodate shade size
indicated. Provide with positive locking mechanism that can stop shade movement at
each half-turn of roller and with manufacturer's standard pull.
1.
D.
Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 4.5 kg or for shades as
recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.
Crank-and-Gear Operating Mechanisms: Sealed gearbox drive system controlled by

crank handle.
1.
2.
C.
Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.

Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.
Pole:
Manufacturer's standard type in length required to make operation
convenient from floor level and with hook for engaging pull.
Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall

thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of
shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end
assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for
service.
1.
2.
3.
Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade.

Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
E.
Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and
conditions indicated.
F.
Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller driveend assembly.
S.T.H.

_____________________________________________________________________________
G.
Shadebands:
1.
2.
Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric.

Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a.
b.
H.
Installation Accessories:
1.
Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
b.
7.
8.
Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and

shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than height indicated on
Drawings.
Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel.
Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation
at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to
wall clip without fasteners.
a.
6.
Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and

shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than height indicated on
Drawings.
Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for
recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end
plates, and removable bottom closure panel.
a.
5.
Shape: Curved.
Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and
shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 102 mm.
Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front

fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.
a.
S.T.H.
Type: Exposed with endcaps.

Color and Finish: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
Closure-Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings.
Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of
shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides
or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.
Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light
gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.
Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full
range.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.2
SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A.
Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
B.
Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.

Type: 62% Acrylic, 31% Polyester, 7% Viscose, blackout fabric.
Roll Width: 1400 mm.
Orientation on Shadeband: As indicated on Drawings.
Features: Washable.
Color: As indicated on Drawings.
ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A.
Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1,
including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and
warning labels.
B.
Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 23 deg C:
1.
2.
C.
Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent

possible except as follows:
1.
2.
3.
S.T.H.
Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of

opening in which shade is installed less 6 mm per side or 13-mm total, plus or
minus 3.1 mm. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in
which shade is installed less 6 mm, plus or minus 3.1 mm.
Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other
defined vertical separations between openings.
Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater

than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length
to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement
without distortion of the material.
Skylight Shades:
Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along
shadeband as required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full
range of movement without distortion or sag of material.
Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the
required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as
required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s)
plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
3.2
A.
ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.3
A.
3.4
Opaque Shade bands: Located so shade band is not closer than 51 mm to interior
face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
ADJUSTING
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from
binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
A.
Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
C.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by

Engineer, before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-1
_____________________________________________________________________
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
These specifications cover the complete supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of elevators specified in the schedule to be used in this project
as manufactured by an approved manufacturer and in accordance with the
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and subject to his approval.
The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, plant and equipment,
engineering supervision, design, calculation, shop drawing and everything
required for design, procurement, fabrication, delivery to site, offloading, setting
out, placing into position, testing and commissioning of all materials to
complete the lift, escalator and inclined passenger conveyor work referred to
below and as required by the Drawings and Specification in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
1.2
1.2.1
PASSENGER ELEVATOR GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

General
The contractor shall supply, install, test and commissioning and hand over the
complete elevator installation as specified and in accordance with of EN 81
elevator safety code
The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are
given in the schedules at the end of the specifications.
The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit
breakers provided in the machine room for this purpose. All the works shall be
co-ordinate with the other contractors prior to installation, so that there will be
no areas of incompatibility.
The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated
traction equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other
equipment and accessories required to provide a complete, modern, durable
and efficient vertical transport system.
All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical
system of the building, as specified under electrical section.
All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under
prevailing environment condition at site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the
elevator for a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Engineer
of the complete elevator installation and shall include for cleaning, oiling and
inspection of the elevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one
month and to include for all emergency calls throughout the 24 hours of the day
through the failure of the elevator to operate normally.
A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately
after each monthly inspection cleaning and greasing.
The contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive
immediate attention on the day of the notification.
1.2.2
Requirements of Installation
The elevators shall be supplied and installed by an approved manufacturer to
the Engineers approval.
The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the building contract
and the main contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection
with the specialist sub contract.
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-2
_____________________________________________________________________
1.2.3
Builders Work and Attendance

The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the
elevator sub contractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator
installation.
The main contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual
facilities for the execution of the specialist subcontract.
1.2.3.1 Related Works

The following represents a list of related work items that are not provided by
the Lift Contractor and as such the Main Contractor (or Construction Manager)
must ensure that these items, along with any others required, are included as
part of their overall scope.
1. Power of necessary characteristics during erection of all devices to provide
illumination, operation of required tools, hoists and power for starting,
testing and adjusting of equipment.
2. Concrete and steel work required for fire rated and plumb shafts, machine
(or controller) rooms (including structural slabs for overhead units). Lift
shafts will be constructed without projections or recesses on the inside of
the shaft.
3. Supports to carry all structural reaction, impact and uplift loads imposed by
the equipment.
4. Masonry and grouting of lift shaft entrances and landing sills.
5. Pit access ladders and equipment hoist beams as required.
6. Waterproofing to keep pits dry.
7. Lift machine room, controller room and pit access doors for lifts. Doors
shall be fire-resistive, self-closing, self-locking and permit the door to be
opened from inside without a key.
8. Finishing coat of paint on all prime coat entrance frames and door panels
as provided by Lift Contractor.
9. Finished flooring in passenger lifts unless otherwise specified to be by
Division 14. This Section shall be responsible for engineering the
equipment to accommodate the weight of the finished flooring, ensuring
that hoist machines and sub-flooring are adequately constructed. This
Section must co-ordinate and schedule installation of the finished flooring
with Division 9 as required.
10. Permanent heating, ventilation, air conditioning necessary to keep Machine
Room / Lift Shaft and Controller Room temperature below 30C.
11. Installation of drains in lift, escalator and passenger conveyor pits to
ensure pits remain dry.
12. Proper electric feeder wires to lift as determined by supplier, including
mainline switches, circuit breakers or fuses, and supplementary disconnect
switches at remote locations (where required). Required outlets or feeder
wires to controllers as for signal circuit, car lights, fans and in pit for pit and
shaft lighting.
13. Provision of conduit between the lift shafts, lift machine rooms and lift
remote control panel(s) including the installation of wiring. Wiring shall be
supplied by Division 14.
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-3
_____________________________________________________________________
14. Provide lighting and receptacle outlets within machine and controller
rooms, lift pits. Minimum light level of 200 lux at machine and controller
room floor levels and in front of each controller and 100 lux at lift pit floor
level. Locate light switch inside machine (or controller) room, adjacent to
access door, and within pit adjacent to access ladder or pit access door.
15. Provide shaft lighting including wiring, conduit, fixtures and control switches
required for same. Coordinate installation of these fixtures with the lift
contractor including carrying of costs to have lift contractor operate lift
where electrical contractor proposes to install these device from the lift car
top (or platform).
16. Building lightning protection terminal in the lift machine room and pit.
17. For all lifts provide 3-Phase and single phase emergency power to all
feeders within the machine room and controller rooms. While it is not
anticipated to have all lifts operate on emergency power, final sequencing
to establish the number of lifts operating on emergency power remains to
be confirmed.
18. Two (2) advance warning transfer signals from the emergency power
transfer switch to the lift machine room in accordance with the following:
Signals will warn of impending transfer from normal to emergency
power (under test conditions) for signal 1, and from emergency power
to normal power (at all times) for signal 2.
Signals will consist of a set of contacts which open at the start of the
time delay and return to the closed position once the time has expired
and transfer of power sources has occurred.
Allow for a pre-transfer warning signal of 20 seconds although time will
be adjustable in increments of 5 seconds between 0 sec and 120
seconds.
Signal wires are to be brought to the lift controllers for termination by
Division 14.
19. Lift emergency power transfer switch will be provided with an in phase
monitoring device to ensure available power sources (emergency and
normal) are in phase prior to switch transferring.
20. Three (3) sets of individual fire alarm signals to each Lift Machine Room.
These signals include:
Primary Recall Signal, generated by all Building fire alarm sensors and
devices, except those located at the main recall lobby.
Alternative Recall Level Signal, from a designated smoke detector in
the main lift lobby which will initiate recall of lifts to the nearest adjacent
floor to primary recall level.
Machine Room/ Controller Room/ Hoistway Fire, from smoke detectors
within both elevator controller rooms along with fire sensing devices in
the hoistways and pits. Controller room smoke detector must be
provided with a set of dry (auxiliary) contacts, wired directly to elevator
Controller, and tied into building's fire alarm system. Fire signal from
controller room smoke detector must terminate on different controller
terminals as coordinated with Division 14. Fire sensing devices within
hoist way and pit areas would be programmed to initiate the same
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-4
_____________________________________________________________________
signal as is generated from the controller room smoke detector.
Division 14 and 26 Contractors must coordinate the final configuration
of signal wires from these fire sensing devices.
21. Other Than the Above mentioned general items; The Main Contractor shall
Provide the following particular requirement of to the Lift contractor such
as:
a. Related builders works, including wire mesh partition, shaft lighting
and ladder in pit, rail guard/mesh/safety chain in the machine
room.
b. Permanent 3 phase 415V 50 Hz and 1 PH 240V 50Hz TPN + SPN
circuit breakers of required capacity etc. in the lift machine room.
c.
Hoisting beam/hooks in the machine room roof slab.
d. Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and

security / reception for elevator interphone supervisory panel.
e. Sufficient weather proof lockable storage accommodation to store
the elevator materials at ground floor near elevator shaft.
f.
Normally open free sensing contacts with wiring from fire alarm
panel to elevator shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire
is required.
g. Supply and installation of tubular free standing scaffolding in Pit as

required inside the elevator shafts with working platform and
removal thereof.
h. Carnage facility for unloading lifts materials from containers and
shifting the same to various floors and machine room.
1.2.4
i.
Temporary power supply for installation and testing purposes up to

shaft and machine room with breakers.
j.
Corian / Marble flooring in the lift cabin.
k.
Lifts Entrance Safety Protection During construction
As fitted Drawings and Services Manuals

On completion of the elevators installation and at least one week prior to the
date of inspection, the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as fitted
elevator installation drawings. Two sets of instruction manuals for general
running and maintenance and repair are to be provided.
1.2.5
Capacity
Each elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete
car cable and ropes and in accordance with the attached schedule.
1.2.6
Speed
The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the schedule.
1.2.7
Traction Machine
The motor shall be permanent magnet synchronous motor to provide highest
possible efficiency. The system shall combine VVVF control utilizing vector
control and IGBT transistors. The traction sheave shall be made of suitable
material to provide good wearing properties of both ropes and sheaves.
The DC operated electromagnetic double independent brakes shall be
provided. The brake shoes being electrically held off the brake drum and
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-5
_____________________________________________________________________
mechanically
applied by compression springs. A manual break release shall
be provided to facilitate hand movement of the lift.
The permanent magnet synchronous motor efficiency shall be 92 - 95% and
have a zero slip factor.
Motor protection for the hoisting motor against overheating and burning. If the
hoisting motor starts to overheat, the elevator car is driven to the nearest
possible floor where the doors will be opened to let the passenger out of the
car. After the motor cools down the elevator will resume normal operation.
The machine should be fixed to the rail at the upper part of the shaft, isolated
by isolation pads in case of machine room less type and on the machine room
when a machine room is used.
The winding insulation levels of the motors shall be of insulation Class

F and the motors shall meet the requirements of EN 81.
1.2.8
Motor Drive
The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive {VVVF} unit will
control the motor speed using a microprocessor.
The VVVF system will be provided with a converter which performs AC
to DC conversion and an inverter which is designed to invert DC to
three phase variable frequency AC. The inverter will give an output of
sinusoidal current by application of pulse width modulation technology.
The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and
accurately in accordance with speed command signal, which is
performed by a microprocessor in the elevator controller.
The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service
under the following condition;
Supply Line Voltage Fluctuation:
voltage
Frequency Variation
- 10% + 5 % from the rated
- + 2% from the rated frequency
The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contractors for removing the
power from the motor of the traction machine. The Contractors will open
each time the car stops. The brake of the traction machine will be
applied while the contact drops out.
A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The
difference between the speed command signal and the actual speed
measured by the pulse rotary encoder will control the motor speed while
the car is accelerating, decelerating and landing.
Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the
VVVF unit and the motor of the traction machine to stop the elevator
when one of the following conditions occurs:
Phase reversal; phase failure, failure of supply voltage, over current,
overheating of thyristor and transistor, operation of any safety device.
1.2.9
Control System
The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a
computerized controller.
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-6
_____________________________________________________________________
A computer controlled regulator will control the car speed by comparing the
actual car speed detected by a pulse rotary encoder with an ideal speed
pattern generated by a microprocessor.
While the car is accelerating the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated by
the microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.
While the car is decelerating the microprocessor will calculate and provide the
ideal speed pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.
At landing a smooth landing pattern will be generated by microprocessor and
as soon as the car has stopped the mechanical brake will be applied to hold
the car.
1.2.10
Operation & Control Selective Collective Operation

1. The operation will be of the selective collective type (simplex, Duplex,
triplex or four car Group Control) as mentioned in the schedule for
each group of elevators. The operating equipment will consist of a
series of micro tough button in each car number to correspond to the
various landings, a single riser of UP and DOWN buttons at the
intermediate landings and single button at the terminal landings, all
connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor selection
and direction of travel to supply the operation described below.
2. One car will be normally parked with doors closed at the main floor and
the other will be a FREE car which parks with doors closed at its last
call floor.
3. Each car will answer its car calls of all floors respectively.
4. The microprocessor calculates penalty values for such things as by
passing reversal and response by distantly positioned elevators and
assigns the call to the elevator that will minimize the total penalty
value.
5. Response to hall calls will be on the basis of same direction priority
response, nearest long waiting time prevention, car bunching
prevention etc.
1.2.11
Hoistway Equipment
(A) GUIDE RAILS
For smooth running of the counterweight and the elevator car, guide rails with
steel tee sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of the elevator
shaft. The rails shall rest on the hoistway pit to prevent exerting any physical
forces on hoistway ceiling or walls of the building.
Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created on
temperature variations.
(B) HOISTING ROPES.
Bright steel wire ropes with fiber cores of adequate cross section
manufacture to EN 81 or steel wire ropes with adequate cross section,
manufactured to EN81.
(C) GOVERNOR ROPES
These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. The two ends shall be
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-7
_____________________________________________________________________
securely linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The
governor ropes shall be tensioned by a weight loaded device located in the
pit.
(D) COUNTERWEIGHT
Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance the
weight of the car and the specified capacity.
(E) BUFFERS
Oil type buffers shall be fitted in the hoistway pit beneath both car and the
counterweight. These shall be securely mounted on continuous RS channels
and correctly disposed relative to the car and the counterweight.
The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to
provide very high safety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to
the top of the plunger to withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates mounted
on the underside of the car and the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be
provided to check the oil level.
Polyurethane Type buffers shall be provided for speeds 60 MPM and below
only.
1.2.12
Travelling Cables
The travelling cables shall be 300/500V grade multi core with stranded high
conductivity copper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty and
manufactured to EN 81. These cables shall be properly supported by retaining
straps and individual cable clamps.
1.2.13
Safety Equipment
The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system,
over speed centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.
The operation of the system shall be such that if the car over speeds in the
downward direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It
shall, in sequence cut off the motor power supply, apply normal brakes and
engage the safety gear jibs when the safety gear jibs engage with the car
guides. It shall apply a constant retarding force to bring the car to a gradual and
smooth stop within defined limits.
Re setting of the safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in
upward direction.
The complete system shall comply with the relevant sections of EN 81 elevator
safety code
A) OVER TRAVEL
Over travel limit switches shall be provide at the top and bottom of the terminal
landings of disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to bring the car to
safe stop position in the event of an over travel in either direction.
B) EVACUATION DEVICES
Provision shall be made to move the car manually from the machine room to a
nearest landing in either direction to facilitate evacuation of passengers during
a power failure.
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-8
_____________________________________________________________________
C) FIREMAN EMERGENCY OPERATION
Fire Emergency operation key switch shall be installed near the entrance of the
main landing and shall operate any one of the elevators under conditions of
emergency in the event of fire. This operation shall be in Full compliance to
Dubai Civil Defense requirements
When the fireman emergency call button is pressed, it shall immediately
disconnect the elevator under normal automatic operation and the car shall
return to the main landing. It shall not register any hall calls, so that the
passenger will not wait for the elevator. The car shall then only operate on the
attendant operation and it shall start registering the car calls.
1.2.14
Elevator Car
The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and
other facilities shall be as called for in the schedule. The car shall be of rigid
steel framework with sound isolation designed and manufactured all in
accordance with relevant sections of EN81.
The operating buttons and keys shall be as given in the relevant section of the
specification. The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in addition
to the items already specified.
A) VENTILATION
Electric ventilation mounted on car roof with proper vents to be provided.
B) EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Self contained, non maintained emergency light, with a trickle charger.
C) EMERGENCY EXIT
An emergency exit shall be provided on car roof. This door shall be able to
open either inside or outside. A safety electrical switch shall be provided to
prevent the car travelling when this emergency exit is open.
D) INTERCOMMUNICATON SYSTEM
Intercommunication system between the car, main landing and the machine
room.
E) WORKING PLATFORM
A working platform, complying with EN 81 shall be provided on the roof of the
car.
F) CAR AND LANDING DOORS
The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic, two panel, centre opening
automatic sliding doors. The finish of the doors shall be as specified in the
schedule.
G) DOOR OPERATOR
The door operator shall be variable speed controlled AC motor with VVVF
control suitable for the specified heavy duty. It shall be estimated to work
800,000 starts per year door technical details with the required proof
certificates shall be submitted for consultant approval. The inverter shall
include high speed switching device which in turn shall provide a smooth sine
curve of output current to assure smooth, quite and precise door control. The
opening and closing speeds of the doors shall be adjustable. The landing and
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-9
_____________________________________________________________________
car doors shall operate in full synchronism advance door opening during cars
approach to a landing could be used to speed up passenger transfer.
H) SAFETY FEATURES
Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation and maintenance
work.
Manual opening of the doors from inside the car, within landing zones during
power failure.
Electronic curtain of light shall be fixed to the sill of the car doors to reverse the
doors when there is any obstruction for closing.
Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car doors, so that
elevators cannot operate unless doors are closed.
Overload indicator with buzzer. If the car is overloaded it shall prevent from
starting. The blinking overload indicator and the sounding buzzer shall signal
the overload condition to the passengers.
Emergency light with trickle charger.
1.2.15
Testing
On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions
shall be carried out in the presence of and to the approval of the engineer.
All materials used must be of the highest quality and best of their respective
kinds and must comply with the relevant EN 81. All weights necessary to carry
out the full load and overload tests must be provided by the contractor and
removed after use.
The tests will include the following:
No load current and voltage readings both on UP and DOWN circuits.
Full load current and voltage readings both on UP and DOWN circuits.
Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
Overload protection.
Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
All interlocks.
Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
Safety gear mechanism.
Speeds on up and down travel with loading and empty.
Door contacts.
Final terminal stopping device.
Normal terminal stopping device.
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-10
_____________________________________________________________________
Insulation and earth continuity.
1.2.16
Operating Panels and Indicators

A) CAR OPERATING PANEL
The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:
Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with
acknowledge light for each button.
Emergency call button.
Intercom station.
Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.
B) LANDING POSITION INDICATOR
Car position indicator shall be provided for each car, in the car and over the
main landing entrance of each elevator. As the elevator travels through the
hoistway, its position shall be indicated by the illumination of the numeral/letter
corresponding to the landing at which the elevator is stopped or passing.
Indicators shall be properly designed for better recognition with color filters to
provide good contrast. Travel direction indicators shall also be included in this
indicator.
C) PUSH BUTTONS AND INDICATORS FOR LANDING

1) Up and down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call had
been registered.
2) Hall indicators / call buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.
3) Fire alarm call switch at the main landing.
1.2.17
Car and Landing Sills

Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every landing
entrance and on the car platform for the entire width of the door opening.
These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the
door panels. The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the
landing sills securely fitted to the entrance threshold. These sills shall be
flushed with the finished floor level.
The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads
exerting on them, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate
appearance.
1.2.18
Electrical Installation of Elevators

General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in
the electrical specifications. GI trunking shall be used wherever possible
instead of multiple conduits. GI conduits and flexible conduits shall be used
between trunking and apparatus.
Earthing of all the equipment shall be carried out as specified in electrical
specification and as per IEE regulations.
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-11
_____________________________________________________________________
Distribution equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and
circuits.
These shall include overload protection, short circuit protection, single
phasing protection etc as appropriate.
1.2.19
Maintenance and Guarantee

The contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the lifts at his own
expense for duration of one year starting from the date of issue of the
completion certificate. Maintenance shall include replacement of parts or whole
equipment that show manufacturing installation defects during operation or due
to normal wear and tear.
The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any
manufacturing or installation defects for a period of one year starting from the
date of issue of the completion certificate.
1.3
1.3.1
Quality Assurance
Approved Manufacturers for passenger elevators
1. KONE
2. Otis
3. Mitsubishi
1.3.2
Bidders must provide the following on company letterhead with their tender:
1. Description of the proposed equipment for all different lift types specified,
clearly indicating which model is included in the bid.
2. Description, make and model of control system for each lift group, identifying
which options have been included in the bid and which options have not been
included.
3. Description, make and model of drive system.
4. Location of manufacture.
1.3.3
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with requirements of the latest

edition (including supplements or updates) of British Standard BS EN 81-1,
Part 1 Electric Lifts
1.3.4
In addition to the above, Work shall be performed in accordance with

applicable local, national and international, building standards, codes,
regulations, ordinances and by-laws.
1.3.5
Obtain and pay for required design submission registration, inspection and
permit, except operation and ownership permits, and make such tests as called
for by regulations of such authorities. Tests shall be made in presence of
authorized representatives of such authorities, the Consultant and the Client's
authorized representative(s).
1.3.6
All lift work shall be performed by properly trained and skilled mechanics in the
direct employ of the units manufacturer or authorized Installation Company.
1.4
OPERATIONAL AND SPECIAL FEATURES FOR ALL ELEVATORS
1.4.1
Fireman's Emergency Operation:
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-12
_____________________________________________________________________
When the fireman's switch is activated during the fire, all calls are cancelled
and the designated car returns immediately to a specified floor to facilitate
rescue afterwards, the car responds only to car calls. This operation shall also
be effected upon receiving a signal from the fire alarm panel.
1.4.2
Car Arrival gong:

An electronic gong sounds to inform waiting passengers of the car arrival and
shall be part of the landing signalization, which shall be fixed at all floors above
the door.
1.4.3
Interphone:
Interphone for three way communication between the elevator cabins, machine
room and security personnel at ground floor lobby near the elevator entrance.
1.4.4
Overload holding stop:

When the car load exceeds pre-determined capacity, the elevator will stop its
operation with the doors open at the floor and a buzzer will sound. The buzzer
will stop when enough passengers have excited the car to reduce the load to
below the excess capacity.
1.4.5
Curtain of lights:
Each elevator shall be equipped with a curtain of lights fixed on the car door
sill. When a passenger or an object passes through the infra-red beams, the
closing doors will be opened immediately.
1.4.6
Automatic door open time adjustment:

The system judges the situation whether each car stops responding to a car
call or a hall call and controls the time of the doors stay open accordingly the
time spent waiting for the elevator is thereby shortened and operating efficiency
is increased.
1.4.7
Door Nudging Feature:

In the event of any door safety device malfunction, a temporary override
function is to be automatically engaged to close the doors, thereby preventing a
fault in elevator operation. Once the doors close completely, the override has to
be cleared and normal operation resumes.
1.4.8
Next Landing Facility with Main Power Supply Uninterrupted:

If an elevator door becomes jammed fro some reason (ex. A pebble) and
passengers are unable to get off at the desired floor. The elevator automatically
proceeds to the next floor with functioning doors closed in order that the
passenger does not get stranded at the affected floor.
1.4.9
Safe Landing with Main Power Supply Uninterrupted:

This feature is so designed to prevent passengers from being stranded in the
car when an elevator malfunctions and stops between the floors. The source of
this malfunction has to be automatically searched out and when the elevator
operation is determined to be safe, the car shall proceed to the nearest safe
landing at reduced speed and the doors then open.
1.4.10
Emergency Landing Device:

Emergency landing device, which will bring the elevators to the nearest landing
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-13
_____________________________________________________________________
in the event of power failure and keep the doors open for evacuation of
passengers. Thereafter, the elevators will discontinue its operation until
restoration of normal power supply.
1.4.11
Car call cancelling:

When a car responds to the final car call in up or down direction, the system
automatically checks for clears the remaining calls from memory thus keeping
operating efficiency high.
1.4.12
Door Sensor Self Diagnosis:

If a non contact door sensor fails, the system will automatically determine the
timing of the door closing to maintain the elevator service.
1.4.13
Emergency Car Lighting:

Turns on immediately when normal power fails, providing a minimum level of
illumination within the car.
1.4.14
Additional features to be provided if not covered in lift schedule Section

142100
Expediting of door close.
Repeating of door close.
Re open with hall button.
Door open and door close buttons
Half back wall clear mirror.
Brushed finished stainless steel handrail on rear side of the cabin.
DC alarm bell.
Hand winding operation for emergency purposes.
Safety
: Gradual type
Buffers
: Oil type
Guide Rails
: Steel tee sections
Counter Weights
: Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel frame.
Power Supply
Lighting Supply
: 415 volts 3 phase 50 Hertz for Elevator Equipment.

: 230 volts 1 phase 50 Hertz for cabins lighting and
Ventilation.
End of Section
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-14
_____________________________________________________________________
SCHEDULE
SECTION 142100
LIFTS SCHEDULE
1.
VISITORmLIFTS
L17,L18,L19,L20,L21,L22,L23&
L24
Designation (LIFT ID)
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
Lift type (passenger, goods, fire fighting, scenic, vehicle, bed)
LOAD Q (kg)
MAIN BUILDING
8
Passenger
2000 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
26
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
1.6 m / s
EN81-1
LIFT MACHINERY / CONTROLLER

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Operation ( Simplex , Duplex , Triplex , Four Car Group etc)
Number of stops and openings
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
Hoistway size [ Width (W) x Depth (D) ]
(mm)
Not Applicable
Machine Room Less Gearless
Permanent Magnet Synchronous
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Duplex
9/9
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4
none
As per drawings
5200mm x 3200mm / Common
shaft
Pit Depth (mm)
1900 mm
Overhead Height (mm)
4500 mm
Machine Room Height (mm)

STEEL DIVIDER BEAMS (if required)
STEEL DIVIDER BEAMS ADAPTORS (if required)
CAR SLING
COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETY GEAR
PIT LADDER
COUNTERWEIGHT SCREEN
LIFT DIVIDING SCREEN
Shaft lights & sockets
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
Car: Width (W) x Depth (D))
1500 mm x 2700 mm X 2400mm
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-15
_____________________________________________________________________
Brushed finished Stainless Steel ,
from lift Manufacture standard
range
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
Silver Etched Stainless Steel
REAR WALL FINISHES
FLOOR FINISHES
CAR CEILING MODEL / FINISH
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
MAXIMUM ALLOWANCE FOR LOCAL FINISHES (KG)
DOORS:
DOOR TYPE (CENTRE OPENING OR SIDE OPENING)
DOOR SIZE (Width X Height)
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
LANDING DOOR FINISHES

MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS
LANDING DOORS JAMPS ( SHAPE AND FINISH):
MAIN FLOOR (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow Jambs)
OTHERS (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow Jambs)
LANDING SILL MATERIAL ( Aluminum or St/St)

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
LANDING DOORS FIRE RATING
LANDING SIGNALISATION:
S.T.H.
25 mm recess to accept Flooring

by Main contractor
Suspended ceiling. LED Round
Spot lights In Stainless steel,
Ventilation by means of electric
blower.
To be selected from
Supplier Standard Range
Out Blowing Electric type
100mm Finished with same fishes
of Front wall
Partial Height Partial width, on the
rear wall
One row of Round shape Curved
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring
Power operated 2 panel Central

Opening
1100 x 2100
AC motor with electronic VVVF
control 800,000 Door Cycle Per
Year
HEAVY
DUTY
DOOR
OPERATOR
Silver Etched Stainless Steel ,
range
Brushed Finished Stainless Steel ,
range
Wide frames in Brushed Finished
Stainless
Steel
from
lift
Manufacture standard range
Narrow
frames
in
Brushed
Finished Stainless Steel from lift
Extruded hard Aluminum

Curtain of Light Full door length
Not less than 120 minutes (UK
Two hours) at all floors

ELEVATOR
142000-16
_____________________________________________________________________
LANDING CALL STATIONS
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
Micro movement push button with

call accepted light, to be placed in
the center area between two
Elevators
Elevators
Black Acrylic with Stainless steel
Frame ,
OVAL
St/St Round, Flush Mounted
Yes
White Lighting
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
BUTTON TYPE (Square or Round, Flush or Surface)
CALL REGISTERED BUZZER
COLOUR
HALL LANTERNS / INDICATORS
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
LCD position Indicator with

Directional Arrows on top of the
Landing Door
Frame
Top of the Landing door
Rectangular
White Lighting
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
LCD
position Indicator with
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALIZATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL
One Car operating panel to the full

height, with call buttons of micro
stroke click type, which will
illuminate In White color on
registration of a call. Faceplate
will be in Black Acrylic with
Stainless steel Frame , Surface
mounted.
Side Walls
2
Black Acrylic Brushed Stainless
steel
YES
CAR OPERATING PANEL LOCATION

NUMBER OF CAR OPERATION PANELS (EACH CAR)
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION INDICATOR ( LCD or Dot Matrix )
OVERLOAD
FLASHING LIGHT/BUZZER
COLOR
INTERCOM
S.T.H.
INDICATION
LCD with Directional arrows

BY
YES
White Lighting
Hands free

ELEVATOR
142000-17
_____________________________________________________________________
1.
CONTROLLER FEATURES:
VISITORmLIFTS
L17,L18,L19,L20,L21,L22,L23&
L24
YES (ZONE 1A)
EAQ Earthquake interfacing only
YES
Priority Key switch inside car

Emergency battery drive , automatic
YES
Firemans drive Key Switch, to operate the lifts during Fire
YES
Fire detection, whole building, alternative return floor, doors open
YES
Emergency intercom car-machine room -control room
YES
Door close button
YES
Accurate relevelling, automatic
YES
Two touch car call cancel
YES
Operation of car light, automatic, switch to turn off
YES
Operation of car ventilation, automatic, switch to turn off
YES
Provision for loudspeaker in car
YES
Out of service switch in car, doors open, lights on, indication
Yes
Parking at pre-defined floor, doors closed
Yes (G)
Car call registered buzzer
YES
BMS Interfacing (Elevator Link)

Elevator Monitoring & Control system
Handicap Requirements
YES
YES
YES
Advance door opening
YES
Nudging service, by measuring load
YES
Emergency stop switch on car roof
YES
Emergency stop switch in well, one switch
YES
Car calls from machine room
YES
Buttons to operate car doors for service purposes on car roof
YES
Alarm bell at main floor
YES
Alarm bell under/top of car
YES
Car emergency lighting, separate light
YES
Emergency exit contact in car
YES
Buffer switch
YES
Correction drive feature
YES
Car roof blocking device switch
YES
Motor protection, thermistors with automatic reset
YES
2.
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
Lift type (passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle,
bed)
LOAD Q (kg)
S.T.H.
INPATIENT LIFTS L2,L4,L6

REAR WALL IN TRANSPARENT
GLASS
MAIN BUILDING
3
Passenger
2000 Kg

ELEVATOR
142000-18
_____________________________________________________________________
LOAD (PERSONS)
26
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
1.6 m / s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Operation ( Simplex , Duplex , Triplex , Four Car Group
etc)
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
(mm)
Not Applicable
Permanent
Magnet
Synchronous motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
9/9
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4
none
As per drawings
2900mm x 3400mm / For each
lift
Pit Depth (mm)
1900 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1600 mm x 2500 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
S.T.H.
Brushed
finished
Stainless
Steel , from lift Manufacture
standard range
Transparent glass with Brushed
stainless steel frame
25 mm recess to accept
Flooring by Main contractor
blower. To be selected from
100mm Finished with same
fishes of Front wall
Partial Height Partial width, on
the rear wall

ELEVATOR
142000-19
_____________________________________________________________________
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION

MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS
MAIN FLOOR (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow
Jambs)

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
LANDING SIGNALIZATION:
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
S.T.H.
One row of Round

Curved on the rear wall
100kg for flooring
shape

Opening
1200 x 2100
Year HEAVY DUTY DOOR
OPERATOR
range
Brushed Finished Stainless
standard range
Wide
frames
in
Brushed
Finished Stainless Steel from
lift Manufacture standard range
Narrow frames in Brushed
Finished Stainless Steel from

Micro movement push button

with call accepted light, to be
placed in the center area
between two Elevators
Black Acrylic with Stainless
steel Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
Directional Arrows on top of
the Landing Door

ELEVATOR
142000-20
_____________________________________________________________________
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
OVERLOADmINDICATIONmBY
COLOR
INTERCOM
3.


steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Directional Arrows on top of
the Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
One Car operating panel to the

full height, with call buttons of
micro stroke click type, which
will illuminate In White color on
mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
INPATIENT LIFTS L2,L4 & L6
YES (ZONE 1A)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-21
_____________________________________________________________________
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
1.
SERVICE LIFTS L9~L16
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
MAIN BUILDING
8
Service
800 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
10
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
1.6 m / s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
(mm)
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Duplex
9/9
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4
none
As per drawings
3800mm x 2300mm / Common
shaft
Pit Depth (mm)
1500 mm
4500 mm
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-22
_____________________________________________________________________
CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1200 mm x 1450 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
Brushed finished Stainless Steel
SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES

FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION

MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS
S.T.H.

,
Rubber
flooring
from
Manufacturer standard range of
designs
blower.
To be selected from
the rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening
800 x 2100
Year
HEAVY
DUTY
DOOR
OPERATOR
Brushed Finished Stainless Steel
Wide
frames
in
Brushed

ELEVATOR
142000-23
_____________________________________________________________________

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS

, from lift Manufacture standard
range
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
S.T.H.


placed in the center area between
two Elevators
two Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

ELEVATOR
142000-24
_____________________________________________________________________
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM
2.


mounted.
Side Walls
1
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
SERVCE LIFTS L9~L16

YES (ZONE 1A)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
YES

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-25
_____________________________________________________________________
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
FIRE LIFTS L1,L3 & L5
1. Designation (LIFT ID)
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
MAIN BUILDING
3
Fireman Lifts
2000 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
26
1.6 m / s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
9/9
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4
Floors Served Rear

Travel (m)
none
As per drawings
2700mm x 3300mm / For each ele
(mm)
Pit Depth (mm)
1900 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-26
_____________________________________________________________________
PIT LADDER
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1500 mm x 2700 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
S.T.H.
Rubber flooring from Manufacturer

standard range of designs
blower.
To be selected from
of Front wall
rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening
1200 x 2100
control
range
range
Stainless
Steel
from
lift
Narrow frames in Brushed Finished
Stainless
Steel
from
lift

ELEVATOR
142000-27
_____________________________________________________________________
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR

MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALIZATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
S.T.H.

range
Not less than 120 minutes (UK Two
hours) at all floors

Elevators
Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
LCD
position
Indicator
with
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

registration of a call. Faceplate will
be in Black Acrylic with Stainless
steel Frame , Surface mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES

ELEVATOR
142000-28
_____________________________________________________________________
COLOR
INTERCOM
2.

Fire fighters operation Phase 1 & Phase 2

YES
White Lighting
Hands free
FIRE LIFTS L1,L3&L5

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
YES

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-29
_____________________________________________________________________
VIP LIFTS L25 & L26
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
MAIN BUILDING
2
Passenger(L26) & Bed(L25)
1150 Kgs - Bed
800 Kgs - Passenger
15 -Bed
10 - Passenger
1.6 m / s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Duplex
10 / 10
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4,R
Floors Served Rear

Travel (m)
none
As per drawings
As per drawing
(mm)
Pit Depth (mm)
1900 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
SIDE WALL FINISHES

REAR WALL FINISHES
S.T.H.
1300 mm x 2100 mm X 2400mm

Bed
1400 mm x 1200 mm X 2400mm
VIP
range

ELEVATOR
142000-30
_____________________________________________________________________
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION

MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
S.T.H.

by Main contractor
blower.
To be selected from
of Front wall
rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening
1000 x 2100 Bed
800 x 2100 Passenger
Year
HEAVY
DUTY
DOOR
OPERATOR
range
range
Stainless
Steel
from
lift
Narrow
frames
in
Brushed


Elevators

ELEVATOR
142000-31
_____________________________________________________________________
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALIZATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM
2. CONTROLLER FEATURES:

Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting

Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
VIP Lifts L25 & L26

YES

YES
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-32
_____________________________________________________________________
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
YES

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
INPATIENT LIFTS L8
REAR WALL IN TRANSPARENT
GLASS
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
MAIN BUILDING
1
Passenger
2000 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
26
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
1.6 m / s
EN81-1
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-33
_____________________________________________________________________
Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
10 / 10
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4,R
Floors Served Rear

Travel (m)
none
As per drawings
2900mm x 3400mm / For each lift
(mm)
Pit Depth (mm)
1900 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1600 mm x 2500 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
SIDE WALL FINISHES

REAR WALL FINISHES
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
S.T.H.

range
Transparent glass with Brushed
stainless steel frame
by Main contractor
blower.
To be selected from
of Front wall
rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening

ELEVATOR
142000-34
_____________________________________________________________________
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
S.T.H.
1200 x 2100
control
Silver Etched Stainless Steel , from
range
Stainless
Steel
from
lift
Narrow frames in Brushed Finished
Stainless
Steel
from
lift

Not less than 120 minutes (UK Two
hours) at all floors

Elevators
Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
LCD
position
Indicator
with
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

ELEVATOR
142000-35
_____________________________________________________________________
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALIZATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM

LCD
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

registration of a call. Faceplate will
be in Black Acrylic with Stainless
steel Frame , Surface mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
INPATIENT Lifts L8
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-36
_____________________________________________________________________
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
1 . Designation (LIFT ID)
FIRE LIFTS L7
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
MAIN BUILDING
1
Fireman Lifts
2000 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
26
1.6 m / s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
etc)
S.T.H.
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
10 / 10

ELEVATOR
142000-37
_____________________________________________________________________
Floors Served Front
B,G,P1~P3,Typ 1~4,R
Floors Served Rear

Travel (m)
none
As per drawings
2700mm x 3300mm / For each
ele
(mm)
Pit Depth (mm)
1900 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1500 mm x 2700 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES

FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
DOOR OPERATION
S.T.H.
(mm)

range
range
range
Rubber
flooring
from
Manufacturer standard range of
designs
blower.
To be selected from
the rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening
1200 x 2100
control

ELEVATOR
142000-38
_____________________________________________________________________
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
S.T.H.

range
range
Wide
frames
in
Brushed

range

two Elevators
two Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular

ELEVATOR
142000-39
_____________________________________________________________________
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
PASSENGER LIFTS L27, L28
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
BLOCK 2 : LONG TERM CARE

2
Passenger Lifts
1600 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
21
1 m/s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
S.T.H.
Not Applicable
Permanent
Magnet
Synchronous motor
VVVF
Microprocessor

ELEVATOR
142000-40
_____________________________________________________________________
Floors Served Front
Duplex
5/5
G, Typ 1~4
Floors Served Rear

Travel (m)
none
As per drawings
4800 mm x 3100mm / Common
shaft
(mm)
Pit Depth (mm)
1500 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1400 mm x 2400 mm X 2400mm

range
FRONT WALL MATERIAL
SIDE WALL FINISHES
Silver etched stainless steel
REAR WALL FINISHES
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:

DOOR OPERATION
S.T.H.
(mm)

the rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening
1000 x 2100
control

ELEVATOR
142000-41
_____________________________________________________________________
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
S.T.H.

Brushed
Finished
Stainless
standard range
Wide
frames
in
Brushed
Brushed
Finished
Stainless
standard range

steel Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting

Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular

ELEVATOR
142000-42
_____________________________________________________________________
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM
2 . Designation (LIFT ID)
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
PASSENGER LIFTS L29
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
Lift type (passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle, bed)
LOAD Q (kg)
BLOCK 3 : LONG TERM CARE

1
Passenger Lifts
800 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
10
1 m/s
EN81-1

Machine Location
Machine Type
S.T.H.
Not Applicable
motor

ELEVATOR
142000-43
_____________________________________________________________________
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
5/5
G, Typ 1~4
Floors Served Rear

Travel (m)
none
As per drawings
2300 mm x 1800 mm / For each
ele
(mm)
Pit Depth (mm)
1500 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1400 mm x 1350 mm X 2400mm

range
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
DOOR OPERATION
S.T.H.
(mm)

blower.
To be selected from
the rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening
900 x 2100
control

ELEVATOR
142000-44
_____________________________________________________________________
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR

MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
S.T.H.

range
Wide
frames
in
Brushed


two Elevators
two Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting

Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door
Frame

ELEVATOR
142000-45
_____________________________________________________________________
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM

Rectangular
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
1
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
PASSENGER LIFT L29

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
YES
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-46
_____________________________________________________________________
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
PASSENGER LIFTS L30, L31
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
Lift type (passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle,
bed)
LOAD Q (kg)
BLOCK 2 : ADMINISTRATION
2
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
21
1 m/s
EN81-1
S.T.H.
Passenger Lifts
1600 Kg

ELEVATOR
142000-47
_____________________________________________________________________
Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
etc)
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
(mm)
Not Applicable
Permanent
Magnet
Synchronous motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Duplex
5/5
G, Typ 1~4
none
As per drawings
4800 mm x 3100mm / Common
shaft
Pit Depth (mm)
1500 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1400 mm x 2400 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES

range
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
S.T.H.

the rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening

ELEVATOR
142000-48
_____________________________________________________________________
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS
MAIN FLOOR (Wide Jamb with Lintel or Narrow
Jambs)

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
S.T.H.
1000 x 2100
control
Brushed
Finished
Stainless
standard range
Wide
frames
in
Brushed


steel Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door

ELEVATOR
142000-49
_____________________________________________________________________
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
2
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
PASSENGER LIFTS L32
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
BLOCK 2 : ADMINISTRATION
1
Passenger Lifts
800 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
10
1 m/s
EN81-1
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-50
_____________________________________________________________________
Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
(mm)
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
5/5
G, Typ 1~4
none
As per drawings
ele
Pit Depth (mm)
1500 mm
4500 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
1400 mm x 1350 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES

range
FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
S.T.H.

blower.
To be selected from
of Front wall
rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring

Opening

ELEVATOR
142000-51
_____________________________________________________________________
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION
MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
S.T.H.
900 x 2100
control
range
Stainless
Steel
from
lift
Narrow
frames
in
Brushed


Elevators
Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting
Landing Door
steel Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting
LCD
Landing Door

ELEVATOR
142000-52
_____________________________________________________________________
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALIZATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM


Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
1
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
PASSENGER LIFT L32

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door close button
YES
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-53
_____________________________________________________________________
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
YES

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
PASSENGER LIFTS P1~P20
MAIN:
Number of Elevators
LOAD Q (kg)
BLOCK 4 : VIP LONG TERM

20
Passenger Lifts
400 Kg
LOAD (PERSONS)
Speed (m/s)
LIFT CODE
5
1 m/s
EN81-1
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-54
_____________________________________________________________________
Machine Location
Machine Type
Drive System
Control system
Floors Served Front
Floors Served Rear
Travel (m)
(mm)
Not Applicable
motor
VVVF
Microprocessor
Simplex
2/2
G, 1
none
As per drawings
ele
Pit Depth (mm)
1300 mm
4100 mm

CAR SLING
PIT LADDER
N/A
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
Bolted
Not required
By Lift contractor
By Main contractor
By Main contractor
By MEP contractor
LIFT CAR
950 mm x 1150 mm X 2400mm
FRONT WALL MATERIAL

SIDE WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES

FLOOR FINISHES
FAN
SKIRTING
MIRROR
HANDRAIL
DOORS:
S.T.H.

blower.
To be selected from
of Front wall
rear wall
on the rear wall
100kg for flooring (23mm recess
shall be provided for flooring )
Power operated
Opening
panel
side

ELEVATOR
142000-55
_____________________________________________________________________
(mm)
DOOR OPERATION

MAIN FLOOR
OTHERS

MAIN
OTHERS
CAR DOORS
DOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION
SILL MATERIAL
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
MAIN FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
S.T.H.
800 x 2100
Year
HEAVY
DUTY
DOOR
OPERATOR
Stainless
Steel
from
lift
Narrow
frames
in
Brushed


Elevators
Elevators
Frame ,
OVAL
Yes
White Lighting

Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

ELEVATOR
142000-56
_____________________________________________________________________
OTHER FLOOR MODEL
FACEPLATE MATERIAL
POSITION
FACEPLATE SHAPE
COLOUR
CAR SIGNALISATION:
CAR OPERATING PANEL

FACEPLATE MATERIAL
COLOR
INTERCOM
8 . CONTROLLER FEATURES:
LCD
Landing Door
Frame
Rectangular
White Lighting

mounted.
Side Walls
1
steel
YES
YES
White Lighting
Hands free
PASSENGER LIFT P1~P20
YES
YES
YES
YES
S.T.H.

ELEVATOR
142000-57
_____________________________________________________________________
Door close button
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Yes
Yes (G)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Buffer switch
YES
YES
YES
YES
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
Works under this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and

Sections of Division 01.
1.2
Works Included
1.2.1
The Escalators shall be provided as shown on the drawings and in accordance

with the schedules at the end of this subsection.
1.2.2
All components of the Escalators shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
1.3
Code requirements. In addition to the local governing regulations, the

escalators should comply with the applicable provisions of the following
standards:
1.3.1
1.3.2
BS , EN115-1:2008+A1:2010, A2.5.
All normative references listed in EN115.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Balustrade
Balustrade should be designed as slime line type and made of 10mm thick clear
tempered safety glass.1000mm height trough entire length of balustrade.
2.1
Machine and Drive
2.1.1
The driving machine shall be a warm gear type driving machine. It shall be
mounted on the isolation rubber located in the top machine room truss. The
driving machine shall be of high efficiency, step chain driven by the main shaft
and handrails are driven by a separate drive shaft, both of them using duplex
chain for this. Motor should be provided with magnetic brake and speed governor
at the input gear shaft and with drive sprocket at the output gear shaft. The warm
gear type driving machine shall be enclosed in a cast iron housing which shall
also hold the lubricant. Due to height efficiency a direct drive system is preferred.
Details should be provided with tender.
2.1.2
The motor shall be a squirrel cage and totally enclosed, fan cooled, protection
IP54, isolation class-F with temperature rise not exceeding Class B limits. Free
from objectionable noise and vibration and specially designed for escalator
service. It shall have a square shaft extension at the non driving end, a handwinding wheel suitably marked "up"" and "down" and a manual break release
lever to allow manual operation of the escalator, motor speed shall not exceed
1800 r.p.m.
2.1.3
The step assembly shall be driven by an assembly consisting of a top sprocket

assembly mechanically coupled to the gear, an idler return bottom sprocket
assembly and two endless roller chains. The chains shall have a factor of safety
not less than 5 and shall be provided with means of independent adjustment.
Step and step chain rollers should have a diameter of 75mm.Step chain roller
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-2
_________________________________________________________________________
bearings and chain roller bearings should be lubricated for life-time. Lubrication
nipples are not permitted.
2.1.4
All bearings shall be dust proof ball or roller type bearing and shall be provided
with easy access and ample means of lubrication.
2.1.5
Step drive unit shall be designed and manufactured for smooth operation, silent
running and vibration free operation.
2.1.6
The handrails shall be driven from the main drive of escalator and arranged, to
move in synchronism with steps at the same speed and in the same direction.
However, a direct handrail drive system is preferred. Details should be provided
with tender. Handrails shall be constructed of laminated, pre-stretched with highgrade linings, canvas and rubber properly vulcanized and be spliced and
vulcanized to ensure strong and smooth splice.
2.2
Step Assembly, Landing and Tracks
2.2.1
The step should be made of one-piece rigid design and high tensile die cast
aluminium.
The step chain rollers should have a diameter of 75mm fitted with sealed roller
bearings lubricated for life-time. Lubrication nipples are not permitted
2.2.2
2.2.3
Replacement of rollers shall be possible without disturbance of the chains and

balustrade and by easy removal of steps at the lower landings.
2.2.4
Step treads shall be fire resistant die-casting aluminium alloy with closely spaced
cleats and black-painted grooves designed in such a way to insure foot hold.
Steps shall be designed and constructed to carry maximum load without
permanent distortion.
2.2.5
Both sides and front edges of step treads shall be provided with yellow plastic
demarcation comb and cleats to allow easy differentiation of each step.
2.2.6
The landing and floor plates shall be made of stainless steel, 304 quality, non slip
surface, punched with diamond pattern, grooves painted in black. Combs should
be made of aluminium with yellow powder coating.
2.2.7
The track system shall be of such a design and tolerances that in the event of a
step chain breaking there is no likelihood of the steps lifting out of place.
2.2.8
Tracks shall be made of galvanized steel not less than 2mm thickness conforming
to approved standard.
2.2.9
shall be installed and rigidly supported so as to assure proper alignment and

smooth operation of running gear under all operating conditions. At upper and
lower truss, the track should be formed by upper and lower modules which should
not require any maintenance. Tracks should be bolted to the truss with in interval
of not more than 1200mm to ensure that they give the rigid support to aid comfort
and stability of the steps.
2.3
Control
2.3.1
The controller shall be a self contained totally enclosed unit containing all the
necessary switchgear including an earth leakage circuit breaker and local control
push buttons. It shall be located in the gruss at the upper landing and connected
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-3
_________________________________________________________________________
by long flexible leads so that it can be lifted out of the truss to facilitate
maintenance.
2.3.2
Overload protection shall be provided by a separate circuit breaker incorporating

a manual resetting type thermal overload device and shall include a trip coil in
series with the safety contact of the escalator.
2.3.3
The escalator shall have a control station at each terminal consisting of a keyoperated start switch, suitably marked for "up" and "down" direction control and
an emergency stop button.
2.3.4
Automatic-start/stop Proximity Sensor Switch, that automatically engages the

escalator motion when a rider is detected on the first step of the entrance landing
platform and stops the escalator when there are no riders on the unit.
2.4
Safety Features
2.4.1
The escalator shall incorporate with the latest edition of EN115 safety code
requirements and addition to this not less than the following safety features:
2.4.2
Interlock contact which open if the step chain breaks, stretch unduly or falls below
a predetermined value.
2.4.3
Comb-Plate switches actuated by any object caught between a step and the teeth
of the comb-plate.
2.4.4
Overload relays that trip if the motor should draw excessive current due to
overload, mechanical defects, etc., operation of these devices shall bring the
escalator to a smooth stop and disconnect the supply.
2.4.5
A non reversing device arranged to prevent a travelling escalatory from reversing.

It shall also prevent the escalator from being run in a direction contrary to that
indicated by the starting control switch.
2.4.6
Magnetic break directly connected to the motor shaft operating when the motor
power source is disconnected either by the STOP button being pushed or
operation of a safety device, providing positive stopping.
2.4.7
A secondary break for escalators with a rise above 6m rise according EN115
which shall be automatically applied if the driving chain between the worm gear
and the head drive wheel should break.
2.4.8
The skirting shall be faced with low friction material to minimize the risk of
anything being drawn in between the step treads and balustrades. Skirtings
should be equipped with skirt deflectors with aluminium holders.
2.4.9
The apertures in the balustrades for handrail entry and exit shall be guarded to
ensure safety of passengers.
2.4.10
In case of emergency, escalator will stop immediately when this button is pushed.
2.4.11
A delta guard of approved construction shall be provided in case there is an

intersection between an escalator and a ceiling.
2.4.12
Escalators should be equipped with LED type traffic lights and both landings.
Prefer to be fixed at both sides at each glass balustrade newel ends.
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-4
_________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Electrical Equipment
2.5.1
Escalator installation shall include all electrical equipment together with wiring,
conduits, electrical control, protective equipment and any other equipment
necessary for the proper operation, starting from the supply points made available
in the vicinity of the top section of the escalator and travelators.
2.5.2
All electrically operated equipment shall comply in all respect with the
international standards mentioned.
2.5.3
All electrical wiring and installations shall comply with the latest editions of the
local regulations.
2.5.5
Conductors shall be stranded copper conductors.
2.5.6
Insulated wires shall be pulled inside heavy gauge galvanized steel or as

manufacturer standards.
2.5.7
All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to

operate without damage to itself or otherwise if the voltage and/or frequency vary
within the following tolerance:
2.5.8
Voltage (plus or minus 10%)
2.5.9
Frequency (plus or minus 6%)
2.5.10
Complete control wiring and schematic diagrams shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval before proceeding with installation of equipment.
2.5.11
All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolonged
operation under the local ambient conditions.
2.5.12
Allowance shall be made for local rises in air temperature due to the operation of
the equipment.
Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC). To ensure that there is no interference with
other electrical systems within the building, the escalator should be designed to
comply with European Standards EN 12015 and EN 12016 EMC Product Family
Standards for Lifts, Escalators and Passenger Conveyors.
2.5.13
2.6
Electric Motors
2.6.1
Motors supplied under this specification shall be of approved manufacture. They

shall be manufactured to perform, continuously their duty in the ambient
temperature of the surroundings.
2.7
Schedules
2.7.1
Schedule No. 1
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-5
_________________________________________________________________________
2.7.1.1
ESCALATORS PARTICULARS (ES - 1, ES - 2, ES 3, ES 4, ES 5, ES 6,

ES - 7& ES - 8)
- No. of Escalators
: 8 Escalators
- Rise
: 5000 mm
- Speed
: 0,5m/s
- Rated capacity (persons/hours)
: 6000
- Level Steps
: 2 level steps on upper and lower

landing
- Step width
: 1000 mm
- Angle of inclination
: 35 deg.
- Power supply (voltage and Frequency)
: 3 Phase, 400 volts, 50 Hz
- Power supply for lighting
: 1 Phase, 230 volts, 50 Hz
2.7.2
Schedule No. 2
2.7.2.1
Finishes of Escalators
A. Balustrade:
- Internal Panel
: 1100 mm high Vertical to truss, flat
rectangular tempered glass panel as approved.
- Deck board
Silver
Brushed
Stainless
Steel
- Skirt guard
Silver Brushed Stainless Steel 304
- Balustrade illumination
304
LED Step demarcation ligjht.

- Moving handrail
black color
- Tread board,
Die-cast aluminium alloy with black painted

Grooves.
- Cleated riser
Die-cast aluminium alloy painted black
- Demarcation comb and cleat
Yellow molded resin.
B. Step:
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-6
_________________________________________________________________________
C. Floor Plate:
- Comb
black plastic
- Comb plate,
Landing plate,
Manhole cover
Stainless steel with antislip pattern

surface and black painted
grooves.
- Floor numeral
Must be provided.
D. Operating Panels
with an emergency stop button
E. Outer Panel Sheathing
Silver Brushed Stainless Steel 304
F. Other Features
:
Hand Rail Speed / Break Monitor
Skirt Switches
Broken drive chain device
Monitoring Contacts
Fault Diagnostics Display
Anti slip floor plate
2.7.3
Schedule No. 3
2.7.3.1
Information to be Submitted With Tender

1.
Outline arrangement drawings for each escalator showing:

- General arrangement
- Main dimensions
- Details of Building Work required.
2.
General arrangement drawings of machinery and truss, showing principal

parts and construction materials.
3.
Schedule showing brief details of materials of construction other than 2

above and standard to which it is manufactured.
4.
Codes and standards generally used in the manufacturing of the escalators.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
Construction
3.1.1
Truss and soffit

The truss should be constructed of hollow profiles, continuously welded, giving
optimum lateral and torsional rigidity. The truss should be primer painted. The
maximum deflection should be less than 1/750 of the distance between two
supports under a load of 5 kN/m.
S.T.H.

ESCALATOR
143100-7
_________________________________________________________________________
The soffit should be constructed from sheet steel, seam welded outside and sealed
inside to be oil tight. Supporting cross member steel angles are not permitted. The
escalators should not be equipped with additional centre supports.
The truss shall consist of the following sections:3.1.2
Top section incorporating a compartment housing the driving machine and

controller, hand wheels and emergency brake, handrail drives, the curved
sections of the tracks and removable pans located beneath the sprocket wheels
to catch rubbish falling from the steps. The compartment shall be easily
accessible for maintenance by removal of floor pans which over the entire area
occupied by the truss.
3.1.3
A bottom section housing the step return idler sprocket, step chains, safety
switches and curved section of the track. Access may be gained by removing the
floor pans which cover the entire floor area occupied by the truss.
3.2
Earthing
3.2.1
All electrical equipment, motors and control gear shall have their frames and all
other metal parts not normally carrying currents, effectively earthed in accordance
with the regulations, governors and other components shall be separately connected to main earth conductor which shall be directly connected to the earth
electrode.
3.2.2
Series earthing of one piece of equipment to another shall not be accepted. The
main earth conductor shall have a cross-section not less than half that required to
carry the current to the motor or other components which it protects. Main earth
conductor shall not be smaller than 50 mm2.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.

Civil Specification PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Civil Specification PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

S.T.

Abu Dhabi Branch

Tel : 6417627 Fax : 6417621 P.O.Box 108707 - Abu Dhabi

STH CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 2: EXISTING CONDITIONS

DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DAMP PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING

METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD

DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES EQUIPMENTS

COMPARTMENTS & CUBICLES

DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT

WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENSIONS

SUBCONTRACTPRS, MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS LOG

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

TESTING AND INSPECTION

Industrial kitchen & laundry.

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

CONTROL AND TEST EQUIPEMT TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

SAMPLING AND TESTING

DAILY & MONTHLY REPORTS

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

PHOTOGRAPHS AND ADVERTISING

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

Scheduled preconstruction, progress meetings.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

Submit a construction progress schedule within fourteen (14) working days of

Correct, revise, up-date, and otherwise maintain schedule during progress of

Construction progress schedule to be in bar chart format in sufficient detail to monitor

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

Dates, status and particulars of submissions, i.e. shop drawings, samples,

Dates, status and particulars of deliveries, i.e. manufacturing dates,

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

Make submittals specified in this Section to the Engineer unless otherwise

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

Submit proposed construction progress schedule.

As construction progresses, submit updated construction schedules each

Include in final shop drawings submissions detailed information, templates and

In addition to shop drawings specified in other Sections, submit shop drawings

Indicate on each submission, changes from the Contract Documents that

Submit shop drawings folded into A4 size.

Submit samples for which submission requirements is specified in trade

Submit samples in triplicate of adequate size to represent the material in its

Label samples with project name, number, Contractor, and date.

BURJEEL MEDICAL CITY

Prepare interference and equipment placing drawings to ensue that all

Prepare drawings to indicate coordination and methods of installation of a

PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

Submit project record drawings on completion. Final acceptance of the

Record, as the work progresses, work constructed differently than shown on

The Contractor shall submit all the warranties as herein specified.

Submit each warranty in an approved uniform format.

If sample is disapproved, two samples will be returned. If sample is approved,

MAINTENANCE/MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Submit three (3) maintenance manuals at completion of project. Maintenance

The project data book shall:

Contain maintenance instructions as specified in various sections and as

Contain brochures and parts listed on all equipment.